https://docs.moodle.org/36/en/api.php?action=feedcontributions&user=Dbauer-ets&feedformat=atomMoodleDocs - User contributions [en]2024-03-29T00:04:49ZUser contributionsMediaWiki 1.39.6https://docs.moodle.org/36/en/index.php?title=Quiz_FAQ&diff=133476Quiz FAQ2019-04-04T16:06:13Z<p>Dbauer-ets: /* How can I delay the quiz feedback after the quiz has passed */</p>
<hr />
<div>{{Quiz}}<br />
==General==<br />
<br />
===How can I try a quiz before it is released?===<br />
<br />
You have prepared a quiz exam for your students. It is currently in a hidden state. The exam opens on the day of the exam, at a time that the students know about. However, to satisfy yourself that it is doable in the time allotted, You wish to do a dry run yourself before that date. How can You accomplish this?<br />
<br />
Method 1: Use the Preview feature available to you as a teacher as you are making the quiz.<br />
<br />
Method 2: <br />
<br />
# Make a dummy account with a name like "Test Student".<br />
# Enrol that user in the course as a student.<br />
# Add a "User override" to the quiz, so "Test Student" can attempt the quiz before it is open to everyone else.<br />
# Log in as "Test student".<br />
# Attempt the quiz.<br />
# Log back in as teacher.<br />
# Review the attempt.<br />
# Go to Results -> Grades and delete the test attempt.<br />
# Un-enrol "Test Student" from your course.<br />
<br />
Method 3: Set up a Moodle Playground course for your teachers. Add teachers with dual role (teacher and student). Teachers can later copy the quiz/assignment/whatever over to their live class.<br />
<br />
===How can I enable notification of quiz submissions?===<br />
<br />
See [[Quiz submission notification]].<br />
<br />
===How do I send a bulk message to all students who haven't completed a quiz?===<br />
*From your navigation block, click ''Reports>Course participation''<br />
*From the drop down, choose your quiz.<br />
*In ''Show only'', choose "Student" and in ''Actions'', choose "post"<br />
*In the list that appears, tick/check the boxes next to those you wish to message.<br />
*In the bottom dropdown ''With selected users'', choose "send message"<br />
<br />
[[File:quizemail.png]]<br />
<br />
===How can build a quiz that picks X questions randomly from a larger question bank?===<br />
See the section on adding random questions in [[Building Quiz]].<br />
<br />
===How can I print a copy of a quiz?===<br />
<br />
Use your browser printer option (for example by right-clicking and selecting Print) When a student prints their finished quiz, responses and feedback will also be printed.<br />
<br />
[[File:browserquizprint29.png|thumb|center|400px|Print preview of finished quiz - Click to enlarge]]<br />
<br />
You can also export the question as Moodle XML, or GIFT format. If you open either of those files in a text-editor, you should be able to see most of the details of each question. <br />
<br />
=== How can I optimize a Moodle server for performing more concurrent quizzes? ===<br />
<br />
See [[Performance recommendations]].<br />
<br />
=== Can I release the answers to students who did not attempt a quiz? ===<br />
Yes. One way to handle this with standard Moodle would be to open the quiz after the deadline and add a time limit to the quiz of one second. Unless students are extremely quick they will not be able to gain any points, but would see the general feedback.<br />
<br />
=== How can I make Moodle quizzes if my school does not have enough computers / fast internet / a good Moodle server? ===<br />
* Check the [[Offline quiz activity]] additional plugin.<br />
* Read about the use of [[Safe_exam_browser#Chrome_OS_and_Safe_Exam_Browser| Chromebooks]] and [[Safe_exam_browser#Securing_a_Moodle_Quiz_on_an_iPad|iPads]] in the [[Safe exam browser]] Moodle documentation.<br />
* Visit the page for [https://www.eventbrite.com.au/o/transforming-exams-e-exams-symposium-17431618115 Transforming Exams] - Transforming Exams is an Australian Government funded research project looking at approaches to conducting authentic digital assessment in the exam rooms of Australian universities via the use of Bring-your-own laptops. The project involves 10 Australian university partners and is lead out of Monash University. See [http://transformingexams.com/ TransformingExams.com] for project information.<br />
<br />
===Can I print the quiz results without the answers history?===<br />
If you want to to print the results of all the student attempts, but ommit the answers history, as it might take much space, you can do so by accessing the settings on Site admin -> Appearance -> Additional HTML. In the 'Within head' setting, put something like:<br />
<br />
<code php n><br />
<style type="text/css"><br />
@media print {<br />
.que .history {<br />
display: none;<br />
}<br />
}<br />
</style><br />
</code><br />
<br />
==Setup==<br />
<br />
===Why am I no longer allowed to add or remove questions?===<br />
Most likely it is because you have students that have already attempted the quiz. You will need to delete all of the attempts by selecting them and choosing to delete them if you need to add/remove questions from a quiz. <br />
<br />
If you are developing a new quiz where the attempts have just been trials then deleting the previous attempts will have no consequences in the grade book. <br />
<br />
There are several ways of getting to the “attempts #” which you need to click on to delete the previous attempts. Use which ever works for you.<br />
#Click on the quiz that you want to amend. It will take you to a page with “attempts #" at the top.<br />
#If you are on a page with this message “You cannot add or remove questions because the quiz has been attempted (attempts #)” Click on "attempts #".<br />
#If you have navigated away from the page with the message go to the Settings block > Quiz Administration > Edit Quiz.<br />
Whichever way you find “attempts #” click on it and you will go to a page with a drop down menu at the top. Select “all users who have attempted the quiz”. There are several other click boxes select whatever applies to your situation.<br />
Click “Show Report” and then “select all”. Click “Delete selected attempts” and confirm selection.<br />
<br />
Go back to Quiz Administration > Edit Quiz and you will now be able to add or delete questions.<br />
<br />
===How can I remove a problem question after the quiz has been taken?===<br />
<br />
You can not remove a question once a quiz has been taken by one student or more. However you can change the score and flag the question so you know it has problems.<br />
<br />
Set the score for that question to 0. <br />
*Caution: In some versions of Moodle if you use this question in an other quiz, this will potentially change the question in that quiz as well. A trick is to score the question as 0, then regrade the just completed quiz. This will establish the new grade for gradebook. Now go back and change the score to the original value. <br />
<br />
Find the question in Question Bank. Maybe edit the title (e.g. 'Do not use in Bio101'). Or if you do not share the question category with other teachers, create a sub category, move the offending question there, and perhaps create a better question to replace the one you just moved. Create a new quiz and if necessary hide the old one.<br />
*Caution: if other departments or teachers use a question category it might be wise to check with the team before moving or changing any question. This is one reason importing questions in a course is a good best practice in some situations.<br />
<br />
===How can I turn off glossary auto-linking in a quiz? ===<br />
*In the Quiz administration settings block there will be a link "filter".<br />
*Click the link and you will have the option to disable filters just for that particular quiz:<br />
<br />
===Can I make a second quiz start right away after a first quiz is finished?===<br />
By using a hack (See [https://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=377382 this forum thread]). <br />
<br />
In the 'Overall feedback' for the first quiz, add some code which redirects to the second quiz. Make a big button to make that obvious:<br />
<br />
<code css><br />
<div style="text-align:center;padding:20px;"><br />
<a href="https://--your domain--/mod/quiz/view.php?id=--quiz 2 no--" target="_blank"><br />
<button type="button" style="height:100px;font-size:24px;">Click here to access Quiz 2</button><br />
</a><br />
</div><br />
</code><br />
<br />
It would look like this:<br />
<br />
[[File:Click here to access Quiz 2.png|200px]]<br />
<br />
Notes:<br />
<br />
* The button will not appear in the gradebook.<br />
* In the quiz settings and under Review options, select 'Overall feedback' under 'Immediately after the attempt'. Deselect 'Overall feedback' under 'Later, while the quiz is still open' and 'After the quiz is closed'.<br />
<br />
==Attempts==<br />
<br />
===How can I give particular students extra time or numbers of attempts?===<br />
*In the Quiz administration there is a link "User overrides"<br />
*Click this link and you will be able to choose one or more users and change quiz dates, times or number of attempts.<br />
<br />
[[File:quizuseroverride.png]]<br />
<br />
===Can I have different start times/timings/numbers of attempts for different groups?===<br />
*In the Quiz administration settings block, there is a link "group overrides" that allows you to do things like grant extensions to certain groups of students.<br />
*Click this link and you will be able to select your groups and change the quiz dates, times and number of attempts:<br />
<br />
[[File:quizgroupoverride.png]]<br />
<br />
===What happens if students submit answers after the quiz closing date?===<br />
It is possible for students to still submit answers after the quiz has closed (for example if they started the attempt before the closing date but then took a long time before submitting). These responses are stored by the quiz module, but the students are not given any credit for them. The teacher can see these answers when reviewing the student's attempts and can give the student credit for them by manually entering a grade in the gradebook. Also the teacher could change the closing date after the fact and regrade the attempts. The students' answers would then get graded.<br />
<br />
===How can a "Never submitted quiz" attempt be submitted?===<br />
Currently there is no way to retrieve an attempt that was "Never Submitted", and get it back into the "In progress" state. Perhaps the best solution is to plan ahead and set your quiz to set your quiz to be submitted automatically. Alternatively, you can<br />
# Update the quiz : set the "close the quiz" date after today<br />
# Set "When time expires" to "There is a grace period ..."<br />
#Under Grade set "Attempts allowed" to "unlimited"<br />
#Question behavior: Each attempt builds on the last "Yes"<br />
# Invite the students who did not close their exams<br />
# Allow them to start a new attempt, and close it immediately.<br />
<br />
===Why can't people (guests) attempt a quiz without creating an account and logging in?===<br />
<br />
This is difficult to implement for technical reasons.<br />
<br />
To explain: The quiz has to link all information about an attempt to a particular 'user' record in the database, and each user can only have one open quiz attempt at a time. All not-logged-in users share the same 'guest' user database record. Therefore, two guests could not attempt the quiz at the same time, and even if they could, it would be difficult to prevent one guest seeing another guest's attempts.<br />
<br />
Of course, given enough work, it would be possible to change some of those assumptions, and so make it possible for guests to attempt quizzes. Indeed, some of the obstructions to implementing this have already been removed while doing other work on the quiz, but there is still some way to go. If you would like to see this implemented, please vote for MDL-17892.<br />
<br />
A workaround is to create a visitor account, say with username = guest, password = visitor, for everyone to share.<br />
<br />
===How can I prevent a student from reviewing or jumping around questions in a quiz?===<br />
You can block the quiz navigation block and the summary of quiz page with CSS code in a theme. However, if a student fails to answer a question, they will not know if you implement this "solution". Also if others on the site do not want this patch, make sure the theme you select for the course is not used by others.<br />
<br />
For example using the Afterburner theme, enter this in the CSS code area:<br />
<br />
:div#mod_quiz_navblock {visibility:hidden;}<br />
:table.quizsummaryofattempt {visibility:hidden;}<br />
<br />
There are other CSS solutions.<br />
<br />
===How can I force my students to answer all the question in a quiz before they submit?===<br />
<br />
There are various ways to answer this:<br />
# You can't.<br />
# Your students are not stupid. They know they will get zero marks for any question they do not answer, so they already have a strong incentive to answer every question. Furthermore, at the end of the quiz there is the summary page where they can easily check that they have answered all the questions before they submit, so they won't accidentally miss questions.<br />
# OK, so you want us to write code that won't let students submit before they have answered each question. Well, all that does is forces the student to put random junk like "asdf" into each question before they click the button, or randomly make a choice in each multiple choice question. There is no educational benefit in this. You get more meaningful information if students leave those questions blank rather than putting in random responses.<br />
<br />
==Grades==<br />
<br />
===Why is my quiz not displaying in the gradebook?===<br />
<br />
Go to the editing quiz page and check that you have a maximum grade that is more than 0 - if your score is 0, then the quiz will not appear in the gradebook.<br />
<br />
===I've entered quiz grades manually in the gradebook. How can I allow students to improve on these grades?===<br />
<br />
When a grade is entered directly in the gradebook, an "overridden" flag is set, meaning that the grade can no longer be changed from within the quiz.<br />
<br />
However, the flag can be removed by turning editing on in the [[Grader report|grader report]], then clicking the edit grade icon, unchecking the overridden box and saving the changes.<br />
<br />
===How can I set a grade to pass?===<br />
<br />
See the section 'Setting a grade to pass for a quiz' in [[Activity completion settings]] for details.<br />
<br />
===How can I have a quiz that is not graded?===<br />
<br />
On the Edit quiz page, change the total score and each question's score to 0 instead of the defaults of 10 and 1 per question:<br />
[[File:quizscore0.png]]<br />
<br />
==Appearance==<br />
<br />
===How can I turn off question flagging?===<br />
By default, flags are available in quiz questions.<br />
<br />
[[File:flag.png]]<br />
<br />
There is a capability attached to this: [[Capabilities/moodle/question:flag]]. Remove this capability from roles that you don't want to see the flags. You can either do that by editing the role definitions globally, or by overriding the permissions in just one quiz or course.<br />
<br />
===How can I hide the number of marks available for each question?===<br />
<br />
This is not really possible unless you are prepared to edit the code.<br />
<br />
If you have a custom theme, you can add CSS like this:<br />
<code css><br />
.que .info .grade { display: none; }<br />
</code><br />
or you could try to make it more specific, and only hide the grade before the question is answered:<br />
<code css><br />
.que.answersaved .info .grade,<br />
.que.invalidanswer .info .grade,<br />
.que.notyetanswered .info .grade { display: none; }<br />
</code><br />
You can also add this CSS using the [[Header_and_footer|Additional HTML admin setting]].<br />
<br />
Alternatively, you can alter the PHP code here: https://github.com/moodle/moodle/blob/4de51c25ae227a727dcba7c39f6f644a5d47ce7a/mod/quiz/locallib.php#L1820. Change that line to give the behaviour you want, e.g.<br />
<code php><br />
$options->marks = self::extract($quiz->reviewmarks, $when,<br />
self::MARK_AND_MAX, self::HIDDEN);<br />
</code><br />
<br />
Be warned that any of these approaches will affect every quiz in the Moodle site.<br />
<br />
===How can I delay the quiz feedback after the quiz has passed===<br />
* Suppose the students take a "Main" one-hour quiz from 2 April 14:00 to 2 April 15:00. They shall not have any feedback during and after the quiz until the following week.<br />
* Students take a "Follow up" quiz a week later, starting 9 April 14:00. If they succeed the "Follow up" quiz, they can then review the "Main" quiz and get their points.<br />
<br />
This can be done by editing the "Main" and "Follow up" quiz settings, and the Gradebook set up as follows:<br />
<br />
[[File:MoodleDocs201904041052.png|280px|thumb|right]]<br />
'''"Main" quiz settings''' ''See also the image on the right'' -><br />
<br />
Timing<br />
Open the quiz: 2 April 14:00<br />
Close the quiz: 9 April 14:00<br />
Review options<br />
During the attempt<br />
Uncheck feedbacks<br />
Immediately after the attempt<br />
Uncheck feedbacks<br />
Later, while the quiz is still open<br />
Uncheck feedbacks<br />
After the quiz is closed<br />
Check feedbacks<br />
Restrict access<br />
Student must match any of the following<br />
Date: until 2 April 15:00<br />
or<br />
Student must match all of the following (restriction set)<br />
Date: from 9 April 14:00<br />
and<br />
Grade: Follow up<br />
Check must be ≥ 1 %<br />
<br />
'''"Follow up" quiz settings'''<br />
<br />
Timing<br />
Open the quiz: 9 April 14:00<br />
<br />
'''Gradebook set up'''<br />
Main quiz: Weight 0.0, ID number "main"<br />
Follow up quiz: Weight 0.0, ID number "followup"<br />
Grade item "Total": Weight 100.0, Calculation = [[main]] + [[followup]] ''(<- do not copy/paste this equation, rewrite it)''<br />
<br />
==Errors==<br />
<br />
===I obtain the error 'The number of random questions required is more than are still available in the category!'===<br />
<br />
Review your quiz and verify Moodle has enough questions from each category of questions it will be pulling from. You may have inadvertently selected more questions than what exists in the category. Also make sure you're not pulling questions from a category that has zero questions. Because you are picking random questions, rather than a specific question, it may not be apparent at first that you have run out of questions to ask!<br />
<br />
==Quiz plugins==<br />
<br />
There are a number of ways to extend quizzes, such as adding new reports and questions types. See [https://moodle.org/plugins/browse.php?list=category&id=28 Moodle plugins directory: Plugin type: Quiz].<br />
<br />
==See also==<br />
<br />
* [[Effective quiz practices]]<br />
* [[Questions FAQ]]<br />
<br />
==Any further questions?==<br />
<br />
Please post in the [https://moodle.org/mod/forum/view.php?id=737 Quiz forum] on moodle.org.<br />
<br />
[[Category:FAQ]]<br />
<br />
[[de:Test FAQ]]<br />
[[es:Examen FAQ]]</div>Dbauer-etshttps://docs.moodle.org/36/en/index.php?title=Quiz_FAQ&diff=133475Quiz FAQ2019-04-04T16:00:46Z<p>Dbauer-ets: /* How can I delay the quiz feedback after the quiz has passed */</p>
<hr />
<div>{{Quiz}}<br />
==General==<br />
<br />
===How can I try a quiz before it is released?===<br />
<br />
You have prepared a quiz exam for your students. It is currently in a hidden state. The exam opens on the day of the exam, at a time that the students know about. However, to satisfy yourself that it is doable in the time allotted, You wish to do a dry run yourself before that date. How can You accomplish this?<br />
<br />
Method 1: Use the Preview feature available to you as a teacher as you are making the quiz.<br />
<br />
Method 2: <br />
<br />
# Make a dummy account with a name like "Test Student".<br />
# Enrol that user in the course as a student.<br />
# Add a "User override" to the quiz, so "Test Student" can attempt the quiz before it is open to everyone else.<br />
# Log in as "Test student".<br />
# Attempt the quiz.<br />
# Log back in as teacher.<br />
# Review the attempt.<br />
# Go to Results -> Grades and delete the test attempt.<br />
# Un-enrol "Test Student" from your course.<br />
<br />
Method 3: Set up a Moodle Playground course for your teachers. Add teachers with dual role (teacher and student). Teachers can later copy the quiz/assignment/whatever over to their live class.<br />
<br />
===How can I enable notification of quiz submissions?===<br />
<br />
See [[Quiz submission notification]].<br />
<br />
===How do I send a bulk message to all students who haven't completed a quiz?===<br />
*From your navigation block, click ''Reports>Course participation''<br />
*From the drop down, choose your quiz.<br />
*In ''Show only'', choose "Student" and in ''Actions'', choose "post"<br />
*In the list that appears, tick/check the boxes next to those you wish to message.<br />
*In the bottom dropdown ''With selected users'', choose "send message"<br />
<br />
[[File:quizemail.png]]<br />
<br />
===How can build a quiz that picks X questions randomly from a larger question bank?===<br />
See the section on adding random questions in [[Building Quiz]].<br />
<br />
===How can I print a copy of a quiz?===<br />
<br />
Use your browser printer option (for example by right-clicking and selecting Print) When a student prints their finished quiz, responses and feedback will also be printed.<br />
<br />
[[File:browserquizprint29.png|thumb|center|400px|Print preview of finished quiz - Click to enlarge]]<br />
<br />
You can also export the question as Moodle XML, or GIFT format. If you open either of those files in a text-editor, you should be able to see most of the details of each question. <br />
<br />
=== How can I optimize a Moodle server for performing more concurrent quizzes? ===<br />
<br />
See [[Performance recommendations]].<br />
<br />
=== Can I release the answers to students who did not attempt a quiz? ===<br />
Yes. One way to handle this with standard Moodle would be to open the quiz after the deadline and add a time limit to the quiz of one second. Unless students are extremely quick they will not be able to gain any points, but would see the general feedback.<br />
<br />
=== How can I make Moodle quizzes if my school does not have enough computers / fast internet / a good Moodle server? ===<br />
* Check the [[Offline quiz activity]] additional plugin.<br />
* Read about the use of [[Safe_exam_browser#Chrome_OS_and_Safe_Exam_Browser| Chromebooks]] and [[Safe_exam_browser#Securing_a_Moodle_Quiz_on_an_iPad|iPads]] in the [[Safe exam browser]] Moodle documentation.<br />
* Visit the page for [https://www.eventbrite.com.au/o/transforming-exams-e-exams-symposium-17431618115 Transforming Exams] - Transforming Exams is an Australian Government funded research project looking at approaches to conducting authentic digital assessment in the exam rooms of Australian universities via the use of Bring-your-own laptops. The project involves 10 Australian university partners and is lead out of Monash University. See [http://transformingexams.com/ TransformingExams.com] for project information.<br />
<br />
===Can I print the quiz results without the answers history?===<br />
If you want to to print the results of all the student attempts, but ommit the answers history, as it might take much space, you can do so by accessing the settings on Site admin -> Appearance -> Additional HTML. In the 'Within head' setting, put something like:<br />
<br />
<code php n><br />
<style type="text/css"><br />
@media print {<br />
.que .history {<br />
display: none;<br />
}<br />
}<br />
</style><br />
</code><br />
<br />
==Setup==<br />
<br />
===Why am I no longer allowed to add or remove questions?===<br />
Most likely it is because you have students that have already attempted the quiz. You will need to delete all of the attempts by selecting them and choosing to delete them if you need to add/remove questions from a quiz. <br />
<br />
If you are developing a new quiz where the attempts have just been trials then deleting the previous attempts will have no consequences in the grade book. <br />
<br />
There are several ways of getting to the “attempts #” which you need to click on to delete the previous attempts. Use which ever works for you.<br />
#Click on the quiz that you want to amend. It will take you to a page with “attempts #" at the top.<br />
#If you are on a page with this message “You cannot add or remove questions because the quiz has been attempted (attempts #)” Click on "attempts #".<br />
#If you have navigated away from the page with the message go to the Settings block > Quiz Administration > Edit Quiz.<br />
Whichever way you find “attempts #” click on it and you will go to a page with a drop down menu at the top. Select “all users who have attempted the quiz”. There are several other click boxes select whatever applies to your situation.<br />
Click “Show Report” and then “select all”. Click “Delete selected attempts” and confirm selection.<br />
<br />
Go back to Quiz Administration > Edit Quiz and you will now be able to add or delete questions.<br />
<br />
===How can I remove a problem question after the quiz has been taken?===<br />
<br />
You can not remove a question once a quiz has been taken by one student or more. However you can change the score and flag the question so you know it has problems.<br />
<br />
Set the score for that question to 0. <br />
*Caution: In some versions of Moodle if you use this question in an other quiz, this will potentially change the question in that quiz as well. A trick is to score the question as 0, then regrade the just completed quiz. This will establish the new grade for gradebook. Now go back and change the score to the original value. <br />
<br />
Find the question in Question Bank. Maybe edit the title (e.g. 'Do not use in Bio101'). Or if you do not share the question category with other teachers, create a sub category, move the offending question there, and perhaps create a better question to replace the one you just moved. Create a new quiz and if necessary hide the old one.<br />
*Caution: if other departments or teachers use a question category it might be wise to check with the team before moving or changing any question. This is one reason importing questions in a course is a good best practice in some situations.<br />
<br />
===How can I turn off glossary auto-linking in a quiz? ===<br />
*In the Quiz administration settings block there will be a link "filter".<br />
*Click the link and you will have the option to disable filters just for that particular quiz:<br />
<br />
===Can I make a second quiz start right away after a first quiz is finished?===<br />
By using a hack (See [https://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=377382 this forum thread]). <br />
<br />
In the 'Overall feedback' for the first quiz, add some code which redirects to the second quiz. Make a big button to make that obvious:<br />
<br />
<code css><br />
<div style="text-align:center;padding:20px;"><br />
<a href="https://--your domain--/mod/quiz/view.php?id=--quiz 2 no--" target="_blank"><br />
<button type="button" style="height:100px;font-size:24px;">Click here to access Quiz 2</button><br />
</a><br />
</div><br />
</code><br />
<br />
It would look like this:<br />
<br />
[[File:Click here to access Quiz 2.png|200px]]<br />
<br />
Notes:<br />
<br />
* The button will not appear in the gradebook.<br />
* In the quiz settings and under Review options, select 'Overall feedback' under 'Immediately after the attempt'. Deselect 'Overall feedback' under 'Later, while the quiz is still open' and 'After the quiz is closed'.<br />
<br />
==Attempts==<br />
<br />
===How can I give particular students extra time or numbers of attempts?===<br />
*In the Quiz administration there is a link "User overrides"<br />
*Click this link and you will be able to choose one or more users and change quiz dates, times or number of attempts.<br />
<br />
[[File:quizuseroverride.png]]<br />
<br />
===Can I have different start times/timings/numbers of attempts for different groups?===<br />
*In the Quiz administration settings block, there is a link "group overrides" that allows you to do things like grant extensions to certain groups of students.<br />
*Click this link and you will be able to select your groups and change the quiz dates, times and number of attempts:<br />
<br />
[[File:quizgroupoverride.png]]<br />
<br />
===What happens if students submit answers after the quiz closing date?===<br />
It is possible for students to still submit answers after the quiz has closed (for example if they started the attempt before the closing date but then took a long time before submitting). These responses are stored by the quiz module, but the students are not given any credit for them. The teacher can see these answers when reviewing the student's attempts and can give the student credit for them by manually entering a grade in the gradebook. Also the teacher could change the closing date after the fact and regrade the attempts. The students' answers would then get graded.<br />
<br />
===How can a "Never submitted quiz" attempt be submitted?===<br />
Currently there is no way to retrieve an attempt that was "Never Submitted", and get it back into the "In progress" state. Perhaps the best solution is to plan ahead and set your quiz to set your quiz to be submitted automatically. Alternatively, you can<br />
# Update the quiz : set the "close the quiz" date after today<br />
# Set "When time expires" to "There is a grace period ..."<br />
#Under Grade set "Attempts allowed" to "unlimited"<br />
#Question behavior: Each attempt builds on the last "Yes"<br />
# Invite the students who did not close their exams<br />
# Allow them to start a new attempt, and close it immediately.<br />
<br />
===Why can't people (guests) attempt a quiz without creating an account and logging in?===<br />
<br />
This is difficult to implement for technical reasons.<br />
<br />
To explain: The quiz has to link all information about an attempt to a particular 'user' record in the database, and each user can only have one open quiz attempt at a time. All not-logged-in users share the same 'guest' user database record. Therefore, two guests could not attempt the quiz at the same time, and even if they could, it would be difficult to prevent one guest seeing another guest's attempts.<br />
<br />
Of course, given enough work, it would be possible to change some of those assumptions, and so make it possible for guests to attempt quizzes. Indeed, some of the obstructions to implementing this have already been removed while doing other work on the quiz, but there is still some way to go. If you would like to see this implemented, please vote for MDL-17892.<br />
<br />
A workaround is to create a visitor account, say with username = guest, password = visitor, for everyone to share.<br />
<br />
===How can I prevent a student from reviewing or jumping around questions in a quiz?===<br />
You can block the quiz navigation block and the summary of quiz page with CSS code in a theme. However, if a student fails to answer a question, they will not know if you implement this "solution". Also if others on the site do not want this patch, make sure the theme you select for the course is not used by others.<br />
<br />
For example using the Afterburner theme, enter this in the CSS code area:<br />
<br />
:div#mod_quiz_navblock {visibility:hidden;}<br />
:table.quizsummaryofattempt {visibility:hidden;}<br />
<br />
There are other CSS solutions.<br />
<br />
===How can I force my students to answer all the question in a quiz before they submit?===<br />
<br />
There are various ways to answer this:<br />
# You can't.<br />
# Your students are not stupid. They know they will get zero marks for any question they do not answer, so they already have a strong incentive to answer every question. Furthermore, at the end of the quiz there is the summary page where they can easily check that they have answered all the questions before they submit, so they won't accidentally miss questions.<br />
# OK, so you want us to write code that won't let students submit before they have answered each question. Well, all that does is forces the student to put random junk like "asdf" into each question before they click the button, or randomly make a choice in each multiple choice question. There is no educational benefit in this. You get more meaningful information if students leave those questions blank rather than putting in random responses.<br />
<br />
==Grades==<br />
<br />
===Why is my quiz not displaying in the gradebook?===<br />
<br />
Go to the editing quiz page and check that you have a maximum grade that is more than 0 - if your score is 0, then the quiz will not appear in the gradebook.<br />
<br />
===I've entered quiz grades manually in the gradebook. How can I allow students to improve on these grades?===<br />
<br />
When a grade is entered directly in the gradebook, an "overridden" flag is set, meaning that the grade can no longer be changed from within the quiz.<br />
<br />
However, the flag can be removed by turning editing on in the [[Grader report|grader report]], then clicking the edit grade icon, unchecking the overridden box and saving the changes.<br />
<br />
===How can I set a grade to pass?===<br />
<br />
See the section 'Setting a grade to pass for a quiz' in [[Activity completion settings]] for details.<br />
<br />
===How can I have a quiz that is not graded?===<br />
<br />
On the Edit quiz page, change the total score and each question's score to 0 instead of the defaults of 10 and 1 per question:<br />
[[File:quizscore0.png]]<br />
<br />
==Appearance==<br />
<br />
===How can I turn off question flagging?===<br />
By default, flags are available in quiz questions.<br />
<br />
[[File:flag.png]]<br />
<br />
There is a capability attached to this: [[Capabilities/moodle/question:flag]]. Remove this capability from roles that you don't want to see the flags. You can either do that by editing the role definitions globally, or by overriding the permissions in just one quiz or course.<br />
<br />
===How can I hide the number of marks available for each question?===<br />
<br />
This is not really possible unless you are prepared to edit the code.<br />
<br />
If you have a custom theme, you can add CSS like this:<br />
<code css><br />
.que .info .grade { display: none; }<br />
</code><br />
or you could try to make it more specific, and only hide the grade before the question is answered:<br />
<code css><br />
.que.answersaved .info .grade,<br />
.que.invalidanswer .info .grade,<br />
.que.notyetanswered .info .grade { display: none; }<br />
</code><br />
You can also add this CSS using the [[Header_and_footer|Additional HTML admin setting]].<br />
<br />
Alternatively, you can alter the PHP code here: https://github.com/moodle/moodle/blob/4de51c25ae227a727dcba7c39f6f644a5d47ce7a/mod/quiz/locallib.php#L1820. Change that line to give the behaviour you want, e.g.<br />
<code php><br />
$options->marks = self::extract($quiz->reviewmarks, $when,<br />
self::MARK_AND_MAX, self::HIDDEN);<br />
</code><br />
<br />
Be warned that any of these approaches will affect every quiz in the Moodle site.<br />
<br />
===How can I delay the quiz feedback after the quiz has passed===<br />
* Suppose the students take a "Main" one-hour quiz from 2 April 14:00 to 2 April 15:00. They shall not have any feedback during and after the quiz until the following week.<br />
* Students take a "Follow up" quiz a week later, starting 9 April 14:00. If they succeed the "Follow up" quiz, they can then review the "Main" quiz and get their points.<br />
<br />
This can be done by editing the "Main" and "Follow up" quiz settings, and the Gradebook set up as follows:<br />
<br />
[[File:MoodleDocs201904041052.png|280px|thumb|right]]<br />
'''"Main" quiz settings''' ''See also the image on the right'' -><br />
<br />
Timing<br />
Open the quiz: 2 April 14:00<br />
Close the quiz: 9 April 14:00<br />
Review options<br />
During the attempt<br />
Uncheck feedbacks<br />
Immediately after the attempt<br />
Uncheck feedbacks<br />
Later, while the quiz is still open<br />
Uncheck feedbacks<br />
After the quiz is closed<br />
Check feedbacks<br />
Restrict access<br />
Student must match any of the following<br />
Date: until 2 April 15:00<br />
or<br />
Student must match all of the following (restriction set)<br />
Date: from 9 April 14:00<br />
and<br />
Grade: Follow up<br />
Check must be ≥ 1 %<br />
<br />
'''"Follow up" quiz settings'''<br />
<br />
Timing<br />
Open the quiz: 9 April 14:00<br />
<br />
'''Gradebook set up'''<br />
Main quiz: Weight 0.0, ID number "main"<br />
Follow up quiz: Weight 0.0, ID number "followup"<br />
Grade item "Total": Weight 100.0, Calculation = [[main]] + [[followup]]<br />
<br />
==Errors==<br />
<br />
===I obtain the error 'The number of random questions required is more than are still available in the category!'===<br />
<br />
Review your quiz and verify Moodle has enough questions from each category of questions it will be pulling from. You may have inadvertently selected more questions than what exists in the category. Also make sure you're not pulling questions from a category that has zero questions. Because you are picking random questions, rather than a specific question, it may not be apparent at first that you have run out of questions to ask!<br />
<br />
==Quiz plugins==<br />
<br />
There are a number of ways to extend quizzes, such as adding new reports and questions types. See [https://moodle.org/plugins/browse.php?list=category&id=28 Moodle plugins directory: Plugin type: Quiz].<br />
<br />
==See also==<br />
<br />
* [[Effective quiz practices]]<br />
* [[Questions FAQ]]<br />
<br />
==Any further questions?==<br />
<br />
Please post in the [https://moodle.org/mod/forum/view.php?id=737 Quiz forum] on moodle.org.<br />
<br />
[[Category:FAQ]]<br />
<br />
[[de:Test FAQ]]<br />
[[es:Examen FAQ]]</div>Dbauer-etshttps://docs.moodle.org/36/en/index.php?title=Quiz_FAQ&diff=133474Quiz FAQ2019-04-04T15:58:37Z<p>Dbauer-ets: /* How can I delay the quiz feedback after the quiz has passed */</p>
<hr />
<div>{{Quiz}}<br />
==General==<br />
<br />
===How can I try a quiz before it is released?===<br />
<br />
You have prepared a quiz exam for your students. It is currently in a hidden state. The exam opens on the day of the exam, at a time that the students know about. However, to satisfy yourself that it is doable in the time allotted, You wish to do a dry run yourself before that date. How can You accomplish this?<br />
<br />
Method 1: Use the Preview feature available to you as a teacher as you are making the quiz.<br />
<br />
Method 2: <br />
<br />
# Make a dummy account with a name like "Test Student".<br />
# Enrol that user in the course as a student.<br />
# Add a "User override" to the quiz, so "Test Student" can attempt the quiz before it is open to everyone else.<br />
# Log in as "Test student".<br />
# Attempt the quiz.<br />
# Log back in as teacher.<br />
# Review the attempt.<br />
# Go to Results -> Grades and delete the test attempt.<br />
# Un-enrol "Test Student" from your course.<br />
<br />
Method 3: Set up a Moodle Playground course for your teachers. Add teachers with dual role (teacher and student). Teachers can later copy the quiz/assignment/whatever over to their live class.<br />
<br />
===How can I enable notification of quiz submissions?===<br />
<br />
See [[Quiz submission notification]].<br />
<br />
===How do I send a bulk message to all students who haven't completed a quiz?===<br />
*From your navigation block, click ''Reports>Course participation''<br />
*From the drop down, choose your quiz.<br />
*In ''Show only'', choose "Student" and in ''Actions'', choose "post"<br />
*In the list that appears, tick/check the boxes next to those you wish to message.<br />
*In the bottom dropdown ''With selected users'', choose "send message"<br />
<br />
[[File:quizemail.png]]<br />
<br />
===How can build a quiz that picks X questions randomly from a larger question bank?===<br />
See the section on adding random questions in [[Building Quiz]].<br />
<br />
===How can I print a copy of a quiz?===<br />
<br />
Use your browser printer option (for example by right-clicking and selecting Print) When a student prints their finished quiz, responses and feedback will also be printed.<br />
<br />
[[File:browserquizprint29.png|thumb|center|400px|Print preview of finished quiz - Click to enlarge]]<br />
<br />
You can also export the question as Moodle XML, or GIFT format. If you open either of those files in a text-editor, you should be able to see most of the details of each question. <br />
<br />
=== How can I optimize a Moodle server for performing more concurrent quizzes? ===<br />
<br />
See [[Performance recommendations]].<br />
<br />
=== Can I release the answers to students who did not attempt a quiz? ===<br />
Yes. One way to handle this with standard Moodle would be to open the quiz after the deadline and add a time limit to the quiz of one second. Unless students are extremely quick they will not be able to gain any points, but would see the general feedback.<br />
<br />
=== How can I make Moodle quizzes if my school does not have enough computers / fast internet / a good Moodle server? ===<br />
* Check the [[Offline quiz activity]] additional plugin.<br />
* Read about the use of [[Safe_exam_browser#Chrome_OS_and_Safe_Exam_Browser| Chromebooks]] and [[Safe_exam_browser#Securing_a_Moodle_Quiz_on_an_iPad|iPads]] in the [[Safe exam browser]] Moodle documentation.<br />
* Visit the page for [https://www.eventbrite.com.au/o/transforming-exams-e-exams-symposium-17431618115 Transforming Exams] - Transforming Exams is an Australian Government funded research project looking at approaches to conducting authentic digital assessment in the exam rooms of Australian universities via the use of Bring-your-own laptops. The project involves 10 Australian university partners and is lead out of Monash University. See [http://transformingexams.com/ TransformingExams.com] for project information.<br />
<br />
===Can I print the quiz results without the answers history?===<br />
If you want to to print the results of all the student attempts, but ommit the answers history, as it might take much space, you can do so by accessing the settings on Site admin -> Appearance -> Additional HTML. In the 'Within head' setting, put something like:<br />
<br />
<code php n><br />
<style type="text/css"><br />
@media print {<br />
.que .history {<br />
display: none;<br />
}<br />
}<br />
</style><br />
</code><br />
<br />
==Setup==<br />
<br />
===Why am I no longer allowed to add or remove questions?===<br />
Most likely it is because you have students that have already attempted the quiz. You will need to delete all of the attempts by selecting them and choosing to delete them if you need to add/remove questions from a quiz. <br />
<br />
If you are developing a new quiz where the attempts have just been trials then deleting the previous attempts will have no consequences in the grade book. <br />
<br />
There are several ways of getting to the “attempts #” which you need to click on to delete the previous attempts. Use which ever works for you.<br />
#Click on the quiz that you want to amend. It will take you to a page with “attempts #" at the top.<br />
#If you are on a page with this message “You cannot add or remove questions because the quiz has been attempted (attempts #)” Click on "attempts #".<br />
#If you have navigated away from the page with the message go to the Settings block > Quiz Administration > Edit Quiz.<br />
Whichever way you find “attempts #” click on it and you will go to a page with a drop down menu at the top. Select “all users who have attempted the quiz”. There are several other click boxes select whatever applies to your situation.<br />
Click “Show Report” and then “select all”. Click “Delete selected attempts” and confirm selection.<br />
<br />
Go back to Quiz Administration > Edit Quiz and you will now be able to add or delete questions.<br />
<br />
===How can I remove a problem question after the quiz has been taken?===<br />
<br />
You can not remove a question once a quiz has been taken by one student or more. However you can change the score and flag the question so you know it has problems.<br />
<br />
Set the score for that question to 0. <br />
*Caution: In some versions of Moodle if you use this question in an other quiz, this will potentially change the question in that quiz as well. A trick is to score the question as 0, then regrade the just completed quiz. This will establish the new grade for gradebook. Now go back and change the score to the original value. <br />
<br />
Find the question in Question Bank. Maybe edit the title (e.g. 'Do not use in Bio101'). Or if you do not share the question category with other teachers, create a sub category, move the offending question there, and perhaps create a better question to replace the one you just moved. Create a new quiz and if necessary hide the old one.<br />
*Caution: if other departments or teachers use a question category it might be wise to check with the team before moving or changing any question. This is one reason importing questions in a course is a good best practice in some situations.<br />
<br />
===How can I turn off glossary auto-linking in a quiz? ===<br />
*In the Quiz administration settings block there will be a link "filter".<br />
*Click the link and you will have the option to disable filters just for that particular quiz:<br />
<br />
===Can I make a second quiz start right away after a first quiz is finished?===<br />
By using a hack (See [https://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=377382 this forum thread]). <br />
<br />
In the 'Overall feedback' for the first quiz, add some code which redirects to the second quiz. Make a big button to make that obvious:<br />
<br />
<code css><br />
<div style="text-align:center;padding:20px;"><br />
<a href="https://--your domain--/mod/quiz/view.php?id=--quiz 2 no--" target="_blank"><br />
<button type="button" style="height:100px;font-size:24px;">Click here to access Quiz 2</button><br />
</a><br />
</div><br />
</code><br />
<br />
It would look like this:<br />
<br />
[[File:Click here to access Quiz 2.png|200px]]<br />
<br />
Notes:<br />
<br />
* The button will not appear in the gradebook.<br />
* In the quiz settings and under Review options, select 'Overall feedback' under 'Immediately after the attempt'. Deselect 'Overall feedback' under 'Later, while the quiz is still open' and 'After the quiz is closed'.<br />
<br />
==Attempts==<br />
<br />
===How can I give particular students extra time or numbers of attempts?===<br />
*In the Quiz administration there is a link "User overrides"<br />
*Click this link and you will be able to choose one or more users and change quiz dates, times or number of attempts.<br />
<br />
[[File:quizuseroverride.png]]<br />
<br />
===Can I have different start times/timings/numbers of attempts for different groups?===<br />
*In the Quiz administration settings block, there is a link "group overrides" that allows you to do things like grant extensions to certain groups of students.<br />
*Click this link and you will be able to select your groups and change the quiz dates, times and number of attempts:<br />
<br />
[[File:quizgroupoverride.png]]<br />
<br />
===What happens if students submit answers after the quiz closing date?===<br />
It is possible for students to still submit answers after the quiz has closed (for example if they started the attempt before the closing date but then took a long time before submitting). These responses are stored by the quiz module, but the students are not given any credit for them. The teacher can see these answers when reviewing the student's attempts and can give the student credit for them by manually entering a grade in the gradebook. Also the teacher could change the closing date after the fact and regrade the attempts. The students' answers would then get graded.<br />
<br />
===How can a "Never submitted quiz" attempt be submitted?===<br />
Currently there is no way to retrieve an attempt that was "Never Submitted", and get it back into the "In progress" state. Perhaps the best solution is to plan ahead and set your quiz to set your quiz to be submitted automatically. Alternatively, you can<br />
# Update the quiz : set the "close the quiz" date after today<br />
# Set "When time expires" to "There is a grace period ..."<br />
#Under Grade set "Attempts allowed" to "unlimited"<br />
#Question behavior: Each attempt builds on the last "Yes"<br />
# Invite the students who did not close their exams<br />
# Allow them to start a new attempt, and close it immediately.<br />
<br />
===Why can't people (guests) attempt a quiz without creating an account and logging in?===<br />
<br />
This is difficult to implement for technical reasons.<br />
<br />
To explain: The quiz has to link all information about an attempt to a particular 'user' record in the database, and each user can only have one open quiz attempt at a time. All not-logged-in users share the same 'guest' user database record. Therefore, two guests could not attempt the quiz at the same time, and even if they could, it would be difficult to prevent one guest seeing another guest's attempts.<br />
<br />
Of course, given enough work, it would be possible to change some of those assumptions, and so make it possible for guests to attempt quizzes. Indeed, some of the obstructions to implementing this have already been removed while doing other work on the quiz, but there is still some way to go. If you would like to see this implemented, please vote for MDL-17892.<br />
<br />
A workaround is to create a visitor account, say with username = guest, password = visitor, for everyone to share.<br />
<br />
===How can I prevent a student from reviewing or jumping around questions in a quiz?===<br />
You can block the quiz navigation block and the summary of quiz page with CSS code in a theme. However, if a student fails to answer a question, they will not know if you implement this "solution". Also if others on the site do not want this patch, make sure the theme you select for the course is not used by others.<br />
<br />
For example using the Afterburner theme, enter this in the CSS code area:<br />
<br />
:div#mod_quiz_navblock {visibility:hidden;}<br />
:table.quizsummaryofattempt {visibility:hidden;}<br />
<br />
There are other CSS solutions.<br />
<br />
===How can I force my students to answer all the question in a quiz before they submit?===<br />
<br />
There are various ways to answer this:<br />
# You can't.<br />
# Your students are not stupid. They know they will get zero marks for any question they do not answer, so they already have a strong incentive to answer every question. Furthermore, at the end of the quiz there is the summary page where they can easily check that they have answered all the questions before they submit, so they won't accidentally miss questions.<br />
# OK, so you want us to write code that won't let students submit before they have answered each question. Well, all that does is forces the student to put random junk like "asdf" into each question before they click the button, or randomly make a choice in each multiple choice question. There is no educational benefit in this. You get more meaningful information if students leave those questions blank rather than putting in random responses.<br />
<br />
==Grades==<br />
<br />
===Why is my quiz not displaying in the gradebook?===<br />
<br />
Go to the editing quiz page and check that you have a maximum grade that is more than 0 - if your score is 0, then the quiz will not appear in the gradebook.<br />
<br />
===I've entered quiz grades manually in the gradebook. How can I allow students to improve on these grades?===<br />
<br />
When a grade is entered directly in the gradebook, an "overridden" flag is set, meaning that the grade can no longer be changed from within the quiz.<br />
<br />
However, the flag can be removed by turning editing on in the [[Grader report|grader report]], then clicking the edit grade icon, unchecking the overridden box and saving the changes.<br />
<br />
===How can I set a grade to pass?===<br />
<br />
See the section 'Setting a grade to pass for a quiz' in [[Activity completion settings]] for details.<br />
<br />
===How can I have a quiz that is not graded?===<br />
<br />
On the Edit quiz page, change the total score and each question's score to 0 instead of the defaults of 10 and 1 per question:<br />
[[File:quizscore0.png]]<br />
<br />
==Appearance==<br />
<br />
===How can I turn off question flagging?===<br />
By default, flags are available in quiz questions.<br />
<br />
[[File:flag.png]]<br />
<br />
There is a capability attached to this: [[Capabilities/moodle/question:flag]]. Remove this capability from roles that you don't want to see the flags. You can either do that by editing the role definitions globally, or by overriding the permissions in just one quiz or course.<br />
<br />
===How can I hide the number of marks available for each question?===<br />
<br />
This is not really possible unless you are prepared to edit the code.<br />
<br />
If you have a custom theme, you can add CSS like this:<br />
<code css><br />
.que .info .grade { display: none; }<br />
</code><br />
or you could try to make it more specific, and only hide the grade before the question is answered:<br />
<code css><br />
.que.answersaved .info .grade,<br />
.que.invalidanswer .info .grade,<br />
.que.notyetanswered .info .grade { display: none; }<br />
</code><br />
You can also add this CSS using the [[Header_and_footer|Additional HTML admin setting]].<br />
<br />
Alternatively, you can alter the PHP code here: https://github.com/moodle/moodle/blob/4de51c25ae227a727dcba7c39f6f644a5d47ce7a/mod/quiz/locallib.php#L1820. Change that line to give the behaviour you want, e.g.<br />
<code php><br />
$options->marks = self::extract($quiz->reviewmarks, $when,<br />
self::MARK_AND_MAX, self::HIDDEN);<br />
</code><br />
<br />
Be warned that any of these approaches will affect every quiz in the Moodle site.<br />
<br />
===How can I delay the quiz feedback after the quiz has passed===<br />
* Suppose the students take a "Main" one-hour quiz from 2 April 14:00 to 2 April 15:00. They shall not have any feedback during and after the quiz until the following week.<br />
* Students take a "Follow up" quiz a week later, starting 9 April 14:00. If they succeed the "Follow up" quiz, they can then review the "Main" quiz and get their points.<br />
<br />
This can be done by editing the "Main" quiz , the "Follow up" quiz and the Gradebook settings as follows:<br />
<br />
[[File:MoodleDocs201904041052.png|280px|thumb|right]]<br />
'''"Main" quiz settings''' ''See also the image on the right'' -><br />
<br />
Timing<br />
Open the quiz: 2 April 14:00<br />
Close the quiz: 9 April 14:00<br />
Review options<br />
During the attempt<br />
Uncheck feedbacks<br />
Immediately after the attempt<br />
Uncheck feedbacks<br />
Later, while the quiz is still open<br />
Uncheck feedbacks<br />
After the quiz is closed<br />
Check feedbacks<br />
Restrict access<br />
Student must match any of the following<br />
Date: until 2 April 15:00<br />
or<br />
Student must match all of the following (restriction set)<br />
Date: from 9 April 14:00<br />
and<br />
Grade: Follow up<br />
Check must be ≥ 1 %<br />
<br />
'''"Follow up" quiz settings'''<br />
<br />
Timing<br />
Open the quiz: 9 April 14:00<br />
<br />
'''Grade book set up'''<br />
Main quiz: Weight 0.0, ID number "main"<br />
Follow up quiz: Weight 0.0, ID number "followup"<br />
Grade item "Total": Weight 100.0, Calculation = [[main]] + [[followup]]<br />
<br />
==Errors==<br />
<br />
===I obtain the error 'The number of random questions required is more than are still available in the category!'===<br />
<br />
Review your quiz and verify Moodle has enough questions from each category of questions it will be pulling from. You may have inadvertently selected more questions than what exists in the category. Also make sure you're not pulling questions from a category that has zero questions. Because you are picking random questions, rather than a specific question, it may not be apparent at first that you have run out of questions to ask!<br />
<br />
==Quiz plugins==<br />
<br />
There are a number of ways to extend quizzes, such as adding new reports and questions types. See [https://moodle.org/plugins/browse.php?list=category&id=28 Moodle plugins directory: Plugin type: Quiz].<br />
<br />
==See also==<br />
<br />
* [[Effective quiz practices]]<br />
* [[Questions FAQ]]<br />
<br />
==Any further questions?==<br />
<br />
Please post in the [https://moodle.org/mod/forum/view.php?id=737 Quiz forum] on moodle.org.<br />
<br />
[[Category:FAQ]]<br />
<br />
[[de:Test FAQ]]<br />
[[es:Examen FAQ]]</div>Dbauer-etshttps://docs.moodle.org/36/en/index.php?title=Quiz_FAQ&diff=133473Quiz FAQ2019-04-04T15:54:33Z<p>Dbauer-ets: /* How can I delay the quiz feedback after the quiz has passed */</p>
<hr />
<div>{{Quiz}}<br />
==General==<br />
<br />
===How can I try a quiz before it is released?===<br />
<br />
You have prepared a quiz exam for your students. It is currently in a hidden state. The exam opens on the day of the exam, at a time that the students know about. However, to satisfy yourself that it is doable in the time allotted, You wish to do a dry run yourself before that date. How can You accomplish this?<br />
<br />
Method 1: Use the Preview feature available to you as a teacher as you are making the quiz.<br />
<br />
Method 2: <br />
<br />
# Make a dummy account with a name like "Test Student".<br />
# Enrol that user in the course as a student.<br />
# Add a "User override" to the quiz, so "Test Student" can attempt the quiz before it is open to everyone else.<br />
# Log in as "Test student".<br />
# Attempt the quiz.<br />
# Log back in as teacher.<br />
# Review the attempt.<br />
# Go to Results -> Grades and delete the test attempt.<br />
# Un-enrol "Test Student" from your course.<br />
<br />
Method 3: Set up a Moodle Playground course for your teachers. Add teachers with dual role (teacher and student). Teachers can later copy the quiz/assignment/whatever over to their live class.<br />
<br />
===How can I enable notification of quiz submissions?===<br />
<br />
See [[Quiz submission notification]].<br />
<br />
===How do I send a bulk message to all students who haven't completed a quiz?===<br />
*From your navigation block, click ''Reports>Course participation''<br />
*From the drop down, choose your quiz.<br />
*In ''Show only'', choose "Student" and in ''Actions'', choose "post"<br />
*In the list that appears, tick/check the boxes next to those you wish to message.<br />
*In the bottom dropdown ''With selected users'', choose "send message"<br />
<br />
[[File:quizemail.png]]<br />
<br />
===How can build a quiz that picks X questions randomly from a larger question bank?===<br />
See the section on adding random questions in [[Building Quiz]].<br />
<br />
===How can I print a copy of a quiz?===<br />
<br />
Use your browser printer option (for example by right-clicking and selecting Print) When a student prints their finished quiz, responses and feedback will also be printed.<br />
<br />
[[File:browserquizprint29.png|thumb|center|400px|Print preview of finished quiz - Click to enlarge]]<br />
<br />
You can also export the question as Moodle XML, or GIFT format. If you open either of those files in a text-editor, you should be able to see most of the details of each question. <br />
<br />
=== How can I optimize a Moodle server for performing more concurrent quizzes? ===<br />
<br />
See [[Performance recommendations]].<br />
<br />
=== Can I release the answers to students who did not attempt a quiz? ===<br />
Yes. One way to handle this with standard Moodle would be to open the quiz after the deadline and add a time limit to the quiz of one second. Unless students are extremely quick they will not be able to gain any points, but would see the general feedback.<br />
<br />
=== How can I make Moodle quizzes if my school does not have enough computers / fast internet / a good Moodle server? ===<br />
* Check the [[Offline quiz activity]] additional plugin.<br />
* Read about the use of [[Safe_exam_browser#Chrome_OS_and_Safe_Exam_Browser| Chromebooks]] and [[Safe_exam_browser#Securing_a_Moodle_Quiz_on_an_iPad|iPads]] in the [[Safe exam browser]] Moodle documentation.<br />
* Visit the page for [https://www.eventbrite.com.au/o/transforming-exams-e-exams-symposium-17431618115 Transforming Exams] - Transforming Exams is an Australian Government funded research project looking at approaches to conducting authentic digital assessment in the exam rooms of Australian universities via the use of Bring-your-own laptops. The project involves 10 Australian university partners and is lead out of Monash University. See [http://transformingexams.com/ TransformingExams.com] for project information.<br />
<br />
===Can I print the quiz results without the answers history?===<br />
If you want to to print the results of all the student attempts, but ommit the answers history, as it might take much space, you can do so by accessing the settings on Site admin -> Appearance -> Additional HTML. In the 'Within head' setting, put something like:<br />
<br />
<code php n><br />
<style type="text/css"><br />
@media print {<br />
.que .history {<br />
display: none;<br />
}<br />
}<br />
</style><br />
</code><br />
<br />
==Setup==<br />
<br />
===Why am I no longer allowed to add or remove questions?===<br />
Most likely it is because you have students that have already attempted the quiz. You will need to delete all of the attempts by selecting them and choosing to delete them if you need to add/remove questions from a quiz. <br />
<br />
If you are developing a new quiz where the attempts have just been trials then deleting the previous attempts will have no consequences in the grade book. <br />
<br />
There are several ways of getting to the “attempts #” which you need to click on to delete the previous attempts. Use which ever works for you.<br />
#Click on the quiz that you want to amend. It will take you to a page with “attempts #" at the top.<br />
#If you are on a page with this message “You cannot add or remove questions because the quiz has been attempted (attempts #)” Click on "attempts #".<br />
#If you have navigated away from the page with the message go to the Settings block > Quiz Administration > Edit Quiz.<br />
Whichever way you find “attempts #” click on it and you will go to a page with a drop down menu at the top. Select “all users who have attempted the quiz”. There are several other click boxes select whatever applies to your situation.<br />
Click “Show Report” and then “select all”. Click “Delete selected attempts” and confirm selection.<br />
<br />
Go back to Quiz Administration > Edit Quiz and you will now be able to add or delete questions.<br />
<br />
===How can I remove a problem question after the quiz has been taken?===<br />
<br />
You can not remove a question once a quiz has been taken by one student or more. However you can change the score and flag the question so you know it has problems.<br />
<br />
Set the score for that question to 0. <br />
*Caution: In some versions of Moodle if you use this question in an other quiz, this will potentially change the question in that quiz as well. A trick is to score the question as 0, then regrade the just completed quiz. This will establish the new grade for gradebook. Now go back and change the score to the original value. <br />
<br />
Find the question in Question Bank. Maybe edit the title (e.g. 'Do not use in Bio101'). Or if you do not share the question category with other teachers, create a sub category, move the offending question there, and perhaps create a better question to replace the one you just moved. Create a new quiz and if necessary hide the old one.<br />
*Caution: if other departments or teachers use a question category it might be wise to check with the team before moving or changing any question. This is one reason importing questions in a course is a good best practice in some situations.<br />
<br />
===How can I turn off glossary auto-linking in a quiz? ===<br />
*In the Quiz administration settings block there will be a link "filter".<br />
*Click the link and you will have the option to disable filters just for that particular quiz:<br />
<br />
===Can I make a second quiz start right away after a first quiz is finished?===<br />
By using a hack (See [https://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=377382 this forum thread]). <br />
<br />
In the 'Overall feedback' for the first quiz, add some code which redirects to the second quiz. Make a big button to make that obvious:<br />
<br />
<code css><br />
<div style="text-align:center;padding:20px;"><br />
<a href="https://--your domain--/mod/quiz/view.php?id=--quiz 2 no--" target="_blank"><br />
<button type="button" style="height:100px;font-size:24px;">Click here to access Quiz 2</button><br />
</a><br />
</div><br />
</code><br />
<br />
It would look like this:<br />
<br />
[[File:Click here to access Quiz 2.png|200px]]<br />
<br />
Notes:<br />
<br />
* The button will not appear in the gradebook.<br />
* In the quiz settings and under Review options, select 'Overall feedback' under 'Immediately after the attempt'. Deselect 'Overall feedback' under 'Later, while the quiz is still open' and 'After the quiz is closed'.<br />
<br />
==Attempts==<br />
<br />
===How can I give particular students extra time or numbers of attempts?===<br />
*In the Quiz administration there is a link "User overrides"<br />
*Click this link and you will be able to choose one or more users and change quiz dates, times or number of attempts.<br />
<br />
[[File:quizuseroverride.png]]<br />
<br />
===Can I have different start times/timings/numbers of attempts for different groups?===<br />
*In the Quiz administration settings block, there is a link "group overrides" that allows you to do things like grant extensions to certain groups of students.<br />
*Click this link and you will be able to select your groups and change the quiz dates, times and number of attempts:<br />
<br />
[[File:quizgroupoverride.png]]<br />
<br />
===What happens if students submit answers after the quiz closing date?===<br />
It is possible for students to still submit answers after the quiz has closed (for example if they started the attempt before the closing date but then took a long time before submitting). These responses are stored by the quiz module, but the students are not given any credit for them. The teacher can see these answers when reviewing the student's attempts and can give the student credit for them by manually entering a grade in the gradebook. Also the teacher could change the closing date after the fact and regrade the attempts. The students' answers would then get graded.<br />
<br />
===How can a "Never submitted quiz" attempt be submitted?===<br />
Currently there is no way to retrieve an attempt that was "Never Submitted", and get it back into the "In progress" state. Perhaps the best solution is to plan ahead and set your quiz to set your quiz to be submitted automatically. Alternatively, you can<br />
# Update the quiz : set the "close the quiz" date after today<br />
# Set "When time expires" to "There is a grace period ..."<br />
#Under Grade set "Attempts allowed" to "unlimited"<br />
#Question behavior: Each attempt builds on the last "Yes"<br />
# Invite the students who did not close their exams<br />
# Allow them to start a new attempt, and close it immediately.<br />
<br />
===Why can't people (guests) attempt a quiz without creating an account and logging in?===<br />
<br />
This is difficult to implement for technical reasons.<br />
<br />
To explain: The quiz has to link all information about an attempt to a particular 'user' record in the database, and each user can only have one open quiz attempt at a time. All not-logged-in users share the same 'guest' user database record. Therefore, two guests could not attempt the quiz at the same time, and even if they could, it would be difficult to prevent one guest seeing another guest's attempts.<br />
<br />
Of course, given enough work, it would be possible to change some of those assumptions, and so make it possible for guests to attempt quizzes. Indeed, some of the obstructions to implementing this have already been removed while doing other work on the quiz, but there is still some way to go. If you would like to see this implemented, please vote for MDL-17892.<br />
<br />
A workaround is to create a visitor account, say with username = guest, password = visitor, for everyone to share.<br />
<br />
===How can I prevent a student from reviewing or jumping around questions in a quiz?===<br />
You can block the quiz navigation block and the summary of quiz page with CSS code in a theme. However, if a student fails to answer a question, they will not know if you implement this "solution". Also if others on the site do not want this patch, make sure the theme you select for the course is not used by others.<br />
<br />
For example using the Afterburner theme, enter this in the CSS code area:<br />
<br />
:div#mod_quiz_navblock {visibility:hidden;}<br />
:table.quizsummaryofattempt {visibility:hidden;}<br />
<br />
There are other CSS solutions.<br />
<br />
===How can I force my students to answer all the question in a quiz before they submit?===<br />
<br />
There are various ways to answer this:<br />
# You can't.<br />
# Your students are not stupid. They know they will get zero marks for any question they do not answer, so they already have a strong incentive to answer every question. Furthermore, at the end of the quiz there is the summary page where they can easily check that they have answered all the questions before they submit, so they won't accidentally miss questions.<br />
# OK, so you want us to write code that won't let students submit before they have answered each question. Well, all that does is forces the student to put random junk like "asdf" into each question before they click the button, or randomly make a choice in each multiple choice question. There is no educational benefit in this. You get more meaningful information if students leave those questions blank rather than putting in random responses.<br />
<br />
==Grades==<br />
<br />
===Why is my quiz not displaying in the gradebook?===<br />
<br />
Go to the editing quiz page and check that you have a maximum grade that is more than 0 - if your score is 0, then the quiz will not appear in the gradebook.<br />
<br />
===I've entered quiz grades manually in the gradebook. How can I allow students to improve on these grades?===<br />
<br />
When a grade is entered directly in the gradebook, an "overridden" flag is set, meaning that the grade can no longer be changed from within the quiz.<br />
<br />
However, the flag can be removed by turning editing on in the [[Grader report|grader report]], then clicking the edit grade icon, unchecking the overridden box and saving the changes.<br />
<br />
===How can I set a grade to pass?===<br />
<br />
See the section 'Setting a grade to pass for a quiz' in [[Activity completion settings]] for details.<br />
<br />
===How can I have a quiz that is not graded?===<br />
<br />
On the Edit quiz page, change the total score and each question's score to 0 instead of the defaults of 10 and 1 per question:<br />
[[File:quizscore0.png]]<br />
<br />
==Appearance==<br />
<br />
===How can I turn off question flagging?===<br />
By default, flags are available in quiz questions.<br />
<br />
[[File:flag.png]]<br />
<br />
There is a capability attached to this: [[Capabilities/moodle/question:flag]]. Remove this capability from roles that you don't want to see the flags. You can either do that by editing the role definitions globally, or by overriding the permissions in just one quiz or course.<br />
<br />
===How can I hide the number of marks available for each question?===<br />
<br />
This is not really possible unless you are prepared to edit the code.<br />
<br />
If you have a custom theme, you can add CSS like this:<br />
<code css><br />
.que .info .grade { display: none; }<br />
</code><br />
or you could try to make it more specific, and only hide the grade before the question is answered:<br />
<code css><br />
.que.answersaved .info .grade,<br />
.que.invalidanswer .info .grade,<br />
.que.notyetanswered .info .grade { display: none; }<br />
</code><br />
You can also add this CSS using the [[Header_and_footer|Additional HTML admin setting]].<br />
<br />
Alternatively, you can alter the PHP code here: https://github.com/moodle/moodle/blob/4de51c25ae227a727dcba7c39f6f644a5d47ce7a/mod/quiz/locallib.php#L1820. Change that line to give the behaviour you want, e.g.<br />
<code php><br />
$options->marks = self::extract($quiz->reviewmarks, $when,<br />
self::MARK_AND_MAX, self::HIDDEN);<br />
</code><br />
<br />
Be warned that any of these approaches will affect every quiz in the Moodle site.<br />
<br />
===How can I delay the quiz feedback after the quiz has passed===<br />
* Suppose the students take a "Main" one-hour quiz from 2 April 14:00 to 2 April 15:00. They shall not have any feedback during and after the quiz until the following week.<br />
* Students take a "Follow up" quiz a week later, starting 9 April 14:00. If they succeed the "Follow up" quiz, they can then review the "Main" quiz and get their points.<br />
<br />
This can be done by editing the "Main" quiz , the "Follow up" quiz and the Gradebook settings as follows:<br />
<br />
[[File:MoodleDocs201904041052.png|280px|thumb|right]]<br />
'''"Main" quiz settings''' ''See also the image on the right'' -><br />
<br />
Timing<br />
Open the quiz: 2 April 14:00<br />
Close the quiz: 9 April 14:00<br />
Review options<br />
During the attempt<br />
Uncheck feedbacks<br />
Immediately after the attempt<br />
Uncheck feedbacks<br />
Later, while the quiz is still open<br />
Uncheck feedbacks<br />
After the quiz is closed<br />
Check feedbacks<br />
Restrict access<br />
Student must match any of the following<br />
Date: until 2 April 15:00<br />
or<br />
Student must match all of the following (restriction set)<br />
Date: from 9 April 14:00<br />
and<br />
Grade: Follow up<br />
Check must be ≥ 1 %<br />
<br />
'''"Follow up" quiz settings'''<br />
<br />
Timing<br />
Open the quiz: 9 April 14:00<br />
<br />
'''Grade book set up'''<br />
Main quiz: Weight 0.0, ID number "main"<br />
Follow up quiz: Weight 0.0, ID number "followup"<br />
Grade item "Total": Weight 100.0, Calculation = main +followup<br />
<br />
==Errors==<br />
<br />
===I obtain the error 'The number of random questions required is more than are still available in the category!'===<br />
<br />
Review your quiz and verify Moodle has enough questions from each category of questions it will be pulling from. You may have inadvertently selected more questions than what exists in the category. Also make sure you're not pulling questions from a category that has zero questions. Because you are picking random questions, rather than a specific question, it may not be apparent at first that you have run out of questions to ask!<br />
<br />
==Quiz plugins==<br />
<br />
There are a number of ways to extend quizzes, such as adding new reports and questions types. See [https://moodle.org/plugins/browse.php?list=category&id=28 Moodle plugins directory: Plugin type: Quiz].<br />
<br />
==See also==<br />
<br />
* [[Effective quiz practices]]<br />
* [[Questions FAQ]]<br />
<br />
==Any further questions?==<br />
<br />
Please post in the [https://moodle.org/mod/forum/view.php?id=737 Quiz forum] on moodle.org.<br />
<br />
[[Category:FAQ]]<br />
<br />
[[de:Test FAQ]]<br />
[[es:Examen FAQ]]</div>Dbauer-etshttps://docs.moodle.org/36/en/index.php?title=File:MoodleDocs201904041052.png&diff=133472File:MoodleDocs201904041052.png2019-04-04T15:41:18Z<p>Dbauer-ets: Dbauer-ets uploaded a new version of File:MoodleDocs201904041052.png</p>
<hr />
<div></div>Dbauer-etshttps://docs.moodle.org/36/en/index.php?title=Quiz_FAQ&diff=133471Quiz FAQ2019-04-04T15:39:26Z<p>Dbauer-ets: /* How can I delay the quiz feedback after the quiz has passed */</p>
<hr />
<div>{{Quiz}}<br />
==General==<br />
<br />
===How can I try a quiz before it is released?===<br />
<br />
You have prepared a quiz exam for your students. It is currently in a hidden state. The exam opens on the day of the exam, at a time that the students know about. However, to satisfy yourself that it is doable in the time allotted, You wish to do a dry run yourself before that date. How can You accomplish this?<br />
<br />
Method 1: Use the Preview feature available to you as a teacher as you are making the quiz.<br />
<br />
Method 2: <br />
<br />
# Make a dummy account with a name like "Test Student".<br />
# Enrol that user in the course as a student.<br />
# Add a "User override" to the quiz, so "Test Student" can attempt the quiz before it is open to everyone else.<br />
# Log in as "Test student".<br />
# Attempt the quiz.<br />
# Log back in as teacher.<br />
# Review the attempt.<br />
# Go to Results -> Grades and delete the test attempt.<br />
# Un-enrol "Test Student" from your course.<br />
<br />
Method 3: Set up a Moodle Playground course for your teachers. Add teachers with dual role (teacher and student). Teachers can later copy the quiz/assignment/whatever over to their live class.<br />
<br />
===How can I enable notification of quiz submissions?===<br />
<br />
See [[Quiz submission notification]].<br />
<br />
===How do I send a bulk message to all students who haven't completed a quiz?===<br />
*From your navigation block, click ''Reports>Course participation''<br />
*From the drop down, choose your quiz.<br />
*In ''Show only'', choose "Student" and in ''Actions'', choose "post"<br />
*In the list that appears, tick/check the boxes next to those you wish to message.<br />
*In the bottom dropdown ''With selected users'', choose "send message"<br />
<br />
[[File:quizemail.png]]<br />
<br />
===How can build a quiz that picks X questions randomly from a larger question bank?===<br />
See the section on adding random questions in [[Building Quiz]].<br />
<br />
===How can I print a copy of a quiz?===<br />
<br />
Use your browser printer option (for example by right-clicking and selecting Print) When a student prints their finished quiz, responses and feedback will also be printed.<br />
<br />
[[File:browserquizprint29.png|thumb|center|400px|Print preview of finished quiz - Click to enlarge]]<br />
<br />
You can also export the question as Moodle XML, or GIFT format. If you open either of those files in a text-editor, you should be able to see most of the details of each question. <br />
<br />
=== How can I optimize a Moodle server for performing more concurrent quizzes? ===<br />
<br />
See [[Performance recommendations]].<br />
<br />
=== Can I release the answers to students who did not attempt a quiz? ===<br />
Yes. One way to handle this with standard Moodle would be to open the quiz after the deadline and add a time limit to the quiz of one second. Unless students are extremely quick they will not be able to gain any points, but would see the general feedback.<br />
<br />
=== How can I make Moodle quizzes if my school does not have enough computers / fast internet / a good Moodle server? ===<br />
* Check the [[Offline quiz activity]] additional plugin.<br />
* Read about the use of [[Safe_exam_browser#Chrome_OS_and_Safe_Exam_Browser| Chromebooks]] and [[Safe_exam_browser#Securing_a_Moodle_Quiz_on_an_iPad|iPads]] in the [[Safe exam browser]] Moodle documentation.<br />
* Visit the page for [https://www.eventbrite.com.au/o/transforming-exams-e-exams-symposium-17431618115 Transforming Exams] - Transforming Exams is an Australian Government funded research project looking at approaches to conducting authentic digital assessment in the exam rooms of Australian universities via the use of Bring-your-own laptops. The project involves 10 Australian university partners and is lead out of Monash University. See [http://transformingexams.com/ TransformingExams.com] for project information.<br />
<br />
===Can I print the quiz results without the answers history?===<br />
If you want to to print the results of all the student attempts, but ommit the answers history, as it might take much space, you can do so by accessing the settings on Site admin -> Appearance -> Additional HTML. In the 'Within head' setting, put something like:<br />
<br />
<code php n><br />
<style type="text/css"><br />
@media print {<br />
.que .history {<br />
display: none;<br />
}<br />
}<br />
</style><br />
</code><br />
<br />
==Setup==<br />
<br />
===Why am I no longer allowed to add or remove questions?===<br />
Most likely it is because you have students that have already attempted the quiz. You will need to delete all of the attempts by selecting them and choosing to delete them if you need to add/remove questions from a quiz. <br />
<br />
If you are developing a new quiz where the attempts have just been trials then deleting the previous attempts will have no consequences in the grade book. <br />
<br />
There are several ways of getting to the “attempts #” which you need to click on to delete the previous attempts. Use which ever works for you.<br />
#Click on the quiz that you want to amend. It will take you to a page with “attempts #" at the top.<br />
#If you are on a page with this message “You cannot add or remove questions because the quiz has been attempted (attempts #)” Click on "attempts #".<br />
#If you have navigated away from the page with the message go to the Settings block > Quiz Administration > Edit Quiz.<br />
Whichever way you find “attempts #” click on it and you will go to a page with a drop down menu at the top. Select “all users who have attempted the quiz”. There are several other click boxes select whatever applies to your situation.<br />
Click “Show Report” and then “select all”. Click “Delete selected attempts” and confirm selection.<br />
<br />
Go back to Quiz Administration > Edit Quiz and you will now be able to add or delete questions.<br />
<br />
===How can I remove a problem question after the quiz has been taken?===<br />
<br />
You can not remove a question once a quiz has been taken by one student or more. However you can change the score and flag the question so you know it has problems.<br />
<br />
Set the score for that question to 0. <br />
*Caution: In some versions of Moodle if you use this question in an other quiz, this will potentially change the question in that quiz as well. A trick is to score the question as 0, then regrade the just completed quiz. This will establish the new grade for gradebook. Now go back and change the score to the original value. <br />
<br />
Find the question in Question Bank. Maybe edit the title (e.g. 'Do not use in Bio101'). Or if you do not share the question category with other teachers, create a sub category, move the offending question there, and perhaps create a better question to replace the one you just moved. Create a new quiz and if necessary hide the old one.<br />
*Caution: if other departments or teachers use a question category it might be wise to check with the team before moving or changing any question. This is one reason importing questions in a course is a good best practice in some situations.<br />
<br />
===How can I turn off glossary auto-linking in a quiz? ===<br />
*In the Quiz administration settings block there will be a link "filter".<br />
*Click the link and you will have the option to disable filters just for that particular quiz:<br />
<br />
===Can I make a second quiz start right away after a first quiz is finished?===<br />
By using a hack (See [https://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=377382 this forum thread]). <br />
<br />
In the 'Overall feedback' for the first quiz, add some code which redirects to the second quiz. Make a big button to make that obvious:<br />
<br />
<code css><br />
<div style="text-align:center;padding:20px;"><br />
<a href="https://--your domain--/mod/quiz/view.php?id=--quiz 2 no--" target="_blank"><br />
<button type="button" style="height:100px;font-size:24px;">Click here to access Quiz 2</button><br />
</a><br />
</div><br />
</code><br />
<br />
It would look like this:<br />
<br />
[[File:Click here to access Quiz 2.png|200px]]<br />
<br />
Notes:<br />
<br />
* The button will not appear in the gradebook.<br />
* In the quiz settings and under Review options, select 'Overall feedback' under 'Immediately after the attempt'. Deselect 'Overall feedback' under 'Later, while the quiz is still open' and 'After the quiz is closed'.<br />
<br />
==Attempts==<br />
<br />
===How can I give particular students extra time or numbers of attempts?===<br />
*In the Quiz administration there is a link "User overrides"<br />
*Click this link and you will be able to choose one or more users and change quiz dates, times or number of attempts.<br />
<br />
[[File:quizuseroverride.png]]<br />
<br />
===Can I have different start times/timings/numbers of attempts for different groups?===<br />
*In the Quiz administration settings block, there is a link "group overrides" that allows you to do things like grant extensions to certain groups of students.<br />
*Click this link and you will be able to select your groups and change the quiz dates, times and number of attempts:<br />
<br />
[[File:quizgroupoverride.png]]<br />
<br />
===What happens if students submit answers after the quiz closing date?===<br />
It is possible for students to still submit answers after the quiz has closed (for example if they started the attempt before the closing date but then took a long time before submitting). These responses are stored by the quiz module, but the students are not given any credit for them. The teacher can see these answers when reviewing the student's attempts and can give the student credit for them by manually entering a grade in the gradebook. Also the teacher could change the closing date after the fact and regrade the attempts. The students' answers would then get graded.<br />
<br />
===How can a "Never submitted quiz" attempt be submitted?===<br />
Currently there is no way to retrieve an attempt that was "Never Submitted", and get it back into the "In progress" state. Perhaps the best solution is to plan ahead and set your quiz to set your quiz to be submitted automatically. Alternatively, you can<br />
# Update the quiz : set the "close the quiz" date after today<br />
# Set "When time expires" to "There is a grace period ..."<br />
#Under Grade set "Attempts allowed" to "unlimited"<br />
#Question behavior: Each attempt builds on the last "Yes"<br />
# Invite the students who did not close their exams<br />
# Allow them to start a new attempt, and close it immediately.<br />
<br />
===Why can't people (guests) attempt a quiz without creating an account and logging in?===<br />
<br />
This is difficult to implement for technical reasons.<br />
<br />
To explain: The quiz has to link all information about an attempt to a particular 'user' record in the database, and each user can only have one open quiz attempt at a time. All not-logged-in users share the same 'guest' user database record. Therefore, two guests could not attempt the quiz at the same time, and even if they could, it would be difficult to prevent one guest seeing another guest's attempts.<br />
<br />
Of course, given enough work, it would be possible to change some of those assumptions, and so make it possible for guests to attempt quizzes. Indeed, some of the obstructions to implementing this have already been removed while doing other work on the quiz, but there is still some way to go. If you would like to see this implemented, please vote for MDL-17892.<br />
<br />
A workaround is to create a visitor account, say with username = guest, password = visitor, for everyone to share.<br />
<br />
===How can I prevent a student from reviewing or jumping around questions in a quiz?===<br />
You can block the quiz navigation block and the summary of quiz page with CSS code in a theme. However, if a student fails to answer a question, they will not know if you implement this "solution". Also if others on the site do not want this patch, make sure the theme you select for the course is not used by others.<br />
<br />
For example using the Afterburner theme, enter this in the CSS code area:<br />
<br />
:div#mod_quiz_navblock {visibility:hidden;}<br />
:table.quizsummaryofattempt {visibility:hidden;}<br />
<br />
There are other CSS solutions.<br />
<br />
===How can I force my students to answer all the question in a quiz before they submit?===<br />
<br />
There are various ways to answer this:<br />
# You can't.<br />
# Your students are not stupid. They know they will get zero marks for any question they do not answer, so they already have a strong incentive to answer every question. Furthermore, at the end of the quiz there is the summary page where they can easily check that they have answered all the questions before they submit, so they won't accidentally miss questions.<br />
# OK, so you want us to write code that won't let students submit before they have answered each question. Well, all that does is forces the student to put random junk like "asdf" into each question before they click the button, or randomly make a choice in each multiple choice question. There is no educational benefit in this. You get more meaningful information if students leave those questions blank rather than putting in random responses.<br />
<br />
==Grades==<br />
<br />
===Why is my quiz not displaying in the gradebook?===<br />
<br />
Go to the editing quiz page and check that you have a maximum grade that is more than 0 - if your score is 0, then the quiz will not appear in the gradebook.<br />
<br />
===I've entered quiz grades manually in the gradebook. How can I allow students to improve on these grades?===<br />
<br />
When a grade is entered directly in the gradebook, an "overridden" flag is set, meaning that the grade can no longer be changed from within the quiz.<br />
<br />
However, the flag can be removed by turning editing on in the [[Grader report|grader report]], then clicking the edit grade icon, unchecking the overridden box and saving the changes.<br />
<br />
===How can I set a grade to pass?===<br />
<br />
See the section 'Setting a grade to pass for a quiz' in [[Activity completion settings]] for details.<br />
<br />
===How can I have a quiz that is not graded?===<br />
<br />
On the Edit quiz page, change the total score and each question's score to 0 instead of the defaults of 10 and 1 per question:<br />
[[File:quizscore0.png]]<br />
<br />
==Appearance==<br />
<br />
===How can I turn off question flagging?===<br />
By default, flags are available in quiz questions.<br />
<br />
[[File:flag.png]]<br />
<br />
There is a capability attached to this: [[Capabilities/moodle/question:flag]]. Remove this capability from roles that you don't want to see the flags. You can either do that by editing the role definitions globally, or by overriding the permissions in just one quiz or course.<br />
<br />
===How can I hide the number of marks available for each question?===<br />
<br />
This is not really possible unless you are prepared to edit the code.<br />
<br />
If you have a custom theme, you can add CSS like this:<br />
<code css><br />
.que .info .grade { display: none; }<br />
</code><br />
or you could try to make it more specific, and only hide the grade before the question is answered:<br />
<code css><br />
.que.answersaved .info .grade,<br />
.que.invalidanswer .info .grade,<br />
.que.notyetanswered .info .grade { display: none; }<br />
</code><br />
You can also add this CSS using the [[Header_and_footer|Additional HTML admin setting]].<br />
<br />
Alternatively, you can alter the PHP code here: https://github.com/moodle/moodle/blob/4de51c25ae227a727dcba7c39f6f644a5d47ce7a/mod/quiz/locallib.php#L1820. Change that line to give the behaviour you want, e.g.<br />
<code php><br />
$options->marks = self::extract($quiz->reviewmarks, $when,<br />
self::MARK_AND_MAX, self::HIDDEN);<br />
</code><br />
<br />
Be warned that any of these approaches will affect every quiz in the Moodle site.<br />
<br />
===How can I delay the quiz feedback after the quiz has passed===<br />
* Suppose the students take a "Main" one-hour quiz from 2 April 14:00 to 2 April 15:00. They shall not have any feedback during and after the quiz until the following week.<br />
* Students take a "Follow up" quiz a week later, starting 9 April 14:00. If they succeed the "Follow up" quiz, they can then review the "Main" quiz and get their points.<br />
<br />
This can be done by editing the "Main" quiz , the "Follow up" quiz and the Gradebook settings as follows:<br />
<br />
'''"Main" quiz settings'''<br />
<br />
Timing<br />
Open the quiz: 2 April 14:00<br />
Close the quiz: 9 April 14:00<br />
Review options<br />
During the attempt<br />
Uncheck feedbacks<br />
Immediately after the attempt<br />
Uncheck feedbacks<br />
Later, while the quiz is still open<br />
Uncheck feedbacks<br />
After the quiz is closed<br />
Check feedbacks<br />
Restrict access<br />
Student must match any of the following<br />
Date: until 2 April 15:00<br />
or<br />
Student must match all of the following (restriction set)<br />
Date: from 9 April 14:00<br />
and<br />
Grade: Follow up<br />
Check must be ≥ 1 %<br />
<br />
[[File:MoodleDocs201904041052.png|thumb]]<br />
<br />
<br />
'''"Follow up" quiz settings'''<br />
<br />
Timing<br />
Open the quiz: 9 April 14:00<br />
<br />
'''Grade book set up'''<br />
Main quiz: Weight 0.0, ID number "main"<br />
Follow up quiz: Weight 0.0, ID number "followup"<br />
Grade item "Total": Weight 100.0, Calculation = main +followup<br />
<br />
==Errors==<br />
<br />
===I obtain the error 'The number of random questions required is more than are still available in the category!'===<br />
<br />
Review your quiz and verify Moodle has enough questions from each category of questions it will be pulling from. You may have inadvertently selected more questions than what exists in the category. Also make sure you're not pulling questions from a category that has zero questions. Because you are picking random questions, rather than a specific question, it may not be apparent at first that you have run out of questions to ask!<br />
<br />
==Quiz plugins==<br />
<br />
There are a number of ways to extend quizzes, such as adding new reports and questions types. See [https://moodle.org/plugins/browse.php?list=category&id=28 Moodle plugins directory: Plugin type: Quiz].<br />
<br />
==See also==<br />
<br />
* [[Effective quiz practices]]<br />
* [[Questions FAQ]]<br />
<br />
==Any further questions?==<br />
<br />
Please post in the [https://moodle.org/mod/forum/view.php?id=737 Quiz forum] on moodle.org.<br />
<br />
[[Category:FAQ]]<br />
<br />
[[de:Test FAQ]]<br />
[[es:Examen FAQ]]</div>Dbauer-etshttps://docs.moodle.org/36/en/index.php?title=Quiz_FAQ&diff=133470Quiz FAQ2019-04-04T15:30:19Z<p>Dbauer-ets: /* How can I delay the quiz feedback after the quiz has passed */</p>
<hr />
<div>{{Quiz}}<br />
==General==<br />
<br />
===How can I try a quiz before it is released?===<br />
<br />
You have prepared a quiz exam for your students. It is currently in a hidden state. The exam opens on the day of the exam, at a time that the students know about. However, to satisfy yourself that it is doable in the time allotted, You wish to do a dry run yourself before that date. How can You accomplish this?<br />
<br />
Method 1: Use the Preview feature available to you as a teacher as you are making the quiz.<br />
<br />
Method 2: <br />
<br />
# Make a dummy account with a name like "Test Student".<br />
# Enrol that user in the course as a student.<br />
# Add a "User override" to the quiz, so "Test Student" can attempt the quiz before it is open to everyone else.<br />
# Log in as "Test student".<br />
# Attempt the quiz.<br />
# Log back in as teacher.<br />
# Review the attempt.<br />
# Go to Results -> Grades and delete the test attempt.<br />
# Un-enrol "Test Student" from your course.<br />
<br />
Method 3: Set up a Moodle Playground course for your teachers. Add teachers with dual role (teacher and student). Teachers can later copy the quiz/assignment/whatever over to their live class.<br />
<br />
===How can I enable notification of quiz submissions?===<br />
<br />
See [[Quiz submission notification]].<br />
<br />
===How do I send a bulk message to all students who haven't completed a quiz?===<br />
*From your navigation block, click ''Reports>Course participation''<br />
*From the drop down, choose your quiz.<br />
*In ''Show only'', choose "Student" and in ''Actions'', choose "post"<br />
*In the list that appears, tick/check the boxes next to those you wish to message.<br />
*In the bottom dropdown ''With selected users'', choose "send message"<br />
<br />
[[File:quizemail.png]]<br />
<br />
===How can build a quiz that picks X questions randomly from a larger question bank?===<br />
See the section on adding random questions in [[Building Quiz]].<br />
<br />
===How can I print a copy of a quiz?===<br />
<br />
Use your browser printer option (for example by right-clicking and selecting Print) When a student prints their finished quiz, responses and feedback will also be printed.<br />
<br />
[[File:browserquizprint29.png|thumb|center|400px|Print preview of finished quiz - Click to enlarge]]<br />
<br />
You can also export the question as Moodle XML, or GIFT format. If you open either of those files in a text-editor, you should be able to see most of the details of each question. <br />
<br />
=== How can I optimize a Moodle server for performing more concurrent quizzes? ===<br />
<br />
See [[Performance recommendations]].<br />
<br />
=== Can I release the answers to students who did not attempt a quiz? ===<br />
Yes. One way to handle this with standard Moodle would be to open the quiz after the deadline and add a time limit to the quiz of one second. Unless students are extremely quick they will not be able to gain any points, but would see the general feedback.<br />
<br />
=== How can I make Moodle quizzes if my school does not have enough computers / fast internet / a good Moodle server? ===<br />
* Check the [[Offline quiz activity]] additional plugin.<br />
* Read about the use of [[Safe_exam_browser#Chrome_OS_and_Safe_Exam_Browser| Chromebooks]] and [[Safe_exam_browser#Securing_a_Moodle_Quiz_on_an_iPad|iPads]] in the [[Safe exam browser]] Moodle documentation.<br />
* Visit the page for [https://www.eventbrite.com.au/o/transforming-exams-e-exams-symposium-17431618115 Transforming Exams] - Transforming Exams is an Australian Government funded research project looking at approaches to conducting authentic digital assessment in the exam rooms of Australian universities via the use of Bring-your-own laptops. The project involves 10 Australian university partners and is lead out of Monash University. See [http://transformingexams.com/ TransformingExams.com] for project information.<br />
<br />
===Can I print the quiz results without the answers history?===<br />
If you want to to print the results of all the student attempts, but ommit the answers history, as it might take much space, you can do so by accessing the settings on Site admin -> Appearance -> Additional HTML. In the 'Within head' setting, put something like:<br />
<br />
<code php n><br />
<style type="text/css"><br />
@media print {<br />
.que .history {<br />
display: none;<br />
}<br />
}<br />
</style><br />
</code><br />
<br />
==Setup==<br />
<br />
===Why am I no longer allowed to add or remove questions?===<br />
Most likely it is because you have students that have already attempted the quiz. You will need to delete all of the attempts by selecting them and choosing to delete them if you need to add/remove questions from a quiz. <br />
<br />
If you are developing a new quiz where the attempts have just been trials then deleting the previous attempts will have no consequences in the grade book. <br />
<br />
There are several ways of getting to the “attempts #” which you need to click on to delete the previous attempts. Use which ever works for you.<br />
#Click on the quiz that you want to amend. It will take you to a page with “attempts #" at the top.<br />
#If you are on a page with this message “You cannot add or remove questions because the quiz has been attempted (attempts #)” Click on "attempts #".<br />
#If you have navigated away from the page with the message go to the Settings block > Quiz Administration > Edit Quiz.<br />
Whichever way you find “attempts #” click on it and you will go to a page with a drop down menu at the top. Select “all users who have attempted the quiz”. There are several other click boxes select whatever applies to your situation.<br />
Click “Show Report” and then “select all”. Click “Delete selected attempts” and confirm selection.<br />
<br />
Go back to Quiz Administration > Edit Quiz and you will now be able to add or delete questions.<br />
<br />
===How can I remove a problem question after the quiz has been taken?===<br />
<br />
You can not remove a question once a quiz has been taken by one student or more. However you can change the score and flag the question so you know it has problems.<br />
<br />
Set the score for that question to 0. <br />
*Caution: In some versions of Moodle if you use this question in an other quiz, this will potentially change the question in that quiz as well. A trick is to score the question as 0, then regrade the just completed quiz. This will establish the new grade for gradebook. Now go back and change the score to the original value. <br />
<br />
Find the question in Question Bank. Maybe edit the title (e.g. 'Do not use in Bio101'). Or if you do not share the question category with other teachers, create a sub category, move the offending question there, and perhaps create a better question to replace the one you just moved. Create a new quiz and if necessary hide the old one.<br />
*Caution: if other departments or teachers use a question category it might be wise to check with the team before moving or changing any question. This is one reason importing questions in a course is a good best practice in some situations.<br />
<br />
===How can I turn off glossary auto-linking in a quiz? ===<br />
*In the Quiz administration settings block there will be a link "filter".<br />
*Click the link and you will have the option to disable filters just for that particular quiz:<br />
<br />
===Can I make a second quiz start right away after a first quiz is finished?===<br />
By using a hack (See [https://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=377382 this forum thread]). <br />
<br />
In the 'Overall feedback' for the first quiz, add some code which redirects to the second quiz. Make a big button to make that obvious:<br />
<br />
<code css><br />
<div style="text-align:center;padding:20px;"><br />
<a href="https://--your domain--/mod/quiz/view.php?id=--quiz 2 no--" target="_blank"><br />
<button type="button" style="height:100px;font-size:24px;">Click here to access Quiz 2</button><br />
</a><br />
</div><br />
</code><br />
<br />
It would look like this:<br />
<br />
[[File:Click here to access Quiz 2.png|200px]]<br />
<br />
Notes:<br />
<br />
* The button will not appear in the gradebook.<br />
* In the quiz settings and under Review options, select 'Overall feedback' under 'Immediately after the attempt'. Deselect 'Overall feedback' under 'Later, while the quiz is still open' and 'After the quiz is closed'.<br />
<br />
==Attempts==<br />
<br />
===How can I give particular students extra time or numbers of attempts?===<br />
*In the Quiz administration there is a link "User overrides"<br />
*Click this link and you will be able to choose one or more users and change quiz dates, times or number of attempts.<br />
<br />
[[File:quizuseroverride.png]]<br />
<br />
===Can I have different start times/timings/numbers of attempts for different groups?===<br />
*In the Quiz administration settings block, there is a link "group overrides" that allows you to do things like grant extensions to certain groups of students.<br />
*Click this link and you will be able to select your groups and change the quiz dates, times and number of attempts:<br />
<br />
[[File:quizgroupoverride.png]]<br />
<br />
===What happens if students submit answers after the quiz closing date?===<br />
It is possible for students to still submit answers after the quiz has closed (for example if they started the attempt before the closing date but then took a long time before submitting). These responses are stored by the quiz module, but the students are not given any credit for them. The teacher can see these answers when reviewing the student's attempts and can give the student credit for them by manually entering a grade in the gradebook. Also the teacher could change the closing date after the fact and regrade the attempts. The students' answers would then get graded.<br />
<br />
===How can a "Never submitted quiz" attempt be submitted?===<br />
Currently there is no way to retrieve an attempt that was "Never Submitted", and get it back into the "In progress" state. Perhaps the best solution is to plan ahead and set your quiz to set your quiz to be submitted automatically. Alternatively, you can<br />
# Update the quiz : set the "close the quiz" date after today<br />
# Set "When time expires" to "There is a grace period ..."<br />
#Under Grade set "Attempts allowed" to "unlimited"<br />
#Question behavior: Each attempt builds on the last "Yes"<br />
# Invite the students who did not close their exams<br />
# Allow them to start a new attempt, and close it immediately.<br />
<br />
===Why can't people (guests) attempt a quiz without creating an account and logging in?===<br />
<br />
This is difficult to implement for technical reasons.<br />
<br />
To explain: The quiz has to link all information about an attempt to a particular 'user' record in the database, and each user can only have one open quiz attempt at a time. All not-logged-in users share the same 'guest' user database record. Therefore, two guests could not attempt the quiz at the same time, and even if they could, it would be difficult to prevent one guest seeing another guest's attempts.<br />
<br />
Of course, given enough work, it would be possible to change some of those assumptions, and so make it possible for guests to attempt quizzes. Indeed, some of the obstructions to implementing this have already been removed while doing other work on the quiz, but there is still some way to go. If you would like to see this implemented, please vote for MDL-17892.<br />
<br />
A workaround is to create a visitor account, say with username = guest, password = visitor, for everyone to share.<br />
<br />
===How can I prevent a student from reviewing or jumping around questions in a quiz?===<br />
You can block the quiz navigation block and the summary of quiz page with CSS code in a theme. However, if a student fails to answer a question, they will not know if you implement this "solution". Also if others on the site do not want this patch, make sure the theme you select for the course is not used by others.<br />
<br />
For example using the Afterburner theme, enter this in the CSS code area:<br />
<br />
:div#mod_quiz_navblock {visibility:hidden;}<br />
:table.quizsummaryofattempt {visibility:hidden;}<br />
<br />
There are other CSS solutions.<br />
<br />
===How can I force my students to answer all the question in a quiz before they submit?===<br />
<br />
There are various ways to answer this:<br />
# You can't.<br />
# Your students are not stupid. They know they will get zero marks for any question they do not answer, so they already have a strong incentive to answer every question. Furthermore, at the end of the quiz there is the summary page where they can easily check that they have answered all the questions before they submit, so they won't accidentally miss questions.<br />
# OK, so you want us to write code that won't let students submit before they have answered each question. Well, all that does is forces the student to put random junk like "asdf" into each question before they click the button, or randomly make a choice in each multiple choice question. There is no educational benefit in this. You get more meaningful information if students leave those questions blank rather than putting in random responses.<br />
<br />
==Grades==<br />
<br />
===Why is my quiz not displaying in the gradebook?===<br />
<br />
Go to the editing quiz page and check that you have a maximum grade that is more than 0 - if your score is 0, then the quiz will not appear in the gradebook.<br />
<br />
===I've entered quiz grades manually in the gradebook. How can I allow students to improve on these grades?===<br />
<br />
When a grade is entered directly in the gradebook, an "overridden" flag is set, meaning that the grade can no longer be changed from within the quiz.<br />
<br />
However, the flag can be removed by turning editing on in the [[Grader report|grader report]], then clicking the edit grade icon, unchecking the overridden box and saving the changes.<br />
<br />
===How can I set a grade to pass?===<br />
<br />
See the section 'Setting a grade to pass for a quiz' in [[Activity completion settings]] for details.<br />
<br />
===How can I have a quiz that is not graded?===<br />
<br />
On the Edit quiz page, change the total score and each question's score to 0 instead of the defaults of 10 and 1 per question:<br />
[[File:quizscore0.png]]<br />
<br />
==Appearance==<br />
<br />
===How can I turn off question flagging?===<br />
By default, flags are available in quiz questions.<br />
<br />
[[File:flag.png]]<br />
<br />
There is a capability attached to this: [[Capabilities/moodle/question:flag]]. Remove this capability from roles that you don't want to see the flags. You can either do that by editing the role definitions globally, or by overriding the permissions in just one quiz or course.<br />
<br />
===How can I hide the number of marks available for each question?===<br />
<br />
This is not really possible unless you are prepared to edit the code.<br />
<br />
If you have a custom theme, you can add CSS like this:<br />
<code css><br />
.que .info .grade { display: none; }<br />
</code><br />
or you could try to make it more specific, and only hide the grade before the question is answered:<br />
<code css><br />
.que.answersaved .info .grade,<br />
.que.invalidanswer .info .grade,<br />
.que.notyetanswered .info .grade { display: none; }<br />
</code><br />
You can also add this CSS using the [[Header_and_footer|Additional HTML admin setting]].<br />
<br />
Alternatively, you can alter the PHP code here: https://github.com/moodle/moodle/blob/4de51c25ae227a727dcba7c39f6f644a5d47ce7a/mod/quiz/locallib.php#L1820. Change that line to give the behaviour you want, e.g.<br />
<code php><br />
$options->marks = self::extract($quiz->reviewmarks, $when,<br />
self::MARK_AND_MAX, self::HIDDEN);<br />
</code><br />
<br />
Be warned that any of these approaches will affect every quiz in the Moodle site.<br />
<br />
===How can I delay the quiz feedback after the quiz has passed===<br />
* Suppose the students take a "Main" one-hour quiz from 2 April 14:00 to 2 April 15:00. They shall not have any feedback during and after the quiz until the following week.<br />
* Students take a "Follow up" quiz a week later, starting 9 April 14:00. If they succeed the "Follow up" quiz, they can then review the "Main" quiz and get their points.<br />
<br />
This can be done by editing the "Main" quiz , the "Follow up" quiz and the Gradebook settings as follows:<br />
<br />
'''"Main" quiz settings'''<br />
<br />
Timing<br />
Open the quiz: 2 April 14:00<br />
Close the quiz: 9 April 14:00<br />
Review options<br />
During the attempt<br />
Uncheck feedbacks<br />
Immediately after the attempt<br />
Uncheck feedbacks<br />
Later, while the quiz is still open<br />
Uncheck feedbacks<br />
After the quiz is closed<br />
Check feedbacks<br />
Restrict access<br />
Student must match any of the following<br />
Date: until 2 April 15:00<br />
or<br />
Student must match all of the following (restriction set)<br />
Date: from 9 April 14:00<br />
and<br />
Grade: Follow up<br />
Check must be ≥ 1 %<br />
[[File:MoodleDocs201904041052.png|700px]]<br />
<br />
'''"Follow up" quiz settings'''<br />
<br />
Timing<br />
Open the quiz: 9 April 14:00<br />
<br />
'''Grade book set up'''<br />
Main quiz: Weight 0.0, ID number "main"<br />
Follow up quiz: Weight 0.0, ID number "followup"<br />
Grade item "Total": Weight 100.0, Calculation = main +followup<br />
<br />
==Errors==<br />
<br />
===I obtain the error 'The number of random questions required is more than are still available in the category!'===<br />
<br />
Review your quiz and verify Moodle has enough questions from each category of questions it will be pulling from. You may have inadvertently selected more questions than what exists in the category. Also make sure you're not pulling questions from a category that has zero questions. Because you are picking random questions, rather than a specific question, it may not be apparent at first that you have run out of questions to ask!<br />
<br />
==Quiz plugins==<br />
<br />
There are a number of ways to extend quizzes, such as adding new reports and questions types. See [https://moodle.org/plugins/browse.php?list=category&id=28 Moodle plugins directory: Plugin type: Quiz].<br />
<br />
==See also==<br />
<br />
* [[Effective quiz practices]]<br />
* [[Questions FAQ]]<br />
<br />
==Any further questions?==<br />
<br />
Please post in the [https://moodle.org/mod/forum/view.php?id=737 Quiz forum] on moodle.org.<br />
<br />
[[Category:FAQ]]<br />
<br />
[[de:Test FAQ]]<br />
[[es:Examen FAQ]]</div>Dbauer-etshttps://docs.moodle.org/36/en/index.php?title=Quiz_FAQ&diff=133469Quiz FAQ2019-04-04T15:08:27Z<p>Dbauer-ets: /* How can I delay the quiz feedback after the quiz has passed */</p>
<hr />
<div>{{Quiz}}<br />
==General==<br />
<br />
===How can I try a quiz before it is released?===<br />
<br />
You have prepared a quiz exam for your students. It is currently in a hidden state. The exam opens on the day of the exam, at a time that the students know about. However, to satisfy yourself that it is doable in the time allotted, You wish to do a dry run yourself before that date. How can You accomplish this?<br />
<br />
Method 1: Use the Preview feature available to you as a teacher as you are making the quiz.<br />
<br />
Method 2: <br />
<br />
# Make a dummy account with a name like "Test Student".<br />
# Enrol that user in the course as a student.<br />
# Add a "User override" to the quiz, so "Test Student" can attempt the quiz before it is open to everyone else.<br />
# Log in as "Test student".<br />
# Attempt the quiz.<br />
# Log back in as teacher.<br />
# Review the attempt.<br />
# Go to Results -> Grades and delete the test attempt.<br />
# Un-enrol "Test Student" from your course.<br />
<br />
Method 3: Set up a Moodle Playground course for your teachers. Add teachers with dual role (teacher and student). Teachers can later copy the quiz/assignment/whatever over to their live class.<br />
<br />
===How can I enable notification of quiz submissions?===<br />
<br />
See [[Quiz submission notification]].<br />
<br />
===How do I send a bulk message to all students who haven't completed a quiz?===<br />
*From your navigation block, click ''Reports>Course participation''<br />
*From the drop down, choose your quiz.<br />
*In ''Show only'', choose "Student" and in ''Actions'', choose "post"<br />
*In the list that appears, tick/check the boxes next to those you wish to message.<br />
*In the bottom dropdown ''With selected users'', choose "send message"<br />
<br />
[[File:quizemail.png]]<br />
<br />
===How can build a quiz that picks X questions randomly from a larger question bank?===<br />
See the section on adding random questions in [[Building Quiz]].<br />
<br />
===How can I print a copy of a quiz?===<br />
<br />
Use your browser printer option (for example by right-clicking and selecting Print) When a student prints their finished quiz, responses and feedback will also be printed.<br />
<br />
[[File:browserquizprint29.png|thumb|center|400px|Print preview of finished quiz - Click to enlarge]]<br />
<br />
You can also export the question as Moodle XML, or GIFT format. If you open either of those files in a text-editor, you should be able to see most of the details of each question. <br />
<br />
=== How can I optimize a Moodle server for performing more concurrent quizzes? ===<br />
<br />
See [[Performance recommendations]].<br />
<br />
=== Can I release the answers to students who did not attempt a quiz? ===<br />
Yes. One way to handle this with standard Moodle would be to open the quiz after the deadline and add a time limit to the quiz of one second. Unless students are extremely quick they will not be able to gain any points, but would see the general feedback.<br />
<br />
=== How can I make Moodle quizzes if my school does not have enough computers / fast internet / a good Moodle server? ===<br />
* Check the [[Offline quiz activity]] additional plugin.<br />
* Read about the use of [[Safe_exam_browser#Chrome_OS_and_Safe_Exam_Browser| Chromebooks]] and [[Safe_exam_browser#Securing_a_Moodle_Quiz_on_an_iPad|iPads]] in the [[Safe exam browser]] Moodle documentation.<br />
* Visit the page for [https://www.eventbrite.com.au/o/transforming-exams-e-exams-symposium-17431618115 Transforming Exams] - Transforming Exams is an Australian Government funded research project looking at approaches to conducting authentic digital assessment in the exam rooms of Australian universities via the use of Bring-your-own laptops. The project involves 10 Australian university partners and is lead out of Monash University. See [http://transformingexams.com/ TransformingExams.com] for project information.<br />
<br />
===Can I print the quiz results without the answers history?===<br />
If you want to to print the results of all the student attempts, but ommit the answers history, as it might take much space, you can do so by accessing the settings on Site admin -> Appearance -> Additional HTML. In the 'Within head' setting, put something like:<br />
<br />
<code php n><br />
<style type="text/css"><br />
@media print {<br />
.que .history {<br />
display: none;<br />
}<br />
}<br />
</style><br />
</code><br />
<br />
==Setup==<br />
<br />
===Why am I no longer allowed to add or remove questions?===<br />
Most likely it is because you have students that have already attempted the quiz. You will need to delete all of the attempts by selecting them and choosing to delete them if you need to add/remove questions from a quiz. <br />
<br />
If you are developing a new quiz where the attempts have just been trials then deleting the previous attempts will have no consequences in the grade book. <br />
<br />
There are several ways of getting to the “attempts #” which you need to click on to delete the previous attempts. Use which ever works for you.<br />
#Click on the quiz that you want to amend. It will take you to a page with “attempts #" at the top.<br />
#If you are on a page with this message “You cannot add or remove questions because the quiz has been attempted (attempts #)” Click on "attempts #".<br />
#If you have navigated away from the page with the message go to the Settings block > Quiz Administration > Edit Quiz.<br />
Whichever way you find “attempts #” click on it and you will go to a page with a drop down menu at the top. Select “all users who have attempted the quiz”. There are several other click boxes select whatever applies to your situation.<br />
Click “Show Report” and then “select all”. Click “Delete selected attempts” and confirm selection.<br />
<br />
Go back to Quiz Administration > Edit Quiz and you will now be able to add or delete questions.<br />
<br />
===How can I remove a problem question after the quiz has been taken?===<br />
<br />
You can not remove a question once a quiz has been taken by one student or more. However you can change the score and flag the question so you know it has problems.<br />
<br />
Set the score for that question to 0. <br />
*Caution: In some versions of Moodle if you use this question in an other quiz, this will potentially change the question in that quiz as well. A trick is to score the question as 0, then regrade the just completed quiz. This will establish the new grade for gradebook. Now go back and change the score to the original value. <br />
<br />
Find the question in Question Bank. Maybe edit the title (e.g. 'Do not use in Bio101'). Or if you do not share the question category with other teachers, create a sub category, move the offending question there, and perhaps create a better question to replace the one you just moved. Create a new quiz and if necessary hide the old one.<br />
*Caution: if other departments or teachers use a question category it might be wise to check with the team before moving or changing any question. This is one reason importing questions in a course is a good best practice in some situations.<br />
<br />
===How can I turn off glossary auto-linking in a quiz? ===<br />
*In the Quiz administration settings block there will be a link "filter".<br />
*Click the link and you will have the option to disable filters just for that particular quiz:<br />
<br />
===Can I make a second quiz start right away after a first quiz is finished?===<br />
By using a hack (See [https://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=377382 this forum thread]). <br />
<br />
In the 'Overall feedback' for the first quiz, add some code which redirects to the second quiz. Make a big button to make that obvious:<br />
<br />
<code css><br />
<div style="text-align:center;padding:20px;"><br />
<a href="https://--your domain--/mod/quiz/view.php?id=--quiz 2 no--" target="_blank"><br />
<button type="button" style="height:100px;font-size:24px;">Click here to access Quiz 2</button><br />
</a><br />
</div><br />
</code><br />
<br />
It would look like this:<br />
<br />
[[File:Click here to access Quiz 2.png|200px]]<br />
<br />
Notes:<br />
<br />
* The button will not appear in the gradebook.<br />
* In the quiz settings and under Review options, select 'Overall feedback' under 'Immediately after the attempt'. Deselect 'Overall feedback' under 'Later, while the quiz is still open' and 'After the quiz is closed'.<br />
<br />
==Attempts==<br />
<br />
===How can I give particular students extra time or numbers of attempts?===<br />
*In the Quiz administration there is a link "User overrides"<br />
*Click this link and you will be able to choose one or more users and change quiz dates, times or number of attempts.<br />
<br />
[[File:quizuseroverride.png]]<br />
<br />
===Can I have different start times/timings/numbers of attempts for different groups?===<br />
*In the Quiz administration settings block, there is a link "group overrides" that allows you to do things like grant extensions to certain groups of students.<br />
*Click this link and you will be able to select your groups and change the quiz dates, times and number of attempts:<br />
<br />
[[File:quizgroupoverride.png]]<br />
<br />
===What happens if students submit answers after the quiz closing date?===<br />
It is possible for students to still submit answers after the quiz has closed (for example if they started the attempt before the closing date but then took a long time before submitting). These responses are stored by the quiz module, but the students are not given any credit for them. The teacher can see these answers when reviewing the student's attempts and can give the student credit for them by manually entering a grade in the gradebook. Also the teacher could change the closing date after the fact and regrade the attempts. The students' answers would then get graded.<br />
<br />
===How can a "Never submitted quiz" attempt be submitted?===<br />
Currently there is no way to retrieve an attempt that was "Never Submitted", and get it back into the "In progress" state. Perhaps the best solution is to plan ahead and set your quiz to set your quiz to be submitted automatically. Alternatively, you can<br />
# Update the quiz : set the "close the quiz" date after today<br />
# Set "When time expires" to "There is a grace period ..."<br />
#Under Grade set "Attempts allowed" to "unlimited"<br />
#Question behavior: Each attempt builds on the last "Yes"<br />
# Invite the students who did not close their exams<br />
# Allow them to start a new attempt, and close it immediately.<br />
<br />
===Why can't people (guests) attempt a quiz without creating an account and logging in?===<br />
<br />
This is difficult to implement for technical reasons.<br />
<br />
To explain: The quiz has to link all information about an attempt to a particular 'user' record in the database, and each user can only have one open quiz attempt at a time. All not-logged-in users share the same 'guest' user database record. Therefore, two guests could not attempt the quiz at the same time, and even if they could, it would be difficult to prevent one guest seeing another guest's attempts.<br />
<br />
Of course, given enough work, it would be possible to change some of those assumptions, and so make it possible for guests to attempt quizzes. Indeed, some of the obstructions to implementing this have already been removed while doing other work on the quiz, but there is still some way to go. If you would like to see this implemented, please vote for MDL-17892.<br />
<br />
A workaround is to create a visitor account, say with username = guest, password = visitor, for everyone to share.<br />
<br />
===How can I prevent a student from reviewing or jumping around questions in a quiz?===<br />
You can block the quiz navigation block and the summary of quiz page with CSS code in a theme. However, if a student fails to answer a question, they will not know if you implement this "solution". Also if others on the site do not want this patch, make sure the theme you select for the course is not used by others.<br />
<br />
For example using the Afterburner theme, enter this in the CSS code area:<br />
<br />
:div#mod_quiz_navblock {visibility:hidden;}<br />
:table.quizsummaryofattempt {visibility:hidden;}<br />
<br />
There are other CSS solutions.<br />
<br />
===How can I force my students to answer all the question in a quiz before they submit?===<br />
<br />
There are various ways to answer this:<br />
# You can't.<br />
# Your students are not stupid. They know they will get zero marks for any question they do not answer, so they already have a strong incentive to answer every question. Furthermore, at the end of the quiz there is the summary page where they can easily check that they have answered all the questions before they submit, so they won't accidentally miss questions.<br />
# OK, so you want us to write code that won't let students submit before they have answered each question. Well, all that does is forces the student to put random junk like "asdf" into each question before they click the button, or randomly make a choice in each multiple choice question. There is no educational benefit in this. You get more meaningful information if students leave those questions blank rather than putting in random responses.<br />
<br />
==Grades==<br />
<br />
===Why is my quiz not displaying in the gradebook?===<br />
<br />
Go to the editing quiz page and check that you have a maximum grade that is more than 0 - if your score is 0, then the quiz will not appear in the gradebook.<br />
<br />
===I've entered quiz grades manually in the gradebook. How can I allow students to improve on these grades?===<br />
<br />
When a grade is entered directly in the gradebook, an "overridden" flag is set, meaning that the grade can no longer be changed from within the quiz.<br />
<br />
However, the flag can be removed by turning editing on in the [[Grader report|grader report]], then clicking the edit grade icon, unchecking the overridden box and saving the changes.<br />
<br />
===How can I set a grade to pass?===<br />
<br />
See the section 'Setting a grade to pass for a quiz' in [[Activity completion settings]] for details.<br />
<br />
===How can I have a quiz that is not graded?===<br />
<br />
On the Edit quiz page, change the total score and each question's score to 0 instead of the defaults of 10 and 1 per question:<br />
[[File:quizscore0.png]]<br />
<br />
==Appearance==<br />
<br />
===How can I turn off question flagging?===<br />
By default, flags are available in quiz questions.<br />
<br />
[[File:flag.png]]<br />
<br />
There is a capability attached to this: [[Capabilities/moodle/question:flag]]. Remove this capability from roles that you don't want to see the flags. You can either do that by editing the role definitions globally, or by overriding the permissions in just one quiz or course.<br />
<br />
===How can I hide the number of marks available for each question?===<br />
<br />
This is not really possible unless you are prepared to edit the code.<br />
<br />
If you have a custom theme, you can add CSS like this:<br />
<code css><br />
.que .info .grade { display: none; }<br />
</code><br />
or you could try to make it more specific, and only hide the grade before the question is answered:<br />
<code css><br />
.que.answersaved .info .grade,<br />
.que.invalidanswer .info .grade,<br />
.que.notyetanswered .info .grade { display: none; }<br />
</code><br />
You can also add this CSS using the [[Header_and_footer|Additional HTML admin setting]].<br />
<br />
Alternatively, you can alter the PHP code here: https://github.com/moodle/moodle/blob/4de51c25ae227a727dcba7c39f6f644a5d47ce7a/mod/quiz/locallib.php#L1820. Change that line to give the behaviour you want, e.g.<br />
<code php><br />
$options->marks = self::extract($quiz->reviewmarks, $when,<br />
self::MARK_AND_MAX, self::HIDDEN);<br />
</code><br />
<br />
Be warned that any of these approaches will affect every quiz in the Moodle site.<br />
<br />
===How can I delay the quiz feedback after the quiz has passed===<br />
* Suppose the students take a "Main" one-hour quiz from 2 April 14:00 to 2 April 15:00. They shall not have any feedback during and after the quiz until the following week.<br />
* Students take a "Follow up" quiz a week later, starting 9 April 14:00. If they succeed the "Follow up" quiz, they can then review the "Main" quiz and get their points.<br />
<br />
This can be done by editing the "Main" quiz and the "Follow up" quiz settings as follows:<br />
<br />
'''"Main" quiz settings'''<br />
<br />
[[File:MoodleDocs201904041052.png|700px]]<br />
<br />
Review options<br />
During the attempt<br />
Uncheck feedbacks<br />
Immediately after the attempt<br />
Uncheck feedbacks<br />
Later, while the quiz is still open<br />
Uncheck feedbacks<br />
After the quiz is closed<br />
Check feedbacks<br />
Restrict access<br />
Student must match any of the following<br />
Date: until 2 April 15:00<br />
or<br />
Student must match all of the following (restriction set)<br />
Date: from 9 April 14:00<br />
and<br />
Grade: Follow up<br />
Check must be ≥ 1 %<br />
<br />
Follow up quiz settings<br />
Timing<br />
Open the quiz: 9 April 14:00<br />
<br />
Grade book set up<br />
Main quiz: Weight 0.0, ID number "main"<br />
Follow up quiz: Weight 0.0, ID number "followup"<br />
Grade item "Total": Weight 100.0, Calculation = main +followup<br />
<br />
==Errors==<br />
<br />
===I obtain the error 'The number of random questions required is more than are still available in the category!'===<br />
<br />
Review your quiz and verify Moodle has enough questions from each category of questions it will be pulling from. You may have inadvertently selected more questions than what exists in the category. Also make sure you're not pulling questions from a category that has zero questions. Because you are picking random questions, rather than a specific question, it may not be apparent at first that you have run out of questions to ask!<br />
<br />
==Quiz plugins==<br />
<br />
There are a number of ways to extend quizzes, such as adding new reports and questions types. See [https://moodle.org/plugins/browse.php?list=category&id=28 Moodle plugins directory: Plugin type: Quiz].<br />
<br />
==See also==<br />
<br />
* [[Effective quiz practices]]<br />
* [[Questions FAQ]]<br />
<br />
==Any further questions?==<br />
<br />
Please post in the [https://moodle.org/mod/forum/view.php?id=737 Quiz forum] on moodle.org.<br />
<br />
[[Category:FAQ]]<br />
<br />
[[de:Test FAQ]]<br />
[[es:Examen FAQ]]</div>Dbauer-etshttps://docs.moodle.org/36/en/index.php?title=File:MoodleDocs201904041052.png&diff=133468File:MoodleDocs201904041052.png2019-04-04T14:59:04Z<p>Dbauer-ets: </p>
<hr />
<div></div>Dbauer-etshttps://docs.moodle.org/36/en/index.php?title=Quiz_Subscores&diff=133446Quiz Subscores2019-03-31T02:18:46Z<p>Dbauer-ets: /* Example */</p>
<hr />
<div>Moodle users sometimes ask how to extract subscores or subtotals from Quiz. For examples, see [https://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=35637 Multiple grade quizzes], [https://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=51850 Quiz with sub-totaled sections?] and [https://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=371767 Moodle Quiz Subscores].<br />
<br />
Here is a method to extract subscores from Quiz (or any other Moodle activity that allows you to set different point values per question), without requiring any changes to Moodle code. It is a bit complex, but it does work. However, this method is only useful if you don't plan to use or display the final Quiz score, but you only want to display and use the subscores.<br />
<br />
This method is based on the [https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Modulo_operation modulo operation] and Floor function [https://docs.moodle.org/en/Grade_calculations#Calculation_functions (Definitions of functions)].<br />
<br />
== Step 1: Create Quiz and set values of Questions ==<br />
Start by creating a quiz as usual. However, for each subscore you want to extract, you will need to set the values of questions for that subscore to an order of magnitude matching that subscore. This is easiest to understand with an example. Suppose you are creating a test that will contain questions from three areas: Mathematics, Language, and History. In this example, Mathematics is Topic 1, Language is Topic 2, and History is Topic 3.<br />
<br />
For each topic, use a different point value for each question in that topic. For Topic 1 (Mathematics), each question is worth 1 point. For Topic 2 (Language), each question is worth 10 points. For Topic 3 (History), each question is worth 100 points. (Note that this is going to make your final quiz score meaningless.)<br />
<br />
'''Important''': set the total points of the quiz to the same as the total of all the questions. Otherwise, the Quiz will change its scores based on whatever you set as the maximum number of points for the Quiz, and your calculations in later steps won't work correctly.<br />
<br />
You also need to give the Quiz activity an ID number that you will be able to remember later. In this example we will use "Pretest".<br />
<br />
== Step 2: Create Grade Items for each topic ==<br />
Next, create one new [https://docs.moodle.org/en/Grade_items#Manual_grade_items Manual Grade Item] for each of your Topics. '''Important''': put these Grade Items into a separate category that does NOT have Natural Weighting as the grade aggregation method. After saving each Grade Item, you will [https://docs.moodle.org/en/Grade_calculations edit the Calculation] for the item directly in the item's Edit menu.<br />
<br />
The calculation looks like this (where <nowiki>[[Pretest]]</nowiki> is the ID of the quiz score you are breaking into subscores):<br />
<br />
<pre>=mod(floor([[Pretest]]/topicvalue),10)</pre><br />
where "topicvalue" is the same as the number of points each question in the topic is worth in step 1. So for Topic 1, the calculation is:<br />
<br />
<pre>=mod(floor([[Pretest]]/1),10)</pre><br />
<br />
For Topic 2, the calculation is:<br />
<pre>=mod(floor([[Pretest]]/10),10)</pre><br />
<br />
For Topic 3, the calculation is:<br />
<pre>=mod(floor([[Pretest]]/100),10)</pre><br />
<br />
[https://docs.moodle.org/en/Grade_calculations#Calculation_functions Definitions of functions available in Gradebook Calculations]:<br />
<br />
<pre>mod(dividend, divisor): Calculates the remainder of a division</pre><br />
<br />
<pre>floor(number): Maps a real number to the largest previous integer</pre><br />
<br />
What this does is extract the digit from the quiz grade. So Topic 1 gets the "ones" digit, topic 2 gets the "tens" digit, etc. Note that this means you can only have up to 9 quiz questions per topic (not 10, otherwise you could not tell the difference between 10 correct answers at 1 point each and 1 correct answer at 10 points each).<br />
<br />
The maximum number of topics depends on the number of questions per topic and is limited by both the maximum allowable values of '''Maximum grade''' and '''Total of marks''' for the quiz. With 9 questions per topic, these limits allow a maximum of 4 sections. See below for larger numbers of topics or questions per topic.<br />
<br />
At this point, you may want to test your quiz with some sample students so you can see how this looks in the Gradebook.<br />
<br />
'''Note''': you can aggregate these subscores at the level of the category you created for them by using any of the available aggregation methods (sum, mean, min, max, etc.) and show the result in place of the original Quiz score, if needed.<br />
<br />
== Use your Subscores ==<br />
Now, you have manual grade items for each topic, and they have values you can use in [https://docs.moodle.org/en/Restrict_access controlling visibility/access] to activities. For example, set some labels to display or not display based on subscores from the first quiz. These labels can contain advisory text to students, letting them know whether they should complete a section of the course. You could also hide the section if the student has done well enough on the pretest, or show a section that is normally hidden if the student did poorly enough to need remedial material.<br />
<br />
==Larger numbers of topics or questions per topic==<br />
<br />
With n questions per topic, you must use calculations in base of at least n+1. For example, with 10 questions per topic, you must use base-11 calculations. If you have 4 questions per topic, you could use base-5 calculations.<br />
<br />
With 10 questions per topic and base-11 calculations, the mark for the questions in the first topic is 1, the mark for the questions in the second topic is 11, third topic 121, fourth topic 1331, etc. For topic 1 the calculation is <pre>=mod(floor(<nowiki>[[Pretest]]</nowiki>/1),11)</pre>, for section 2 the calculation is <pre>=mod(floor(<nowiki>[[Pretest]]</nowiki>/11),11)</pre>, for section 3 the calculation is <pre>=mod(floor(<nowiki>[[Pretest]]</nowiki>/121]]),11)</pre>, etc.<br />
<br />
In general, we have:<br />
<br />
<pre>Number of questions per topic : n</pre><br><br />
<br />
<pre>Base for calculations : b = n + 1</pre><br><br />
<br />
<pre>Value for topic t (t = 1, 2,...) : topicvalue(t) = bᵗ⁻¹</pre><br><br />
<br />
<pre>Calculation for topic t : =mod(floor([[Pretest]]/topicvalue(t)),b)</pre><br><br />
<br />
<pre>Maximum grade for the quiz : = n*[ b⁰ + b¹ + b² + ... + b**(number of topics - 1) ]</pre><br><br />
<br />
<pre>Total of marks = Maximum grade for the quiz</pre><br><br />
<br />
Both Maximum grade and Total of marks for the quiz must be less than or equal to their maximum allowable values which are respectively 90 909 and 99 999 by default. For example, with 4 questions per topic and base-5 calculations, the maximum number of topics is 7 with the Maximum grade and Total of marks set at 78 124 (less than or equal to 90 909). Mishael Ogochukwu '''[https://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=371767#p1499327 reported]''' that he got around the limits for Maximum grade and Total Marks by adjusting the datatype for "sumgrades", "maxmark", "grade", "finalgrade", "rawgrademax" and "rawgrade" in the Moodle database to allow for a higher grade number. <br />
<br />
==Examples==<br />
<br />
Detailed examples can be found at '''[https://moodleformulas.org/course/view.php?id=49&section=16 MoodleFormulas.org]'''.<br />
<br />
[[es:Subpuntajes del examen]]</div>Dbauer-etshttps://docs.moodle.org/36/en/index.php?title=Quiz_Subscores&diff=133445Quiz Subscores2019-03-31T02:18:36Z<p>Dbauer-ets: /* Example */</p>
<hr />
<div>Moodle users sometimes ask how to extract subscores or subtotals from Quiz. For examples, see [https://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=35637 Multiple grade quizzes], [https://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=51850 Quiz with sub-totaled sections?] and [https://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=371767 Moodle Quiz Subscores].<br />
<br />
Here is a method to extract subscores from Quiz (or any other Moodle activity that allows you to set different point values per question), without requiring any changes to Moodle code. It is a bit complex, but it does work. However, this method is only useful if you don't plan to use or display the final Quiz score, but you only want to display and use the subscores.<br />
<br />
This method is based on the [https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Modulo_operation modulo operation] and Floor function [https://docs.moodle.org/en/Grade_calculations#Calculation_functions (Definitions of functions)].<br />
<br />
== Step 1: Create Quiz and set values of Questions ==<br />
Start by creating a quiz as usual. However, for each subscore you want to extract, you will need to set the values of questions for that subscore to an order of magnitude matching that subscore. This is easiest to understand with an example. Suppose you are creating a test that will contain questions from three areas: Mathematics, Language, and History. In this example, Mathematics is Topic 1, Language is Topic 2, and History is Topic 3.<br />
<br />
For each topic, use a different point value for each question in that topic. For Topic 1 (Mathematics), each question is worth 1 point. For Topic 2 (Language), each question is worth 10 points. For Topic 3 (History), each question is worth 100 points. (Note that this is going to make your final quiz score meaningless.)<br />
<br />
'''Important''': set the total points of the quiz to the same as the total of all the questions. Otherwise, the Quiz will change its scores based on whatever you set as the maximum number of points for the Quiz, and your calculations in later steps won't work correctly.<br />
<br />
You also need to give the Quiz activity an ID number that you will be able to remember later. In this example we will use "Pretest".<br />
<br />
== Step 2: Create Grade Items for each topic ==<br />
Next, create one new [https://docs.moodle.org/en/Grade_items#Manual_grade_items Manual Grade Item] for each of your Topics. '''Important''': put these Grade Items into a separate category that does NOT have Natural Weighting as the grade aggregation method. After saving each Grade Item, you will [https://docs.moodle.org/en/Grade_calculations edit the Calculation] for the item directly in the item's Edit menu.<br />
<br />
The calculation looks like this (where <nowiki>[[Pretest]]</nowiki> is the ID of the quiz score you are breaking into subscores):<br />
<br />
<pre>=mod(floor([[Pretest]]/topicvalue),10)</pre><br />
where "topicvalue" is the same as the number of points each question in the topic is worth in step 1. So for Topic 1, the calculation is:<br />
<br />
<pre>=mod(floor([[Pretest]]/1),10)</pre><br />
<br />
For Topic 2, the calculation is:<br />
<pre>=mod(floor([[Pretest]]/10),10)</pre><br />
<br />
For Topic 3, the calculation is:<br />
<pre>=mod(floor([[Pretest]]/100),10)</pre><br />
<br />
[https://docs.moodle.org/en/Grade_calculations#Calculation_functions Definitions of functions available in Gradebook Calculations]:<br />
<br />
<pre>mod(dividend, divisor): Calculates the remainder of a division</pre><br />
<br />
<pre>floor(number): Maps a real number to the largest previous integer</pre><br />
<br />
What this does is extract the digit from the quiz grade. So Topic 1 gets the "ones" digit, topic 2 gets the "tens" digit, etc. Note that this means you can only have up to 9 quiz questions per topic (not 10, otherwise you could not tell the difference between 10 correct answers at 1 point each and 1 correct answer at 10 points each).<br />
<br />
The maximum number of topics depends on the number of questions per topic and is limited by both the maximum allowable values of '''Maximum grade''' and '''Total of marks''' for the quiz. With 9 questions per topic, these limits allow a maximum of 4 sections. See below for larger numbers of topics or questions per topic.<br />
<br />
At this point, you may want to test your quiz with some sample students so you can see how this looks in the Gradebook.<br />
<br />
'''Note''': you can aggregate these subscores at the level of the category you created for them by using any of the available aggregation methods (sum, mean, min, max, etc.) and show the result in place of the original Quiz score, if needed.<br />
<br />
== Use your Subscores ==<br />
Now, you have manual grade items for each topic, and they have values you can use in [https://docs.moodle.org/en/Restrict_access controlling visibility/access] to activities. For example, set some labels to display or not display based on subscores from the first quiz. These labels can contain advisory text to students, letting them know whether they should complete a section of the course. You could also hide the section if the student has done well enough on the pretest, or show a section that is normally hidden if the student did poorly enough to need remedial material.<br />
<br />
==Larger numbers of topics or questions per topic==<br />
<br />
With n questions per topic, you must use calculations in base of at least n+1. For example, with 10 questions per topic, you must use base-11 calculations. If you have 4 questions per topic, you could use base-5 calculations.<br />
<br />
With 10 questions per topic and base-11 calculations, the mark for the questions in the first topic is 1, the mark for the questions in the second topic is 11, third topic 121, fourth topic 1331, etc. For topic 1 the calculation is <pre>=mod(floor(<nowiki>[[Pretest]]</nowiki>/1),11)</pre>, for section 2 the calculation is <pre>=mod(floor(<nowiki>[[Pretest]]</nowiki>/11),11)</pre>, for section 3 the calculation is <pre>=mod(floor(<nowiki>[[Pretest]]</nowiki>/121]]),11)</pre>, etc.<br />
<br />
In general, we have:<br />
<br />
<pre>Number of questions per topic : n</pre><br><br />
<br />
<pre>Base for calculations : b = n + 1</pre><br><br />
<br />
<pre>Value for topic t (t = 1, 2,...) : topicvalue(t) = bᵗ⁻¹</pre><br><br />
<br />
<pre>Calculation for topic t : =mod(floor([[Pretest]]/topicvalue(t)),b)</pre><br><br />
<br />
<pre>Maximum grade for the quiz : = n*[ b⁰ + b¹ + b² + ... + b**(number of topics - 1) ]</pre><br><br />
<br />
<pre>Total of marks = Maximum grade for the quiz</pre><br><br />
<br />
Both Maximum grade and Total of marks for the quiz must be less than or equal to their maximum allowable values which are respectively 90 909 and 99 999 by default. For example, with 4 questions per topic and base-5 calculations, the maximum number of topics is 7 with the Maximum grade and Total of marks set at 78 124 (less than or equal to 90 909). Mishael Ogochukwu '''[https://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=371767#p1499327 reported]''' that he got around the limits for Maximum grade and Total Marks by adjusting the datatype for "sumgrades", "maxmark", "grade", "finalgrade", "rawgrademax" and "rawgrade" in the Moodle database to allow for a higher grade number. <br />
<br />
==Example==<br />
<br />
Detailed examples can be found at '''[https://moodleformulas.org/course/view.php?id=49&section=16 MoodleFormulas.org]'''.<br />
<br />
[[es:Subpuntajes del examen]]</div>Dbauer-etshttps://docs.moodle.org/36/en/index.php?title=Quiz_Subscores&diff=133404Quiz Subscores2019-03-26T05:28:06Z<p>Dbauer-ets: /* Larger numbers of topics or questions per topic */</p>
<hr />
<div>Moodle users sometimes ask how to extract subscores or subtotals from Quiz. For examples, see [https://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=35637 Multiple grade quizzes], [https://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=51850 Quiz with sub-totaled sections?] and [https://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=371767 Moodle Quiz Subscores].<br />
<br />
Here is a method to extract subscores from Quiz (or any other Moodle activity that allows you to set different point values per question), without requiring any changes to Moodle code. It is a bit complex, but it does work. However, this method is only useful if you don't plan to use or display the final Quiz score, but you only want to display and use the subscores.<br />
<br />
This method is based on the [https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Modulo_operation modulo operation] and Floor function [https://docs.moodle.org/en/Grade_calculations#Calculation_functions (Definitions of functions)].<br />
<br />
== Step 1: Create Quiz and set values of Questions ==<br />
Start by creating a quiz as usual. However, for each subscore you want to extract, you will need to set the values of questions for that subscore to an order of magnitude matching that subscore. This is easiest to understand with an example. Suppose you are creating a test that will contain questions from three areas: Mathematics, Language, and History. In this example, Mathematics is Topic 1, Language is Topic 2, and History is Topic 3.<br />
<br />
For each topic, use a different point value for each question in that topic. For Topic 1 (Mathematics), each question is worth 1 point. For Topic 2 (Language), each question is worth 10 points. For Topic 3 (History), each question is worth 100 points. (Note that this is going to make your final quiz score meaningless.)<br />
<br />
'''Important''': set the total points of the quiz to the same as the total of all the questions. Otherwise, the Quiz will change its scores based on whatever you set as the maximum number of points for the Quiz, and your calculations in later steps won't work correctly.<br />
<br />
You also need to give the Quiz activity an ID number that you will be able to remember later. In this example we will use "Pretest".<br />
<br />
== Step 2: Create Grade Items for each topic ==<br />
Next, create one new [https://docs.moodle.org/en/Grade_items#Manual_grade_items Manual Grade Item] for each of your Topics. '''Important''': put these Grade Items into a separate category that does NOT have Natural Weighting as the grade aggregation method. After saving each Grade Item, you will [https://docs.moodle.org/en/Grade_calculations edit the Calculation] for the item directly in the item's Edit menu.<br />
<br />
The calculation looks like this (where <nowiki>[[Pretest]]</nowiki> is the ID of the quiz score you are breaking into subscores):<br />
<br />
<pre>=mod(floor([[Pretest]]/topicvalue),10)</pre><br />
where "topicvalue" is the same as the number of points each question in the topic is worth in step 1. So for Topic 1, the calculation is:<br />
<br />
<pre>=mod(floor([[Pretest]]/1),10)</pre><br />
<br />
For Topic 2, the calculation is:<br />
<pre>=mod(floor([[Pretest]]/10),10)</pre><br />
<br />
For Topic 3, the calculation is:<br />
<pre>=mod(floor([[Pretest]]/100),10)</pre><br />
<br />
[https://docs.moodle.org/en/Grade_calculations#Calculation_functions Definitions of functions available in Gradebook Calculations]:<br />
<br />
<pre>mod(dividend, divisor): Calculates the remainder of a division</pre><br />
<br />
<pre>floor(number): Maps a real number to the largest previous integer</pre><br />
<br />
What this does is extract the digit from the quiz grade. So Topic 1 gets the "ones" digit, topic 2 gets the "tens" digit, etc. Note that this means you can only have up to 9 quiz questions per topic (not 10, otherwise you could not tell the difference between 10 correct answers at 1 point each and 1 correct answer at 10 points each).<br />
<br />
The maximum number of topics depends on the number of questions per topic and is limited by both the maximum allowable values of '''Maximum grade''' and '''Total of marks''' for the quiz. With 9 questions per topic, these limits allow a maximum of 4 sections. See below for larger numbers of topics or questions per topic.<br />
<br />
At this point, you may want to test your quiz with some sample students so you can see how this looks in the Gradebook.<br />
<br />
'''Note''': you can aggregate these subscores at the level of the category you created for them by using any of the available aggregation methods (sum, mean, min, max, etc.) and show the result in place of the original Quiz score, if needed.<br />
<br />
== Use your Subscores ==<br />
Now, you have manual grade items for each topic, and they have values you can use in [https://docs.moodle.org/en/Restrict_access controlling visibility/access] to activities. For example, set some labels to display or not display based on subscores from the first quiz. These labels can contain advisory text to students, letting them know whether they should complete a section of the course. You could also hide the section if the student has done well enough on the pretest, or show a section that is normally hidden if the student did poorly enough to need remedial material.<br />
<br />
==Larger numbers of topics or questions per topic==<br />
<br />
With n questions per topic, you must use calculations in base of at least n+1. For example, with 10 questions per topic, you must use base-11 calculations. If you have 4 questions per topic, you could use base-5 calculations.<br />
<br />
With 10 questions per topic and base-11 calculations, the mark for the questions in the first topic is 1, the mark for the questions in the second topic is 11, third topic 121, fourth topic 1331, etc. For topic 1 the calculation is <pre>=mod(floor(<nowiki>[[Pretest]]</nowiki>/1),11)</pre>, for section 2 the calculation is <pre>=mod(floor(<nowiki>[[Pretest]]</nowiki>/11),11)</pre>, for section 3 the calculation is <pre>=mod(floor(<nowiki>[[Pretest]]</nowiki>/121]]),11)</pre>, etc.<br />
<br />
In general, we have:<br />
<br />
<pre>Number of questions per topic : n</pre><br><br />
<br />
<pre>Base for calculations : b = n + 1</pre><br><br />
<br />
<pre>Value for topic t (t = 1, 2,...) : topicvalue(t) = bᵗ⁻¹</pre><br><br />
<br />
<pre>Calculation for topic t : =mod(floor([[Pretest]]/topicvalue(t)),b)</pre><br><br />
<br />
<pre>Maximum grade for the quiz : = n*[ b⁰ + b¹ + b² + ... + b**(number of topics - 1) ]</pre><br><br />
<br />
<pre>Total of marks = Maximum grade for the quiz</pre><br><br />
<br />
Both Maximum grade and Total of marks for the quiz must be less than or equal to their maximum allowable values which are respectively 90 909 and 99 999 by default. For example, with 4 questions per topic and base-5 calculations, the maximum number of topics is 7 with the Maximum grade and Total of marks set at 78 124 (less than or equal to 90 909). Mishael Ogochukwu '''[https://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=371767#p1499327 reported]''' that he got around the limits for Maximum grade and Total Marks by adjusting the datatype for "sumgrades", "maxmark", "grade", "finalgrade", "rawgrademax" and "rawgrade" in the Moodle database to allow for a higher grade number. <br />
<br />
==Example==<br />
<br />
A detailed example can be found at '''[https://moodleformulas.org/course/view.php?id=49&section=16 MoodleFormulas.org]'''.<br />
<br />
[[es:Subpuntajes del examen]]</div>Dbauer-etshttps://docs.moodle.org/36/en/index.php?title=Embedded_Answers_(Cloze)_question_type&diff=133192Embedded Answers (Cloze) question type2019-03-03T16:25:37Z<p>Dbauer-ets: /* Detailed syntax explanations */</p>
<hr />
<div>{{Questions}}<br />
'''Embedded answers (Cloze)''' questions consist of a passage of text (in Moodle format) that has various answers embedded within it, including multiple choice, short answers and numerical answers.<br />
<br />
Until mid2013, there was no graphical interface to create these questions within your Moodle site - you needed to specify the question format using the text box or by importing them from external files.<br />
<br />
You can link to an external web site that does create these questions from a graphical interface, see the ''[http://projects.ael.uni-tuebingen.de/quiz/htmlarea/index.php Online Cloze Question quiz generator]'' below.<br />
<br />
There is an Excel-based [http://hbwubecc.wixsite.com/jordan/tools Cloze and GIFT Generator] that was presented at the 2017 Moodle Moot Japan.<br />
<br />
There is a [[Cloze editor for TinyMCE]] that will let you create these questions from a graphical interface within your Moodle site, but it will overwrite your current HTML editor and only works with the [[TinyMCE editor]] but not with [[Atto]]. In 2016 a [[Cloze editor for Atto]] additional plugin was created.<br />
<br />
Lots of people suggested that [[Hot Potatoes]] software is the easiest way to create Embedded answer (Cloze) questions. Once you have created your questions on your PC, you can then import them into Moodle's quiz module.<br />
<br />
However, the flexibility of the Cloze question type is hard to equal and despite the minor coding that you need to create the questions, it has great worth in the Moodle Quiz.<br />
<br />
==Question set-up==<br />
<br />
#Select the question category<br />
#Give the question a descriptive name - this allows you to identify it in the question bank.<br />
#Enter the passage of text (in Moodle format - see [[Embedded_Answers_%28Cloze%29_question_type#Format|Format]] below) into the 'question text' field.<br />
#Select an image to display if you want to add a picture to the question. For the student, it appears immediately above the question text.<br />
#Set the 'default question grade' (i.e. the maximum number of marks for this question).<br />
#Set the 'Penalty factor' (see [[Embedded_Answers_%28Cloze%29_question_type#Penalty_factor|Penalty factor]] below).<br />
#If you wish, add general feedback. This is text that appears to the student after he/she has answered the question.<br />
#The editor has been modified and allows you to test if your syntax is good. The different questions elements decoded will be displayed and syntax errors pinpoint. However, it cannot check if the question decoded is two questions in one because of an error syntax (for example ~}, =~, etc.).<br />
#Click Save changes to add the question to the category.<br />
<br />
=== Penalty factor ===<br />
<br />
The 'penalty factor' only applies when the question is used in a quiz using adaptive mode - i.e. where the student is allowed multiple attempts at a question even within the same attempt at the quiz. If the penalty factor is more than 0, then the student will lose that proportion of the '''maximum''' grade upon each successive attempt. For example, if the default question grade is 10, and the penalty factor is 0.2, then each successive attempt after the first one will incur a penalty of 0.2 x 10 = 2 points. The grading for the cloze question applies the penalty to each subpart of the question as a whole. For example, if you have three fill in the blanks each worth 1 point each, then the penalty will only be incurred on the incorrect parts, not the questions as a whole.<br />
<br />
==Question rendering==<br />
<br />
The question answer entry space or INPUT HTML ELEMENT (for Short Answer and Numerical question types) and the dropdown list or SELECT HTML ELEMENT (for multichoice) are normally displayed in-line with the text.<br />
<br />
The size of the entry space or INPUT HTML ELEMENT ( Short and Numerical) will be adjustable to the length of the longest answer (good or bad) + a random number (0 to 15% total length).([[User:Pierre Pichet|Pierre Pichet]] 15:37, 26 January 2008 (CST))<br />
<br />
The size will adjust to the length of the student response when displayed in the grading and feedback process.<br />
<br />
The size of the dropdown list or SELECT HTML ELEMENT (multichoice) adjusts itself automatically to the longest answer.<br />
<br />
==Format==<br />
<br />
Questions consist of a passage of text (in Moodle format) that has various sub-questions embedded within it, including<br />
<br />
* short answers (SHORTANSWER or SA or MW), case is unimportant,<br />
* short answers (SHORTANSWER_C or SAC or MWC), case must match,<br />
* numerical answers (NUMERICAL or NM),<br />
* multiple choice (MULTICHOICE or MC), represented as a dropdown menu in-line in the text,<br />
* multiple choice (MULTICHOICE_V or MCV), represented as a vertical column of radio buttons, or<br />
* multiple choice (MULTICHOICE_H or MCH), represented as a horizontal row of radio-buttons,<br />
* multiple choice (MULTIRESPONSE or MR), represented as a vertical row of checkboxes<br />
* multiple choice (MULTIRESPONSE_H or MRH), represented as a horizontal row of checkboxes<br />
===Shuffle sub questions===<br />
When the quiz question behavior shuffle option is set to '''YES''', the following special multiple choice sub-questions elements will be shuffled:<br />
* multiple choice (MULTICHOICE_S or MCS), represented as a dropdown menu in-line in the text,<br />
* multiple choice (MULTICHOICE_VS or MCVS), represented as a vertical column of radio buttons, or<br />
* multiple choice (MULTICHOICE_HS or MCHS), represented as a horizontal row of radio-buttons.<br />
* multiple choice (MULTIRESPONSE_S or MRS), represented as a vertical row of checkboxes<br />
* multiple choice (MULTIRESPONSE_HS or MRHS), represented as a horizontal row of checkboxes<br />
<br />
{{Note|MCS, MCVS, MCHS are new (Moodle 3.0) Cloze subquestion types with shuffling of answers. See MDL-38214.}}<br />
<br />
The structure of each cloze sub-question is identical:<br />
:'''{''' start the cloze sub-question with a bracket (AltGr+7)<br />
:'''1''' define a grade for each cloze by a number (optional). This used for calculation of question grading.<br />
:''':SHORTANSWER:''' define the type of cloze sub-question. Definition is bounded by ':'. <br />
:'''~''' is a seperator between answer options<br />
:'''=''' marks a correct answer<br />
:'''#''' marks the beginning of an (optional) feedback message<br />
:'''}''' close the cloze sub-question at the end with a bracket (AltGr+0)<br />
<br />
Now a very simple example:<br />
<pre><br />
{1:SHORTANSWER:=Berlin} is the capital of Germany.<br />
</pre><br />
<br />
For full details of the format for embedded-answers questions, see the [[Embedded_Answers_%28Cloze%29_question_type#Detailed_syntax_explanations|detailed syntax explanation]] below.<br />
<br />
NB: Be careful when copying a cloze type question into the WYSIWYG HTML editor, as line breaks tend to get added, which destroys the question.<br />
<br />
If the correct answer contains } # ~ / " or \ you will have to escape them by putting a \ in front of each such character. But [[https://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=275299 this is tricky]]. The { shouldn't be escaped, this can be vital in getting TeX expressions to work. In the feedback ~ and } must be escaped otherwise it will be interpreted as ''the next answer'' or ''end of the short answer section'' respectively. Quotation signs: " can lead to trouble anyhow in both places. Use the HTML entity: & quot; (without the space between ''&'' and ''quot;''). If you want to have Mathematical symbols there can be problems with the \ used in TeX expressions. One alternative can be to use [[unicode]] characters. <br />
<br />
See the notes further down about numerical embedded question!<br />
<br />
===Examples===<br />
<br />
====Example 1====<br />
The following text creates a simple embedded-answers question:<br />
<br />
Match the following cities with the correct state:<br />
* San Francisco: {1:MULTICHOICE:=California#OK~Arizona#Wrong}<br />
* Tucson: {1:MULTICHOICE:California#Wrong~%100%Arizona#OK}<br />
* Los Angeles: {1:MULTICHOICE:=California#OK~Arizona#Wrong}<br />
* Phoenix: {1:MULTICHOICE:%0%California#Wrong~=Arizona#OK}<br />
The capital of France is {1:SHORTANSWER:%100%Paris#Congratulations!<br />
~%50%Marseille#No, that is the second largest city in France (after<br />
Paris).~*#Wrong answer. The capital of France is Paris, of course.}.<br />
<br />
And the result will be:<br />
<br />
[[Image:Cloze.gif|Cloze question type]] <br />
<br />
====Example 2====<br />
<div style="padding: 1em;border: 1px dashed #FFB53A;color: black;background-color: #f9f9f9;font-family: monospace;font-size:1.2em;"><br />
This question consists of some text with an answer embedded right here {1:MULTICHOICE:Wrong answer#Feedback for this wrong answer~Another wrong answer#Feedback for the other wrong answer~=Correct answer#Feedback for correct answer~%50%Answer that gives half the credit#Feedback for half credit answer}<br />
<br />
and right after that you will have to deal with this short answer {1:SHORTANSWER:Wrong answer#Feedback for this wrong answer~=Correct answer#Feedback for correct answer~%50%Answer that gives half the credit#Feedback for half credit answer}<br />
<br />
and finally we have a floating point number {2:NUMERICAL:=23.8:0.1#Feedback for correct answer 23.8~%50%23.8:2#Feedback for half credit answer in the nearby region of the correct answer}.<br />
<br />
The multichoice question can also be shown in the vertical display of the standard moodle multiple choice.<br />
{2:MCV:1. Wrong answer#Feedback for this wrong answer~2. Another wrong answer#Feedback for the other wrong answer~=3. Correct answer#Feedback for correct answer~%50%4. Answer that gives half the credit#Feedback for half credit answer}<br />
<br />
Or in an horizontal display that is included here in a table<br />
{2:MCH:a. Wrong answer#Feedback for this wrong answer~b. Another wrong answer#Feedback for the other wrong answer~=c. Correct answer#Feedback for correct answer~%50%d. Answer that gives half the credit#Feedback for half credit answer}<br />
<br />
A shortanswer question where case must match. Write moodle in upper case letters {1:SHORTANSWER_C:moodle#Feedback for moodle in lower case ~=MOODLE#Feedback for MOODLE in upper case ~%50%Moodle#Feedback for only first letter in upper case}<br />
<br />
Note that addresses like www.moodle.org and smileys :-) all work as normal:<br />
<br />
a) How good is this? {:MULTICHOICE:=Yes#Correct~No#We have a different opinion}<br />
<br />
b) What grade would you give it? {3:NUMERICAL:=3:2}<br />
</div><br />
[[Image:Cloze example.png]]<br />
<br />
Some things to note:<br />
* The individual embedded answers are represented by the code in braces {}.<br />
* The number at the start is the 'weight', so in this case each answer contributes an equal share of the overall grade.<br />
* The correct option in each case is preceded either by an = sign or by %100%. <br />
* The text appearing after the # that follows each option is the feedback that the student will see if they choose that option.<br />
* If the student enters 'Marseille' in the final example, they score 50% of the total grade.<br />
* The asterisk * preceding the "Wrong answer" feedback in the final example means that the student will see this feedback if they enter anything other than "Paris" or "Marseille".<br />
* For multiple choice vertical or horizontal rendering there is no automatic numbering, though can added at each answer.<br />
<br />
==Detailed syntax explanations==<br />
# All question items within a cloze-type question are coded inside curled braces { }.<br />
# The number which appears between the opening brace and the colon {1: is the weighting of that item; if it is set at 1 for all the items, it needs not be specified, so you can have {:.<br />
# After the colon we have the item question type: MULTICHOICE, SHORTANSWER, NUMERICAL.<br />
# '''NOTE'''.- If you have installed the [https://moodle.org/plugins/qtype_regexp REGEXP question type plugin] you can also use the REGEXP question type; see [https://docs.moodle.org/36/en/Regular_Expression_Short-Answer_question_type#Inserting_RegExp_sub-questions_in_Cloze_type_questions instructions here].<br />
# The syntax for MULTICHOICE and SHORTANSWER is the same; the only difference is in the displaying of the item to the student.<br />
# The order of the various answers is indifferent (except if you want a catch-all for wrong answers, see #13 below).<br />
# A correct answer is preceded with the equal sign = or a percentage (usually %100%) - '''Note''': [[Talk:Embedded_Answers_(Cloze)_question_type| The equal sign (=) doesn't seem to work with SHORTANSWER.]]<br />
# A wrong answer is preceded with nothing or a percentage (usually %0%)but you can even use negative points by preceding with ~%-25% [not before Moodle 2.0]).<br />
# You can allocate some points between 0 and 100 to some answers, if you put the appropriate percentage.<br />
# All answers except the first one are separated from one another by the tilde ~ sign.<br />
# Answers can be followed by an optional feedback message, preceded with the # sign; if there is no feedback message, the # sign can be present or absent, it does not matter.<br />
# Note that the feedback message and the correct answer are displayed in a small popup window (if and when the correct and or feedback have been declared accessible to the students in the Quiz settings) upon mouse hovering. The popup window has a title "feedback" and you can use HTML tags to format your feedback. In some browsers (For example IE5.5) the form fields can cover part of the feedback windows. It can help to not have the formfields for the answers too close to each other.<br />
# In the SHORTANSWER type you may want to put a catch-all (wrong) answer in order to send a "wrong, try again" feedback; you can do this by inserting an asterisk '''*''' as '''the very last expected answer''' in your formula.<br />
# You should not have sequences such as %#, %~, %}, =#, =%, =}, ~#, ~% and ~} in the answer because you should not have empty answers or empty answer options. These two character sequences constitute error syntaxes, where the second character is interpreted as if it were escaped<sup>(why?)</sup>, and gives unexpected results: the answer is decoded as one instead of two or more.<br />
<br />
==Numerical Cloze questions== <br />
<br />
From the student perspective, a numerical Cloze question looks just like a short-answer question or ''fill in the blanks''.<br />
<br />
The difference is that numerical answers are allowed to have an accepted error. This allows a continuous range of answers to be set. You can also express your answer in some different numerical formats. 23.4 23,4 (some countries use , as a decimal separator) and 2.34E+1 (meaning 2.34*10^1) would be interpreted as the same.<br />
<br />
=== False positives ===<br />
<br />
'''Note:''' the following examples of false positives do '''not''' apply to Moodle 1.8+, where you cannot use percentages or fractions as the answers in a numerical Cloze test; Moodle will generate an error if you try to save such a question. However the following may be relevant for earlier versions of Moodle.<br />
<br />
More examples: <br />
0.5 accepts .5 0.5 ,5 0,5 0.500 5e-1 5E-1 but not 1/2 50% <br />
50% accepts 50% 50.0% 5E1% 50/100 even '''50/1000 50''' but not 500/1000 0.5 <br />
1/2 accepts 1/2 '''1/3 1twenty''' but not 2/4 0.5 0,5 3/6 50% ½ <br />
½ accepts ½ <br />
HALF doesn't even accept HALF (maybe '''0'''?) <br />
<br />
If you want to accept several variants you can have them in the same {} but '''be careful, notice the "false positives" in bold'''!<br />
<br />
===Syntax for numerical Cloze questions===<br />
<br />
The format of a NUMERICAL Cloze question is similar to that of the other Cloze types and they can be mixed in the same question. As with other Cloze tests, you write your question or incomplete text, and add the Cloze code at the point where the student is supposed to enter their numerical answer.<br />
<br />
An example of the syntax used is shown below:<br />
<br />
'''Note: ''' It is preferable to write the code in 'source code' mode. The WSIWYG editor can insert linebreaks that make the question not function. The linebreak in the example box below is for readability only! A problem with these questions is the readability of the code! :( <br />
<br />
{2:NUMERICAL:=23.8:0.1#Feedback for correct answer 23.8 <br />
~%50%23.8:2#Feedback for ½credit near correct answer}. <br />
<br />
In this example:<br />
* 2: is the question point weight, which means that this question has twice the weight in the final point(s) for this question as other partial answers with weight 1 (or no declared weight - you can start with {: for the default weight 1) in the same question.<br />
* NUMERICAL: says what kind of question it is. It must be in CAPS. <br />
* =23.8:0.1 = or %100% means correct if the answer is 23.8 with an accepted error of 0.1, then any number between 23.7 and 23.9 will be accepted as correct. (In the GIFT numerical question one can express an interval like this 13..15 or 14:1 but in Cloze only 14:1 works.) <br />
* #Feedback for correct answer 23.8 is preceded by #<br />
* ~%50%23.8:2 ~ is the separator for answer alternatives %50% means this answer would get 50% of the score that the more precise answer had gotten. Because the tolerance here is 2, 21.8 to 25.8 would get this point and feedback.<br />
<br />
The feedback (which is seen within a popup window when the user hovers over the answer space) is formattable with HTML tags. For example, if you want an exponent, surround it with superscript tags: &lt;sup&gt; &lt;/sup&gt;. You can even include pictures in the feedback popup, but you must clean out all " characters and save while still in source code mode (not WYSIWYG). So, this works in feedback popup:<br />
#See this picture:&lt;br&gt;&lt;img src=Something.gif />} <br />
but not this:<br />
#See this picture:&lt;br&gt;&lt;img src="Something.gif" />} <br />
<br />
(ALGEBRA and TEX filters don't work in the feedback popups, but they can be very useful in the question writing for math/science expressions). But you can use [[Unicode]] characters. <br />
<br />
If you want to give feedback for any answer that didn't fit the intervals you already have specified feedback for, add some BIG general intervals, like for positive answers (if they aren't bigger than 20000 you could add: <br />
~%0%10000.0001:10000#Feedback for unspecified not_right answers} <br />
This would give feedback for anything from 0.0001 to 20000.0001 (that hadn't already gotten feedback). I didn't want to include 0 since that special case as well as negative ought to have specific reactions. <br />
~%0%0#Hey! It can't be zero <br />
~%0%-10000.0001:10000#We just want the size here, <br />
so a negative value is not what we want} <br />
<br />
Numerical questions could, before version 1.7, also have case-insensitive non-numerical answers. This is useful whenever the answer for a numerical question is something like +inf, -inf, NaN etc.<br />
==Importing CLOZE questions==<br />
If you try importing directly as CLOZE this text:<br />
<pre><br />
Single line per question! Match the following cities with the correct state:<br />
* San Francisco: {1:MULTICHOICE:=California#OK~Arizona#Wrong}<br />
* Tucson: {1:MULTICHOICE:California#Wrong~%100%Arizona#OK}<br />
* Los Angeles: {1:MULTICHOICE:=California#OK~Arizona#Wrong}<br />
* Phoenix: {1:MULTICHOICE:%0%California#Wrong~=Arizona#OK}<br />
<br />
The capital of France is {1:SHORTANSWER:%100%Paris#Congratulations!~%50%Marseille#No, that is the second largest city in France (after Paris).~*#Wrong answer. The capital of France is Paris, of course.}.<br />
<br />
23+ 0.8 = {2:NUMERICAL:=23.8:0.1#Feedback for correct answer 23.8 ~%50%23.8:2#Feedback for ½credit near correct answer}. </pre><br />
<br />
You would get all three questions as different parts of '''ONE question'''. (NOTE see that there are no linebreaks between the { } !)<br />
<br />
Multiple CLOZE questions can be imported using the XML format:<br />
<pre><br />
<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?><br />
<quiz><br />
<br />
<!-- question: 1 --><br />
<question type="cloze"><br />
<name><text>Book Test #1</text><br />
</name><br />
<questiontext><br />
<text><![CDATA[..............]]></text><br />
</questiontext><br />
<generalfeedback><br />
<text></text><br />
</generalfeedback><br />
<shuffleanswers>0</shuffleanswers><br />
</question><br />
<br />
<!-- question: 2 --><br />
<question type="cloze"><br />
<name><text>Book Test #2</text><br />
</name><br />
<questiontext><br />
<text><![CDATA[............]]></text><br />
</questiontext><br />
<generalfeedback><br />
<text></text><br />
</generalfeedback><br />
<shuffleanswers>0</shuffleanswers><br />
</question><br />
<br />
</quiz><br />
</pre><br />
You would put the question text including CLOZE code in the ....... spaces.<br />
<br />
==Online Cloze Question generator==<br />
* There is a website to generate CLOZE quizzes for Moodle (1.9 and 2.x and 3.x versions) and/or to try out the CLOZE editor integration for Moodle.<br />
* This editor was built at the Chair of Applied English Linguistics at Universitaet Tuebingen, Germany, by Andreas Glombitza (andiglombitza(at)googlemail.com) and Achim Skuta (achim.skuta(at)googlemail.com).<br />
* The authors are currently maintaining this software and webservice as a private project.<br />
<br />
Website: [http://projects.ael.uni-tuebingen.de/quiz/htmlarea/index.php http://projects.ael.uni-tuebingen.de/quiz/htmlarea/index.php]<br />
<br />
==Cloze editor plugin for TinyMCE==<br />
* You can download a [https://moodle.org/plugins/view.php?plugin=other_cloze Moodle plugin from the Moodle plugins database] that will let you create these questions from a graphical interface within your Moodle site. There are versions available for Moodle 1.9, 2.x and 3.x.<br />
<br />
==Cloze editor plugin for Atto==<br />
This [[Cloze editor for Atto|new plugin for Moodle 3.1+]] was developed by Daniel Thies and is available for download and install from the Moodle plugins database..<br />
<br />
==Question with 1 media (e.g. audio) and several subquestions==<br />
As described in [https://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=376874 this forum post], you can easily make a question where the student inspect a media (e.g. an audio file) and then has to answer several small multiple choice questions. The example below is from a Moodle 3.5.2+ site using the new Record audio tool in the Atto editor. The Record video tool will also let you add video as part of the question, if you want to.<br />
<br />
[[File:CLOZE question with 1 audio and 3 sub-questions.png|400px]]<br />
<br />
== Questions with student notes and feedback for teacher==<br />
You can easily make one/many/all question(s) with an optional field for student notes and/or feedback for the teacher, as requested in [https://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=353587 this forum thread]. Note that only the first MULTICHOICE question is marked, and the two optional fields do not score positive nor negative points:<br />
<br />
[[File:CLOZE question with student comment and teacher feedback.png]]<br />
<br />
The full question for the above example is:<br />
<br />
Which of the following options is the right answer ?<br />
{1:MULTICHOICE_VS:~A wrong answer~Another wrong answer~Yet another wrong answer~%100%This is the only right answer}<br />
Optionally:Write a personal note: {0:SHORTANSWER:~%0%I want to have a longer input box for the note.~%100%*}<br />
Optionally:Send feedback to teacher:{0:SHORTANSWER:~%0%I want to have a longer input box for the feedback.~%100%*}<br />
<br />
<br />
==See also==<br />
* See the [http://projects.ael.uni-tuebingen.de/quiz/htmlarea/index.php online Cloze question generator].<br />
* Download the newest version of the [[Cloze editor for TinyMCE]] for Moodle 1.9 and for Moodle 2.0 to 3.3 from [https://moodle.org/plugins/view.php?plugin=tinymce_clozeeditor the Moodle plugins database]<br />
* Easily edit embedded answer questions with the additional plugin [[Cloze editor for Atto]] for Moodle 2.7+<br />
<br />
This information was drawn from:<br />
*Using Moodle [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=36521 Is there a guide to using the cloze format?] forum discussion<br />
*Using Moodle [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=36430&parent=170308 Cloze-type question syntax] forum post<br />
<br />
[[Category:Language teaching]]<br />
<br />
[[de:Fragetyp Lückentext (Cloze)]]<br />
[[es:Tipo de Pregunta con respuestas incrustadas (Cloze)]]<br />
[[fr:Question Cloze à réponses intégrées]]<br />
[[ja: 穴埋め問題 ( Cloze ) タイプ]]<br />
[[zh:填空題(克漏字)]]</div>Dbauer-etshttps://docs.moodle.org/36/en/index.php?title=Multiple_Choice_question_type&diff=133189Multiple Choice question type2019-03-02T15:38:35Z<p>Dbauer-ets: /* Single-answer questions */</p>
<hr />
<div>{{Questions}}<br />
Moodle provides teachers with a lot of flexibility when creating this common question type. You can create single-answer and multiple-answer questions, include pictures, sound or other media in the question and/or answer options (by inserting HTML) and weight individual answers. Remember that [[Lesson_module#Multiple_choice|Lesson module questions]] behave differently.<br />
<br />
There are two types of multiple choice questions - single answer and multiple answer.<br />
<br />
<br />
===Single-answer questions===<br />
These questions allow one and only one answer to be chosen by providing radio buttons next to the answers. You can specify negative or non-negative marks for each answer, usually zero marks for wrong answers, maximum marks for correct answers and partial marks for partially correct answers. A single-answer Multiple Choice question can result in a negative grade if its behaviour is set to Deferred feedback, but not other modes (Adaptive mode, Interactive with multiple tries, etc.)<sup>[https://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=383245#p1544671 ref]</sup><br />
<br />
===Multiple-answer questions===<br />
The teacher can select "multiple answers are allowed" in a Multiple Choice question type. "Multiple answers" questions types in a quiz allow one or more answers to be chosen by providing check boxes next to the answers. Each answer may carry a positive or negative grade, so that choosing ALL the options will not necessarily result in good grade. If the total grade is negative then the total grade for this question will be zero.<br />
<br />
Feedback can be associated either with specific answers, or with the question as a whole.<br />
<br />
==Question set-up==<br />
<br />
#Select the question category<br />
#Give the question a descriptive name. You'll use the name to track your questions later so "Question 1" isn't a good idea. The name will be used in the question lists on the quiz editing page or in the lesson as a page title. It will not be shown to the students, so you can choose any name that makes sense to you and possibly other teachers.<br />
#Create the question text. If you're using the HTML Editor, you can format the question just like a word processing document.<br />
#Select an image to display if you want to add a picture to the question. The available images are those you have uploaded to the '''main''' Moodle files area (they cannot be in folders). For the student, the image appears immediately after the question text and before the answer options.<br />
#*Alternatively, if you used the HTML editor to create the question text, you can click the image icon. This will pop up the Insert Image window. You can choose to upload an image into your files area from this window, or you can add the URL of an image on the web. If you add a file to your files area, click the name of the file after you upload it to insert the link into the URL text entry at the top of the screen. Then click OK.<br />
#Set the 'default question grade' (i.e. the maximum number of marks for this question).<br />
#Set the 'Penalty factor' (see [[Multiple_Choice_question_type#Penalty_factor|Penalty factor]] below).<br />
#If you wish, add general feedback. This is text that appears to the student after he/she has answered the question.<br />
#Choose whether students can only select one answer or multiple answers<br />
#Choose whether to shuffle the answer options<br />
#Write your first answer in the Choice 1 text field. Inserting HTML into this area also makes it possible to add an image or a sound file.<br />
#Select a grade percentage for the answer. This is the percentage of the total points for the question that selecting this response is worth. You can select negative percentages as well as positive percentages. So, selecting a correct response in a multiple answer question may give you 50% of the possible points, while selecting a wrong answer may take away 10%. Note that in a multiple-answer question, the positive grades must add up to at least 100%.<br />
#*Be aware that if you allow multiple answers and have more than a single correct choice, and do not use a negative grade percentage for wrong answers, the students can simply tick all choices and get the full grade.<br />
#If you wish, you can add feedback for each response. It may be a bit more work, but it’s good practice to tell the students why each answer is right or wrong using the feedback area. If students know why an answer is right or wrong, they can analyse their own thinking and begin to understand why an answer is correct. Your feedback will only be displayed if you select Show Feedback in the quiz body options.<br />
#Fill in the rest of the response choices in the rest of the form. Any unused areas will be ignored.<br />
#Fill in the [[Multiple_Choice_question_type#Overall_feedback|overall feedback]] fields if you wish.<br />
#Select the "Save Changes" button at the bottom of the screen.<br />
<br />
=== Penalty factor ===<br />
<br />
The 'penalty factor' only applies when the question is used in a quiz using adaptive mode - i.e. where the student is allowed multiple attempts at a question even within the same attempt at the quiz. If the penalty factor is more than 0, then the student will lose that proportion of the '''maximum''' grade upon each successive attempt. For example, if the default question grade is 10, and the penalty factor is 0.2, then each successive attempt after the first one will incur a penalty of 0.2 x 10 = 2 points.<br />
<br />
==General feedback==<br />
General feedback is some text that gets shown to the student after they have attempted the question. Unlike answer feedbacks, which depend on the question type and what response the student gave, the same general feedback text is shown to all students.<br />
<br />
You can control when general feedback is shown to students using the "Review options" check-boxes on the quiz editing form.<br />
<br />
You can use the general feedback to give students some background to what knowledge the question was testing. Or to give them a link to more information they can use if they did not understand the questions.<br />
<br />
==Combined feedback==<br />
The option ''Combined feedback'' for correct/partially correct/incorrect responses is particularly useful for multiple-response questions, where it is difficult to control what feedback students see just using the answer-specific feedback.<br />
<br />
So, when the student submits the question, they will see the answer-specific feedback next to the option(s) they selected, the combined feedback in a box below the options, and if applicable, the general feedback underneath everything else.<br />
<br />
==Site administration settings==<br />
<br />
An administrator can specify the defaults for multiple choice settings via the settings link in 'Manage question types' in the Site administration.<br />
<br />
==Lesson module multiple choice questions==<br />
This page was created for the Quiz module. A [[Lesson_module#Multiple_choice|Lesson Multiple Choice]] or [[Multianswer question type]] looks the same to the student but is very different in the teacher's edit mode. A lesson question offers the teacher the chance to both grade a student's answer, give feedback and also to send the student to another specific page based upon the student's choice.<br />
<br />
There are other differences. Quiz has a more robust scoring system that is similar to "Custom Scoring" in the Lesson module. Even with custom scoring turned on, Lesson will not give percentage credit of a question's score for an answer. And students must select all the correct answers to receive any credit for the multianswer question in the Lesson module.<br />
<br />
==All-or-nothing multiple choice question type (plugin)==<br />
The [[All or nothing multiple choice question type]] plugin is adapted from the existing multichoice question. The main difference from the standard Moodle multiple choice question type is in the way that grading works.<br />
<br />
The teacher editing interface is slightly modified as when creating the question, the teacher just indicates which choices are correct.<br />
In an all-or-nothing multiple choice question, a respondent can choose one or more answers. If the chosen answers correspond exactly to the correct choices defined in the question, the respondent gets 100%. If he/she chooses any incorrect choices or does not select all of the correct choices, the grade is 0%.<br />
<br />
Before using the all-or-nothing question type, teachers must really think if this grading is what they want.<br />
<br />
==Calculated multichoice question type==<br />
The [[Calculated multichoice question type]] are like multiple choice questions with the additonal property that the elements to select can include formula results from numeric values that are selected randomly from a set when the quiz is taken. They use the same wildcards than Calculated questions and their wildcards can be shared with other Calculated multichoice or regular Calculated questions.<br />
<br />
The main difference is that the formula is included in the answer choice as {=...}.<br />
<br />
==Eliminator==<br />
<br />
Some teachers say that young students may be less successful in Moodle multiple-choice quizzes than in multiple-choice tests on paper. This would be largely due to the fact that students tend to cross out the wrong answers, which they can not do with Moodle's multiple choice quizzes.<br />
<br />
An "eliminator" is a way of graying out or crossing out choices to help students keep the choice they want. Moodle's core Multiple Choice question does not yet include such an eliminator. However, the teacher can easily create an eliminator by adding HTML code to the text of the choices.<br />
<br />
<p style="margin-bottom:5px;">For a gray out eliminator, add the following HTML code to the text of each choice:</p><br />
&lt;div style="display:inline-block;"><br />
&lt;input type="radio" id="Eliminator" style="display:none;"><br />
&lt;label for="Eliminator"><br />
&lt;span onclick="if(this.style.opacity==0.3){this.style.opacity=1;}else{this.style.opacity=0.3;}" style="opacity: 1;"><br />
<i>Choice text</i><br />
&lt;/span><br />
&lt;/label><br />
&lt;/div><br />
<p style="margin:0;"></p><br />
where <i><pre>Choice text</pre></i> is the actual text for each choice.<br />
<p style="margin-top:2px;">The workaround works as follows:</p><br />
*The student clicks on the <b>text</b> of the choices to toggle: black / gray out. The gray out color reminds the student that these choices are eliminated.<br />
*The student clicks on the <b>radio buttons</b> to select the answer.<br />
<br />
Examples and variations (e.g. line-through) of this workaround are presented [https://moodleformulas.org/course/view.php?id=38&section=7 here].<br />
<br />
==See also==<br />
<br />
*[[Quizventure activity]] a 'space invaders'-like Moodle 2.7+ game using multiple choice questions<br />
* [https://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=368129 Arabic choices not written in Arabic language]<br />
<br />
[[ja:多肢選択問題タイプ]]<br />
[[fr:Question à choix multiple]]<br />
[[ca:Tipus_de_pregunta_de_opcions_múltiples]]<br />
[[de:Fragetyp Multiple-Choice]]<br />
[[es:Tipo de Pregunta de Opción Múltiple]]</div>Dbauer-etshttps://docs.moodle.org/36/en/index.php?title=Multiple_Choice_question_type&diff=133188Multiple Choice question type2019-03-02T15:05:37Z<p>Dbauer-ets: /* Single-answer questions */</p>
<hr />
<div>{{Questions}}<br />
Moodle provides teachers with a lot of flexibility when creating this common question type. You can create single-answer and multiple-answer questions, include pictures, sound or other media in the question and/or answer options (by inserting HTML) and weight individual answers. Remember that [[Lesson_module#Multiple_choice|Lesson module questions]] behave differently.<br />
<br />
There are two types of multiple choice questions - single answer and multiple answer.<br />
<br />
<br />
===Single-answer questions===<br />
These questions allow one and only one answer to be chosen by providing radio buttons next to the answers. You can specify negative or non-negative marks for each answer, usually zero marks for wrong answers, maximum marks for correct answers and partial marks for partially correct answers. A single-answer Multiple Choice question can result in a negative grade if its behaviour is set to Deferred feedback, but not other modes (Adaptive mode, Interactive with multiple tries, etc.)<sup>[https://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=383245 ref]</sup><br />
<br />
===Multiple-answer questions===<br />
The teacher can select "multiple answers are allowed" in a Multiple Choice question type. "Multiple answers" questions types in a quiz allow one or more answers to be chosen by providing check boxes next to the answers. Each answer may carry a positive or negative grade, so that choosing ALL the options will not necessarily result in good grade. If the total grade is negative then the total grade for this question will be zero.<br />
<br />
Feedback can be associated either with specific answers, or with the question as a whole.<br />
<br />
==Question set-up==<br />
<br />
#Select the question category<br />
#Give the question a descriptive name. You'll use the name to track your questions later so "Question 1" isn't a good idea. The name will be used in the question lists on the quiz editing page or in the lesson as a page title. It will not be shown to the students, so you can choose any name that makes sense to you and possibly other teachers.<br />
#Create the question text. If you're using the HTML Editor, you can format the question just like a word processing document.<br />
#Select an image to display if you want to add a picture to the question. The available images are those you have uploaded to the '''main''' Moodle files area (they cannot be in folders). For the student, the image appears immediately after the question text and before the answer options.<br />
#*Alternatively, if you used the HTML editor to create the question text, you can click the image icon. This will pop up the Insert Image window. You can choose to upload an image into your files area from this window, or you can add the URL of an image on the web. If you add a file to your files area, click the name of the file after you upload it to insert the link into the URL text entry at the top of the screen. Then click OK.<br />
#Set the 'default question grade' (i.e. the maximum number of marks for this question).<br />
#Set the 'Penalty factor' (see [[Multiple_Choice_question_type#Penalty_factor|Penalty factor]] below).<br />
#If you wish, add general feedback. This is text that appears to the student after he/she has answered the question.<br />
#Choose whether students can only select one answer or multiple answers<br />
#Choose whether to shuffle the answer options<br />
#Write your first answer in the Choice 1 text field. Inserting HTML into this area also makes it possible to add an image or a sound file.<br />
#Select a grade percentage for the answer. This is the percentage of the total points for the question that selecting this response is worth. You can select negative percentages as well as positive percentages. So, selecting a correct response in a multiple answer question may give you 50% of the possible points, while selecting a wrong answer may take away 10%. Note that in a multiple-answer question, the positive grades must add up to at least 100%.<br />
#*Be aware that if you allow multiple answers and have more than a single correct choice, and do not use a negative grade percentage for wrong answers, the students can simply tick all choices and get the full grade.<br />
#If you wish, you can add feedback for each response. It may be a bit more work, but it’s good practice to tell the students why each answer is right or wrong using the feedback area. If students know why an answer is right or wrong, they can analyse their own thinking and begin to understand why an answer is correct. Your feedback will only be displayed if you select Show Feedback in the quiz body options.<br />
#Fill in the rest of the response choices in the rest of the form. Any unused areas will be ignored.<br />
#Fill in the [[Multiple_Choice_question_type#Overall_feedback|overall feedback]] fields if you wish.<br />
#Select the "Save Changes" button at the bottom of the screen.<br />
<br />
=== Penalty factor ===<br />
<br />
The 'penalty factor' only applies when the question is used in a quiz using adaptive mode - i.e. where the student is allowed multiple attempts at a question even within the same attempt at the quiz. If the penalty factor is more than 0, then the student will lose that proportion of the '''maximum''' grade upon each successive attempt. For example, if the default question grade is 10, and the penalty factor is 0.2, then each successive attempt after the first one will incur a penalty of 0.2 x 10 = 2 points.<br />
<br />
==General feedback==<br />
General feedback is some text that gets shown to the student after they have attempted the question. Unlike answer feedbacks, which depend on the question type and what response the student gave, the same general feedback text is shown to all students.<br />
<br />
You can control when general feedback is shown to students using the "Review options" check-boxes on the quiz editing form.<br />
<br />
You can use the general feedback to give students some background to what knowledge the question was testing. Or to give them a link to more information they can use if they did not understand the questions.<br />
<br />
==Combined feedback==<br />
The option ''Combined feedback'' for correct/partially correct/incorrect responses is particularly useful for multiple-response questions, where it is difficult to control what feedback students see just using the answer-specific feedback.<br />
<br />
So, when the student submits the question, they will see the answer-specific feedback next to the option(s) they selected, the combined feedback in a box below the options, and if applicable, the general feedback underneath everything else.<br />
<br />
==Site administration settings==<br />
<br />
An administrator can specify the defaults for multiple choice settings via the settings link in 'Manage question types' in the Site administration.<br />
<br />
==Lesson module multiple choice questions==<br />
This page was created for the Quiz module. A [[Lesson_module#Multiple_choice|Lesson Multiple Choice]] or [[Multianswer question type]] looks the same to the student but is very different in the teacher's edit mode. A lesson question offers the teacher the chance to both grade a student's answer, give feedback and also to send the student to another specific page based upon the student's choice.<br />
<br />
There are other differences. Quiz has a more robust scoring system that is similar to "Custom Scoring" in the Lesson module. Even with custom scoring turned on, Lesson will not give percentage credit of a question's score for an answer. And students must select all the correct answers to receive any credit for the multianswer question in the Lesson module.<br />
<br />
==All-or-nothing multiple choice question type (plugin)==<br />
The [[All or nothing multiple choice question type]] plugin is adapted from the existing multichoice question. The main difference from the standard Moodle multiple choice question type is in the way that grading works.<br />
<br />
The teacher editing interface is slightly modified as when creating the question, the teacher just indicates which choices are correct.<br />
In an all-or-nothing multiple choice question, a respondent can choose one or more answers. If the chosen answers correspond exactly to the correct choices defined in the question, the respondent gets 100%. If he/she chooses any incorrect choices or does not select all of the correct choices, the grade is 0%.<br />
<br />
Before using the all-or-nothing question type, teachers must really think if this grading is what they want.<br />
<br />
==Calculated multichoice question type==<br />
The [[Calculated multichoice question type]] are like multiple choice questions with the additonal property that the elements to select can include formula results from numeric values that are selected randomly from a set when the quiz is taken. They use the same wildcards than Calculated questions and their wildcards can be shared with other Calculated multichoice or regular Calculated questions.<br />
<br />
The main difference is that the formula is included in the answer choice as {=...}.<br />
<br />
==Eliminator==<br />
<br />
Some teachers say that young students may be less successful in Moodle multiple-choice quizzes than in multiple-choice tests on paper. This would be largely due to the fact that students tend to cross out the wrong answers, which they can not do with Moodle's multiple choice quizzes.<br />
<br />
An "eliminator" is a way of graying out or crossing out choices to help students keep the choice they want. Moodle's core Multiple Choice question does not yet include such an eliminator. However, the teacher can easily create an eliminator by adding HTML code to the text of the choices.<br />
<br />
<p style="margin-bottom:5px;">For a gray out eliminator, add the following HTML code to the text of each choice:</p><br />
&lt;div style="display:inline-block;"><br />
&lt;input type="radio" id="Eliminator" style="display:none;"><br />
&lt;label for="Eliminator"><br />
&lt;span onclick="if(this.style.opacity==0.3){this.style.opacity=1;}else{this.style.opacity=0.3;}" style="opacity: 1;"><br />
<i>Choice text</i><br />
&lt;/span><br />
&lt;/label><br />
&lt;/div><br />
<p style="margin:0;"></p><br />
where <i><pre>Choice text</pre></i> is the actual text for each choice.<br />
<p style="margin-top:2px;">The workaround works as follows:</p><br />
*The student clicks on the <b>text</b> of the choices to toggle: black / gray out. The gray out color reminds the student that these choices are eliminated.<br />
*The student clicks on the <b>radio buttons</b> to select the answer.<br />
<br />
Examples and variations (e.g. line-through) of this workaround are presented [https://moodleformulas.org/course/view.php?id=38&section=7 here].<br />
<br />
==See also==<br />
<br />
*[[Quizventure activity]] a 'space invaders'-like Moodle 2.7+ game using multiple choice questions<br />
* [https://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=368129 Arabic choices not written in Arabic language]<br />
<br />
[[ja:多肢選択問題タイプ]]<br />
[[fr:Question à choix multiple]]<br />
[[ca:Tipus_de_pregunta_de_opcions_múltiples]]<br />
[[de:Fragetyp Multiple-Choice]]<br />
[[es:Tipo de Pregunta de Opción Múltiple]]</div>Dbauer-etshttps://docs.moodle.org/36/en/index.php?title=Multiple_Choice_question_type&diff=133187Multiple Choice question type2019-03-02T15:03:22Z<p>Dbauer-ets: /* Single-answer questions */</p>
<hr />
<div>{{Questions}}<br />
Moodle provides teachers with a lot of flexibility when creating this common question type. You can create single-answer and multiple-answer questions, include pictures, sound or other media in the question and/or answer options (by inserting HTML) and weight individual answers. Remember that [[Lesson_module#Multiple_choice|Lesson module questions]] behave differently.<br />
<br />
There are two types of multiple choice questions - single answer and multiple answer.<br />
<br />
<br />
===Single-answer questions===<br />
These questions allow one and only one answer to be chosen by providing radio buttons next to the answers. You can specify negative or non-negative marks for each answer, usually zero marks for wrong answers, maximum marks for correct answers and partial marks for partially correct answers. A single-answer Multiple Choice question can result in a negative grade if it is set to Deferred feedback, but not other behaviours (Adaptive mode, Interactive with multiple tries, etc.)<sup>[https://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=383245 ref]</sup><br />
<br />
===Multiple-answer questions===<br />
The teacher can select "multiple answers are allowed" in a Multiple Choice question type. "Multiple answers" questions types in a quiz allow one or more answers to be chosen by providing check boxes next to the answers. Each answer may carry a positive or negative grade, so that choosing ALL the options will not necessarily result in good grade. If the total grade is negative then the total grade for this question will be zero.<br />
<br />
Feedback can be associated either with specific answers, or with the question as a whole.<br />
<br />
==Question set-up==<br />
<br />
#Select the question category<br />
#Give the question a descriptive name. You'll use the name to track your questions later so "Question 1" isn't a good idea. The name will be used in the question lists on the quiz editing page or in the lesson as a page title. It will not be shown to the students, so you can choose any name that makes sense to you and possibly other teachers.<br />
#Create the question text. If you're using the HTML Editor, you can format the question just like a word processing document.<br />
#Select an image to display if you want to add a picture to the question. The available images are those you have uploaded to the '''main''' Moodle files area (they cannot be in folders). For the student, the image appears immediately after the question text and before the answer options.<br />
#*Alternatively, if you used the HTML editor to create the question text, you can click the image icon. This will pop up the Insert Image window. You can choose to upload an image into your files area from this window, or you can add the URL of an image on the web. If you add a file to your files area, click the name of the file after you upload it to insert the link into the URL text entry at the top of the screen. Then click OK.<br />
#Set the 'default question grade' (i.e. the maximum number of marks for this question).<br />
#Set the 'Penalty factor' (see [[Multiple_Choice_question_type#Penalty_factor|Penalty factor]] below).<br />
#If you wish, add general feedback. This is text that appears to the student after he/she has answered the question.<br />
#Choose whether students can only select one answer or multiple answers<br />
#Choose whether to shuffle the answer options<br />
#Write your first answer in the Choice 1 text field. Inserting HTML into this area also makes it possible to add an image or a sound file.<br />
#Select a grade percentage for the answer. This is the percentage of the total points for the question that selecting this response is worth. You can select negative percentages as well as positive percentages. So, selecting a correct response in a multiple answer question may give you 50% of the possible points, while selecting a wrong answer may take away 10%. Note that in a multiple-answer question, the positive grades must add up to at least 100%.<br />
#*Be aware that if you allow multiple answers and have more than a single correct choice, and do not use a negative grade percentage for wrong answers, the students can simply tick all choices and get the full grade.<br />
#If you wish, you can add feedback for each response. It may be a bit more work, but it’s good practice to tell the students why each answer is right or wrong using the feedback area. If students know why an answer is right or wrong, they can analyse their own thinking and begin to understand why an answer is correct. Your feedback will only be displayed if you select Show Feedback in the quiz body options.<br />
#Fill in the rest of the response choices in the rest of the form. Any unused areas will be ignored.<br />
#Fill in the [[Multiple_Choice_question_type#Overall_feedback|overall feedback]] fields if you wish.<br />
#Select the "Save Changes" button at the bottom of the screen.<br />
<br />
=== Penalty factor ===<br />
<br />
The 'penalty factor' only applies when the question is used in a quiz using adaptive mode - i.e. where the student is allowed multiple attempts at a question even within the same attempt at the quiz. If the penalty factor is more than 0, then the student will lose that proportion of the '''maximum''' grade upon each successive attempt. For example, if the default question grade is 10, and the penalty factor is 0.2, then each successive attempt after the first one will incur a penalty of 0.2 x 10 = 2 points.<br />
<br />
==General feedback==<br />
General feedback is some text that gets shown to the student after they have attempted the question. Unlike answer feedbacks, which depend on the question type and what response the student gave, the same general feedback text is shown to all students.<br />
<br />
You can control when general feedback is shown to students using the "Review options" check-boxes on the quiz editing form.<br />
<br />
You can use the general feedback to give students some background to what knowledge the question was testing. Or to give them a link to more information they can use if they did not understand the questions.<br />
<br />
==Combined feedback==<br />
The option ''Combined feedback'' for correct/partially correct/incorrect responses is particularly useful for multiple-response questions, where it is difficult to control what feedback students see just using the answer-specific feedback.<br />
<br />
So, when the student submits the question, they will see the answer-specific feedback next to the option(s) they selected, the combined feedback in a box below the options, and if applicable, the general feedback underneath everything else.<br />
<br />
==Site administration settings==<br />
<br />
An administrator can specify the defaults for multiple choice settings via the settings link in 'Manage question types' in the Site administration.<br />
<br />
==Lesson module multiple choice questions==<br />
This page was created for the Quiz module. A [[Lesson_module#Multiple_choice|Lesson Multiple Choice]] or [[Multianswer question type]] looks the same to the student but is very different in the teacher's edit mode. A lesson question offers the teacher the chance to both grade a student's answer, give feedback and also to send the student to another specific page based upon the student's choice.<br />
<br />
There are other differences. Quiz has a more robust scoring system that is similar to "Custom Scoring" in the Lesson module. Even with custom scoring turned on, Lesson will not give percentage credit of a question's score for an answer. And students must select all the correct answers to receive any credit for the multianswer question in the Lesson module.<br />
<br />
==All-or-nothing multiple choice question type (plugin)==<br />
The [[All or nothing multiple choice question type]] plugin is adapted from the existing multichoice question. The main difference from the standard Moodle multiple choice question type is in the way that grading works.<br />
<br />
The teacher editing interface is slightly modified as when creating the question, the teacher just indicates which choices are correct.<br />
In an all-or-nothing multiple choice question, a respondent can choose one or more answers. If the chosen answers correspond exactly to the correct choices defined in the question, the respondent gets 100%. If he/she chooses any incorrect choices or does not select all of the correct choices, the grade is 0%.<br />
<br />
Before using the all-or-nothing question type, teachers must really think if this grading is what they want.<br />
<br />
==Calculated multichoice question type==<br />
The [[Calculated multichoice question type]] are like multiple choice questions with the additonal property that the elements to select can include formula results from numeric values that are selected randomly from a set when the quiz is taken. They use the same wildcards than Calculated questions and their wildcards can be shared with other Calculated multichoice or regular Calculated questions.<br />
<br />
The main difference is that the formula is included in the answer choice as {=...}.<br />
<br />
==Eliminator==<br />
<br />
Some teachers say that young students may be less successful in Moodle multiple-choice quizzes than in multiple-choice tests on paper. This would be largely due to the fact that students tend to cross out the wrong answers, which they can not do with Moodle's multiple choice quizzes.<br />
<br />
An "eliminator" is a way of graying out or crossing out choices to help students keep the choice they want. Moodle's core Multiple Choice question does not yet include such an eliminator. However, the teacher can easily create an eliminator by adding HTML code to the text of the choices.<br />
<br />
<p style="margin-bottom:5px;">For a gray out eliminator, add the following HTML code to the text of each choice:</p><br />
&lt;div style="display:inline-block;"><br />
&lt;input type="radio" id="Eliminator" style="display:none;"><br />
&lt;label for="Eliminator"><br />
&lt;span onclick="if(this.style.opacity==0.3){this.style.opacity=1;}else{this.style.opacity=0.3;}" style="opacity: 1;"><br />
<i>Choice text</i><br />
&lt;/span><br />
&lt;/label><br />
&lt;/div><br />
<p style="margin:0;"></p><br />
where <i><pre>Choice text</pre></i> is the actual text for each choice.<br />
<p style="margin-top:2px;">The workaround works as follows:</p><br />
*The student clicks on the <b>text</b> of the choices to toggle: black / gray out. The gray out color reminds the student that these choices are eliminated.<br />
*The student clicks on the <b>radio buttons</b> to select the answer.<br />
<br />
Examples and variations (e.g. line-through) of this workaround are presented [https://moodleformulas.org/course/view.php?id=38&section=7 here].<br />
<br />
==See also==<br />
<br />
*[[Quizventure activity]] a 'space invaders'-like Moodle 2.7+ game using multiple choice questions<br />
* [https://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=368129 Arabic choices not written in Arabic language]<br />
<br />
[[ja:多肢選択問題タイプ]]<br />
[[fr:Question à choix multiple]]<br />
[[ca:Tipus_de_pregunta_de_opcions_múltiples]]<br />
[[de:Fragetyp Multiple-Choice]]<br />
[[es:Tipo de Pregunta de Opción Múltiple]]</div>Dbauer-etshttps://docs.moodle.org/36/en/index.php?title=Multiple_Choice_question_type&diff=133186Multiple Choice question type2019-03-02T14:58:18Z<p>Dbauer-ets: /* Single-answer questions */</p>
<hr />
<div>{{Questions}}<br />
Moodle provides teachers with a lot of flexibility when creating this common question type. You can create single-answer and multiple-answer questions, include pictures, sound or other media in the question and/or answer options (by inserting HTML) and weight individual answers. Remember that [[Lesson_module#Multiple_choice|Lesson module questions]] behave differently.<br />
<br />
There are two types of multiple choice questions - single answer and multiple answer.<br />
<br />
<br />
===Single-answer questions===<br />
These questions allow one and only one answer to be chosen by providing radio buttons next to the answers. You can specify negative or non-negative marks for each answer, usually zero marks for wrong answers, maximum marks for correct answers and partial marks for partially correct answers. A single-answer Multiple Choice question can result in a negative grade if it is set to Deferred feedback, but not other behaviours (Adaptive mode, Interactive with multiple tries, etc.)<sup>[https://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=383245 ref]</sup>.<br />
<br />
===Multiple-answer questions===<br />
The teacher can select "multiple answers are allowed" in a Multiple Choice question type. "Multiple answers" questions types in a quiz allow one or more answers to be chosen by providing check boxes next to the answers. Each answer may carry a positive or negative grade, so that choosing ALL the options will not necessarily result in good grade. If the total grade is negative then the total grade for this question will be zero.<br />
<br />
Feedback can be associated either with specific answers, or with the question as a whole.<br />
<br />
==Question set-up==<br />
<br />
#Select the question category<br />
#Give the question a descriptive name. You'll use the name to track your questions later so "Question 1" isn't a good idea. The name will be used in the question lists on the quiz editing page or in the lesson as a page title. It will not be shown to the students, so you can choose any name that makes sense to you and possibly other teachers.<br />
#Create the question text. If you're using the HTML Editor, you can format the question just like a word processing document.<br />
#Select an image to display if you want to add a picture to the question. The available images are those you have uploaded to the '''main''' Moodle files area (they cannot be in folders). For the student, the image appears immediately after the question text and before the answer options.<br />
#*Alternatively, if you used the HTML editor to create the question text, you can click the image icon. This will pop up the Insert Image window. You can choose to upload an image into your files area from this window, or you can add the URL of an image on the web. If you add a file to your files area, click the name of the file after you upload it to insert the link into the URL text entry at the top of the screen. Then click OK.<br />
#Set the 'default question grade' (i.e. the maximum number of marks for this question).<br />
#Set the 'Penalty factor' (see [[Multiple_Choice_question_type#Penalty_factor|Penalty factor]] below).<br />
#If you wish, add general feedback. This is text that appears to the student after he/she has answered the question.<br />
#Choose whether students can only select one answer or multiple answers<br />
#Choose whether to shuffle the answer options<br />
#Write your first answer in the Choice 1 text field. Inserting HTML into this area also makes it possible to add an image or a sound file.<br />
#Select a grade percentage for the answer. This is the percentage of the total points for the question that selecting this response is worth. You can select negative percentages as well as positive percentages. So, selecting a correct response in a multiple answer question may give you 50% of the possible points, while selecting a wrong answer may take away 10%. Note that in a multiple-answer question, the positive grades must add up to at least 100%.<br />
#*Be aware that if you allow multiple answers and have more than a single correct choice, and do not use a negative grade percentage for wrong answers, the students can simply tick all choices and get the full grade.<br />
#If you wish, you can add feedback for each response. It may be a bit more work, but it’s good practice to tell the students why each answer is right or wrong using the feedback area. If students know why an answer is right or wrong, they can analyse their own thinking and begin to understand why an answer is correct. Your feedback will only be displayed if you select Show Feedback in the quiz body options.<br />
#Fill in the rest of the response choices in the rest of the form. Any unused areas will be ignored.<br />
#Fill in the [[Multiple_Choice_question_type#Overall_feedback|overall feedback]] fields if you wish.<br />
#Select the "Save Changes" button at the bottom of the screen.<br />
<br />
=== Penalty factor ===<br />
<br />
The 'penalty factor' only applies when the question is used in a quiz using adaptive mode - i.e. where the student is allowed multiple attempts at a question even within the same attempt at the quiz. If the penalty factor is more than 0, then the student will lose that proportion of the '''maximum''' grade upon each successive attempt. For example, if the default question grade is 10, and the penalty factor is 0.2, then each successive attempt after the first one will incur a penalty of 0.2 x 10 = 2 points.<br />
<br />
==General feedback==<br />
General feedback is some text that gets shown to the student after they have attempted the question. Unlike answer feedbacks, which depend on the question type and what response the student gave, the same general feedback text is shown to all students.<br />
<br />
You can control when general feedback is shown to students using the "Review options" check-boxes on the quiz editing form.<br />
<br />
You can use the general feedback to give students some background to what knowledge the question was testing. Or to give them a link to more information they can use if they did not understand the questions.<br />
<br />
==Combined feedback==<br />
The option ''Combined feedback'' for correct/partially correct/incorrect responses is particularly useful for multiple-response questions, where it is difficult to control what feedback students see just using the answer-specific feedback.<br />
<br />
So, when the student submits the question, they will see the answer-specific feedback next to the option(s) they selected, the combined feedback in a box below the options, and if applicable, the general feedback underneath everything else.<br />
<br />
==Site administration settings==<br />
<br />
An administrator can specify the defaults for multiple choice settings via the settings link in 'Manage question types' in the Site administration.<br />
<br />
==Lesson module multiple choice questions==<br />
This page was created for the Quiz module. A [[Lesson_module#Multiple_choice|Lesson Multiple Choice]] or [[Multianswer question type]] looks the same to the student but is very different in the teacher's edit mode. A lesson question offers the teacher the chance to both grade a student's answer, give feedback and also to send the student to another specific page based upon the student's choice.<br />
<br />
There are other differences. Quiz has a more robust scoring system that is similar to "Custom Scoring" in the Lesson module. Even with custom scoring turned on, Lesson will not give percentage credit of a question's score for an answer. And students must select all the correct answers to receive any credit for the multianswer question in the Lesson module.<br />
<br />
==All-or-nothing multiple choice question type (plugin)==<br />
The [[All or nothing multiple choice question type]] plugin is adapted from the existing multichoice question. The main difference from the standard Moodle multiple choice question type is in the way that grading works.<br />
<br />
The teacher editing interface is slightly modified as when creating the question, the teacher just indicates which choices are correct.<br />
In an all-or-nothing multiple choice question, a respondent can choose one or more answers. If the chosen answers correspond exactly to the correct choices defined in the question, the respondent gets 100%. If he/she chooses any incorrect choices or does not select all of the correct choices, the grade is 0%.<br />
<br />
Before using the all-or-nothing question type, teachers must really think if this grading is what they want.<br />
<br />
==Calculated multichoice question type==<br />
The [[Calculated multichoice question type]] are like multiple choice questions with the additonal property that the elements to select can include formula results from numeric values that are selected randomly from a set when the quiz is taken. They use the same wildcards than Calculated questions and their wildcards can be shared with other Calculated multichoice or regular Calculated questions.<br />
<br />
The main difference is that the formula is included in the answer choice as {=...}.<br />
<br />
==Eliminator==<br />
<br />
Some teachers say that young students may be less successful in Moodle multiple-choice quizzes than in multiple-choice tests on paper. This would be largely due to the fact that students tend to cross out the wrong answers, which they can not do with Moodle's multiple choice quizzes.<br />
<br />
An "eliminator" is a way of graying out or crossing out choices to help students keep the choice they want. Moodle's core Multiple Choice question does not yet include such an eliminator. However, the teacher can easily create an eliminator by adding HTML code to the text of the choices.<br />
<br />
<p style="margin-bottom:5px;">For a gray out eliminator, add the following HTML code to the text of each choice:</p><br />
&lt;div style="display:inline-block;"><br />
&lt;input type="radio" id="Eliminator" style="display:none;"><br />
&lt;label for="Eliminator"><br />
&lt;span onclick="if(this.style.opacity==0.3){this.style.opacity=1;}else{this.style.opacity=0.3;}" style="opacity: 1;"><br />
<i>Choice text</i><br />
&lt;/span><br />
&lt;/label><br />
&lt;/div><br />
<p style="margin:0;"></p><br />
where <i><pre>Choice text</pre></i> is the actual text for each choice.<br />
<p style="margin-top:2px;">The workaround works as follows:</p><br />
*The student clicks on the <b>text</b> of the choices to toggle: black / gray out. The gray out color reminds the student that these choices are eliminated.<br />
*The student clicks on the <b>radio buttons</b> to select the answer.<br />
<br />
Examples and variations (e.g. line-through) of this workaround are presented [https://moodleformulas.org/course/view.php?id=38&section=7 here].<br />
<br />
==See also==<br />
<br />
*[[Quizventure activity]] a 'space invaders'-like Moodle 2.7+ game using multiple choice questions<br />
* [https://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=368129 Arabic choices not written in Arabic language]<br />
<br />
[[ja:多肢選択問題タイプ]]<br />
[[fr:Question à choix multiple]]<br />
[[ca:Tipus_de_pregunta_de_opcions_múltiples]]<br />
[[de:Fragetyp Multiple-Choice]]<br />
[[es:Tipo de Pregunta de Opción Múltiple]]</div>Dbauer-etshttps://docs.moodle.org/36/en/index.php?title=Multiple_Choice_question_type&diff=133185Multiple Choice question type2019-03-02T14:54:24Z<p>Dbauer-ets: /* Single-answer questions */</p>
<hr />
<div>{{Questions}}<br />
Moodle provides teachers with a lot of flexibility when creating this common question type. You can create single-answer and multiple-answer questions, include pictures, sound or other media in the question and/or answer options (by inserting HTML) and weight individual answers. Remember that [[Lesson_module#Multiple_choice|Lesson module questions]] behave differently.<br />
<br />
There are two types of multiple choice questions - single answer and multiple answer.<br />
<br />
<br />
===Single-answer questions===<br />
These questions allow one and only one answer to be chosen by providing radio buttons next to the answers. You can specify negative or non-negative marks for each answer, usually zero marks for wrong answers, maximum marks for correct answers and partial marks for partially correct answers. A single-answer Multiple Choice question can result in a negative grade if it is set to Deferred feedback, but not other behaviours (Adaptive mode, Interactive with multiple tries, etc.).<br />
<br />
===Multiple-answer questions===<br />
The teacher can select "multiple answers are allowed" in a Multiple Choice question type. "Multiple answers" questions types in a quiz allow one or more answers to be chosen by providing check boxes next to the answers. Each answer may carry a positive or negative grade, so that choosing ALL the options will not necessarily result in good grade. If the total grade is negative then the total grade for this question will be zero.<br />
<br />
Feedback can be associated either with specific answers, or with the question as a whole.<br />
<br />
==Question set-up==<br />
<br />
#Select the question category<br />
#Give the question a descriptive name. You'll use the name to track your questions later so "Question 1" isn't a good idea. The name will be used in the question lists on the quiz editing page or in the lesson as a page title. It will not be shown to the students, so you can choose any name that makes sense to you and possibly other teachers.<br />
#Create the question text. If you're using the HTML Editor, you can format the question just like a word processing document.<br />
#Select an image to display if you want to add a picture to the question. The available images are those you have uploaded to the '''main''' Moodle files area (they cannot be in folders). For the student, the image appears immediately after the question text and before the answer options.<br />
#*Alternatively, if you used the HTML editor to create the question text, you can click the image icon. This will pop up the Insert Image window. You can choose to upload an image into your files area from this window, or you can add the URL of an image on the web. If you add a file to your files area, click the name of the file after you upload it to insert the link into the URL text entry at the top of the screen. Then click OK.<br />
#Set the 'default question grade' (i.e. the maximum number of marks for this question).<br />
#Set the 'Penalty factor' (see [[Multiple_Choice_question_type#Penalty_factor|Penalty factor]] below).<br />
#If you wish, add general feedback. This is text that appears to the student after he/she has answered the question.<br />
#Choose whether students can only select one answer or multiple answers<br />
#Choose whether to shuffle the answer options<br />
#Write your first answer in the Choice 1 text field. Inserting HTML into this area also makes it possible to add an image or a sound file.<br />
#Select a grade percentage for the answer. This is the percentage of the total points for the question that selecting this response is worth. You can select negative percentages as well as positive percentages. So, selecting a correct response in a multiple answer question may give you 50% of the possible points, while selecting a wrong answer may take away 10%. Note that in a multiple-answer question, the positive grades must add up to at least 100%.<br />
#*Be aware that if you allow multiple answers and have more than a single correct choice, and do not use a negative grade percentage for wrong answers, the students can simply tick all choices and get the full grade.<br />
#If you wish, you can add feedback for each response. It may be a bit more work, but it’s good practice to tell the students why each answer is right or wrong using the feedback area. If students know why an answer is right or wrong, they can analyse their own thinking and begin to understand why an answer is correct. Your feedback will only be displayed if you select Show Feedback in the quiz body options.<br />
#Fill in the rest of the response choices in the rest of the form. Any unused areas will be ignored.<br />
#Fill in the [[Multiple_Choice_question_type#Overall_feedback|overall feedback]] fields if you wish.<br />
#Select the "Save Changes" button at the bottom of the screen.<br />
<br />
=== Penalty factor ===<br />
<br />
The 'penalty factor' only applies when the question is used in a quiz using adaptive mode - i.e. where the student is allowed multiple attempts at a question even within the same attempt at the quiz. If the penalty factor is more than 0, then the student will lose that proportion of the '''maximum''' grade upon each successive attempt. For example, if the default question grade is 10, and the penalty factor is 0.2, then each successive attempt after the first one will incur a penalty of 0.2 x 10 = 2 points.<br />
<br />
==General feedback==<br />
General feedback is some text that gets shown to the student after they have attempted the question. Unlike answer feedbacks, which depend on the question type and what response the student gave, the same general feedback text is shown to all students.<br />
<br />
You can control when general feedback is shown to students using the "Review options" check-boxes on the quiz editing form.<br />
<br />
You can use the general feedback to give students some background to what knowledge the question was testing. Or to give them a link to more information they can use if they did not understand the questions.<br />
<br />
==Combined feedback==<br />
The option ''Combined feedback'' for correct/partially correct/incorrect responses is particularly useful for multiple-response questions, where it is difficult to control what feedback students see just using the answer-specific feedback.<br />
<br />
So, when the student submits the question, they will see the answer-specific feedback next to the option(s) they selected, the combined feedback in a box below the options, and if applicable, the general feedback underneath everything else.<br />
<br />
==Site administration settings==<br />
<br />
An administrator can specify the defaults for multiple choice settings via the settings link in 'Manage question types' in the Site administration.<br />
<br />
==Lesson module multiple choice questions==<br />
This page was created for the Quiz module. A [[Lesson_module#Multiple_choice|Lesson Multiple Choice]] or [[Multianswer question type]] looks the same to the student but is very different in the teacher's edit mode. A lesson question offers the teacher the chance to both grade a student's answer, give feedback and also to send the student to another specific page based upon the student's choice.<br />
<br />
There are other differences. Quiz has a more robust scoring system that is similar to "Custom Scoring" in the Lesson module. Even with custom scoring turned on, Lesson will not give percentage credit of a question's score for an answer. And students must select all the correct answers to receive any credit for the multianswer question in the Lesson module.<br />
<br />
==All-or-nothing multiple choice question type (plugin)==<br />
The [[All or nothing multiple choice question type]] plugin is adapted from the existing multichoice question. The main difference from the standard Moodle multiple choice question type is in the way that grading works.<br />
<br />
The teacher editing interface is slightly modified as when creating the question, the teacher just indicates which choices are correct.<br />
In an all-or-nothing multiple choice question, a respondent can choose one or more answers. If the chosen answers correspond exactly to the correct choices defined in the question, the respondent gets 100%. If he/she chooses any incorrect choices or does not select all of the correct choices, the grade is 0%.<br />
<br />
Before using the all-or-nothing question type, teachers must really think if this grading is what they want.<br />
<br />
==Calculated multichoice question type==<br />
The [[Calculated multichoice question type]] are like multiple choice questions with the additonal property that the elements to select can include formula results from numeric values that are selected randomly from a set when the quiz is taken. They use the same wildcards than Calculated questions and their wildcards can be shared with other Calculated multichoice or regular Calculated questions.<br />
<br />
The main difference is that the formula is included in the answer choice as {=...}.<br />
<br />
==Eliminator==<br />
<br />
Some teachers say that young students may be less successful in Moodle multiple-choice quizzes than in multiple-choice tests on paper. This would be largely due to the fact that students tend to cross out the wrong answers, which they can not do with Moodle's multiple choice quizzes.<br />
<br />
An "eliminator" is a way of graying out or crossing out choices to help students keep the choice they want. Moodle's core Multiple Choice question does not yet include such an eliminator. However, the teacher can easily create an eliminator by adding HTML code to the text of the choices.<br />
<br />
<p style="margin-bottom:5px;">For a gray out eliminator, add the following HTML code to the text of each choice:</p><br />
&lt;div style="display:inline-block;"><br />
&lt;input type="radio" id="Eliminator" style="display:none;"><br />
&lt;label for="Eliminator"><br />
&lt;span onclick="if(this.style.opacity==0.3){this.style.opacity=1;}else{this.style.opacity=0.3;}" style="opacity: 1;"><br />
<i>Choice text</i><br />
&lt;/span><br />
&lt;/label><br />
&lt;/div><br />
<p style="margin:0;"></p><br />
where <i><pre>Choice text</pre></i> is the actual text for each choice.<br />
<p style="margin-top:2px;">The workaround works as follows:</p><br />
*The student clicks on the <b>text</b> of the choices to toggle: black / gray out. The gray out color reminds the student that these choices are eliminated.<br />
*The student clicks on the <b>radio buttons</b> to select the answer.<br />
<br />
Examples and variations (e.g. line-through) of this workaround are presented [https://moodleformulas.org/course/view.php?id=38&section=7 here].<br />
<br />
==See also==<br />
<br />
*[[Quizventure activity]] a 'space invaders'-like Moodle 2.7+ game using multiple choice questions<br />
* [https://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=368129 Arabic choices not written in Arabic language]<br />
<br />
[[ja:多肢選択問題タイプ]]<br />
[[fr:Question à choix multiple]]<br />
[[ca:Tipus_de_pregunta_de_opcions_múltiples]]<br />
[[de:Fragetyp Multiple-Choice]]<br />
[[es:Tipo de Pregunta de Opción Múltiple]]</div>Dbauer-etshttps://docs.moodle.org/36/en/index.php?title=Embedded_Answers_(Cloze)_question_type&diff=133184Embedded Answers (Cloze) question type2019-03-02T14:26:33Z<p>Dbauer-ets: /* Detailed syntax explanations */</p>
<hr />
<div>{{Questions}}<br />
'''Embedded answers (Cloze)''' questions consist of a passage of text (in Moodle format) that has various answers embedded within it, including multiple choice, short answers and numerical answers.<br />
<br />
Until mid2013, there was no graphical interface to create these questions within your Moodle site - you needed to specify the question format using the text box or by importing them from external files.<br />
<br />
You can link to an external web site that does create these questions from a graphical interface, see the ''[http://projects.ael.uni-tuebingen.de/quiz/htmlarea/index.php Online Cloze Question quiz generator]'' below.<br />
<br />
There is an Excel-based [http://hbwubecc.wixsite.com/jordan/tools Cloze and GIFT Generator] that was presented at the 2017 Moodle Moot Japan.<br />
<br />
There is a [[Cloze editor for TinyMCE]] that will let you create these questions from a graphical interface within your Moodle site, but it will overwrite your current HTML editor and only works with the [[TinyMCE editor]] but not with [[Atto]]. In 2016 a [[Cloze editor for Atto]] additional plugin was created.<br />
<br />
Lots of people suggested that [[Hot Potatoes]] software is the easiest way to create Embedded answer (Cloze) questions. Once you have created your questions on your PC, you can then import them into Moodle's quiz module.<br />
<br />
However, the flexibility of the Cloze question type is hard to equal and despite the minor coding that you need to create the questions, it has great worth in the Moodle Quiz.<br />
<br />
==Question set-up==<br />
<br />
#Select the question category<br />
#Give the question a descriptive name - this allows you to identify it in the question bank.<br />
#Enter the passage of text (in Moodle format - see [[Embedded_Answers_%28Cloze%29_question_type#Format|Format]] below) into the 'question text' field.<br />
#Select an image to display if you want to add a picture to the question. For the student, it appears immediately above the question text.<br />
#Set the 'default question grade' (i.e. the maximum number of marks for this question).<br />
#Set the 'Penalty factor' (see [[Embedded_Answers_%28Cloze%29_question_type#Penalty_factor|Penalty factor]] below).<br />
#If you wish, add general feedback. This is text that appears to the student after he/she has answered the question.<br />
#The editor has been modified and allows you to test if your syntax is good. The different questions elements decoded will be displayed and syntax errors pinpoint. However, it cannot check if the question decoded is two questions in one because of an error syntax (for example ~}, =~, etc.).<br />
#Click Save changes to add the question to the category.<br />
<br />
=== Penalty factor ===<br />
<br />
The 'penalty factor' only applies when the question is used in a quiz using adaptive mode - i.e. where the student is allowed multiple attempts at a question even within the same attempt at the quiz. If the penalty factor is more than 0, then the student will lose that proportion of the '''maximum''' grade upon each successive attempt. For example, if the default question grade is 10, and the penalty factor is 0.2, then each successive attempt after the first one will incur a penalty of 0.2 x 10 = 2 points. The grading for the cloze question applies the penalty to each subpart of the question as a whole. For example, if you have three fill in the blanks each worth 1 point each, then the penalty will only be incurred on the incorrect parts, not the questions as a whole.<br />
<br />
==Question rendering==<br />
<br />
The question answer entry space or INPUT HTML ELEMENT (for Short Answer and Numerical question types) and the dropdown list or SELECT HTML ELEMENT (for multichoice) are normally displayed in-line with the text.<br />
<br />
The size of the entry space or INPUT HTML ELEMENT ( Short and Numerical) will be adjustable to the length of the longest answer (good or bad) + a random number (0 to 15% total length).([[User:Pierre Pichet|Pierre Pichet]] 15:37, 26 January 2008 (CST))<br />
<br />
The size will adjust to the length of the student response when displayed in the grading and feedback process.<br />
<br />
The size of the dropdown list or SELECT HTML ELEMENT (multichoice) adjusts itself automatically to the longest answer.<br />
<br />
==Format==<br />
<br />
Questions consist of a passage of text (in Moodle format) that has various sub-questions embedded within it, including<br />
<br />
* short answers (SHORTANSWER or SA or MW), case is unimportant,<br />
* short answers (SHORTANSWER_C or SAC or MWC), case must match,<br />
* numerical answers (NUMERICAL or NM),<br />
* multiple choice (MULTICHOICE or MC), represented as a dropdown menu in-line in the text,<br />
* multiple choice (MULTICHOICE_V or MCV), represented as a vertical column of radio buttons, or<br />
* multiple choice (MULTICHOICE_H or MCH), represented as a horizontal row of radio-buttons,<br />
* multiple choice (MULTIRESPONSE or MR), represented as a vertical row of checkboxes<br />
* multiple choice (MULTIRESPONSE_H or MRH), represented as a horizontal row of checkboxes<br />
===Shuffle sub questions===<br />
When the quiz question behavior shuffle option is set to '''YES''', the following special multiple choice sub-questions elements will be shuffled:<br />
* multiple choice (MULTICHOICE_S or MCS), represented as a dropdown menu in-line in the text,<br />
* multiple choice (MULTICHOICE_VS or MCVS), represented as a vertical column of radio buttons, or<br />
* multiple choice (MULTICHOICE_HS or MCHS), represented as a horizontal row of radio-buttons.<br />
* multiple choice (MULTIRESPONSE_S or MRS), represented as a vertical row of checkboxes<br />
* multiple choice (MULTIRESPONSE_HS or MRHS), represented as a horizontal row of checkboxes<br />
<br />
{{Note|MCS, MCVS, MCHS are new (Moodle 3.0) Cloze subquestion types with shuffling of answers. See MDL-38214.}}<br />
<br />
The structure of each cloze sub-question is identical:<br />
:'''{''' start the cloze sub-question with a bracket (AltGr+7)<br />
:'''1''' define a grade for each cloze by a number (optional). This used for calculation of question grading.<br />
:''':SHORTANSWER:''' define the type of cloze sub-question. Definition is bounded by ':'. <br />
:'''~''' is a seperator between answer options<br />
:'''=''' marks a correct answer<br />
:'''#''' marks the beginning of an (optional) feedback message<br />
:'''}''' close the cloze sub-question at the end with a bracket (AltGr+0)<br />
<br />
Now a very simple example:<br />
<pre><br />
{1:SHORTANSWER:=Berlin} is the capital of Germany.<br />
</pre><br />
<br />
For full details of the format for embedded-answers questions, see the [[Embedded_Answers_%28Cloze%29_question_type#Detailed_syntax_explanations|detailed syntax explanation]] below.<br />
<br />
NB: Be careful when copying a cloze type question into the WYSIWYG HTML editor, as line breaks tend to get added, which destroys the question.<br />
<br />
If the correct answer contains } # ~ / " or \ you will have to escape them by putting a \ in front of each such character. But [[https://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=275299 this is tricky]]. The { shouldn't be escaped, this can be vital in getting TeX expressions to work. In the feedback ~ and } must be escaped otherwise it will be interpreted as ''the next answer'' or ''end of the short answer section'' respectively. Quotation signs: " can lead to trouble anyhow in both places. Use the HTML entity: & quot; (without the space between ''&'' and ''quot;''). If you want to have Mathematical symbols there can be problems with the \ used in TeX expressions. One alternative can be to use [[unicode]] characters. <br />
<br />
See the notes further down about numerical embedded question!<br />
<br />
===Examples===<br />
<br />
====Example 1====<br />
The following text creates a simple embedded-answers question:<br />
<br />
Match the following cities with the correct state:<br />
* San Francisco: {1:MULTICHOICE:=California#OK~Arizona#Wrong}<br />
* Tucson: {1:MULTICHOICE:California#Wrong~%100%Arizona#OK}<br />
* Los Angeles: {1:MULTICHOICE:=California#OK~Arizona#Wrong}<br />
* Phoenix: {1:MULTICHOICE:%0%California#Wrong~=Arizona#OK}<br />
The capital of France is {1:SHORTANSWER:%100%Paris#Congratulations!<br />
~%50%Marseille#No, that is the second largest city in France (after<br />
Paris).~*#Wrong answer. The capital of France is Paris, of course.}.<br />
<br />
And the result will be:<br />
<br />
[[Image:Cloze.gif|Cloze question type]] <br />
<br />
====Example 2====<br />
<div style="padding: 1em;border: 1px dashed #FFB53A;color: black;background-color: #f9f9f9;font-family: monospace;font-size:1.2em;"><br />
This question consists of some text with an answer embedded right here {1:MULTICHOICE:Wrong answer#Feedback for this wrong answer~Another wrong answer#Feedback for the other wrong answer~=Correct answer#Feedback for correct answer~%50%Answer that gives half the credit#Feedback for half credit answer}<br />
<br />
and right after that you will have to deal with this short answer {1:SHORTANSWER:Wrong answer#Feedback for this wrong answer~=Correct answer#Feedback for correct answer~%50%Answer that gives half the credit#Feedback for half credit answer}<br />
<br />
and finally we have a floating point number {2:NUMERICAL:=23.8:0.1#Feedback for correct answer 23.8~%50%23.8:2#Feedback for half credit answer in the nearby region of the correct answer}.<br />
<br />
The multichoice question can also be shown in the vertical display of the standard moodle multiple choice.<br />
{2:MCV:1. Wrong answer#Feedback for this wrong answer~2. Another wrong answer#Feedback for the other wrong answer~=3. Correct answer#Feedback for correct answer~%50%4. Answer that gives half the credit#Feedback for half credit answer}<br />
<br />
Or in an horizontal display that is included here in a table<br />
{2:MCH:a. Wrong answer#Feedback for this wrong answer~b. Another wrong answer#Feedback for the other wrong answer~=c. Correct answer#Feedback for correct answer~%50%d. Answer that gives half the credit#Feedback for half credit answer}<br />
<br />
A shortanswer question where case must match. Write moodle in upper case letters {1:SHORTANSWER_C:moodle#Feedback for moodle in lower case ~=MOODLE#Feedback for MOODLE in upper case ~%50%Moodle#Feedback for only first letter in upper case}<br />
<br />
Note that addresses like www.moodle.org and smileys :-) all work as normal:<br />
<br />
a) How good is this? {:MULTICHOICE:=Yes#Correct~No#We have a different opinion}<br />
<br />
b) What grade would you give it? {3:NUMERICAL:=3:2}<br />
</div><br />
[[Image:Cloze example.png]]<br />
<br />
Some things to note:<br />
* The individual embedded answers are represented by the code in braces {}.<br />
* The number at the start is the 'weight', so in this case each answer contributes an equal share of the overall grade.<br />
* The correct option in each case is preceded either by an = sign or by %100%. <br />
* The text appearing after the # that follows each option is the feedback that the student will see if they choose that option.<br />
* If the student enters 'Marseille' in the final example, they score 50% of the total grade.<br />
* The asterisk * preceding the "Wrong answer" feedback in the final example means that the student will see this feedback if they enter anything other than "Paris" or "Marseille".<br />
* For multiple choice vertical or horizontal rendering there is no automatic numbering, though can added at each answer.<br />
<br />
==Detailed syntax explanations==<br />
# All question items within a cloze-type question are coded inside curled braces { }.<br />
# The number which appears between the opening brace and the colon {1: is the weighting of that item; if it is set at 1 for all the items, it needs not be specified, so you can have {:.<br />
# After the colon we have the item question type: MULTICHOICE, SHORTANSWER, NUMERICAL.<br />
# '''NOTE'''.- If you have installed the [https://moodle.org/plugins/qtype_regexp REGEXP question type plugin] you can also use the REGEXP question type; see [https://docs.moodle.org/36/en/Regular_Expression_Short-Answer_question_type#Inserting_RegExp_sub-questions_in_Cloze_type_questions instructions here].<br />
# The syntax for MULTICHOICE and SHORTANSWER is the same; the only difference is in the displaying of the item to the student.<br />
# The order of the various answers is indifferent (except if you want a catch-all for wrong answers, see #13 below).<br />
# A correct answer is preceded with the equal sign = or a percentage (usually %100%) - '''Note''': [[Talk:Embedded_Answers_(Cloze)_question_type| The equal sign (=) doesn't seem to work with SHORTANSWER.]]<br />
# A wrong answer is preceded with nothing or a percentage (usually %0%)but you can even use negative points by preceding with ~%-25% [not before Moodle 2.0]).<br />
# You can allocate some points between 0 and 100 to some answers, if you put the appropriate percentage.<br />
# All answers except the first one are separated from one another by the tilde ~ sign.<br />
# Answers can be followed by an optional feedback message, preceded with the # sign; if there is no feedback message, the # sign can be present or absent, it does not matter.<br />
# Note that the feedback message and the correct answer are displayed in a small popup window (if and when the correct and or feedback have been declared accessible to the students in the Quiz settings) upon mouse hovering. The popup window has a title "feedback" and you can use HTML tags to format your feedback. In some browsers (For example IE5.5) the form fields can cover part of the feedback windows. It can help to not have the formfields for the answers too close to each other.<br />
# In the SHORTANSWER type you may want to put a catch-all (wrong) answer in order to send a "wrong, try again" feedback; you can do this by inserting an asterisk '''*''' as '''the very last expected answer''' in your formula.<br />
# You should not have sequences such as %#, %~, %}, =#, =%, =}, ~#, ~% and ~} in the answer because you should not have empty answers or empty answer options. These two character sequences constitute error syntaxes. They are problematic because the second character is interpreted as if it were escaped<sup>(why?)</sup> and gives unexpected results: the answer is decoded as one instead of two or more.<br />
<br />
==Numerical Cloze questions== <br />
<br />
From the student perspective, a numerical Cloze question looks just like a short-answer question or ''fill in the blanks''.<br />
<br />
The difference is that numerical answers are allowed to have an accepted error. This allows a continuous range of answers to be set. You can also express your answer in some different numerical formats. 23.4 23,4 (some countries use , as a decimal separator) and 2.34E+1 (meaning 2.34*10^1) would be interpreted as the same.<br />
<br />
=== False positives ===<br />
<br />
'''Note:''' the following examples of false positives do '''not''' apply to Moodle 1.8+, where you cannot use percentages or fractions as the answers in a numerical Cloze test; Moodle will generate an error if you try to save such a question. However the following may be relevant for earlier versions of Moodle.<br />
<br />
More examples: <br />
0.5 accepts .5 0.5 ,5 0,5 0.500 5e-1 5E-1 but not 1/2 50% <br />
50% accepts 50% 50.0% 5E1% 50/100 even '''50/1000 50''' but not 500/1000 0.5 <br />
1/2 accepts 1/2 '''1/3 1twenty''' but not 2/4 0.5 0,5 3/6 50% ½ <br />
½ accepts ½ <br />
HALF doesn't even accept HALF (maybe '''0'''?) <br />
<br />
If you want to accept several variants you can have them in the same {} but '''be careful, notice the "false positives" in bold'''!<br />
<br />
===Syntax for numerical Cloze questions===<br />
<br />
The format of a NUMERICAL Cloze question is similar to that of the other Cloze types and they can be mixed in the same question. As with other Cloze tests, you write your question or incomplete text, and add the Cloze code at the point where the student is supposed to enter their numerical answer.<br />
<br />
An example of the syntax used is shown below:<br />
<br />
'''Note: ''' It is preferable to write the code in 'source code' mode. The WSIWYG editor can insert linebreaks that make the question not function. The linebreak in the example box below is for readability only! A problem with these questions is the readability of the code! :( <br />
<br />
{2:NUMERICAL:=23.8:0.1#Feedback for correct answer 23.8 <br />
~%50%23.8:2#Feedback for ½credit near correct answer}. <br />
<br />
In this example:<br />
* 2: is the question point weight, which means that this question has twice the weight in the final point(s) for this question as other partial answers with weight 1 (or no declared weight - you can start with {: for the default weight 1) in the same question.<br />
* NUMERICAL: says what kind of question it is. It must be in CAPS. <br />
* =23.8:0.1 = or %100% means correct if the answer is 23.8 with an accepted error of 0.1, then any number between 23.7 and 23.9 will be accepted as correct. (In the GIFT numerical question one can express an interval like this 13..15 or 14:1 but in Cloze only 14:1 works.) <br />
* #Feedback for correct answer 23.8 is preceded by #<br />
* ~%50%23.8:2 ~ is the separator for answer alternatives %50% means this answer would get 50% of the score that the more precise answer had gotten. Because the tolerance here is 2, 21.8 to 25.8 would get this point and feedback.<br />
<br />
The feedback (which is seen within a popup window when the user hovers over the answer space) is formattable with HTML tags. For example, if you want an exponent, surround it with superscript tags: &lt;sup&gt; &lt;/sup&gt;. You can even include pictures in the feedback popup, but you must clean out all " characters and save while still in source code mode (not WYSIWYG). So, this works in feedback popup:<br />
#See this picture:&lt;br&gt;&lt;img src=Something.gif />} <br />
but not this:<br />
#See this picture:&lt;br&gt;&lt;img src="Something.gif" />} <br />
<br />
(ALGEBRA and TEX filters don't work in the feedback popups, but they can be very useful in the question writing for math/science expressions). But you can use [[Unicode]] characters. <br />
<br />
If you want to give feedback for any answer that didn't fit the intervals you already have specified feedback for, add some BIG general intervals, like for positive answers (if they aren't bigger than 20000 you could add: <br />
~%0%10000.0001:10000#Feedback for unspecified not_right answers} <br />
This would give feedback for anything from 0.0001 to 20000.0001 (that hadn't already gotten feedback). I didn't want to include 0 since that special case as well as negative ought to have specific reactions. <br />
~%0%0#Hey! It can't be zero <br />
~%0%-10000.0001:10000#We just want the size here, <br />
so a negative value is not what we want} <br />
<br />
Numerical questions could, before version 1.7, also have case-insensitive non-numerical answers. This is useful whenever the answer for a numerical question is something like +inf, -inf, NaN etc.<br />
==Importing CLOZE questions==<br />
If you try importing directly as CLOZE this text:<br />
<pre><br />
Single line per question! Match the following cities with the correct state:<br />
* San Francisco: {1:MULTICHOICE:=California#OK~Arizona#Wrong}<br />
* Tucson: {1:MULTICHOICE:California#Wrong~%100%Arizona#OK}<br />
* Los Angeles: {1:MULTICHOICE:=California#OK~Arizona#Wrong}<br />
* Phoenix: {1:MULTICHOICE:%0%California#Wrong~=Arizona#OK}<br />
<br />
The capital of France is {1:SHORTANSWER:%100%Paris#Congratulations!~%50%Marseille#No, that is the second largest city in France (after Paris).~*#Wrong answer. The capital of France is Paris, of course.}.<br />
<br />
23+ 0.8 = {2:NUMERICAL:=23.8:0.1#Feedback for correct answer 23.8 ~%50%23.8:2#Feedback for ½credit near correct answer}. </pre><br />
<br />
You would get all three questions as different parts of '''ONE question'''. (NOTE see that there are no linebreaks between the { } !)<br />
<br />
Multiple CLOZE questions can be imported using the XML format:<br />
<pre><br />
<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?><br />
<quiz><br />
<br />
<!-- question: 1 --><br />
<question type="cloze"><br />
<name><text>Book Test #1</text><br />
</name><br />
<questiontext><br />
<text><![CDATA[..............]]></text><br />
</questiontext><br />
<generalfeedback><br />
<text></text><br />
</generalfeedback><br />
<shuffleanswers>0</shuffleanswers><br />
</question><br />
<br />
<!-- question: 2 --><br />
<question type="cloze"><br />
<name><text>Book Test #2</text><br />
</name><br />
<questiontext><br />
<text><![CDATA[............]]></text><br />
</questiontext><br />
<generalfeedback><br />
<text></text><br />
</generalfeedback><br />
<shuffleanswers>0</shuffleanswers><br />
</question><br />
<br />
</quiz><br />
</pre><br />
You would put the question text including CLOZE code in the ....... spaces.<br />
<br />
==Online Cloze Question generator==<br />
* There is a website to generate CLOZE quizzes for Moodle (1.9 and 2.x and 3.x versions) and/or to try out the CLOZE editor integration for Moodle.<br />
* This editor was built at the Chair of Applied English Linguistics at Universitaet Tuebingen, Germany, by Andreas Glombitza (andiglombitza(at)googlemail.com) and Achim Skuta (achim.skuta(at)googlemail.com).<br />
* The authors are currently maintaining this software and webservice as a private project.<br />
<br />
Website: [http://projects.ael.uni-tuebingen.de/quiz/htmlarea/index.php http://projects.ael.uni-tuebingen.de/quiz/htmlarea/index.php]<br />
<br />
==Cloze editor plugin for TinyMCE==<br />
* You can download a [https://moodle.org/plugins/view.php?plugin=other_cloze Moodle plugin from the Moodle plugins database] that will let you create these questions from a graphical interface within your Moodle site. There are versions available for Moodle 1.9, 2.x and 3.x.<br />
<br />
==Cloze editor plugin for Atto==<br />
This [[Cloze editor for Atto|new plugin for Moodle 3.1+]] was developed by Daniel Thies and is available for download and install from the Moodle plugins database..<br />
<br />
==Question with 1 media (e.g. audio) and several subquestions==<br />
As described in [https://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=376874 this forum post], you can easily make a question where the student inspect a media (e.g. an audio file) and then has to answer several small multiple choice questions. The example below is from a Moodle 3.5.2+ site using the new Record audio tool in the Atto editor. The Record video tool will also let you add video as part of the question, if you want to.<br />
<br />
[[File:CLOZE question with 1 audio and 3 sub-questions.png|400px]]<br />
<br />
== Questions with student notes and feedback for teacher==<br />
You can easily make one/many/all question(s) with an optional field for student notes and/or feedback for the teacher, as requested in [https://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=353587 this forum thread]. Note that only the first MULTICHOICE question is marked, and the two optional fields do not score positive nor negative points:<br />
<br />
[[File:CLOZE question with student comment and teacher feedback.png]]<br />
<br />
The full question for the above example is:<br />
<br />
Which of the following options is the right answer ?<br />
{1:MULTICHOICE_VS:~A wrong answer~Another wrong answer~Yet another wrong answer~%100%This is the only right answer}<br />
Optionally:Write a personal note: {0:SHORTANSWER:~%0%I want to have a longer input box for the note.~%100%*}<br />
Optionally:Send feedback to teacher:{0:SHORTANSWER:~%0%I want to have a longer input box for the feedback.~%100%*}<br />
<br />
<br />
==See also==<br />
* See the [http://projects.ael.uni-tuebingen.de/quiz/htmlarea/index.php online Cloze question generator].<br />
* Download the newest version of the [[Cloze editor for TinyMCE]] for Moodle 1.9 and for Moodle 2.0 to 3.3 from [https://moodle.org/plugins/view.php?plugin=tinymce_clozeeditor the Moodle plugins database]<br />
* Easily edit embedded answer questions with the additional plugin [[Cloze editor for Atto]] for Moodle 2.7+<br />
<br />
This information was drawn from:<br />
*Using Moodle [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=36521 Is there a guide to using the cloze format?] forum discussion<br />
*Using Moodle [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=36430&parent=170308 Cloze-type question syntax] forum post<br />
<br />
[[Category:Language teaching]]<br />
<br />
[[de:Fragetyp Lückentext (Cloze)]]<br />
[[es:Tipo de Pregunta con respuestas incrustadas (Cloze)]]<br />
[[fr:Question Cloze à réponses intégrées]]<br />
[[ja: 穴埋め問題 ( Cloze ) タイプ]]<br />
[[zh:填空題(克漏字)]]</div>Dbauer-etshttps://docs.moodle.org/36/en/index.php?title=Embedded_Answers_(Cloze)_question_type&diff=133183Embedded Answers (Cloze) question type2019-03-02T14:21:02Z<p>Dbauer-ets: /* Question set-up */</p>
<hr />
<div>{{Questions}}<br />
'''Embedded answers (Cloze)''' questions consist of a passage of text (in Moodle format) that has various answers embedded within it, including multiple choice, short answers and numerical answers.<br />
<br />
Until mid2013, there was no graphical interface to create these questions within your Moodle site - you needed to specify the question format using the text box or by importing them from external files.<br />
<br />
You can link to an external web site that does create these questions from a graphical interface, see the ''[http://projects.ael.uni-tuebingen.de/quiz/htmlarea/index.php Online Cloze Question quiz generator]'' below.<br />
<br />
There is an Excel-based [http://hbwubecc.wixsite.com/jordan/tools Cloze and GIFT Generator] that was presented at the 2017 Moodle Moot Japan.<br />
<br />
There is a [[Cloze editor for TinyMCE]] that will let you create these questions from a graphical interface within your Moodle site, but it will overwrite your current HTML editor and only works with the [[TinyMCE editor]] but not with [[Atto]]. In 2016 a [[Cloze editor for Atto]] additional plugin was created.<br />
<br />
Lots of people suggested that [[Hot Potatoes]] software is the easiest way to create Embedded answer (Cloze) questions. Once you have created your questions on your PC, you can then import them into Moodle's quiz module.<br />
<br />
However, the flexibility of the Cloze question type is hard to equal and despite the minor coding that you need to create the questions, it has great worth in the Moodle Quiz.<br />
<br />
==Question set-up==<br />
<br />
#Select the question category<br />
#Give the question a descriptive name - this allows you to identify it in the question bank.<br />
#Enter the passage of text (in Moodle format - see [[Embedded_Answers_%28Cloze%29_question_type#Format|Format]] below) into the 'question text' field.<br />
#Select an image to display if you want to add a picture to the question. For the student, it appears immediately above the question text.<br />
#Set the 'default question grade' (i.e. the maximum number of marks for this question).<br />
#Set the 'Penalty factor' (see [[Embedded_Answers_%28Cloze%29_question_type#Penalty_factor|Penalty factor]] below).<br />
#If you wish, add general feedback. This is text that appears to the student after he/she has answered the question.<br />
#The editor has been modified and allows you to test if your syntax is good. The different questions elements decoded will be displayed and syntax errors pinpoint. However, it cannot check if the question decoded is two questions in one because of an error syntax (for example ~}, =~, etc.).<br />
#Click Save changes to add the question to the category.<br />
<br />
=== Penalty factor ===<br />
<br />
The 'penalty factor' only applies when the question is used in a quiz using adaptive mode - i.e. where the student is allowed multiple attempts at a question even within the same attempt at the quiz. If the penalty factor is more than 0, then the student will lose that proportion of the '''maximum''' grade upon each successive attempt. For example, if the default question grade is 10, and the penalty factor is 0.2, then each successive attempt after the first one will incur a penalty of 0.2 x 10 = 2 points. The grading for the cloze question applies the penalty to each subpart of the question as a whole. For example, if you have three fill in the blanks each worth 1 point each, then the penalty will only be incurred on the incorrect parts, not the questions as a whole.<br />
<br />
==Question rendering==<br />
<br />
The question answer entry space or INPUT HTML ELEMENT (for Short Answer and Numerical question types) and the dropdown list or SELECT HTML ELEMENT (for multichoice) are normally displayed in-line with the text.<br />
<br />
The size of the entry space or INPUT HTML ELEMENT ( Short and Numerical) will be adjustable to the length of the longest answer (good or bad) + a random number (0 to 15% total length).([[User:Pierre Pichet|Pierre Pichet]] 15:37, 26 January 2008 (CST))<br />
<br />
The size will adjust to the length of the student response when displayed in the grading and feedback process.<br />
<br />
The size of the dropdown list or SELECT HTML ELEMENT (multichoice) adjusts itself automatically to the longest answer.<br />
<br />
==Format==<br />
<br />
Questions consist of a passage of text (in Moodle format) that has various sub-questions embedded within it, including<br />
<br />
* short answers (SHORTANSWER or SA or MW), case is unimportant,<br />
* short answers (SHORTANSWER_C or SAC or MWC), case must match,<br />
* numerical answers (NUMERICAL or NM),<br />
* multiple choice (MULTICHOICE or MC), represented as a dropdown menu in-line in the text,<br />
* multiple choice (MULTICHOICE_V or MCV), represented as a vertical column of radio buttons, or<br />
* multiple choice (MULTICHOICE_H or MCH), represented as a horizontal row of radio-buttons,<br />
* multiple choice (MULTIRESPONSE or MR), represented as a vertical row of checkboxes<br />
* multiple choice (MULTIRESPONSE_H or MRH), represented as a horizontal row of checkboxes<br />
===Shuffle sub questions===<br />
When the quiz question behavior shuffle option is set to '''YES''', the following special multiple choice sub-questions elements will be shuffled:<br />
* multiple choice (MULTICHOICE_S or MCS), represented as a dropdown menu in-line in the text,<br />
* multiple choice (MULTICHOICE_VS or MCVS), represented as a vertical column of radio buttons, or<br />
* multiple choice (MULTICHOICE_HS or MCHS), represented as a horizontal row of radio-buttons.<br />
* multiple choice (MULTIRESPONSE_S or MRS), represented as a vertical row of checkboxes<br />
* multiple choice (MULTIRESPONSE_HS or MRHS), represented as a horizontal row of checkboxes<br />
<br />
{{Note|MCS, MCVS, MCHS are new (Moodle 3.0) Cloze subquestion types with shuffling of answers. See MDL-38214.}}<br />
<br />
The structure of each cloze sub-question is identical:<br />
:'''{''' start the cloze sub-question with a bracket (AltGr+7)<br />
:'''1''' define a grade for each cloze by a number (optional). This used for calculation of question grading.<br />
:''':SHORTANSWER:''' define the type of cloze sub-question. Definition is bounded by ':'. <br />
:'''~''' is a seperator between answer options<br />
:'''=''' marks a correct answer<br />
:'''#''' marks the beginning of an (optional) feedback message<br />
:'''}''' close the cloze sub-question at the end with a bracket (AltGr+0)<br />
<br />
Now a very simple example:<br />
<pre><br />
{1:SHORTANSWER:=Berlin} is the capital of Germany.<br />
</pre><br />
<br />
For full details of the format for embedded-answers questions, see the [[Embedded_Answers_%28Cloze%29_question_type#Detailed_syntax_explanations|detailed syntax explanation]] below.<br />
<br />
NB: Be careful when copying a cloze type question into the WYSIWYG HTML editor, as line breaks tend to get added, which destroys the question.<br />
<br />
If the correct answer contains } # ~ / " or \ you will have to escape them by putting a \ in front of each such character. But [[https://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=275299 this is tricky]]. The { shouldn't be escaped, this can be vital in getting TeX expressions to work. In the feedback ~ and } must be escaped otherwise it will be interpreted as ''the next answer'' or ''end of the short answer section'' respectively. Quotation signs: " can lead to trouble anyhow in both places. Use the HTML entity: & quot; (without the space between ''&'' and ''quot;''). If you want to have Mathematical symbols there can be problems with the \ used in TeX expressions. One alternative can be to use [[unicode]] characters. <br />
<br />
See the notes further down about numerical embedded question!<br />
<br />
===Examples===<br />
<br />
====Example 1====<br />
The following text creates a simple embedded-answers question:<br />
<br />
Match the following cities with the correct state:<br />
* San Francisco: {1:MULTICHOICE:=California#OK~Arizona#Wrong}<br />
* Tucson: {1:MULTICHOICE:California#Wrong~%100%Arizona#OK}<br />
* Los Angeles: {1:MULTICHOICE:=California#OK~Arizona#Wrong}<br />
* Phoenix: {1:MULTICHOICE:%0%California#Wrong~=Arizona#OK}<br />
The capital of France is {1:SHORTANSWER:%100%Paris#Congratulations!<br />
~%50%Marseille#No, that is the second largest city in France (after<br />
Paris).~*#Wrong answer. The capital of France is Paris, of course.}.<br />
<br />
And the result will be:<br />
<br />
[[Image:Cloze.gif|Cloze question type]] <br />
<br />
====Example 2====<br />
<div style="padding: 1em;border: 1px dashed #FFB53A;color: black;background-color: #f9f9f9;font-family: monospace;font-size:1.2em;"><br />
This question consists of some text with an answer embedded right here {1:MULTICHOICE:Wrong answer#Feedback for this wrong answer~Another wrong answer#Feedback for the other wrong answer~=Correct answer#Feedback for correct answer~%50%Answer that gives half the credit#Feedback for half credit answer}<br />
<br />
and right after that you will have to deal with this short answer {1:SHORTANSWER:Wrong answer#Feedback for this wrong answer~=Correct answer#Feedback for correct answer~%50%Answer that gives half the credit#Feedback for half credit answer}<br />
<br />
and finally we have a floating point number {2:NUMERICAL:=23.8:0.1#Feedback for correct answer 23.8~%50%23.8:2#Feedback for half credit answer in the nearby region of the correct answer}.<br />
<br />
The multichoice question can also be shown in the vertical display of the standard moodle multiple choice.<br />
{2:MCV:1. Wrong answer#Feedback for this wrong answer~2. Another wrong answer#Feedback for the other wrong answer~=3. Correct answer#Feedback for correct answer~%50%4. Answer that gives half the credit#Feedback for half credit answer}<br />
<br />
Or in an horizontal display that is included here in a table<br />
{2:MCH:a. Wrong answer#Feedback for this wrong answer~b. Another wrong answer#Feedback for the other wrong answer~=c. Correct answer#Feedback for correct answer~%50%d. Answer that gives half the credit#Feedback for half credit answer}<br />
<br />
A shortanswer question where case must match. Write moodle in upper case letters {1:SHORTANSWER_C:moodle#Feedback for moodle in lower case ~=MOODLE#Feedback for MOODLE in upper case ~%50%Moodle#Feedback for only first letter in upper case}<br />
<br />
Note that addresses like www.moodle.org and smileys :-) all work as normal:<br />
<br />
a) How good is this? {:MULTICHOICE:=Yes#Correct~No#We have a different opinion}<br />
<br />
b) What grade would you give it? {3:NUMERICAL:=3:2}<br />
</div><br />
[[Image:Cloze example.png]]<br />
<br />
Some things to note:<br />
* The individual embedded answers are represented by the code in braces {}.<br />
* The number at the start is the 'weight', so in this case each answer contributes an equal share of the overall grade.<br />
* The correct option in each case is preceded either by an = sign or by %100%. <br />
* The text appearing after the # that follows each option is the feedback that the student will see if they choose that option.<br />
* If the student enters 'Marseille' in the final example, they score 50% of the total grade.<br />
* The asterisk * preceding the "Wrong answer" feedback in the final example means that the student will see this feedback if they enter anything other than "Paris" or "Marseille".<br />
* For multiple choice vertical or horizontal rendering there is no automatic numbering, though can added at each answer.<br />
<br />
==Detailed syntax explanations==<br />
# All question items within a cloze-type question are coded inside curled braces { }.<br />
# The number which appears between the opening brace and the colon {1: is the weighting of that item; if it is set at 1 for all the items, it needs not be specified, so you can have {:.<br />
# After the colon we have the item question type: MULTICHOICE, SHORTANSWER, NUMERICAL.<br />
# '''NOTE'''.- If you have installed the [https://moodle.org/plugins/qtype_regexp REGEXP question type plugin] you can also use the REGEXP question type; see [https://docs.moodle.org/36/en/Regular_Expression_Short-Answer_question_type#Inserting_RegExp_sub-questions_in_Cloze_type_questions instructions here].<br />
# The syntax for MULTICHOICE and SHORTANSWER is the same; the only difference is in the displaying of the item to the student.<br />
# The order of the various answers is indifferent (except if you want a catch-all for wrong answers, see #13 below).<br />
# A correct answer is preceded with the equal sign = or a percentage (usually %100%) - '''Note''': [[Talk:Embedded_Answers_(Cloze)_question_type| The equal sign (=) doesn't seem to work with SHORTANSWER.]]<br />
# A wrong answer is preceded with nothing or a percentage (usually %0%)but you can even use negative points by preceding with ~%-25% [not before Moodle 2.0]).<br />
# You can allocate some points between 0 and 100 to some answers, if you put the appropriate percentage.<br />
# All answers except the first one are separated from one another by the tilde ~ sign.<br />
# Answers can be followed by an optional feedback message, preceded with the # sign; if there is no feedback message, the # sign can be present or absent, it does not matter.<br />
# Note that the feedback message and the correct answer are displayed in a small popup window (if and when the correct and or feedback have been declared accessible to the students in the Quiz settings) upon mouse hovering. The popup window has a title "feedback" and you can use HTML tags to format your feedback. In some browsers (For example IE5.5) the form fields can cover part of the feedback windows. It can help to not have the formfields for the answers too close to each other.<br />
# In the SHORTANSWER type you may want to put a catch-all (wrong) answer in order to send a "wrong, try again" feedback; you can do this by inserting an asterisk '''*''' as '''the very last expected answer''' in your formula.<br />
# You should not have sequences such as %#, %~, %}, =#, =%, =}, ~#, ~% and ~} in the answer because you should not have empty answers or empty answer options. In addition, these two character sequences are problematic because the second character is interpreted as if it were escaped<sup>(why?)</sup> and gives unexpected results.<br />
<br />
==Numerical Cloze questions== <br />
<br />
From the student perspective, a numerical Cloze question looks just like a short-answer question or ''fill in the blanks''.<br />
<br />
The difference is that numerical answers are allowed to have an accepted error. This allows a continuous range of answers to be set. You can also express your answer in some different numerical formats. 23.4 23,4 (some countries use , as a decimal separator) and 2.34E+1 (meaning 2.34*10^1) would be interpreted as the same.<br />
<br />
=== False positives ===<br />
<br />
'''Note:''' the following examples of false positives do '''not''' apply to Moodle 1.8+, where you cannot use percentages or fractions as the answers in a numerical Cloze test; Moodle will generate an error if you try to save such a question. However the following may be relevant for earlier versions of Moodle.<br />
<br />
More examples: <br />
0.5 accepts .5 0.5 ,5 0,5 0.500 5e-1 5E-1 but not 1/2 50% <br />
50% accepts 50% 50.0% 5E1% 50/100 even '''50/1000 50''' but not 500/1000 0.5 <br />
1/2 accepts 1/2 '''1/3 1twenty''' but not 2/4 0.5 0,5 3/6 50% ½ <br />
½ accepts ½ <br />
HALF doesn't even accept HALF (maybe '''0'''?) <br />
<br />
If you want to accept several variants you can have them in the same {} but '''be careful, notice the "false positives" in bold'''!<br />
<br />
===Syntax for numerical Cloze questions===<br />
<br />
The format of a NUMERICAL Cloze question is similar to that of the other Cloze types and they can be mixed in the same question. As with other Cloze tests, you write your question or incomplete text, and add the Cloze code at the point where the student is supposed to enter their numerical answer.<br />
<br />
An example of the syntax used is shown below:<br />
<br />
'''Note: ''' It is preferable to write the code in 'source code' mode. The WSIWYG editor can insert linebreaks that make the question not function. The linebreak in the example box below is for readability only! A problem with these questions is the readability of the code! :( <br />
<br />
{2:NUMERICAL:=23.8:0.1#Feedback for correct answer 23.8 <br />
~%50%23.8:2#Feedback for ½credit near correct answer}. <br />
<br />
In this example:<br />
* 2: is the question point weight, which means that this question has twice the weight in the final point(s) for this question as other partial answers with weight 1 (or no declared weight - you can start with {: for the default weight 1) in the same question.<br />
* NUMERICAL: says what kind of question it is. It must be in CAPS. <br />
* =23.8:0.1 = or %100% means correct if the answer is 23.8 with an accepted error of 0.1, then any number between 23.7 and 23.9 will be accepted as correct. (In the GIFT numerical question one can express an interval like this 13..15 or 14:1 but in Cloze only 14:1 works.) <br />
* #Feedback for correct answer 23.8 is preceded by #<br />
* ~%50%23.8:2 ~ is the separator for answer alternatives %50% means this answer would get 50% of the score that the more precise answer had gotten. Because the tolerance here is 2, 21.8 to 25.8 would get this point and feedback.<br />
<br />
The feedback (which is seen within a popup window when the user hovers over the answer space) is formattable with HTML tags. For example, if you want an exponent, surround it with superscript tags: &lt;sup&gt; &lt;/sup&gt;. You can even include pictures in the feedback popup, but you must clean out all " characters and save while still in source code mode (not WYSIWYG). So, this works in feedback popup:<br />
#See this picture:&lt;br&gt;&lt;img src=Something.gif />} <br />
but not this:<br />
#See this picture:&lt;br&gt;&lt;img src="Something.gif" />} <br />
<br />
(ALGEBRA and TEX filters don't work in the feedback popups, but they can be very useful in the question writing for math/science expressions). But you can use [[Unicode]] characters. <br />
<br />
If you want to give feedback for any answer that didn't fit the intervals you already have specified feedback for, add some BIG general intervals, like for positive answers (if they aren't bigger than 20000 you could add: <br />
~%0%10000.0001:10000#Feedback for unspecified not_right answers} <br />
This would give feedback for anything from 0.0001 to 20000.0001 (that hadn't already gotten feedback). I didn't want to include 0 since that special case as well as negative ought to have specific reactions. <br />
~%0%0#Hey! It can't be zero <br />
~%0%-10000.0001:10000#We just want the size here, <br />
so a negative value is not what we want} <br />
<br />
Numerical questions could, before version 1.7, also have case-insensitive non-numerical answers. This is useful whenever the answer for a numerical question is something like +inf, -inf, NaN etc.<br />
==Importing CLOZE questions==<br />
If you try importing directly as CLOZE this text:<br />
<pre><br />
Single line per question! Match the following cities with the correct state:<br />
* San Francisco: {1:MULTICHOICE:=California#OK~Arizona#Wrong}<br />
* Tucson: {1:MULTICHOICE:California#Wrong~%100%Arizona#OK}<br />
* Los Angeles: {1:MULTICHOICE:=California#OK~Arizona#Wrong}<br />
* Phoenix: {1:MULTICHOICE:%0%California#Wrong~=Arizona#OK}<br />
<br />
The capital of France is {1:SHORTANSWER:%100%Paris#Congratulations!~%50%Marseille#No, that is the second largest city in France (after Paris).~*#Wrong answer. The capital of France is Paris, of course.}.<br />
<br />
23+ 0.8 = {2:NUMERICAL:=23.8:0.1#Feedback for correct answer 23.8 ~%50%23.8:2#Feedback for ½credit near correct answer}. </pre><br />
<br />
You would get all three questions as different parts of '''ONE question'''. (NOTE see that there are no linebreaks between the { } !)<br />
<br />
Multiple CLOZE questions can be imported using the XML format:<br />
<pre><br />
<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?><br />
<quiz><br />
<br />
<!-- question: 1 --><br />
<question type="cloze"><br />
<name><text>Book Test #1</text><br />
</name><br />
<questiontext><br />
<text><![CDATA[..............]]></text><br />
</questiontext><br />
<generalfeedback><br />
<text></text><br />
</generalfeedback><br />
<shuffleanswers>0</shuffleanswers><br />
</question><br />
<br />
<!-- question: 2 --><br />
<question type="cloze"><br />
<name><text>Book Test #2</text><br />
</name><br />
<questiontext><br />
<text><![CDATA[............]]></text><br />
</questiontext><br />
<generalfeedback><br />
<text></text><br />
</generalfeedback><br />
<shuffleanswers>0</shuffleanswers><br />
</question><br />
<br />
</quiz><br />
</pre><br />
You would put the question text including CLOZE code in the ....... spaces.<br />
<br />
==Online Cloze Question generator==<br />
* There is a website to generate CLOZE quizzes for Moodle (1.9 and 2.x and 3.x versions) and/or to try out the CLOZE editor integration for Moodle.<br />
* This editor was built at the Chair of Applied English Linguistics at Universitaet Tuebingen, Germany, by Andreas Glombitza (andiglombitza(at)googlemail.com) and Achim Skuta (achim.skuta(at)googlemail.com).<br />
* The authors are currently maintaining this software and webservice as a private project.<br />
<br />
Website: [http://projects.ael.uni-tuebingen.de/quiz/htmlarea/index.php http://projects.ael.uni-tuebingen.de/quiz/htmlarea/index.php]<br />
<br />
==Cloze editor plugin for TinyMCE==<br />
* You can download a [https://moodle.org/plugins/view.php?plugin=other_cloze Moodle plugin from the Moodle plugins database] that will let you create these questions from a graphical interface within your Moodle site. There are versions available for Moodle 1.9, 2.x and 3.x.<br />
<br />
==Cloze editor plugin for Atto==<br />
This [[Cloze editor for Atto|new plugin for Moodle 3.1+]] was developed by Daniel Thies and is available for download and install from the Moodle plugins database..<br />
<br />
==Question with 1 media (e.g. audio) and several subquestions==<br />
As described in [https://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=376874 this forum post], you can easily make a question where the student inspect a media (e.g. an audio file) and then has to answer several small multiple choice questions. The example below is from a Moodle 3.5.2+ site using the new Record audio tool in the Atto editor. The Record video tool will also let you add video as part of the question, if you want to.<br />
<br />
[[File:CLOZE question with 1 audio and 3 sub-questions.png|400px]]<br />
<br />
== Questions with student notes and feedback for teacher==<br />
You can easily make one/many/all question(s) with an optional field for student notes and/or feedback for the teacher, as requested in [https://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=353587 this forum thread]. Note that only the first MULTICHOICE question is marked, and the two optional fields do not score positive nor negative points:<br />
<br />
[[File:CLOZE question with student comment and teacher feedback.png]]<br />
<br />
The full question for the above example is:<br />
<br />
Which of the following options is the right answer ?<br />
{1:MULTICHOICE_VS:~A wrong answer~Another wrong answer~Yet another wrong answer~%100%This is the only right answer}<br />
Optionally:Write a personal note: {0:SHORTANSWER:~%0%I want to have a longer input box for the note.~%100%*}<br />
Optionally:Send feedback to teacher:{0:SHORTANSWER:~%0%I want to have a longer input box for the feedback.~%100%*}<br />
<br />
<br />
==See also==<br />
* See the [http://projects.ael.uni-tuebingen.de/quiz/htmlarea/index.php online Cloze question generator].<br />
* Download the newest version of the [[Cloze editor for TinyMCE]] for Moodle 1.9 and for Moodle 2.0 to 3.3 from [https://moodle.org/plugins/view.php?plugin=tinymce_clozeeditor the Moodle plugins database]<br />
* Easily edit embedded answer questions with the additional plugin [[Cloze editor for Atto]] for Moodle 2.7+<br />
<br />
This information was drawn from:<br />
*Using Moodle [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=36521 Is there a guide to using the cloze format?] forum discussion<br />
*Using Moodle [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=36430&parent=170308 Cloze-type question syntax] forum post<br />
<br />
[[Category:Language teaching]]<br />
<br />
[[de:Fragetyp Lückentext (Cloze)]]<br />
[[es:Tipo de Pregunta con respuestas incrustadas (Cloze)]]<br />
[[fr:Question Cloze à réponses intégrées]]<br />
[[ja: 穴埋め問題 ( Cloze ) タイプ]]<br />
[[zh:填空題(克漏字)]]</div>Dbauer-etshttps://docs.moodle.org/36/en/index.php?title=Embedded_Answers_(Cloze)_question_type&diff=133179Embedded Answers (Cloze) question type2019-02-28T23:04:20Z<p>Dbauer-ets: /* Detailed syntax explanations */</p>
<hr />
<div>{{Questions}}<br />
'''Embedded answers (Cloze)''' questions consist of a passage of text (in Moodle format) that has various answers embedded within it, including multiple choice, short answers and numerical answers.<br />
<br />
Until mid2013, there was no graphical interface to create these questions within your Moodle site - you needed to specify the question format using the text box or by importing them from external files.<br />
<br />
You can link to an external web site that does create these questions from a graphical interface, see the ''[http://projects.ael.uni-tuebingen.de/quiz/htmlarea/index.php Online Cloze Question quiz generator]'' below.<br />
<br />
There is an Excel-based [http://hbwubecc.wixsite.com/jordan/tools Cloze and GIFT Generator] that was presented at the 2017 Moodle Moot Japan.<br />
<br />
There is a [[Cloze editor for TinyMCE]] that will let you create these questions from a graphical interface within your Moodle site, but it will overwrite your current HTML editor and only works with the [[TinyMCE editor]] but not with [[Atto]]. In 2016 a [[Cloze editor for Atto]] additional plugin was created.<br />
<br />
Lots of people suggested that [[Hot Potatoes]] software is the easiest way to create Embedded answer (Cloze) questions. Once you have created your questions on your PC, you can then import them into Moodle's quiz module.<br />
<br />
However, the flexibility of the Cloze question type is hard to equal and despite the minor coding that you need to create the questions, it has great worth in the Moodle Quiz.<br />
<br />
==Question set-up==<br />
<br />
#Select the question category<br />
#Give the question a descriptive name - this allows you to identify it in the question bank.<br />
#Enter the passage of text (in Moodle format - see [[Embedded_Answers_%28Cloze%29_question_type#Format|Format]] below) into the 'question text' field.<br />
#Select an image to display if you want to add a picture to the question. For the student, it appears immediately above the question text.<br />
#Set the 'default question grade' (i.e. the maximum number of marks for this question).<br />
#Set the 'Penalty factor' (see [[Embedded_Answers_%28Cloze%29_question_type#Penalty_factor|Penalty factor]] below).<br />
#If you wish, add general feedback. This is text that appears to the student after he/she has answered the question.<br />
#The editor has been modified and allows you to test if your syntax is good. The different questions elements decoded will be displayed and syntax errors pinpoint. However, it cannot check if the question decoded is two questions in one because of an error syntax.<br />
#Click Save changes to add the question to the category.<br />
<br />
=== Penalty factor ===<br />
<br />
The 'penalty factor' only applies when the question is used in a quiz using adaptive mode - i.e. where the student is allowed multiple attempts at a question even within the same attempt at the quiz. If the penalty factor is more than 0, then the student will lose that proportion of the '''maximum''' grade upon each successive attempt. For example, if the default question grade is 10, and the penalty factor is 0.2, then each successive attempt after the first one will incur a penalty of 0.2 x 10 = 2 points. The grading for the cloze question applies the penalty to each subpart of the question as a whole. For example, if you have three fill in the blanks each worth 1 point each, then the penalty will only be incurred on the incorrect parts, not the questions as a whole.<br />
<br />
==Question rendering==<br />
<br />
The question answer entry space or INPUT HTML ELEMENT (for Short Answer and Numerical question types) and the dropdown list or SELECT HTML ELEMENT (for multichoice) are normally displayed in-line with the text.<br />
<br />
The size of the entry space or INPUT HTML ELEMENT ( Short and Numerical) will be adjustable to the length of the longest answer (good or bad) + a random number (0 to 15% total length).([[User:Pierre Pichet|Pierre Pichet]] 15:37, 26 January 2008 (CST))<br />
<br />
The size will adjust to the length of the student response when displayed in the grading and feedback process.<br />
<br />
The size of the dropdown list or SELECT HTML ELEMENT (multichoice) adjusts itself automatically to the longest answer.<br />
<br />
==Format==<br />
<br />
Questions consist of a passage of text (in Moodle format) that has various sub-questions embedded within it, including<br />
<br />
* short answers (SHORTANSWER or SA or MW), case is unimportant,<br />
* short answers (SHORTANSWER_C or SAC or MWC), case must match,<br />
* numerical answers (NUMERICAL or NM),<br />
* multiple choice (MULTICHOICE or MC), represented as a dropdown menu in-line in the text,<br />
* multiple choice (MULTICHOICE_V or MCV), represented as a vertical column of radio buttons, or<br />
* multiple choice (MULTICHOICE_H or MCH), represented as a horizontal row of radio-buttons,<br />
* multiple choice (MULTIRESPONSE or MR), represented as a vertical row of checkboxes<br />
* multiple choice (MULTIRESPONSE_H or MRH), represented as a horizontal row of checkboxes<br />
===Shuffle sub questions===<br />
When the quiz question behavior shuffle option is set to '''YES''', the following special multiple choice sub-questions elements will be shuffled:<br />
* multiple choice (MULTICHOICE_S or MCS), represented as a dropdown menu in-line in the text,<br />
* multiple choice (MULTICHOICE_VS or MCVS), represented as a vertical column of radio buttons, or<br />
* multiple choice (MULTICHOICE_HS or MCHS), represented as a horizontal row of radio-buttons.<br />
* multiple choice (MULTIRESPONSE_S or MRS), represented as a vertical row of checkboxes<br />
* multiple choice (MULTIRESPONSE_HS or MRHS), represented as a horizontal row of checkboxes<br />
<br />
{{Note|MCS, MCVS, MCHS are new (Moodle 3.0) Cloze subquestion types with shuffling of answers. See MDL-38214.}}<br />
<br />
The structure of each cloze sub-question is identical:<br />
:'''{''' start the cloze sub-question with a bracket (AltGr+7)<br />
:'''1''' define a grade for each cloze by a number (optional). This used for calculation of question grading.<br />
:''':SHORTANSWER:''' define the type of cloze sub-question. Definition is bounded by ':'. <br />
:'''~''' is a seperator between answer options<br />
:'''=''' marks a correct answer<br />
:'''#''' marks the beginning of an (optional) feedback message<br />
:'''}''' close the cloze sub-question at the end with a bracket (AltGr+0)<br />
<br />
Now a very simple example:<br />
<pre><br />
{1:SHORTANSWER:=Berlin} is the capital of Germany.<br />
</pre><br />
<br />
For full details of the format for embedded-answers questions, see the [[Embedded_Answers_%28Cloze%29_question_type#Detailed_syntax_explanations|detailed syntax explanation]] below.<br />
<br />
NB: Be careful when copying a cloze type question into the WYSIWYG HTML editor, as line breaks tend to get added, which destroys the question.<br />
<br />
If the correct answer contains } # ~ / " or \ you will have to escape them by putting a \ in front of each such character. But [[https://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=275299 this is tricky]]. The { shouldn't be escaped, this can be vital in getting TeX expressions to work. In the feedback ~ and } must be escaped otherwise it will be interpreted as ''the next answer'' or ''end of the short answer section'' respectively. Quotation signs: " can lead to trouble anyhow in both places. Use the HTML entity: & quot; (without the space between ''&'' and ''quot;''). If you want to have Mathematical symbols there can be problems with the \ used in TeX expressions. One alternative can be to use [[unicode]] characters. <br />
<br />
See the notes further down about numerical embedded question!<br />
<br />
===Examples===<br />
<br />
====Example 1====<br />
The following text creates a simple embedded-answers question:<br />
<br />
Match the following cities with the correct state:<br />
* San Francisco: {1:MULTICHOICE:=California#OK~Arizona#Wrong}<br />
* Tucson: {1:MULTICHOICE:California#Wrong~%100%Arizona#OK}<br />
* Los Angeles: {1:MULTICHOICE:=California#OK~Arizona#Wrong}<br />
* Phoenix: {1:MULTICHOICE:%0%California#Wrong~=Arizona#OK}<br />
The capital of France is {1:SHORTANSWER:%100%Paris#Congratulations!<br />
~%50%Marseille#No, that is the second largest city in France (after<br />
Paris).~*#Wrong answer. The capital of France is Paris, of course.}.<br />
<br />
And the result will be:<br />
<br />
[[Image:Cloze.gif|Cloze question type]] <br />
<br />
====Example 2====<br />
<div style="padding: 1em;border: 1px dashed #FFB53A;color: black;background-color: #f9f9f9;font-family: monospace;font-size:1.2em;"><br />
This question consists of some text with an answer embedded right here {1:MULTICHOICE:Wrong answer#Feedback for this wrong answer~Another wrong answer#Feedback for the other wrong answer~=Correct answer#Feedback for correct answer~%50%Answer that gives half the credit#Feedback for half credit answer}<br />
<br />
and right after that you will have to deal with this short answer {1:SHORTANSWER:Wrong answer#Feedback for this wrong answer~=Correct answer#Feedback for correct answer~%50%Answer that gives half the credit#Feedback for half credit answer}<br />
<br />
and finally we have a floating point number {2:NUMERICAL:=23.8:0.1#Feedback for correct answer 23.8~%50%23.8:2#Feedback for half credit answer in the nearby region of the correct answer}.<br />
<br />
The multichoice question can also be shown in the vertical display of the standard moodle multiple choice.<br />
{2:MCV:1. Wrong answer#Feedback for this wrong answer~2. Another wrong answer#Feedback for the other wrong answer~=3. Correct answer#Feedback for correct answer~%50%4. Answer that gives half the credit#Feedback for half credit answer}<br />
<br />
Or in an horizontal display that is included here in a table<br />
{2:MCH:a. Wrong answer#Feedback for this wrong answer~b. Another wrong answer#Feedback for the other wrong answer~=c. Correct answer#Feedback for correct answer~%50%d. Answer that gives half the credit#Feedback for half credit answer}<br />
<br />
A shortanswer question where case must match. Write moodle in upper case letters {1:SHORTANSWER_C:moodle#Feedback for moodle in lower case ~=MOODLE#Feedback for MOODLE in upper case ~%50%Moodle#Feedback for only first letter in upper case}<br />
<br />
Note that addresses like www.moodle.org and smileys :-) all work as normal:<br />
<br />
a) How good is this? {:MULTICHOICE:=Yes#Correct~No#We have a different opinion}<br />
<br />
b) What grade would you give it? {3:NUMERICAL:=3:2}<br />
</div><br />
[[Image:Cloze example.png]]<br />
<br />
Some things to note:<br />
* The individual embedded answers are represented by the code in braces {}.<br />
* The number at the start is the 'weight', so in this case each answer contributes an equal share of the overall grade.<br />
* The correct option in each case is preceded either by an = sign or by %100%. <br />
* The text appearing after the # that follows each option is the feedback that the student will see if they choose that option.<br />
* If the student enters 'Marseille' in the final example, they score 50% of the total grade.<br />
* The asterisk * preceding the "Wrong answer" feedback in the final example means that the student will see this feedback if they enter anything other than "Paris" or "Marseille".<br />
* For multiple choice vertical or horizontal rendering there is no automatic numbering, though can added at each answer.<br />
<br />
==Detailed syntax explanations==<br />
# All question items within a cloze-type question are coded inside curled braces { }.<br />
# The number which appears between the opening brace and the colon {1: is the weighting of that item; if it is set at 1 for all the items, it needs not be specified, so you can have {:.<br />
# After the colon we have the item question type: MULTICHOICE, SHORTANSWER, NUMERICAL.<br />
# '''NOTE'''.- If you have installed the [https://moodle.org/plugins/qtype_regexp REGEXP question type plugin] you can also use the REGEXP question type; see [https://docs.moodle.org/36/en/Regular_Expression_Short-Answer_question_type#Inserting_RegExp_sub-questions_in_Cloze_type_questions instructions here].<br />
# The syntax for MULTICHOICE and SHORTANSWER is the same; the only difference is in the displaying of the item to the student.<br />
# The order of the various answers is indifferent (except if you want a catch-all for wrong answers, see #13 below).<br />
# A correct answer is preceded with the equal sign = or a percentage (usually %100%) - '''Note''': [[Talk:Embedded_Answers_(Cloze)_question_type| The equal sign (=) doesn't seem to work with SHORTANSWER.]]<br />
# A wrong answer is preceded with nothing or a percentage (usually %0%)but you can even use negative points by preceding with ~%-25% [not before Moodle 2.0]).<br />
# You can allocate some points between 0 and 100 to some answers, if you put the appropriate percentage.<br />
# All answers except the first one are separated from one another by the tilde ~ sign.<br />
# Answers can be followed by an optional feedback message, preceded with the # sign; if there is no feedback message, the # sign can be present or absent, it does not matter.<br />
# Note that the feedback message and the correct answer are displayed in a small popup window (if and when the correct and or feedback have been declared accessible to the students in the Quiz settings) upon mouse hovering. The popup window has a title "feedback" and you can use HTML tags to format your feedback. In some browsers (For example IE5.5) the form fields can cover part of the feedback windows. It can help to not have the formfields for the answers too close to each other.<br />
# In the SHORTANSWER type you may want to put a catch-all (wrong) answer in order to send a "wrong, try again" feedback; you can do this by inserting an asterisk '''*''' as '''the very last expected answer''' in your formula.<br />
# You should not have sequences such as %#, %~, %}, =#, =%, =}, ~#, ~% and ~} in the answer because you should not have empty answers or empty answer options. In addition, these two character sequences are problematic because the second character is interpreted as if it were escaped<sup>(why?)</sup> and gives unexpected results.<br />
<br />
==Numerical Cloze questions== <br />
<br />
From the student perspective, a numerical Cloze question looks just like a short-answer question or ''fill in the blanks''.<br />
<br />
The difference is that numerical answers are allowed to have an accepted error. This allows a continuous range of answers to be set. You can also express your answer in some different numerical formats. 23.4 23,4 (some countries use , as a decimal separator) and 2.34E+1 (meaning 2.34*10^1) would be interpreted as the same.<br />
<br />
=== False positives ===<br />
<br />
'''Note:''' the following examples of false positives do '''not''' apply to Moodle 1.8+, where you cannot use percentages or fractions as the answers in a numerical Cloze test; Moodle will generate an error if you try to save such a question. However the following may be relevant for earlier versions of Moodle.<br />
<br />
More examples: <br />
0.5 accepts .5 0.5 ,5 0,5 0.500 5e-1 5E-1 but not 1/2 50% <br />
50% accepts 50% 50.0% 5E1% 50/100 even '''50/1000 50''' but not 500/1000 0.5 <br />
1/2 accepts 1/2 '''1/3 1twenty''' but not 2/4 0.5 0,5 3/6 50% ½ <br />
½ accepts ½ <br />
HALF doesn't even accept HALF (maybe '''0'''?) <br />
<br />
If you want to accept several variants you can have them in the same {} but '''be careful, notice the "false positives" in bold'''!<br />
<br />
===Syntax for numerical Cloze questions===<br />
<br />
The format of a NUMERICAL Cloze question is similar to that of the other Cloze types and they can be mixed in the same question. As with other Cloze tests, you write your question or incomplete text, and add the Cloze code at the point where the student is supposed to enter their numerical answer.<br />
<br />
An example of the syntax used is shown below:<br />
<br />
'''Note: ''' It is preferable to write the code in 'source code' mode. The WSIWYG editor can insert linebreaks that make the question not function. The linebreak in the example box below is for readability only! A problem with these questions is the readability of the code! :( <br />
<br />
{2:NUMERICAL:=23.8:0.1#Feedback for correct answer 23.8 <br />
~%50%23.8:2#Feedback for ½credit near correct answer}. <br />
<br />
In this example:<br />
* 2: is the question point weight, which means that this question has twice the weight in the final point(s) for this question as other partial answers with weight 1 (or no declared weight - you can start with {: for the default weight 1) in the same question.<br />
* NUMERICAL: says what kind of question it is. It must be in CAPS. <br />
* =23.8:0.1 = or %100% means correct if the answer is 23.8 with an accepted error of 0.1, then any number between 23.7 and 23.9 will be accepted as correct. (In the GIFT numerical question one can express an interval like this 13..15 or 14:1 but in Cloze only 14:1 works.) <br />
* #Feedback for correct answer 23.8 is preceded by #<br />
* ~%50%23.8:2 ~ is the separator for answer alternatives %50% means this answer would get 50% of the score that the more precise answer had gotten. Because the tolerance here is 2, 21.8 to 25.8 would get this point and feedback.<br />
<br />
The feedback (which is seen within a popup window when the user hovers over the answer space) is formattable with HTML tags. For example, if you want an exponent, surround it with superscript tags: &lt;sup&gt; &lt;/sup&gt;. You can even include pictures in the feedback popup, but you must clean out all " characters and save while still in source code mode (not WYSIWYG). So, this works in feedback popup:<br />
#See this picture:&lt;br&gt;&lt;img src=Something.gif />} <br />
but not this:<br />
#See this picture:&lt;br&gt;&lt;img src="Something.gif" />} <br />
<br />
(ALGEBRA and TEX filters don't work in the feedback popups, but they can be very useful in the question writing for math/science expressions). But you can use [[Unicode]] characters. <br />
<br />
If you want to give feedback for any answer that didn't fit the intervals you already have specified feedback for, add some BIG general intervals, like for positive answers (if they aren't bigger than 20000 you could add: <br />
~%0%10000.0001:10000#Feedback for unspecified not_right answers} <br />
This would give feedback for anything from 0.0001 to 20000.0001 (that hadn't already gotten feedback). I didn't want to include 0 since that special case as well as negative ought to have specific reactions. <br />
~%0%0#Hey! It can't be zero <br />
~%0%-10000.0001:10000#We just want the size here, <br />
so a negative value is not what we want} <br />
<br />
Numerical questions could, before version 1.7, also have case-insensitive non-numerical answers. This is useful whenever the answer for a numerical question is something like +inf, -inf, NaN etc.<br />
==Importing CLOZE questions==<br />
If you try importing directly as CLOZE this text:<br />
<pre><br />
Single line per question! Match the following cities with the correct state:<br />
* San Francisco: {1:MULTICHOICE:=California#OK~Arizona#Wrong}<br />
* Tucson: {1:MULTICHOICE:California#Wrong~%100%Arizona#OK}<br />
* Los Angeles: {1:MULTICHOICE:=California#OK~Arizona#Wrong}<br />
* Phoenix: {1:MULTICHOICE:%0%California#Wrong~=Arizona#OK}<br />
<br />
The capital of France is {1:SHORTANSWER:%100%Paris#Congratulations!~%50%Marseille#No, that is the second largest city in France (after Paris).~*#Wrong answer. The capital of France is Paris, of course.}.<br />
<br />
23+ 0.8 = {2:NUMERICAL:=23.8:0.1#Feedback for correct answer 23.8 ~%50%23.8:2#Feedback for ½credit near correct answer}. </pre><br />
<br />
You would get all three questions as different parts of '''ONE question'''. (NOTE see that there are no linebreaks between the { } !)<br />
<br />
Multiple CLOZE questions can be imported using the XML format:<br />
<pre><br />
<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?><br />
<quiz><br />
<br />
<!-- question: 1 --><br />
<question type="cloze"><br />
<name><text>Book Test #1</text><br />
</name><br />
<questiontext><br />
<text><![CDATA[..............]]></text><br />
</questiontext><br />
<generalfeedback><br />
<text></text><br />
</generalfeedback><br />
<shuffleanswers>0</shuffleanswers><br />
</question><br />
<br />
<!-- question: 2 --><br />
<question type="cloze"><br />
<name><text>Book Test #2</text><br />
</name><br />
<questiontext><br />
<text><![CDATA[............]]></text><br />
</questiontext><br />
<generalfeedback><br />
<text></text><br />
</generalfeedback><br />
<shuffleanswers>0</shuffleanswers><br />
</question><br />
<br />
</quiz><br />
</pre><br />
You would put the question text including CLOZE code in the ....... spaces.<br />
<br />
==Online Cloze Question generator==<br />
* There is a website to generate CLOZE quizzes for Moodle (1.9 and 2.x and 3.x versions) and/or to try out the CLOZE editor integration for Moodle.<br />
* This editor was built at the Chair of Applied English Linguistics at Universitaet Tuebingen, Germany, by Andreas Glombitza (andiglombitza(at)googlemail.com) and Achim Skuta (achim.skuta(at)googlemail.com).<br />
* The authors are currently maintaining this software and webservice as a private project.<br />
<br />
Website: [http://projects.ael.uni-tuebingen.de/quiz/htmlarea/index.php http://projects.ael.uni-tuebingen.de/quiz/htmlarea/index.php]<br />
<br />
==Cloze editor plugin for TinyMCE==<br />
* You can download a [https://moodle.org/plugins/view.php?plugin=other_cloze Moodle plugin from the Moodle plugins database] that will let you create these questions from a graphical interface within your Moodle site. There are versions available for Moodle 1.9, 2.x and 3.x.<br />
<br />
==Cloze editor plugin for Atto==<br />
This [[Cloze editor for Atto|new plugin for Moodle 3.1+]] was developed by Daniel Thies and is available for download and install from the Moodle plugins database..<br />
<br />
==Question with 1 media (e.g. audio) and several subquestions==<br />
As described in [https://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=376874 this forum post], you can easily make a question where the student inspect a media (e.g. an audio file) and then has to answer several small multiple choice questions. The example below is from a Moodle 3.5.2+ site using the new Record audio tool in the Atto editor. The Record video tool will also let you add video as part of the question, if you want to.<br />
<br />
[[File:CLOZE question with 1 audio and 3 sub-questions.png|400px]]<br />
<br />
== Questions with student notes and feedback for teacher==<br />
You can easily make one/many/all question(s) with an optional field for student notes and/or feedback for the teacher, as requested in [https://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=353587 this forum thread]. Note that only the first MULTICHOICE question is marked, and the two optional fields do not score positive nor negative points:<br />
<br />
[[File:CLOZE question with student comment and teacher feedback.png]]<br />
<br />
The full question for the above example is:<br />
<br />
Which of the following options is the right answer ?<br />
{1:MULTICHOICE_VS:~A wrong answer~Another wrong answer~Yet another wrong answer~%100%This is the only right answer}<br />
Optionally:Write a personal note: {0:SHORTANSWER:~%0%I want to have a longer input box for the note.~%100%*}<br />
Optionally:Send feedback to teacher:{0:SHORTANSWER:~%0%I want to have a longer input box for the feedback.~%100%*}<br />
<br />
<br />
==See also==<br />
* See the [http://projects.ael.uni-tuebingen.de/quiz/htmlarea/index.php online Cloze question generator].<br />
* Download the newest version of the [[Cloze editor for TinyMCE]] for Moodle 1.9 and for Moodle 2.0 to 3.3 from [https://moodle.org/plugins/view.php?plugin=tinymce_clozeeditor the Moodle plugins database]<br />
* Easily edit embedded answer questions with the additional plugin [[Cloze editor for Atto]] for Moodle 2.7+<br />
<br />
This information was drawn from:<br />
*Using Moodle [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=36521 Is there a guide to using the cloze format?] forum discussion<br />
*Using Moodle [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=36430&parent=170308 Cloze-type question syntax] forum post<br />
<br />
[[Category:Language teaching]]<br />
<br />
[[de:Fragetyp Lückentext (Cloze)]]<br />
[[es:Tipo de Pregunta con respuestas incrustadas (Cloze)]]<br />
[[fr:Question Cloze à réponses intégrées]]<br />
[[ja: 穴埋め問題 ( Cloze ) タイプ]]<br />
[[zh:填空題(克漏字)]]</div>Dbauer-etshttps://docs.moodle.org/36/en/index.php?title=Embedded_Answers_(Cloze)_question_type&diff=133178Embedded Answers (Cloze) question type2019-02-28T22:27:33Z<p>Dbauer-ets: /* Detailed syntax explanations */</p>
<hr />
<div>{{Questions}}<br />
'''Embedded answers (Cloze)''' questions consist of a passage of text (in Moodle format) that has various answers embedded within it, including multiple choice, short answers and numerical answers.<br />
<br />
Until mid2013, there was no graphical interface to create these questions within your Moodle site - you needed to specify the question format using the text box or by importing them from external files.<br />
<br />
You can link to an external web site that does create these questions from a graphical interface, see the ''[http://projects.ael.uni-tuebingen.de/quiz/htmlarea/index.php Online Cloze Question quiz generator]'' below.<br />
<br />
There is an Excel-based [http://hbwubecc.wixsite.com/jordan/tools Cloze and GIFT Generator] that was presented at the 2017 Moodle Moot Japan.<br />
<br />
There is a [[Cloze editor for TinyMCE]] that will let you create these questions from a graphical interface within your Moodle site, but it will overwrite your current HTML editor and only works with the [[TinyMCE editor]] but not with [[Atto]]. In 2016 a [[Cloze editor for Atto]] additional plugin was created.<br />
<br />
Lots of people suggested that [[Hot Potatoes]] software is the easiest way to create Embedded answer (Cloze) questions. Once you have created your questions on your PC, you can then import them into Moodle's quiz module.<br />
<br />
However, the flexibility of the Cloze question type is hard to equal and despite the minor coding that you need to create the questions, it has great worth in the Moodle Quiz.<br />
<br />
==Question set-up==<br />
<br />
#Select the question category<br />
#Give the question a descriptive name - this allows you to identify it in the question bank.<br />
#Enter the passage of text (in Moodle format - see [[Embedded_Answers_%28Cloze%29_question_type#Format|Format]] below) into the 'question text' field.<br />
#Select an image to display if you want to add a picture to the question. For the student, it appears immediately above the question text.<br />
#Set the 'default question grade' (i.e. the maximum number of marks for this question).<br />
#Set the 'Penalty factor' (see [[Embedded_Answers_%28Cloze%29_question_type#Penalty_factor|Penalty factor]] below).<br />
#If you wish, add general feedback. This is text that appears to the student after he/she has answered the question.<br />
#The editor has been modified and allows you to test if your syntax is good. The different questions elements decoded will be displayed and syntax errors pinpoint. However, it cannot check if the question decoded is two questions in one because of an error syntax.<br />
#Click Save changes to add the question to the category.<br />
<br />
=== Penalty factor ===<br />
<br />
The 'penalty factor' only applies when the question is used in a quiz using adaptive mode - i.e. where the student is allowed multiple attempts at a question even within the same attempt at the quiz. If the penalty factor is more than 0, then the student will lose that proportion of the '''maximum''' grade upon each successive attempt. For example, if the default question grade is 10, and the penalty factor is 0.2, then each successive attempt after the first one will incur a penalty of 0.2 x 10 = 2 points. The grading for the cloze question applies the penalty to each subpart of the question as a whole. For example, if you have three fill in the blanks each worth 1 point each, then the penalty will only be incurred on the incorrect parts, not the questions as a whole.<br />
<br />
==Question rendering==<br />
<br />
The question answer entry space or INPUT HTML ELEMENT (for Short Answer and Numerical question types) and the dropdown list or SELECT HTML ELEMENT (for multichoice) are normally displayed in-line with the text.<br />
<br />
The size of the entry space or INPUT HTML ELEMENT ( Short and Numerical) will be adjustable to the length of the longest answer (good or bad) + a random number (0 to 15% total length).([[User:Pierre Pichet|Pierre Pichet]] 15:37, 26 January 2008 (CST))<br />
<br />
The size will adjust to the length of the student response when displayed in the grading and feedback process.<br />
<br />
The size of the dropdown list or SELECT HTML ELEMENT (multichoice) adjusts itself automatically to the longest answer.<br />
<br />
==Format==<br />
<br />
Questions consist of a passage of text (in Moodle format) that has various sub-questions embedded within it, including<br />
<br />
* short answers (SHORTANSWER or SA or MW), case is unimportant,<br />
* short answers (SHORTANSWER_C or SAC or MWC), case must match,<br />
* numerical answers (NUMERICAL or NM),<br />
* multiple choice (MULTICHOICE or MC), represented as a dropdown menu in-line in the text,<br />
* multiple choice (MULTICHOICE_V or MCV), represented as a vertical column of radio buttons, or<br />
* multiple choice (MULTICHOICE_H or MCH), represented as a horizontal row of radio-buttons,<br />
* multiple choice (MULTIRESPONSE or MR), represented as a vertical row of checkboxes<br />
* multiple choice (MULTIRESPONSE_H or MRH), represented as a horizontal row of checkboxes<br />
===Shuffle sub questions===<br />
When the quiz question behavior shuffle option is set to '''YES''', the following special multiple choice sub-questions elements will be shuffled:<br />
* multiple choice (MULTICHOICE_S or MCS), represented as a dropdown menu in-line in the text,<br />
* multiple choice (MULTICHOICE_VS or MCVS), represented as a vertical column of radio buttons, or<br />
* multiple choice (MULTICHOICE_HS or MCHS), represented as a horizontal row of radio-buttons.<br />
* multiple choice (MULTIRESPONSE_S or MRS), represented as a vertical row of checkboxes<br />
* multiple choice (MULTIRESPONSE_HS or MRHS), represented as a horizontal row of checkboxes<br />
<br />
{{Note|MCS, MCVS, MCHS are new (Moodle 3.0) Cloze subquestion types with shuffling of answers. See MDL-38214.}}<br />
<br />
The structure of each cloze sub-question is identical:<br />
:'''{''' start the cloze sub-question with a bracket (AltGr+7)<br />
:'''1''' define a grade for each cloze by a number (optional). This used for calculation of question grading.<br />
:''':SHORTANSWER:''' define the type of cloze sub-question. Definition is bounded by ':'. <br />
:'''~''' is a seperator between answer options<br />
:'''=''' marks a correct answer<br />
:'''#''' marks the beginning of an (optional) feedback message<br />
:'''}''' close the cloze sub-question at the end with a bracket (AltGr+0)<br />
<br />
Now a very simple example:<br />
<pre><br />
{1:SHORTANSWER:=Berlin} is the capital of Germany.<br />
</pre><br />
<br />
For full details of the format for embedded-answers questions, see the [[Embedded_Answers_%28Cloze%29_question_type#Detailed_syntax_explanations|detailed syntax explanation]] below.<br />
<br />
NB: Be careful when copying a cloze type question into the WYSIWYG HTML editor, as line breaks tend to get added, which destroys the question.<br />
<br />
If the correct answer contains } # ~ / " or \ you will have to escape them by putting a \ in front of each such character. But [[https://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=275299 this is tricky]]. The { shouldn't be escaped, this can be vital in getting TeX expressions to work. In the feedback ~ and } must be escaped otherwise it will be interpreted as ''the next answer'' or ''end of the short answer section'' respectively. Quotation signs: " can lead to trouble anyhow in both places. Use the HTML entity: & quot; (without the space between ''&'' and ''quot;''). If you want to have Mathematical symbols there can be problems with the \ used in TeX expressions. One alternative can be to use [[unicode]] characters. <br />
<br />
See the notes further down about numerical embedded question!<br />
<br />
===Examples===<br />
<br />
====Example 1====<br />
The following text creates a simple embedded-answers question:<br />
<br />
Match the following cities with the correct state:<br />
* San Francisco: {1:MULTICHOICE:=California#OK~Arizona#Wrong}<br />
* Tucson: {1:MULTICHOICE:California#Wrong~%100%Arizona#OK}<br />
* Los Angeles: {1:MULTICHOICE:=California#OK~Arizona#Wrong}<br />
* Phoenix: {1:MULTICHOICE:%0%California#Wrong~=Arizona#OK}<br />
The capital of France is {1:SHORTANSWER:%100%Paris#Congratulations!<br />
~%50%Marseille#No, that is the second largest city in France (after<br />
Paris).~*#Wrong answer. The capital of France is Paris, of course.}.<br />
<br />
And the result will be:<br />
<br />
[[Image:Cloze.gif|Cloze question type]] <br />
<br />
====Example 2====<br />
<div style="padding: 1em;border: 1px dashed #FFB53A;color: black;background-color: #f9f9f9;font-family: monospace;font-size:1.2em;"><br />
This question consists of some text with an answer embedded right here {1:MULTICHOICE:Wrong answer#Feedback for this wrong answer~Another wrong answer#Feedback for the other wrong answer~=Correct answer#Feedback for correct answer~%50%Answer that gives half the credit#Feedback for half credit answer}<br />
<br />
and right after that you will have to deal with this short answer {1:SHORTANSWER:Wrong answer#Feedback for this wrong answer~=Correct answer#Feedback for correct answer~%50%Answer that gives half the credit#Feedback for half credit answer}<br />
<br />
and finally we have a floating point number {2:NUMERICAL:=23.8:0.1#Feedback for correct answer 23.8~%50%23.8:2#Feedback for half credit answer in the nearby region of the correct answer}.<br />
<br />
The multichoice question can also be shown in the vertical display of the standard moodle multiple choice.<br />
{2:MCV:1. Wrong answer#Feedback for this wrong answer~2. Another wrong answer#Feedback for the other wrong answer~=3. Correct answer#Feedback for correct answer~%50%4. Answer that gives half the credit#Feedback for half credit answer}<br />
<br />
Or in an horizontal display that is included here in a table<br />
{2:MCH:a. Wrong answer#Feedback for this wrong answer~b. Another wrong answer#Feedback for the other wrong answer~=c. Correct answer#Feedback for correct answer~%50%d. Answer that gives half the credit#Feedback for half credit answer}<br />
<br />
A shortanswer question where case must match. Write moodle in upper case letters {1:SHORTANSWER_C:moodle#Feedback for moodle in lower case ~=MOODLE#Feedback for MOODLE in upper case ~%50%Moodle#Feedback for only first letter in upper case}<br />
<br />
Note that addresses like www.moodle.org and smileys :-) all work as normal:<br />
<br />
a) How good is this? {:MULTICHOICE:=Yes#Correct~No#We have a different opinion}<br />
<br />
b) What grade would you give it? {3:NUMERICAL:=3:2}<br />
</div><br />
[[Image:Cloze example.png]]<br />
<br />
Some things to note:<br />
* The individual embedded answers are represented by the code in braces {}.<br />
* The number at the start is the 'weight', so in this case each answer contributes an equal share of the overall grade.<br />
* The correct option in each case is preceded either by an = sign or by %100%. <br />
* The text appearing after the # that follows each option is the feedback that the student will see if they choose that option.<br />
* If the student enters 'Marseille' in the final example, they score 50% of the total grade.<br />
* The asterisk * preceding the "Wrong answer" feedback in the final example means that the student will see this feedback if they enter anything other than "Paris" or "Marseille".<br />
* For multiple choice vertical or horizontal rendering there is no automatic numbering, though can added at each answer.<br />
<br />
==Detailed syntax explanations==<br />
# All question items within a cloze-type question are coded inside curled braces { }.<br />
# The number which appears between the opening brace and the colon {1: is the weighting of that item; if it is set at 1 for all the items, it needs not be specified, so you can have {:.<br />
# After the colon we have the item question type: MULTICHOICE, SHORTANSWER, NUMERICAL.<br />
# '''NOTE'''.- If you have installed the [https://moodle.org/plugins/qtype_regexp REGEXP question type plugin] you can also use the REGEXP question type; see [https://docs.moodle.org/36/en/Regular_Expression_Short-Answer_question_type#Inserting_RegExp_sub-questions_in_Cloze_type_questions instructions here].<br />
# The syntax for MULTICHOICE and SHORTANSWER is the same; the only difference is in the displaying of the item to the student.<br />
# The order of the various answers is indifferent (except if you want a catch-all for wrong answers, see #13 below).<br />
# A correct answer is preceded with the equal sign = or a percentage (usually %100%) - '''Note''': [[Talk:Embedded_Answers_(Cloze)_question_type| The equal sign (=) doesn't seem to work with SHORTANSWER.]]<br />
# A wrong answer is preceded with nothing or a percentage (usually %0%)but you can even use negative points by preceding with ~%-25% [not before Moodle 2.0]).<br />
# You can allocate some points between 0 and 100 to some answers, if you put the appropriate percentage.<br />
# All answers except the first one are separated from one another by the tilde ~ sign.<br />
# Answers can be followed by an optional feedback message, preceded with the # sign; if there is no feedback message, the # sign can be present or absent, it does not matter.<br />
# Note that the feedback message and the correct answer are displayed in a small popup window (if and when the correct and or feedback have been declared accessible to the students in the Quiz settings) upon mouse hovering. The popup window has a title "feedback" and you can use HTML tags to format your feedback. In some browsers (For example IE5.5) the form fields can cover part of the feedback windows. It can help to not have the formfields for the answers too close to each other.<br />
# In the SHORTANSWER type you may want to put a catch-all (wrong) answer in order to send a "wrong, try again" feedback; you can do this by inserting an asterisk '''*''' as '''the very last expected answer''' in your formula.<br />
# You should not have sequences such as %#, %~, %}, =#, =%, =}, ~#, ~% and ~} in the answer because you should not have empty answers or empty answer options. These two character sequences are problematic because the second character is interpreted as if it were escaped<sup>(why?)</sup> and gives unexpected results.<br />
<br />
==Numerical Cloze questions== <br />
<br />
From the student perspective, a numerical Cloze question looks just like a short-answer question or ''fill in the blanks''.<br />
<br />
The difference is that numerical answers are allowed to have an accepted error. This allows a continuous range of answers to be set. You can also express your answer in some different numerical formats. 23.4 23,4 (some countries use , as a decimal separator) and 2.34E+1 (meaning 2.34*10^1) would be interpreted as the same.<br />
<br />
=== False positives ===<br />
<br />
'''Note:''' the following examples of false positives do '''not''' apply to Moodle 1.8+, where you cannot use percentages or fractions as the answers in a numerical Cloze test; Moodle will generate an error if you try to save such a question. However the following may be relevant for earlier versions of Moodle.<br />
<br />
More examples: <br />
0.5 accepts .5 0.5 ,5 0,5 0.500 5e-1 5E-1 but not 1/2 50% <br />
50% accepts 50% 50.0% 5E1% 50/100 even '''50/1000 50''' but not 500/1000 0.5 <br />
1/2 accepts 1/2 '''1/3 1twenty''' but not 2/4 0.5 0,5 3/6 50% ½ <br />
½ accepts ½ <br />
HALF doesn't even accept HALF (maybe '''0'''?) <br />
<br />
If you want to accept several variants you can have them in the same {} but '''be careful, notice the "false positives" in bold'''!<br />
<br />
===Syntax for numerical Cloze questions===<br />
<br />
The format of a NUMERICAL Cloze question is similar to that of the other Cloze types and they can be mixed in the same question. As with other Cloze tests, you write your question or incomplete text, and add the Cloze code at the point where the student is supposed to enter their numerical answer.<br />
<br />
An example of the syntax used is shown below:<br />
<br />
'''Note: ''' It is preferable to write the code in 'source code' mode. The WSIWYG editor can insert linebreaks that make the question not function. The linebreak in the example box below is for readability only! A problem with these questions is the readability of the code! :( <br />
<br />
{2:NUMERICAL:=23.8:0.1#Feedback for correct answer 23.8 <br />
~%50%23.8:2#Feedback for ½credit near correct answer}. <br />
<br />
In this example:<br />
* 2: is the question point weight, which means that this question has twice the weight in the final point(s) for this question as other partial answers with weight 1 (or no declared weight - you can start with {: for the default weight 1) in the same question.<br />
* NUMERICAL: says what kind of question it is. It must be in CAPS. <br />
* =23.8:0.1 = or %100% means correct if the answer is 23.8 with an accepted error of 0.1, then any number between 23.7 and 23.9 will be accepted as correct. (In the GIFT numerical question one can express an interval like this 13..15 or 14:1 but in Cloze only 14:1 works.) <br />
* #Feedback for correct answer 23.8 is preceded by #<br />
* ~%50%23.8:2 ~ is the separator for answer alternatives %50% means this answer would get 50% of the score that the more precise answer had gotten. Because the tolerance here is 2, 21.8 to 25.8 would get this point and feedback.<br />
<br />
The feedback (which is seen within a popup window when the user hovers over the answer space) is formattable with HTML tags. For example, if you want an exponent, surround it with superscript tags: &lt;sup&gt; &lt;/sup&gt;. You can even include pictures in the feedback popup, but you must clean out all " characters and save while still in source code mode (not WYSIWYG). So, this works in feedback popup:<br />
#See this picture:&lt;br&gt;&lt;img src=Something.gif />} <br />
but not this:<br />
#See this picture:&lt;br&gt;&lt;img src="Something.gif" />} <br />
<br />
(ALGEBRA and TEX filters don't work in the feedback popups, but they can be very useful in the question writing for math/science expressions). But you can use [[Unicode]] characters. <br />
<br />
If you want to give feedback for any answer that didn't fit the intervals you already have specified feedback for, add some BIG general intervals, like for positive answers (if they aren't bigger than 20000 you could add: <br />
~%0%10000.0001:10000#Feedback for unspecified not_right answers} <br />
This would give feedback for anything from 0.0001 to 20000.0001 (that hadn't already gotten feedback). I didn't want to include 0 since that special case as well as negative ought to have specific reactions. <br />
~%0%0#Hey! It can't be zero <br />
~%0%-10000.0001:10000#We just want the size here, <br />
so a negative value is not what we want} <br />
<br />
Numerical questions could, before version 1.7, also have case-insensitive non-numerical answers. This is useful whenever the answer for a numerical question is something like +inf, -inf, NaN etc.<br />
==Importing CLOZE questions==<br />
If you try importing directly as CLOZE this text:<br />
<pre><br />
Single line per question! Match the following cities with the correct state:<br />
* San Francisco: {1:MULTICHOICE:=California#OK~Arizona#Wrong}<br />
* Tucson: {1:MULTICHOICE:California#Wrong~%100%Arizona#OK}<br />
* Los Angeles: {1:MULTICHOICE:=California#OK~Arizona#Wrong}<br />
* Phoenix: {1:MULTICHOICE:%0%California#Wrong~=Arizona#OK}<br />
<br />
The capital of France is {1:SHORTANSWER:%100%Paris#Congratulations!~%50%Marseille#No, that is the second largest city in France (after Paris).~*#Wrong answer. The capital of France is Paris, of course.}.<br />
<br />
23+ 0.8 = {2:NUMERICAL:=23.8:0.1#Feedback for correct answer 23.8 ~%50%23.8:2#Feedback for ½credit near correct answer}. </pre><br />
<br />
You would get all three questions as different parts of '''ONE question'''. (NOTE see that there are no linebreaks between the { } !)<br />
<br />
Multiple CLOZE questions can be imported using the XML format:<br />
<pre><br />
<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?><br />
<quiz><br />
<br />
<!-- question: 1 --><br />
<question type="cloze"><br />
<name><text>Book Test #1</text><br />
</name><br />
<questiontext><br />
<text><![CDATA[..............]]></text><br />
</questiontext><br />
<generalfeedback><br />
<text></text><br />
</generalfeedback><br />
<shuffleanswers>0</shuffleanswers><br />
</question><br />
<br />
<!-- question: 2 --><br />
<question type="cloze"><br />
<name><text>Book Test #2</text><br />
</name><br />
<questiontext><br />
<text><![CDATA[............]]></text><br />
</questiontext><br />
<generalfeedback><br />
<text></text><br />
</generalfeedback><br />
<shuffleanswers>0</shuffleanswers><br />
</question><br />
<br />
</quiz><br />
</pre><br />
You would put the question text including CLOZE code in the ....... spaces.<br />
<br />
==Online Cloze Question generator==<br />
* There is a website to generate CLOZE quizzes for Moodle (1.9 and 2.x and 3.x versions) and/or to try out the CLOZE editor integration for Moodle.<br />
* This editor was built at the Chair of Applied English Linguistics at Universitaet Tuebingen, Germany, by Andreas Glombitza (andiglombitza(at)googlemail.com) and Achim Skuta (achim.skuta(at)googlemail.com).<br />
* The authors are currently maintaining this software and webservice as a private project.<br />
<br />
Website: [http://projects.ael.uni-tuebingen.de/quiz/htmlarea/index.php http://projects.ael.uni-tuebingen.de/quiz/htmlarea/index.php]<br />
<br />
==Cloze editor plugin for TinyMCE==<br />
* You can download a [https://moodle.org/plugins/view.php?plugin=other_cloze Moodle plugin from the Moodle plugins database] that will let you create these questions from a graphical interface within your Moodle site. There are versions available for Moodle 1.9, 2.x and 3.x.<br />
<br />
==Cloze editor plugin for Atto==<br />
This [[Cloze editor for Atto|new plugin for Moodle 3.1+]] was developed by Daniel Thies and is available for download and install from the Moodle plugins database..<br />
<br />
==Question with 1 media (e.g. audio) and several subquestions==<br />
As described in [https://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=376874 this forum post], you can easily make a question where the student inspect a media (e.g. an audio file) and then has to answer several small multiple choice questions. The example below is from a Moodle 3.5.2+ site using the new Record audio tool in the Atto editor. The Record video tool will also let you add video as part of the question, if you want to.<br />
<br />
[[File:CLOZE question with 1 audio and 3 sub-questions.png|400px]]<br />
<br />
== Questions with student notes and feedback for teacher==<br />
You can easily make one/many/all question(s) with an optional field for student notes and/or feedback for the teacher, as requested in [https://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=353587 this forum thread]. Note that only the first MULTICHOICE question is marked, and the two optional fields do not score positive nor negative points:<br />
<br />
[[File:CLOZE question with student comment and teacher feedback.png]]<br />
<br />
The full question for the above example is:<br />
<br />
Which of the following options is the right answer ?<br />
{1:MULTICHOICE_VS:~A wrong answer~Another wrong answer~Yet another wrong answer~%100%This is the only right answer}<br />
Optionally:Write a personal note: {0:SHORTANSWER:~%0%I want to have a longer input box for the note.~%100%*}<br />
Optionally:Send feedback to teacher:{0:SHORTANSWER:~%0%I want to have a longer input box for the feedback.~%100%*}<br />
<br />
<br />
==See also==<br />
* See the [http://projects.ael.uni-tuebingen.de/quiz/htmlarea/index.php online Cloze question generator].<br />
* Download the newest version of the [[Cloze editor for TinyMCE]] for Moodle 1.9 and for Moodle 2.0 to 3.3 from [https://moodle.org/plugins/view.php?plugin=tinymce_clozeeditor the Moodle plugins database]<br />
* Easily edit embedded answer questions with the additional plugin [[Cloze editor for Atto]] for Moodle 2.7+<br />
<br />
This information was drawn from:<br />
*Using Moodle [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=36521 Is there a guide to using the cloze format?] forum discussion<br />
*Using Moodle [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=36430&parent=170308 Cloze-type question syntax] forum post<br />
<br />
[[Category:Language teaching]]<br />
<br />
[[de:Fragetyp Lückentext (Cloze)]]<br />
[[es:Tipo de Pregunta con respuestas incrustadas (Cloze)]]<br />
[[fr:Question Cloze à réponses intégrées]]<br />
[[ja: 穴埋め問題 ( Cloze ) タイプ]]<br />
[[zh:填空題(克漏字)]]</div>Dbauer-etshttps://docs.moodle.org/36/en/index.php?title=Embedded_Answers_(Cloze)_question_type&diff=133177Embedded Answers (Cloze) question type2019-02-28T22:25:40Z<p>Dbauer-ets: /* Detailed syntax explanations */</p>
<hr />
<div>{{Questions}}<br />
'''Embedded answers (Cloze)''' questions consist of a passage of text (in Moodle format) that has various answers embedded within it, including multiple choice, short answers and numerical answers.<br />
<br />
Until mid2013, there was no graphical interface to create these questions within your Moodle site - you needed to specify the question format using the text box or by importing them from external files.<br />
<br />
You can link to an external web site that does create these questions from a graphical interface, see the ''[http://projects.ael.uni-tuebingen.de/quiz/htmlarea/index.php Online Cloze Question quiz generator]'' below.<br />
<br />
There is an Excel-based [http://hbwubecc.wixsite.com/jordan/tools Cloze and GIFT Generator] that was presented at the 2017 Moodle Moot Japan.<br />
<br />
There is a [[Cloze editor for TinyMCE]] that will let you create these questions from a graphical interface within your Moodle site, but it will overwrite your current HTML editor and only works with the [[TinyMCE editor]] but not with [[Atto]]. In 2016 a [[Cloze editor for Atto]] additional plugin was created.<br />
<br />
Lots of people suggested that [[Hot Potatoes]] software is the easiest way to create Embedded answer (Cloze) questions. Once you have created your questions on your PC, you can then import them into Moodle's quiz module.<br />
<br />
However, the flexibility of the Cloze question type is hard to equal and despite the minor coding that you need to create the questions, it has great worth in the Moodle Quiz.<br />
<br />
==Question set-up==<br />
<br />
#Select the question category<br />
#Give the question a descriptive name - this allows you to identify it in the question bank.<br />
#Enter the passage of text (in Moodle format - see [[Embedded_Answers_%28Cloze%29_question_type#Format|Format]] below) into the 'question text' field.<br />
#Select an image to display if you want to add a picture to the question. For the student, it appears immediately above the question text.<br />
#Set the 'default question grade' (i.e. the maximum number of marks for this question).<br />
#Set the 'Penalty factor' (see [[Embedded_Answers_%28Cloze%29_question_type#Penalty_factor|Penalty factor]] below).<br />
#If you wish, add general feedback. This is text that appears to the student after he/she has answered the question.<br />
#The editor has been modified and allows you to test if your syntax is good. The different questions elements decoded will be displayed and syntax errors pinpoint. However, it cannot check if the question decoded is two questions in one because of an error syntax.<br />
#Click Save changes to add the question to the category.<br />
<br />
=== Penalty factor ===<br />
<br />
The 'penalty factor' only applies when the question is used in a quiz using adaptive mode - i.e. where the student is allowed multiple attempts at a question even within the same attempt at the quiz. If the penalty factor is more than 0, then the student will lose that proportion of the '''maximum''' grade upon each successive attempt. For example, if the default question grade is 10, and the penalty factor is 0.2, then each successive attempt after the first one will incur a penalty of 0.2 x 10 = 2 points. The grading for the cloze question applies the penalty to each subpart of the question as a whole. For example, if you have three fill in the blanks each worth 1 point each, then the penalty will only be incurred on the incorrect parts, not the questions as a whole.<br />
<br />
==Question rendering==<br />
<br />
The question answer entry space or INPUT HTML ELEMENT (for Short Answer and Numerical question types) and the dropdown list or SELECT HTML ELEMENT (for multichoice) are normally displayed in-line with the text.<br />
<br />
The size of the entry space or INPUT HTML ELEMENT ( Short and Numerical) will be adjustable to the length of the longest answer (good or bad) + a random number (0 to 15% total length).([[User:Pierre Pichet|Pierre Pichet]] 15:37, 26 January 2008 (CST))<br />
<br />
The size will adjust to the length of the student response when displayed in the grading and feedback process.<br />
<br />
The size of the dropdown list or SELECT HTML ELEMENT (multichoice) adjusts itself automatically to the longest answer.<br />
<br />
==Format==<br />
<br />
Questions consist of a passage of text (in Moodle format) that has various sub-questions embedded within it, including<br />
<br />
* short answers (SHORTANSWER or SA or MW), case is unimportant,<br />
* short answers (SHORTANSWER_C or SAC or MWC), case must match,<br />
* numerical answers (NUMERICAL or NM),<br />
* multiple choice (MULTICHOICE or MC), represented as a dropdown menu in-line in the text,<br />
* multiple choice (MULTICHOICE_V or MCV), represented as a vertical column of radio buttons, or<br />
* multiple choice (MULTICHOICE_H or MCH), represented as a horizontal row of radio-buttons,<br />
* multiple choice (MULTIRESPONSE or MR), represented as a vertical row of checkboxes<br />
* multiple choice (MULTIRESPONSE_H or MRH), represented as a horizontal row of checkboxes<br />
===Shuffle sub questions===<br />
When the quiz question behavior shuffle option is set to '''YES''', the following special multiple choice sub-questions elements will be shuffled:<br />
* multiple choice (MULTICHOICE_S or MCS), represented as a dropdown menu in-line in the text,<br />
* multiple choice (MULTICHOICE_VS or MCVS), represented as a vertical column of radio buttons, or<br />
* multiple choice (MULTICHOICE_HS or MCHS), represented as a horizontal row of radio-buttons.<br />
* multiple choice (MULTIRESPONSE_S or MRS), represented as a vertical row of checkboxes<br />
* multiple choice (MULTIRESPONSE_HS or MRHS), represented as a horizontal row of checkboxes<br />
<br />
{{Note|MCS, MCVS, MCHS are new (Moodle 3.0) Cloze subquestion types with shuffling of answers. See MDL-38214.}}<br />
<br />
The structure of each cloze sub-question is identical:<br />
:'''{''' start the cloze sub-question with a bracket (AltGr+7)<br />
:'''1''' define a grade for each cloze by a number (optional). This used for calculation of question grading.<br />
:''':SHORTANSWER:''' define the type of cloze sub-question. Definition is bounded by ':'. <br />
:'''~''' is a seperator between answer options<br />
:'''=''' marks a correct answer<br />
:'''#''' marks the beginning of an (optional) feedback message<br />
:'''}''' close the cloze sub-question at the end with a bracket (AltGr+0)<br />
<br />
Now a very simple example:<br />
<pre><br />
{1:SHORTANSWER:=Berlin} is the capital of Germany.<br />
</pre><br />
<br />
For full details of the format for embedded-answers questions, see the [[Embedded_Answers_%28Cloze%29_question_type#Detailed_syntax_explanations|detailed syntax explanation]] below.<br />
<br />
NB: Be careful when copying a cloze type question into the WYSIWYG HTML editor, as line breaks tend to get added, which destroys the question.<br />
<br />
If the correct answer contains } # ~ / " or \ you will have to escape them by putting a \ in front of each such character. But [[https://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=275299 this is tricky]]. The { shouldn't be escaped, this can be vital in getting TeX expressions to work. In the feedback ~ and } must be escaped otherwise it will be interpreted as ''the next answer'' or ''end of the short answer section'' respectively. Quotation signs: " can lead to trouble anyhow in both places. Use the HTML entity: & quot; (without the space between ''&'' and ''quot;''). If you want to have Mathematical symbols there can be problems with the \ used in TeX expressions. One alternative can be to use [[unicode]] characters. <br />
<br />
See the notes further down about numerical embedded question!<br />
<br />
===Examples===<br />
<br />
====Example 1====<br />
The following text creates a simple embedded-answers question:<br />
<br />
Match the following cities with the correct state:<br />
* San Francisco: {1:MULTICHOICE:=California#OK~Arizona#Wrong}<br />
* Tucson: {1:MULTICHOICE:California#Wrong~%100%Arizona#OK}<br />
* Los Angeles: {1:MULTICHOICE:=California#OK~Arizona#Wrong}<br />
* Phoenix: {1:MULTICHOICE:%0%California#Wrong~=Arizona#OK}<br />
The capital of France is {1:SHORTANSWER:%100%Paris#Congratulations!<br />
~%50%Marseille#No, that is the second largest city in France (after<br />
Paris).~*#Wrong answer. The capital of France is Paris, of course.}.<br />
<br />
And the result will be:<br />
<br />
[[Image:Cloze.gif|Cloze question type]] <br />
<br />
====Example 2====<br />
<div style="padding: 1em;border: 1px dashed #FFB53A;color: black;background-color: #f9f9f9;font-family: monospace;font-size:1.2em;"><br />
This question consists of some text with an answer embedded right here {1:MULTICHOICE:Wrong answer#Feedback for this wrong answer~Another wrong answer#Feedback for the other wrong answer~=Correct answer#Feedback for correct answer~%50%Answer that gives half the credit#Feedback for half credit answer}<br />
<br />
and right after that you will have to deal with this short answer {1:SHORTANSWER:Wrong answer#Feedback for this wrong answer~=Correct answer#Feedback for correct answer~%50%Answer that gives half the credit#Feedback for half credit answer}<br />
<br />
and finally we have a floating point number {2:NUMERICAL:=23.8:0.1#Feedback for correct answer 23.8~%50%23.8:2#Feedback for half credit answer in the nearby region of the correct answer}.<br />
<br />
The multichoice question can also be shown in the vertical display of the standard moodle multiple choice.<br />
{2:MCV:1. Wrong answer#Feedback for this wrong answer~2. Another wrong answer#Feedback for the other wrong answer~=3. Correct answer#Feedback for correct answer~%50%4. Answer that gives half the credit#Feedback for half credit answer}<br />
<br />
Or in an horizontal display that is included here in a table<br />
{2:MCH:a. Wrong answer#Feedback for this wrong answer~b. Another wrong answer#Feedback for the other wrong answer~=c. Correct answer#Feedback for correct answer~%50%d. Answer that gives half the credit#Feedback for half credit answer}<br />
<br />
A shortanswer question where case must match. Write moodle in upper case letters {1:SHORTANSWER_C:moodle#Feedback for moodle in lower case ~=MOODLE#Feedback for MOODLE in upper case ~%50%Moodle#Feedback for only first letter in upper case}<br />
<br />
Note that addresses like www.moodle.org and smileys :-) all work as normal:<br />
<br />
a) How good is this? {:MULTICHOICE:=Yes#Correct~No#We have a different opinion}<br />
<br />
b) What grade would you give it? {3:NUMERICAL:=3:2}<br />
</div><br />
[[Image:Cloze example.png]]<br />
<br />
Some things to note:<br />
* The individual embedded answers are represented by the code in braces {}.<br />
* The number at the start is the 'weight', so in this case each answer contributes an equal share of the overall grade.<br />
* The correct option in each case is preceded either by an = sign or by %100%. <br />
* The text appearing after the # that follows each option is the feedback that the student will see if they choose that option.<br />
* If the student enters 'Marseille' in the final example, they score 50% of the total grade.<br />
* The asterisk * preceding the "Wrong answer" feedback in the final example means that the student will see this feedback if they enter anything other than "Paris" or "Marseille".<br />
* For multiple choice vertical or horizontal rendering there is no automatic numbering, though can added at each answer.<br />
<br />
==Detailed syntax explanations==<br />
# All question items within a cloze-type question are coded inside curled braces { }.<br />
# The number which appears between the opening brace and the colon {1: is the weighting of that item; if it is set at 1 for all the items, it needs not be specified, so you can have {:.<br />
# After the colon we have the item question type: MULTICHOICE, SHORTANSWER, NUMERICAL.<br />
# '''NOTE'''.- If you have installed the [https://moodle.org/plugins/qtype_regexp REGEXP question type plugin] you can also use the REGEXP question type; see [https://docs.moodle.org/36/en/Regular_Expression_Short-Answer_question_type#Inserting_RegExp_sub-questions_in_Cloze_type_questions instructions here].<br />
# The syntax for MULTICHOICE and SHORTANSWER is the same; the only difference is in the displaying of the item to the student.<br />
# The order of the various answers is indifferent (except if you want a catch-all for wrong answers, see #13 below).<br />
# A correct answer is preceded with the equal sign = or a percentage (usually %100%) - '''Note''': [[Talk:Embedded_Answers_(Cloze)_question_type| The equal sign (=) doesn't seem to work with SHORTANSWER.]]<br />
# A wrong answer is preceded with nothing or a percentage (usually %0%)but you can even use negative points by preceding with ~%-25% [not before Moodle 2.0]).<br />
# You can allocate some points between 0 and 100 to some answers, if you put the appropriate percentage.<br />
# All answers except the first one are separated from one another by the tilde ~ sign.<br />
# Answers can be followed by an optional feedback message, preceded with the # sign; if there is no feedback message, the # sign can be present or absent, it does not matter.<br />
# Note that the feedback message and the correct answer are displayed in a small popup window (if and when the correct and or feedback have been declared accessible to the students in the Quiz settings) upon mouse hovering. The popup window has a title "feedback" and you can use HTML tags to format your feedback. In some browsers (For example IE5.5) the form fields can cover part of the feedback windows. It can help to not have the formfields for the answers too close to each other.<br />
# In the SHORTANSWER type you may want to put a catch-all (wrong) answer in order to send a "wrong, try again" feedback; you can do this by inserting an asterisk '''*''' as '''the very last expected answer''' in your formula.<br />
# You should not have sequences such as %#, %~, %}, =#, =%, =}, ~#, ~% and ~} in the answer because you should not have empty answers or empty answer options. These two character sequences are problematic because the second characters are interpreted as if they were escaped<sup>(why?)</sup> and give unexpected results.<br />
<br />
==Numerical Cloze questions== <br />
<br />
From the student perspective, a numerical Cloze question looks just like a short-answer question or ''fill in the blanks''.<br />
<br />
The difference is that numerical answers are allowed to have an accepted error. This allows a continuous range of answers to be set. You can also express your answer in some different numerical formats. 23.4 23,4 (some countries use , as a decimal separator) and 2.34E+1 (meaning 2.34*10^1) would be interpreted as the same.<br />
<br />
=== False positives ===<br />
<br />
'''Note:''' the following examples of false positives do '''not''' apply to Moodle 1.8+, where you cannot use percentages or fractions as the answers in a numerical Cloze test; Moodle will generate an error if you try to save such a question. However the following may be relevant for earlier versions of Moodle.<br />
<br />
More examples: <br />
0.5 accepts .5 0.5 ,5 0,5 0.500 5e-1 5E-1 but not 1/2 50% <br />
50% accepts 50% 50.0% 5E1% 50/100 even '''50/1000 50''' but not 500/1000 0.5 <br />
1/2 accepts 1/2 '''1/3 1twenty''' but not 2/4 0.5 0,5 3/6 50% ½ <br />
½ accepts ½ <br />
HALF doesn't even accept HALF (maybe '''0'''?) <br />
<br />
If you want to accept several variants you can have them in the same {} but '''be careful, notice the "false positives" in bold'''!<br />
<br />
===Syntax for numerical Cloze questions===<br />
<br />
The format of a NUMERICAL Cloze question is similar to that of the other Cloze types and they can be mixed in the same question. As with other Cloze tests, you write your question or incomplete text, and add the Cloze code at the point where the student is supposed to enter their numerical answer.<br />
<br />
An example of the syntax used is shown below:<br />
<br />
'''Note: ''' It is preferable to write the code in 'source code' mode. The WSIWYG editor can insert linebreaks that make the question not function. The linebreak in the example box below is for readability only! A problem with these questions is the readability of the code! :( <br />
<br />
{2:NUMERICAL:=23.8:0.1#Feedback for correct answer 23.8 <br />
~%50%23.8:2#Feedback for ½credit near correct answer}. <br />
<br />
In this example:<br />
* 2: is the question point weight, which means that this question has twice the weight in the final point(s) for this question as other partial answers with weight 1 (or no declared weight - you can start with {: for the default weight 1) in the same question.<br />
* NUMERICAL: says what kind of question it is. It must be in CAPS. <br />
* =23.8:0.1 = or %100% means correct if the answer is 23.8 with an accepted error of 0.1, then any number between 23.7 and 23.9 will be accepted as correct. (In the GIFT numerical question one can express an interval like this 13..15 or 14:1 but in Cloze only 14:1 works.) <br />
* #Feedback for correct answer 23.8 is preceded by #<br />
* ~%50%23.8:2 ~ is the separator for answer alternatives %50% means this answer would get 50% of the score that the more precise answer had gotten. Because the tolerance here is 2, 21.8 to 25.8 would get this point and feedback.<br />
<br />
The feedback (which is seen within a popup window when the user hovers over the answer space) is formattable with HTML tags. For example, if you want an exponent, surround it with superscript tags: &lt;sup&gt; &lt;/sup&gt;. You can even include pictures in the feedback popup, but you must clean out all " characters and save while still in source code mode (not WYSIWYG). So, this works in feedback popup:<br />
#See this picture:&lt;br&gt;&lt;img src=Something.gif />} <br />
but not this:<br />
#See this picture:&lt;br&gt;&lt;img src="Something.gif" />} <br />
<br />
(ALGEBRA and TEX filters don't work in the feedback popups, but they can be very useful in the question writing for math/science expressions). But you can use [[Unicode]] characters. <br />
<br />
If you want to give feedback for any answer that didn't fit the intervals you already have specified feedback for, add some BIG general intervals, like for positive answers (if they aren't bigger than 20000 you could add: <br />
~%0%10000.0001:10000#Feedback for unspecified not_right answers} <br />
This would give feedback for anything from 0.0001 to 20000.0001 (that hadn't already gotten feedback). I didn't want to include 0 since that special case as well as negative ought to have specific reactions. <br />
~%0%0#Hey! It can't be zero <br />
~%0%-10000.0001:10000#We just want the size here, <br />
so a negative value is not what we want} <br />
<br />
Numerical questions could, before version 1.7, also have case-insensitive non-numerical answers. This is useful whenever the answer for a numerical question is something like +inf, -inf, NaN etc.<br />
==Importing CLOZE questions==<br />
If you try importing directly as CLOZE this text:<br />
<pre><br />
Single line per question! Match the following cities with the correct state:<br />
* San Francisco: {1:MULTICHOICE:=California#OK~Arizona#Wrong}<br />
* Tucson: {1:MULTICHOICE:California#Wrong~%100%Arizona#OK}<br />
* Los Angeles: {1:MULTICHOICE:=California#OK~Arizona#Wrong}<br />
* Phoenix: {1:MULTICHOICE:%0%California#Wrong~=Arizona#OK}<br />
<br />
The capital of France is {1:SHORTANSWER:%100%Paris#Congratulations!~%50%Marseille#No, that is the second largest city in France (after Paris).~*#Wrong answer. The capital of France is Paris, of course.}.<br />
<br />
23+ 0.8 = {2:NUMERICAL:=23.8:0.1#Feedback for correct answer 23.8 ~%50%23.8:2#Feedback for ½credit near correct answer}. </pre><br />
<br />
You would get all three questions as different parts of '''ONE question'''. (NOTE see that there are no linebreaks between the { } !)<br />
<br />
Multiple CLOZE questions can be imported using the XML format:<br />
<pre><br />
<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?><br />
<quiz><br />
<br />
<!-- question: 1 --><br />
<question type="cloze"><br />
<name><text>Book Test #1</text><br />
</name><br />
<questiontext><br />
<text><![CDATA[..............]]></text><br />
</questiontext><br />
<generalfeedback><br />
<text></text><br />
</generalfeedback><br />
<shuffleanswers>0</shuffleanswers><br />
</question><br />
<br />
<!-- question: 2 --><br />
<question type="cloze"><br />
<name><text>Book Test #2</text><br />
</name><br />
<questiontext><br />
<text><![CDATA[............]]></text><br />
</questiontext><br />
<generalfeedback><br />
<text></text><br />
</generalfeedback><br />
<shuffleanswers>0</shuffleanswers><br />
</question><br />
<br />
</quiz><br />
</pre><br />
You would put the question text including CLOZE code in the ....... spaces.<br />
<br />
==Online Cloze Question generator==<br />
* There is a website to generate CLOZE quizzes for Moodle (1.9 and 2.x and 3.x versions) and/or to try out the CLOZE editor integration for Moodle.<br />
* This editor was built at the Chair of Applied English Linguistics at Universitaet Tuebingen, Germany, by Andreas Glombitza (andiglombitza(at)googlemail.com) and Achim Skuta (achim.skuta(at)googlemail.com).<br />
* The authors are currently maintaining this software and webservice as a private project.<br />
<br />
Website: [http://projects.ael.uni-tuebingen.de/quiz/htmlarea/index.php http://projects.ael.uni-tuebingen.de/quiz/htmlarea/index.php]<br />
<br />
==Cloze editor plugin for TinyMCE==<br />
* You can download a [https://moodle.org/plugins/view.php?plugin=other_cloze Moodle plugin from the Moodle plugins database] that will let you create these questions from a graphical interface within your Moodle site. There are versions available for Moodle 1.9, 2.x and 3.x.<br />
<br />
==Cloze editor plugin for Atto==<br />
This [[Cloze editor for Atto|new plugin for Moodle 3.1+]] was developed by Daniel Thies and is available for download and install from the Moodle plugins database..<br />
<br />
==Question with 1 media (e.g. audio) and several subquestions==<br />
As described in [https://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=376874 this forum post], you can easily make a question where the student inspect a media (e.g. an audio file) and then has to answer several small multiple choice questions. The example below is from a Moodle 3.5.2+ site using the new Record audio tool in the Atto editor. The Record video tool will also let you add video as part of the question, if you want to.<br />
<br />
[[File:CLOZE question with 1 audio and 3 sub-questions.png|400px]]<br />
<br />
== Questions with student notes and feedback for teacher==<br />
You can easily make one/many/all question(s) with an optional field for student notes and/or feedback for the teacher, as requested in [https://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=353587 this forum thread]. Note that only the first MULTICHOICE question is marked, and the two optional fields do not score positive nor negative points:<br />
<br />
[[File:CLOZE question with student comment and teacher feedback.png]]<br />
<br />
The full question for the above example is:<br />
<br />
Which of the following options is the right answer ?<br />
{1:MULTICHOICE_VS:~A wrong answer~Another wrong answer~Yet another wrong answer~%100%This is the only right answer}<br />
Optionally:Write a personal note: {0:SHORTANSWER:~%0%I want to have a longer input box for the note.~%100%*}<br />
Optionally:Send feedback to teacher:{0:SHORTANSWER:~%0%I want to have a longer input box for the feedback.~%100%*}<br />
<br />
<br />
==See also==<br />
* See the [http://projects.ael.uni-tuebingen.de/quiz/htmlarea/index.php online Cloze question generator].<br />
* Download the newest version of the [[Cloze editor for TinyMCE]] for Moodle 1.9 and for Moodle 2.0 to 3.3 from [https://moodle.org/plugins/view.php?plugin=tinymce_clozeeditor the Moodle plugins database]<br />
* Easily edit embedded answer questions with the additional plugin [[Cloze editor for Atto]] for Moodle 2.7+<br />
<br />
This information was drawn from:<br />
*Using Moodle [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=36521 Is there a guide to using the cloze format?] forum discussion<br />
*Using Moodle [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=36430&parent=170308 Cloze-type question syntax] forum post<br />
<br />
[[Category:Language teaching]]<br />
<br />
[[de:Fragetyp Lückentext (Cloze)]]<br />
[[es:Tipo de Pregunta con respuestas incrustadas (Cloze)]]<br />
[[fr:Question Cloze à réponses intégrées]]<br />
[[ja: 穴埋め問題 ( Cloze ) タイプ]]<br />
[[zh:填空題(克漏字)]]</div>Dbauer-etshttps://docs.moodle.org/36/en/index.php?title=Embedded_Answers_(Cloze)_question_type&diff=133176Embedded Answers (Cloze) question type2019-02-28T22:15:31Z<p>Dbauer-ets: /* Detailed syntax explanations */</p>
<hr />
<div>{{Questions}}<br />
'''Embedded answers (Cloze)''' questions consist of a passage of text (in Moodle format) that has various answers embedded within it, including multiple choice, short answers and numerical answers.<br />
<br />
Until mid2013, there was no graphical interface to create these questions within your Moodle site - you needed to specify the question format using the text box or by importing them from external files.<br />
<br />
You can link to an external web site that does create these questions from a graphical interface, see the ''[http://projects.ael.uni-tuebingen.de/quiz/htmlarea/index.php Online Cloze Question quiz generator]'' below.<br />
<br />
There is an Excel-based [http://hbwubecc.wixsite.com/jordan/tools Cloze and GIFT Generator] that was presented at the 2017 Moodle Moot Japan.<br />
<br />
There is a [[Cloze editor for TinyMCE]] that will let you create these questions from a graphical interface within your Moodle site, but it will overwrite your current HTML editor and only works with the [[TinyMCE editor]] but not with [[Atto]]. In 2016 a [[Cloze editor for Atto]] additional plugin was created.<br />
<br />
Lots of people suggested that [[Hot Potatoes]] software is the easiest way to create Embedded answer (Cloze) questions. Once you have created your questions on your PC, you can then import them into Moodle's quiz module.<br />
<br />
However, the flexibility of the Cloze question type is hard to equal and despite the minor coding that you need to create the questions, it has great worth in the Moodle Quiz.<br />
<br />
==Question set-up==<br />
<br />
#Select the question category<br />
#Give the question a descriptive name - this allows you to identify it in the question bank.<br />
#Enter the passage of text (in Moodle format - see [[Embedded_Answers_%28Cloze%29_question_type#Format|Format]] below) into the 'question text' field.<br />
#Select an image to display if you want to add a picture to the question. For the student, it appears immediately above the question text.<br />
#Set the 'default question grade' (i.e. the maximum number of marks for this question).<br />
#Set the 'Penalty factor' (see [[Embedded_Answers_%28Cloze%29_question_type#Penalty_factor|Penalty factor]] below).<br />
#If you wish, add general feedback. This is text that appears to the student after he/she has answered the question.<br />
#The editor has been modified and allows you to test if your syntax is good. The different questions elements decoded will be displayed and syntax errors pinpoint. However, it cannot check if the question decoded is two questions in one because of an error syntax.<br />
#Click Save changes to add the question to the category.<br />
<br />
=== Penalty factor ===<br />
<br />
The 'penalty factor' only applies when the question is used in a quiz using adaptive mode - i.e. where the student is allowed multiple attempts at a question even within the same attempt at the quiz. If the penalty factor is more than 0, then the student will lose that proportion of the '''maximum''' grade upon each successive attempt. For example, if the default question grade is 10, and the penalty factor is 0.2, then each successive attempt after the first one will incur a penalty of 0.2 x 10 = 2 points. The grading for the cloze question applies the penalty to each subpart of the question as a whole. For example, if you have three fill in the blanks each worth 1 point each, then the penalty will only be incurred on the incorrect parts, not the questions as a whole.<br />
<br />
==Question rendering==<br />
<br />
The question answer entry space or INPUT HTML ELEMENT (for Short Answer and Numerical question types) and the dropdown list or SELECT HTML ELEMENT (for multichoice) are normally displayed in-line with the text.<br />
<br />
The size of the entry space or INPUT HTML ELEMENT ( Short and Numerical) will be adjustable to the length of the longest answer (good or bad) + a random number (0 to 15% total length).([[User:Pierre Pichet|Pierre Pichet]] 15:37, 26 January 2008 (CST))<br />
<br />
The size will adjust to the length of the student response when displayed in the grading and feedback process.<br />
<br />
The size of the dropdown list or SELECT HTML ELEMENT (multichoice) adjusts itself automatically to the longest answer.<br />
<br />
==Format==<br />
<br />
Questions consist of a passage of text (in Moodle format) that has various sub-questions embedded within it, including<br />
<br />
* short answers (SHORTANSWER or SA or MW), case is unimportant,<br />
* short answers (SHORTANSWER_C or SAC or MWC), case must match,<br />
* numerical answers (NUMERICAL or NM),<br />
* multiple choice (MULTICHOICE or MC), represented as a dropdown menu in-line in the text,<br />
* multiple choice (MULTICHOICE_V or MCV), represented as a vertical column of radio buttons, or<br />
* multiple choice (MULTICHOICE_H or MCH), represented as a horizontal row of radio-buttons,<br />
* multiple choice (MULTIRESPONSE or MR), represented as a vertical row of checkboxes<br />
* multiple choice (MULTIRESPONSE_H or MRH), represented as a horizontal row of checkboxes<br />
===Shuffle sub questions===<br />
When the quiz question behavior shuffle option is set to '''YES''', the following special multiple choice sub-questions elements will be shuffled:<br />
* multiple choice (MULTICHOICE_S or MCS), represented as a dropdown menu in-line in the text,<br />
* multiple choice (MULTICHOICE_VS or MCVS), represented as a vertical column of radio buttons, or<br />
* multiple choice (MULTICHOICE_HS or MCHS), represented as a horizontal row of radio-buttons.<br />
* multiple choice (MULTIRESPONSE_S or MRS), represented as a vertical row of checkboxes<br />
* multiple choice (MULTIRESPONSE_HS or MRHS), represented as a horizontal row of checkboxes<br />
<br />
{{Note|MCS, MCVS, MCHS are new (Moodle 3.0) Cloze subquestion types with shuffling of answers. See MDL-38214.}}<br />
<br />
The structure of each cloze sub-question is identical:<br />
:'''{''' start the cloze sub-question with a bracket (AltGr+7)<br />
:'''1''' define a grade for each cloze by a number (optional). This used for calculation of question grading.<br />
:''':SHORTANSWER:''' define the type of cloze sub-question. Definition is bounded by ':'. <br />
:'''~''' is a seperator between answer options<br />
:'''=''' marks a correct answer<br />
:'''#''' marks the beginning of an (optional) feedback message<br />
:'''}''' close the cloze sub-question at the end with a bracket (AltGr+0)<br />
<br />
Now a very simple example:<br />
<pre><br />
{1:SHORTANSWER:=Berlin} is the capital of Germany.<br />
</pre><br />
<br />
For full details of the format for embedded-answers questions, see the [[Embedded_Answers_%28Cloze%29_question_type#Detailed_syntax_explanations|detailed syntax explanation]] below.<br />
<br />
NB: Be careful when copying a cloze type question into the WYSIWYG HTML editor, as line breaks tend to get added, which destroys the question.<br />
<br />
If the correct answer contains } # ~ / " or \ you will have to escape them by putting a \ in front of each such character. But [[https://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=275299 this is tricky]]. The { shouldn't be escaped, this can be vital in getting TeX expressions to work. In the feedback ~ and } must be escaped otherwise it will be interpreted as ''the next answer'' or ''end of the short answer section'' respectively. Quotation signs: " can lead to trouble anyhow in both places. Use the HTML entity: & quot; (without the space between ''&'' and ''quot;''). If you want to have Mathematical symbols there can be problems with the \ used in TeX expressions. One alternative can be to use [[unicode]] characters. <br />
<br />
See the notes further down about numerical embedded question!<br />
<br />
===Examples===<br />
<br />
====Example 1====<br />
The following text creates a simple embedded-answers question:<br />
<br />
Match the following cities with the correct state:<br />
* San Francisco: {1:MULTICHOICE:=California#OK~Arizona#Wrong}<br />
* Tucson: {1:MULTICHOICE:California#Wrong~%100%Arizona#OK}<br />
* Los Angeles: {1:MULTICHOICE:=California#OK~Arizona#Wrong}<br />
* Phoenix: {1:MULTICHOICE:%0%California#Wrong~=Arizona#OK}<br />
The capital of France is {1:SHORTANSWER:%100%Paris#Congratulations!<br />
~%50%Marseille#No, that is the second largest city in France (after<br />
Paris).~*#Wrong answer. The capital of France is Paris, of course.}.<br />
<br />
And the result will be:<br />
<br />
[[Image:Cloze.gif|Cloze question type]] <br />
<br />
====Example 2====<br />
<div style="padding: 1em;border: 1px dashed #FFB53A;color: black;background-color: #f9f9f9;font-family: monospace;font-size:1.2em;"><br />
This question consists of some text with an answer embedded right here {1:MULTICHOICE:Wrong answer#Feedback for this wrong answer~Another wrong answer#Feedback for the other wrong answer~=Correct answer#Feedback for correct answer~%50%Answer that gives half the credit#Feedback for half credit answer}<br />
<br />
and right after that you will have to deal with this short answer {1:SHORTANSWER:Wrong answer#Feedback for this wrong answer~=Correct answer#Feedback for correct answer~%50%Answer that gives half the credit#Feedback for half credit answer}<br />
<br />
and finally we have a floating point number {2:NUMERICAL:=23.8:0.1#Feedback for correct answer 23.8~%50%23.8:2#Feedback for half credit answer in the nearby region of the correct answer}.<br />
<br />
The multichoice question can also be shown in the vertical display of the standard moodle multiple choice.<br />
{2:MCV:1. Wrong answer#Feedback for this wrong answer~2. Another wrong answer#Feedback for the other wrong answer~=3. Correct answer#Feedback for correct answer~%50%4. Answer that gives half the credit#Feedback for half credit answer}<br />
<br />
Or in an horizontal display that is included here in a table<br />
{2:MCH:a. Wrong answer#Feedback for this wrong answer~b. Another wrong answer#Feedback for the other wrong answer~=c. Correct answer#Feedback for correct answer~%50%d. Answer that gives half the credit#Feedback for half credit answer}<br />
<br />
A shortanswer question where case must match. Write moodle in upper case letters {1:SHORTANSWER_C:moodle#Feedback for moodle in lower case ~=MOODLE#Feedback for MOODLE in upper case ~%50%Moodle#Feedback for only first letter in upper case}<br />
<br />
Note that addresses like www.moodle.org and smileys :-) all work as normal:<br />
<br />
a) How good is this? {:MULTICHOICE:=Yes#Correct~No#We have a different opinion}<br />
<br />
b) What grade would you give it? {3:NUMERICAL:=3:2}<br />
</div><br />
[[Image:Cloze example.png]]<br />
<br />
Some things to note:<br />
* The individual embedded answers are represented by the code in braces {}.<br />
* The number at the start is the 'weight', so in this case each answer contributes an equal share of the overall grade.<br />
* The correct option in each case is preceded either by an = sign or by %100%. <br />
* The text appearing after the # that follows each option is the feedback that the student will see if they choose that option.<br />
* If the student enters 'Marseille' in the final example, they score 50% of the total grade.<br />
* The asterisk * preceding the "Wrong answer" feedback in the final example means that the student will see this feedback if they enter anything other than "Paris" or "Marseille".<br />
* For multiple choice vertical or horizontal rendering there is no automatic numbering, though can added at each answer.<br />
<br />
==Detailed syntax explanations==<br />
# All question items within a cloze-type question are coded inside curled braces { }.<br />
# The number which appears between the opening brace and the colon {1: is the weighting of that item; if it is set at 1 for all the items, it needs not be specified, so you can have {:.<br />
# After the colon we have the item question type: MULTICHOICE, SHORTANSWER, NUMERICAL.<br />
# '''NOTE'''.- If you have installed the [https://moodle.org/plugins/qtype_regexp REGEXP question type plugin] you can also use the REGEXP question type; see [https://docs.moodle.org/36/en/Regular_Expression_Short-Answer_question_type#Inserting_RegExp_sub-questions_in_Cloze_type_questions instructions here].<br />
# The syntax for MULTICHOICE and SHORTANSWER is the same; the only difference is in the displaying of the item to the student.<br />
# The order of the various answers is indifferent (except if you want a catch-all for wrong answers, see #13 below).<br />
# A correct answer is preceded with the equal sign = or a percentage (usually %100%) - '''Note''': [[Talk:Embedded_Answers_(Cloze)_question_type| The equal sign (=) doesn't seem to work with SHORTANSWER.]]<br />
# A wrong answer is preceded with nothing or a percentage (usually %0%)but you can even use negative points by preceding with ~%-25% [not before Moodle 2.0]).<br />
# You can allocate some points between 0 and 100 to some answers, if you put the appropriate percentage.<br />
# All answers except the first one are separated from one another by the tilde ~ sign.<br />
# Answers can be followed by an optional feedback message, preceded with the # sign; if there is no feedback message, the # sign can be present or absent, it does not matter.<br />
# Note that the feedback message and the correct answer are displayed in a small popup window (if and when the correct and or feedback have been declared accessible to the students in the Quiz settings) upon mouse hovering. The popup window has a title "feedback" and you can use HTML tags to format your feedback. In some browsers (For example IE5.5) the form fields can cover part of the feedback windows. It can help to not have the formfields for the answers too close to each other.<br />
# In the SHORTANSWER type you may want to put a catch-all (wrong) answer in order to send a "wrong, try again" feedback; you can do this by inserting an asterisk '''*''' as '''the very last expected answer''' in your formula.<br />
# You should not have sequences such as %#, %~, %}, =#, =%, =}, ~#, ~% and ~} in the answer because you should not have empty correct answers or empty answer options. These sequences are problematic because the second character is interpreted as if it were escaped<sup>(why?)</sup> and give unexpected results.<br />
<br />
==Numerical Cloze questions== <br />
<br />
From the student perspective, a numerical Cloze question looks just like a short-answer question or ''fill in the blanks''.<br />
<br />
The difference is that numerical answers are allowed to have an accepted error. This allows a continuous range of answers to be set. You can also express your answer in some different numerical formats. 23.4 23,4 (some countries use , as a decimal separator) and 2.34E+1 (meaning 2.34*10^1) would be interpreted as the same.<br />
<br />
=== False positives ===<br />
<br />
'''Note:''' the following examples of false positives do '''not''' apply to Moodle 1.8+, where you cannot use percentages or fractions as the answers in a numerical Cloze test; Moodle will generate an error if you try to save such a question. However the following may be relevant for earlier versions of Moodle.<br />
<br />
More examples: <br />
0.5 accepts .5 0.5 ,5 0,5 0.500 5e-1 5E-1 but not 1/2 50% <br />
50% accepts 50% 50.0% 5E1% 50/100 even '''50/1000 50''' but not 500/1000 0.5 <br />
1/2 accepts 1/2 '''1/3 1twenty''' but not 2/4 0.5 0,5 3/6 50% ½ <br />
½ accepts ½ <br />
HALF doesn't even accept HALF (maybe '''0'''?) <br />
<br />
If you want to accept several variants you can have them in the same {} but '''be careful, notice the "false positives" in bold'''!<br />
<br />
===Syntax for numerical Cloze questions===<br />
<br />
The format of a NUMERICAL Cloze question is similar to that of the other Cloze types and they can be mixed in the same question. As with other Cloze tests, you write your question or incomplete text, and add the Cloze code at the point where the student is supposed to enter their numerical answer.<br />
<br />
An example of the syntax used is shown below:<br />
<br />
'''Note: ''' It is preferable to write the code in 'source code' mode. The WSIWYG editor can insert linebreaks that make the question not function. The linebreak in the example box below is for readability only! A problem with these questions is the readability of the code! :( <br />
<br />
{2:NUMERICAL:=23.8:0.1#Feedback for correct answer 23.8 <br />
~%50%23.8:2#Feedback for ½credit near correct answer}. <br />
<br />
In this example:<br />
* 2: is the question point weight, which means that this question has twice the weight in the final point(s) for this question as other partial answers with weight 1 (or no declared weight - you can start with {: for the default weight 1) in the same question.<br />
* NUMERICAL: says what kind of question it is. It must be in CAPS. <br />
* =23.8:0.1 = or %100% means correct if the answer is 23.8 with an accepted error of 0.1, then any number between 23.7 and 23.9 will be accepted as correct. (In the GIFT numerical question one can express an interval like this 13..15 or 14:1 but in Cloze only 14:1 works.) <br />
* #Feedback for correct answer 23.8 is preceded by #<br />
* ~%50%23.8:2 ~ is the separator for answer alternatives %50% means this answer would get 50% of the score that the more precise answer had gotten. Because the tolerance here is 2, 21.8 to 25.8 would get this point and feedback.<br />
<br />
The feedback (which is seen within a popup window when the user hovers over the answer space) is formattable with HTML tags. For example, if you want an exponent, surround it with superscript tags: &lt;sup&gt; &lt;/sup&gt;. You can even include pictures in the feedback popup, but you must clean out all " characters and save while still in source code mode (not WYSIWYG). So, this works in feedback popup:<br />
#See this picture:&lt;br&gt;&lt;img src=Something.gif />} <br />
but not this:<br />
#See this picture:&lt;br&gt;&lt;img src="Something.gif" />} <br />
<br />
(ALGEBRA and TEX filters don't work in the feedback popups, but they can be very useful in the question writing for math/science expressions). But you can use [[Unicode]] characters. <br />
<br />
If you want to give feedback for any answer that didn't fit the intervals you already have specified feedback for, add some BIG general intervals, like for positive answers (if they aren't bigger than 20000 you could add: <br />
~%0%10000.0001:10000#Feedback for unspecified not_right answers} <br />
This would give feedback for anything from 0.0001 to 20000.0001 (that hadn't already gotten feedback). I didn't want to include 0 since that special case as well as negative ought to have specific reactions. <br />
~%0%0#Hey! It can't be zero <br />
~%0%-10000.0001:10000#We just want the size here, <br />
so a negative value is not what we want} <br />
<br />
Numerical questions could, before version 1.7, also have case-insensitive non-numerical answers. This is useful whenever the answer for a numerical question is something like +inf, -inf, NaN etc.<br />
==Importing CLOZE questions==<br />
If you try importing directly as CLOZE this text:<br />
<pre><br />
Single line per question! Match the following cities with the correct state:<br />
* San Francisco: {1:MULTICHOICE:=California#OK~Arizona#Wrong}<br />
* Tucson: {1:MULTICHOICE:California#Wrong~%100%Arizona#OK}<br />
* Los Angeles: {1:MULTICHOICE:=California#OK~Arizona#Wrong}<br />
* Phoenix: {1:MULTICHOICE:%0%California#Wrong~=Arizona#OK}<br />
<br />
The capital of France is {1:SHORTANSWER:%100%Paris#Congratulations!~%50%Marseille#No, that is the second largest city in France (after Paris).~*#Wrong answer. The capital of France is Paris, of course.}.<br />
<br />
23+ 0.8 = {2:NUMERICAL:=23.8:0.1#Feedback for correct answer 23.8 ~%50%23.8:2#Feedback for ½credit near correct answer}. </pre><br />
<br />
You would get all three questions as different parts of '''ONE question'''. (NOTE see that there are no linebreaks between the { } !)<br />
<br />
Multiple CLOZE questions can be imported using the XML format:<br />
<pre><br />
<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?><br />
<quiz><br />
<br />
<!-- question: 1 --><br />
<question type="cloze"><br />
<name><text>Book Test #1</text><br />
</name><br />
<questiontext><br />
<text><![CDATA[..............]]></text><br />
</questiontext><br />
<generalfeedback><br />
<text></text><br />
</generalfeedback><br />
<shuffleanswers>0</shuffleanswers><br />
</question><br />
<br />
<!-- question: 2 --><br />
<question type="cloze"><br />
<name><text>Book Test #2</text><br />
</name><br />
<questiontext><br />
<text><![CDATA[............]]></text><br />
</questiontext><br />
<generalfeedback><br />
<text></text><br />
</generalfeedback><br />
<shuffleanswers>0</shuffleanswers><br />
</question><br />
<br />
</quiz><br />
</pre><br />
You would put the question text including CLOZE code in the ....... spaces.<br />
<br />
==Online Cloze Question generator==<br />
* There is a website to generate CLOZE quizzes for Moodle (1.9 and 2.x and 3.x versions) and/or to try out the CLOZE editor integration for Moodle.<br />
* This editor was built at the Chair of Applied English Linguistics at Universitaet Tuebingen, Germany, by Andreas Glombitza (andiglombitza(at)googlemail.com) and Achim Skuta (achim.skuta(at)googlemail.com).<br />
* The authors are currently maintaining this software and webservice as a private project.<br />
<br />
Website: [http://projects.ael.uni-tuebingen.de/quiz/htmlarea/index.php http://projects.ael.uni-tuebingen.de/quiz/htmlarea/index.php]<br />
<br />
==Cloze editor plugin for TinyMCE==<br />
* You can download a [https://moodle.org/plugins/view.php?plugin=other_cloze Moodle plugin from the Moodle plugins database] that will let you create these questions from a graphical interface within your Moodle site. There are versions available for Moodle 1.9, 2.x and 3.x.<br />
<br />
==Cloze editor plugin for Atto==<br />
This [[Cloze editor for Atto|new plugin for Moodle 3.1+]] was developed by Daniel Thies and is available for download and install from the Moodle plugins database..<br />
<br />
==Question with 1 media (e.g. audio) and several subquestions==<br />
As described in [https://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=376874 this forum post], you can easily make a question where the student inspect a media (e.g. an audio file) and then has to answer several small multiple choice questions. The example below is from a Moodle 3.5.2+ site using the new Record audio tool in the Atto editor. The Record video tool will also let you add video as part of the question, if you want to.<br />
<br />
[[File:CLOZE question with 1 audio and 3 sub-questions.png|400px]]<br />
<br />
== Questions with student notes and feedback for teacher==<br />
You can easily make one/many/all question(s) with an optional field for student notes and/or feedback for the teacher, as requested in [https://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=353587 this forum thread]. Note that only the first MULTICHOICE question is marked, and the two optional fields do not score positive nor negative points:<br />
<br />
[[File:CLOZE question with student comment and teacher feedback.png]]<br />
<br />
The full question for the above example is:<br />
<br />
Which of the following options is the right answer ?<br />
{1:MULTICHOICE_VS:~A wrong answer~Another wrong answer~Yet another wrong answer~%100%This is the only right answer}<br />
Optionally:Write a personal note: {0:SHORTANSWER:~%0%I want to have a longer input box for the note.~%100%*}<br />
Optionally:Send feedback to teacher:{0:SHORTANSWER:~%0%I want to have a longer input box for the feedback.~%100%*}<br />
<br />
<br />
==See also==<br />
* See the [http://projects.ael.uni-tuebingen.de/quiz/htmlarea/index.php online Cloze question generator].<br />
* Download the newest version of the [[Cloze editor for TinyMCE]] for Moodle 1.9 and for Moodle 2.0 to 3.3 from [https://moodle.org/plugins/view.php?plugin=tinymce_clozeeditor the Moodle plugins database]<br />
* Easily edit embedded answer questions with the additional plugin [[Cloze editor for Atto]] for Moodle 2.7+<br />
<br />
This information was drawn from:<br />
*Using Moodle [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=36521 Is there a guide to using the cloze format?] forum discussion<br />
*Using Moodle [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=36430&parent=170308 Cloze-type question syntax] forum post<br />
<br />
[[Category:Language teaching]]<br />
<br />
[[de:Fragetyp Lückentext (Cloze)]]<br />
[[es:Tipo de Pregunta con respuestas incrustadas (Cloze)]]<br />
[[fr:Question Cloze à réponses intégrées]]<br />
[[ja: 穴埋め問題 ( Cloze ) タイプ]]<br />
[[zh:填空題(克漏字)]]</div>Dbauer-etshttps://docs.moodle.org/36/en/index.php?title=Multiple_Choice_question_type&diff=133175Multiple Choice question type2019-02-28T20:16:26Z<p>Dbauer-ets: /* Question set-up */</p>
<hr />
<div>{{Questions}}<br />
Moodle provides teachers with a lot of flexibility when creating this common question type. You can create single-answer and multiple-answer questions, include pictures, sound or other media in the question and/or answer options (by inserting HTML) and weight individual answers. Remember that [[Lesson_module#Multiple_choice|Lesson module questions]] behave differently.<br />
<br />
There are two types of multiple choice questions - single answer and multiple answer.<br />
<br />
<br />
===Single-answer questions===<br />
These questions allow one and only one answer to be chosen by providing radio buttons next to the answers. You can specify negative or non-negative marks for each answer, usually zero marks for wrong answers, maximum marks for correct answers and partial marks for partially correct answers. A single-answer Multiple Choice question can result in a negative grade.<br />
<br />
===Multiple-answer questions===<br />
The teacher can select "multiple answers are allowed" in a Multiple Choice question type. "Multiple answers" questions types in a quiz allow one or more answers to be chosen by providing check boxes next to the answers. Each answer may carry a positive or negative grade, so that choosing ALL the options will not necessarily result in good grade. If the total grade is negative then the total grade for this question will be zero.<br />
<br />
Feedback can be associated either with specific answers, or with the question as a whole.<br />
<br />
==Question set-up==<br />
<br />
#Select the question category<br />
#Give the question a descriptive name. You'll use the name to track your questions later so "Question 1" isn't a good idea. The name will be used in the question lists on the quiz editing page or in the lesson as a page title. It will not be shown to the students, so you can choose any name that makes sense to you and possibly other teachers.<br />
#Create the question text. If you're using the HTML Editor, you can format the question just like a word processing document.<br />
#Select an image to display if you want to add a picture to the question. The available images are those you have uploaded to the '''main''' Moodle files area (they cannot be in folders). For the student, the image appears immediately after the question text and before the answer options.<br />
#*Alternatively, if you used the HTML editor to create the question text, you can click the image icon. This will pop up the Insert Image window. You can choose to upload an image into your files area from this window, or you can add the URL of an image on the web. If you add a file to your files area, click the name of the file after you upload it to insert the link into the URL text entry at the top of the screen. Then click OK.<br />
#Set the 'default question grade' (i.e. the maximum number of marks for this question).<br />
#Set the 'Penalty factor' (see [[Multiple_Choice_question_type#Penalty_factor|Penalty factor]] below).<br />
#If you wish, add general feedback. This is text that appears to the student after he/she has answered the question.<br />
#Choose whether students can only select one answer or multiple answers<br />
#Choose whether to shuffle the answer options<br />
#Write your first answer in the Choice 1 text field. Inserting HTML into this area also makes it possible to add an image or a sound file.<br />
#Select a grade percentage for the answer. This is the percentage of the total points for the question that selecting this response is worth. You can select negative percentages as well as positive percentages. So, selecting a correct response in a multiple answer question may give you 50% of the possible points, while selecting a wrong answer may take away 10%. Note that in a multiple-answer question, the positive grades must add up to at least 100%.<br />
#*Be aware that if you allow multiple answers and have more than a single correct choice, and do not use a negative grade percentage for wrong answers, the students can simply tick all choices and get the full grade.<br />
#If you wish, you can add feedback for each response. It may be a bit more work, but it’s good practice to tell the students why each answer is right or wrong using the feedback area. If students know why an answer is right or wrong, they can analyse their own thinking and begin to understand why an answer is correct. Your feedback will only be displayed if you select Show Feedback in the quiz body options.<br />
#Fill in the rest of the response choices in the rest of the form. Any unused areas will be ignored.<br />
#Fill in the [[Multiple_Choice_question_type#Overall_feedback|overall feedback]] fields if you wish.<br />
#Select the "Save Changes" button at the bottom of the screen.<br />
<br />
=== Penalty factor ===<br />
<br />
The 'penalty factor' only applies when the question is used in a quiz using adaptive mode - i.e. where the student is allowed multiple attempts at a question even within the same attempt at the quiz. If the penalty factor is more than 0, then the student will lose that proportion of the '''maximum''' grade upon each successive attempt. For example, if the default question grade is 10, and the penalty factor is 0.2, then each successive attempt after the first one will incur a penalty of 0.2 x 10 = 2 points.<br />
<br />
==General feedback==<br />
General feedback is some text that gets shown to the student after they have attempted the question. Unlike answer feedbacks, which depend on the question type and what response the student gave, the same general feedback text is shown to all students.<br />
<br />
You can control when general feedback is shown to students using the "Review options" check-boxes on the quiz editing form.<br />
<br />
You can use the general feedback to give students some background to what knowledge the question was testing. Or to give them a link to more information they can use if they did not understand the questions.<br />
<br />
==Combined feedback==<br />
The option ''Combined feedback'' for correct/partially correct/incorrect responses is particularly useful for multiple-response questions, where it is difficult to control what feedback students see just using the answer-specific feedback.<br />
<br />
So, when the student submits the question, they will see the answer-specific feedback next to the option(s) they selected, the combined feedback in a box below the options, and if applicable, the general feedback underneath everything else.<br />
<br />
==Site administration settings==<br />
<br />
An administrator can specify the defaults for multiple choice settings via the settings link in 'Manage question types' in the Site administration.<br />
<br />
==Lesson module multiple choice questions==<br />
This page was created for the Quiz module. A [[Lesson_module#Multiple_choice|Lesson Multiple Choice]] or [[Multianswer question type]] looks the same to the student but is very different in the teacher's edit mode. A lesson question offers the teacher the chance to both grade a student's answer, give feedback and also to send the student to another specific page based upon the student's choice.<br />
<br />
There are other differences. Quiz has a more robust scoring system that is similar to "Custom Scoring" in the Lesson module. Even with custom scoring turned on, Lesson will not give percentage credit of a question's score for an answer. And students must select all the correct answers to receive any credit for the multianswer question in the Lesson module.<br />
<br />
==All-or-nothing multiple choice question type (plugin)==<br />
The [[All or nothing multiple choice question type]] plugin is adapted from the existing multichoice question. The main difference from the standard Moodle multiple choice question type is in the way that grading works.<br />
<br />
The teacher editing interface is slightly modified as when creating the question, the teacher just indicates which choices are correct.<br />
In an all-or-nothing multiple choice question, a respondent can choose one or more answers. If the chosen answers correspond exactly to the correct choices defined in the question, the respondent gets 100%. If he/she chooses any incorrect choices or does not select all of the correct choices, the grade is 0%.<br />
<br />
Before using the all-or-nothing question type, teachers must really think if this grading is what they want.<br />
<br />
==Calculated multichoice question type==<br />
The [[Calculated multichoice question type]] are like multiple choice questions with the additonal property that the elements to select can include formula results from numeric values that are selected randomly from a set when the quiz is taken. They use the same wildcards than Calculated questions and their wildcards can be shared with other Calculated multichoice or regular Calculated questions.<br />
<br />
The main difference is that the formula is included in the answer choice as {=...}.<br />
<br />
==Eliminator==<br />
<br />
Some teachers say that young students may be less successful in Moodle multiple-choice quizzes than in multiple-choice tests on paper. This would be largely due to the fact that students tend to cross out the wrong answers, which they can not do with Moodle's multiple choice quizzes.<br />
<br />
An "eliminator" is a way of graying out or crossing out choices to help students keep the choice they want. Moodle's core Multiple Choice question does not yet include such an eliminator. However, the teacher can easily create an eliminator by adding HTML code to the text of the choices.<br />
<br />
<p style="margin-bottom:5px;">For a gray out eliminator, add the following HTML code to the text of each choice:</p><br />
&lt;div style="display:inline-block;"><br />
&lt;input type="radio" id="Eliminator" style="display:none;"><br />
&lt;label for="Eliminator"><br />
&lt;span onclick="if(this.style.opacity==0.3){this.style.opacity=1;}else{this.style.opacity=0.3;}" style="opacity: 1;"><br />
<i>Choice text</i><br />
&lt;/span><br />
&lt;/label><br />
&lt;/div><br />
<p style="margin:0;"></p><br />
where <i><pre>Choice text</pre></i> is the actual text for each choice.<br />
<p style="margin-top:2px;">The workaround works as follows:</p><br />
*The student clicks on the <b>text</b> of the choices to toggle: black / gray out. The gray out color reminds the student that these choices are eliminated.<br />
*The student clicks on the <b>radio buttons</b> to select the answer.<br />
<br />
Examples and variations (e.g. line-through) of this workaround are presented [https://moodleformulas.org/course/view.php?id=38&section=7 here].<br />
<br />
==See also==<br />
<br />
*[[Quizventure activity]] a 'space invaders'-like Moodle 2.7+ game using multiple choice questions<br />
* [https://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=368129 Arabic choices not written in Arabic language]<br />
<br />
[[ja:多肢選択問題タイプ]]<br />
[[fr:Question à choix multiple]]<br />
[[ca:Tipus_de_pregunta_de_opcions_múltiples]]<br />
[[de:Fragetyp Multiple-Choice]]<br />
[[es:Tipo de Pregunta de Opción Múltiple]]</div>Dbauer-etshttps://docs.moodle.org/36/en/index.php?title=Multiple_Choice_question_type&diff=133174Multiple Choice question type2019-02-28T20:14:31Z<p>Dbauer-ets: /* General feedback */</p>
<hr />
<div>{{Questions}}<br />
Moodle provides teachers with a lot of flexibility when creating this common question type. You can create single-answer and multiple-answer questions, include pictures, sound or other media in the question and/or answer options (by inserting HTML) and weight individual answers. Remember that [[Lesson_module#Multiple_choice|Lesson module questions]] behave differently.<br />
<br />
There are two types of multiple choice questions - single answer and multiple answer.<br />
<br />
<br />
===Single-answer questions===<br />
These questions allow one and only one answer to be chosen by providing radio buttons next to the answers. You can specify negative or non-negative marks for each answer, usually zero marks for wrong answers, maximum marks for correct answers and partial marks for partially correct answers. A single-answer Multiple Choice question can result in a negative grade.<br />
<br />
===Multiple-answer questions===<br />
The teacher can select "multiple answers are allowed" in a Multiple Choice question type. "Multiple answers" questions types in a quiz allow one or more answers to be chosen by providing check boxes next to the answers. Each answer may carry a positive or negative grade, so that choosing ALL the options will not necessarily result in good grade. If the total grade is negative then the total grade for this question will be zero.<br />
<br />
Feedback can be associated either with specific answers, or with the question as a whole.<br />
<br />
==Question set-up==<br />
<br />
#Select the question category<br />
#Give the question a descriptive name. You'll use the name to track your questions later so "Question 1" isn't a good idea. The name will be used in the question lists on the quiz editing page or in the lesson as a page title. It will not be shown to the students, so you can choose any name that makes sense to you and possibly other teachers.<br />
#Create the question text. If you're using the HTML Editor, you can format the question just like a word processing document.<br />
#Select an image to display if you want to add a picture to the question. The available images are those you have uploaded to the '''main''' Moodle files area (they cannot be in folders). For the student, the image appears immediately after the question text and before the answer options.<br />
#*Alternatively, if you used the HTML editor to create the question text, you can click the image icon. This will pop up the Insert Image window. You can choose to upload an image into your files area from this window, or you can add the URL of an image on the web. If you add a file to your files area, click the name of the file after you upload it to insert the link into the URL text entry at the top of the screen. Then click OK.<br />
#Set the 'default question grade' (i.e. the maximum number of marks for this question).<br />
#Set the 'Penalty factor' (see [[Multiple_Choice_question_type#Penalty_factor|Penalty factor]] below).<br />
#If you wish, add general feedback. This is text that appears to the student after he/she has answered the question.<br />
#Choose whether students can only select one answer or multiple answers<br />
#Choose whether to shuffle the answer options<br />
#Write your first answer in the Choice 1 text field. Inserting HTML into this area also makes it possible to add an image or a sound file.<br />
#Select a grade percentage for the answer. This is the percentage of the total points for the question that selecting this response is worth. You can select negative percentages as well as positive percentages. So, selecting a correct response in a multiple answer question may give you 50% of the possible points, while selecting a wrong answer may take away 10%. Note that in a multiple-answer question, the grades must add up to 100%.<br />
#*Be aware that if you allow multiple answers and have more than a single correct choice, and do not use a negative grade percentage for wrong answers, the students can simply tick all choices and get the full grade.<br />
#If you wish, you can add feedback for each response. It may be a bit more work, but it’s good practice to tell the students why each answer is right or wrong using the feedback area. If students know why an answer is right or wrong, they can analyse their own thinking and begin to understand why an answer is correct. Your feedback will only be displayed if you select Show Feedback in the quiz body options.<br />
#Fill in the rest of the response choices in the rest of the form. Any unused areas will be ignored.<br />
#Fill in the [[Multiple_Choice_question_type#Overall_feedback|overall feedback]] fields if you wish.<br />
#Select the "Save Changes" button at the bottom of the screen.<br />
<br />
=== Penalty factor ===<br />
<br />
The 'penalty factor' only applies when the question is used in a quiz using adaptive mode - i.e. where the student is allowed multiple attempts at a question even within the same attempt at the quiz. If the penalty factor is more than 0, then the student will lose that proportion of the '''maximum''' grade upon each successive attempt. For example, if the default question grade is 10, and the penalty factor is 0.2, then each successive attempt after the first one will incur a penalty of 0.2 x 10 = 2 points.<br />
<br />
==General feedback==<br />
General feedback is some text that gets shown to the student after they have attempted the question. Unlike answer feedbacks, which depend on the question type and what response the student gave, the same general feedback text is shown to all students.<br />
<br />
You can control when general feedback is shown to students using the "Review options" check-boxes on the quiz editing form.<br />
<br />
You can use the general feedback to give students some background to what knowledge the question was testing. Or to give them a link to more information they can use if they did not understand the questions.<br />
<br />
==Combined feedback==<br />
The option ''Combined feedback'' for correct/partially correct/incorrect responses is particularly useful for multiple-response questions, where it is difficult to control what feedback students see just using the answer-specific feedback.<br />
<br />
So, when the student submits the question, they will see the answer-specific feedback next to the option(s) they selected, the combined feedback in a box below the options, and if applicable, the general feedback underneath everything else.<br />
<br />
==Site administration settings==<br />
<br />
An administrator can specify the defaults for multiple choice settings via the settings link in 'Manage question types' in the Site administration.<br />
<br />
==Lesson module multiple choice questions==<br />
This page was created for the Quiz module. A [[Lesson_module#Multiple_choice|Lesson Multiple Choice]] or [[Multianswer question type]] looks the same to the student but is very different in the teacher's edit mode. A lesson question offers the teacher the chance to both grade a student's answer, give feedback and also to send the student to another specific page based upon the student's choice.<br />
<br />
There are other differences. Quiz has a more robust scoring system that is similar to "Custom Scoring" in the Lesson module. Even with custom scoring turned on, Lesson will not give percentage credit of a question's score for an answer. And students must select all the correct answers to receive any credit for the multianswer question in the Lesson module.<br />
<br />
==All-or-nothing multiple choice question type (plugin)==<br />
The [[All or nothing multiple choice question type]] plugin is adapted from the existing multichoice question. The main difference from the standard Moodle multiple choice question type is in the way that grading works.<br />
<br />
The teacher editing interface is slightly modified as when creating the question, the teacher just indicates which choices are correct.<br />
In an all-or-nothing multiple choice question, a respondent can choose one or more answers. If the chosen answers correspond exactly to the correct choices defined in the question, the respondent gets 100%. If he/she chooses any incorrect choices or does not select all of the correct choices, the grade is 0%.<br />
<br />
Before using the all-or-nothing question type, teachers must really think if this grading is what they want.<br />
<br />
==Calculated multichoice question type==<br />
The [[Calculated multichoice question type]] are like multiple choice questions with the additonal property that the elements to select can include formula results from numeric values that are selected randomly from a set when the quiz is taken. They use the same wildcards than Calculated questions and their wildcards can be shared with other Calculated multichoice or regular Calculated questions.<br />
<br />
The main difference is that the formula is included in the answer choice as {=...}.<br />
<br />
==Eliminator==<br />
<br />
Some teachers say that young students may be less successful in Moodle multiple-choice quizzes than in multiple-choice tests on paper. This would be largely due to the fact that students tend to cross out the wrong answers, which they can not do with Moodle's multiple choice quizzes.<br />
<br />
An "eliminator" is a way of graying out or crossing out choices to help students keep the choice they want. Moodle's core Multiple Choice question does not yet include such an eliminator. However, the teacher can easily create an eliminator by adding HTML code to the text of the choices.<br />
<br />
<p style="margin-bottom:5px;">For a gray out eliminator, add the following HTML code to the text of each choice:</p><br />
&lt;div style="display:inline-block;"><br />
&lt;input type="radio" id="Eliminator" style="display:none;"><br />
&lt;label for="Eliminator"><br />
&lt;span onclick="if(this.style.opacity==0.3){this.style.opacity=1;}else{this.style.opacity=0.3;}" style="opacity: 1;"><br />
<i>Choice text</i><br />
&lt;/span><br />
&lt;/label><br />
&lt;/div><br />
<p style="margin:0;"></p><br />
where <i><pre>Choice text</pre></i> is the actual text for each choice.<br />
<p style="margin-top:2px;">The workaround works as follows:</p><br />
*The student clicks on the <b>text</b> of the choices to toggle: black / gray out. The gray out color reminds the student that these choices are eliminated.<br />
*The student clicks on the <b>radio buttons</b> to select the answer.<br />
<br />
Examples and variations (e.g. line-through) of this workaround are presented [https://moodleformulas.org/course/view.php?id=38&section=7 here].<br />
<br />
==See also==<br />
<br />
*[[Quizventure activity]] a 'space invaders'-like Moodle 2.7+ game using multiple choice questions<br />
* [https://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=368129 Arabic choices not written in Arabic language]<br />
<br />
[[ja:多肢選択問題タイプ]]<br />
[[fr:Question à choix multiple]]<br />
[[ca:Tipus_de_pregunta_de_opcions_múltiples]]<br />
[[de:Fragetyp Multiple-Choice]]<br />
[[es:Tipo de Pregunta de Opción Múltiple]]</div>Dbauer-etshttps://docs.moodle.org/36/en/index.php?title=Multiple_Choice_question_type&diff=133173Multiple Choice question type2019-02-28T20:13:30Z<p>Dbauer-ets: /* General feedback */</p>
<hr />
<div>{{Questions}}<br />
Moodle provides teachers with a lot of flexibility when creating this common question type. You can create single-answer and multiple-answer questions, include pictures, sound or other media in the question and/or answer options (by inserting HTML) and weight individual answers. Remember that [[Lesson_module#Multiple_choice|Lesson module questions]] behave differently.<br />
<br />
There are two types of multiple choice questions - single answer and multiple answer.<br />
<br />
<br />
===Single-answer questions===<br />
These questions allow one and only one answer to be chosen by providing radio buttons next to the answers. You can specify negative or non-negative marks for each answer, usually zero marks for wrong answers, maximum marks for correct answers and partial marks for partially correct answers. A single-answer Multiple Choice question can result in a negative grade.<br />
<br />
===Multiple-answer questions===<br />
The teacher can select "multiple answers are allowed" in a Multiple Choice question type. "Multiple answers" questions types in a quiz allow one or more answers to be chosen by providing check boxes next to the answers. Each answer may carry a positive or negative grade, so that choosing ALL the options will not necessarily result in good grade. If the total grade is negative then the total grade for this question will be zero.<br />
<br />
Feedback can be associated either with specific answers, or with the question as a whole.<br />
<br />
==Question set-up==<br />
<br />
#Select the question category<br />
#Give the question a descriptive name. You'll use the name to track your questions later so "Question 1" isn't a good idea. The name will be used in the question lists on the quiz editing page or in the lesson as a page title. It will not be shown to the students, so you can choose any name that makes sense to you and possibly other teachers.<br />
#Create the question text. If you're using the HTML Editor, you can format the question just like a word processing document.<br />
#Select an image to display if you want to add a picture to the question. The available images are those you have uploaded to the '''main''' Moodle files area (they cannot be in folders). For the student, the image appears immediately after the question text and before the answer options.<br />
#*Alternatively, if you used the HTML editor to create the question text, you can click the image icon. This will pop up the Insert Image window. You can choose to upload an image into your files area from this window, or you can add the URL of an image on the web. If you add a file to your files area, click the name of the file after you upload it to insert the link into the URL text entry at the top of the screen. Then click OK.<br />
#Set the 'default question grade' (i.e. the maximum number of marks for this question).<br />
#Set the 'Penalty factor' (see [[Multiple_Choice_question_type#Penalty_factor|Penalty factor]] below).<br />
#If you wish, add general feedback. This is text that appears to the student after he/she has answered the question.<br />
#Choose whether students can only select one answer or multiple answers<br />
#Choose whether to shuffle the answer options<br />
#Write your first answer in the Choice 1 text field. Inserting HTML into this area also makes it possible to add an image or a sound file.<br />
#Select a grade percentage for the answer. This is the percentage of the total points for the question that selecting this response is worth. You can select negative percentages as well as positive percentages. So, selecting a correct response in a multiple answer question may give you 50% of the possible points, while selecting a wrong answer may take away 10%. Note that in a multiple-answer question, the grades must add up to 100%.<br />
#*Be aware that if you allow multiple answers and have more than a single correct choice, and do not use a negative grade percentage for wrong answers, the students can simply tick all choices and get the full grade.<br />
#If you wish, you can add feedback for each response. It may be a bit more work, but it’s good practice to tell the students why each answer is right or wrong using the feedback area. If students know why an answer is right or wrong, they can analyse their own thinking and begin to understand why an answer is correct. Your feedback will only be displayed if you select Show Feedback in the quiz body options.<br />
#Fill in the rest of the response choices in the rest of the form. Any unused areas will be ignored.<br />
#Fill in the [[Multiple_Choice_question_type#Overall_feedback|overall feedback]] fields if you wish.<br />
#Select the "Save Changes" button at the bottom of the screen.<br />
<br />
=== Penalty factor ===<br />
<br />
The 'penalty factor' only applies when the question is used in a quiz using adaptive mode - i.e. where the student is allowed multiple attempts at a question even within the same attempt at the quiz. If the penalty factor is more than 0, then the student will lose that proportion of the '''maximum''' grade upon each successive attempt. For example, if the default question grade is 10, and the penalty factor is 0.2, then each successive attempt after the first one will incur a penalty of 0.2 x 10 = 2 points.<br />
<br />
==General feedback==<br />
General feedback is some text that gets shown to the student after they have attempted the question. Unlike answer feedbacks, which depend on the question type and what response the student gave, the same general feedback text is shown to all students.<br />
<br />
You can control when general feedback is shown to students using the "Students may review:" check-boxes on the quiz editing form.<br />
<br />
You can use the general feedback to give students some background to what knowledge the question was testing. Or to give them a link to more information they can use if they did not understand the questions.<br />
<br />
==Combined feedback==<br />
The option ''Combined feedback'' for correct/partially correct/incorrect responses is particularly useful for multiple-response questions, where it is difficult to control what feedback students see just using the answer-specific feedback.<br />
<br />
So, when the student submits the question, they will see the answer-specific feedback next to the option(s) they selected, the combined feedback in a box below the options, and if applicable, the general feedback underneath everything else.<br />
<br />
==Site administration settings==<br />
<br />
An administrator can specify the defaults for multiple choice settings via the settings link in 'Manage question types' in the Site administration.<br />
<br />
==Lesson module multiple choice questions==<br />
This page was created for the Quiz module. A [[Lesson_module#Multiple_choice|Lesson Multiple Choice]] or [[Multianswer question type]] looks the same to the student but is very different in the teacher's edit mode. A lesson question offers the teacher the chance to both grade a student's answer, give feedback and also to send the student to another specific page based upon the student's choice.<br />
<br />
There are other differences. Quiz has a more robust scoring system that is similar to "Custom Scoring" in the Lesson module. Even with custom scoring turned on, Lesson will not give percentage credit of a question's score for an answer. And students must select all the correct answers to receive any credit for the multianswer question in the Lesson module.<br />
<br />
==All-or-nothing multiple choice question type (plugin)==<br />
The [[All or nothing multiple choice question type]] plugin is adapted from the existing multichoice question. The main difference from the standard Moodle multiple choice question type is in the way that grading works.<br />
<br />
The teacher editing interface is slightly modified as when creating the question, the teacher just indicates which choices are correct.<br />
In an all-or-nothing multiple choice question, a respondent can choose one or more answers. If the chosen answers correspond exactly to the correct choices defined in the question, the respondent gets 100%. If he/she chooses any incorrect choices or does not select all of the correct choices, the grade is 0%.<br />
<br />
Before using the all-or-nothing question type, teachers must really think if this grading is what they want.<br />
<br />
==Calculated multichoice question type==<br />
The [[Calculated multichoice question type]] are like multiple choice questions with the additonal property that the elements to select can include formula results from numeric values that are selected randomly from a set when the quiz is taken. They use the same wildcards than Calculated questions and their wildcards can be shared with other Calculated multichoice or regular Calculated questions.<br />
<br />
The main difference is that the formula is included in the answer choice as {=...}.<br />
<br />
==Eliminator==<br />
<br />
Some teachers say that young students may be less successful in Moodle multiple-choice quizzes than in multiple-choice tests on paper. This would be largely due to the fact that students tend to cross out the wrong answers, which they can not do with Moodle's multiple choice quizzes.<br />
<br />
An "eliminator" is a way of graying out or crossing out choices to help students keep the choice they want. Moodle's core Multiple Choice question does not yet include such an eliminator. However, the teacher can easily create an eliminator by adding HTML code to the text of the choices.<br />
<br />
<p style="margin-bottom:5px;">For a gray out eliminator, add the following HTML code to the text of each choice:</p><br />
&lt;div style="display:inline-block;"><br />
&lt;input type="radio" id="Eliminator" style="display:none;"><br />
&lt;label for="Eliminator"><br />
&lt;span onclick="if(this.style.opacity==0.3){this.style.opacity=1;}else{this.style.opacity=0.3;}" style="opacity: 1;"><br />
<i>Choice text</i><br />
&lt;/span><br />
&lt;/label><br />
&lt;/div><br />
<p style="margin:0;"></p><br />
where <i><pre>Choice text</pre></i> is the actual text for each choice.<br />
<p style="margin-top:2px;">The workaround works as follows:</p><br />
*The student clicks on the <b>text</b> of the choices to toggle: black / gray out. The gray out color reminds the student that these choices are eliminated.<br />
*The student clicks on the <b>radio buttons</b> to select the answer.<br />
<br />
Examples and variations (e.g. line-through) of this workaround are presented [https://moodleformulas.org/course/view.php?id=38&section=7 here].<br />
<br />
==See also==<br />
<br />
*[[Quizventure activity]] a 'space invaders'-like Moodle 2.7+ game using multiple choice questions<br />
* [https://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=368129 Arabic choices not written in Arabic language]<br />
<br />
[[ja:多肢選択問題タイプ]]<br />
[[fr:Question à choix multiple]]<br />
[[ca:Tipus_de_pregunta_de_opcions_múltiples]]<br />
[[de:Fragetyp Multiple-Choice]]<br />
[[es:Tipo de Pregunta de Opción Múltiple]]</div>Dbauer-etshttps://docs.moodle.org/36/en/index.php?title=Multiple_Choice_question_type&diff=133172Multiple Choice question type2019-02-28T20:11:36Z<p>Dbauer-ets: /* Overall feedback */</p>
<hr />
<div>{{Questions}}<br />
Moodle provides teachers with a lot of flexibility when creating this common question type. You can create single-answer and multiple-answer questions, include pictures, sound or other media in the question and/or answer options (by inserting HTML) and weight individual answers. Remember that [[Lesson_module#Multiple_choice|Lesson module questions]] behave differently.<br />
<br />
There are two types of multiple choice questions - single answer and multiple answer.<br />
<br />
<br />
===Single-answer questions===<br />
These questions allow one and only one answer to be chosen by providing radio buttons next to the answers. You can specify negative or non-negative marks for each answer, usually zero marks for wrong answers, maximum marks for correct answers and partial marks for partially correct answers. A single-answer Multiple Choice question can result in a negative grade.<br />
<br />
===Multiple-answer questions===<br />
The teacher can select "multiple answers are allowed" in a Multiple Choice question type. "Multiple answers" questions types in a quiz allow one or more answers to be chosen by providing check boxes next to the answers. Each answer may carry a positive or negative grade, so that choosing ALL the options will not necessarily result in good grade. If the total grade is negative then the total grade for this question will be zero.<br />
<br />
Feedback can be associated either with specific answers, or with the question as a whole.<br />
<br />
==Question set-up==<br />
<br />
#Select the question category<br />
#Give the question a descriptive name. You'll use the name to track your questions later so "Question 1" isn't a good idea. The name will be used in the question lists on the quiz editing page or in the lesson as a page title. It will not be shown to the students, so you can choose any name that makes sense to you and possibly other teachers.<br />
#Create the question text. If you're using the HTML Editor, you can format the question just like a word processing document.<br />
#Select an image to display if you want to add a picture to the question. The available images are those you have uploaded to the '''main''' Moodle files area (they cannot be in folders). For the student, the image appears immediately after the question text and before the answer options.<br />
#*Alternatively, if you used the HTML editor to create the question text, you can click the image icon. This will pop up the Insert Image window. You can choose to upload an image into your files area from this window, or you can add the URL of an image on the web. If you add a file to your files area, click the name of the file after you upload it to insert the link into the URL text entry at the top of the screen. Then click OK.<br />
#Set the 'default question grade' (i.e. the maximum number of marks for this question).<br />
#Set the 'Penalty factor' (see [[Multiple_Choice_question_type#Penalty_factor|Penalty factor]] below).<br />
#If you wish, add general feedback. This is text that appears to the student after he/she has answered the question.<br />
#Choose whether students can only select one answer or multiple answers<br />
#Choose whether to shuffle the answer options<br />
#Write your first answer in the Choice 1 text field. Inserting HTML into this area also makes it possible to add an image or a sound file.<br />
#Select a grade percentage for the answer. This is the percentage of the total points for the question that selecting this response is worth. You can select negative percentages as well as positive percentages. So, selecting a correct response in a multiple answer question may give you 50% of the possible points, while selecting a wrong answer may take away 10%. Note that in a multiple-answer question, the grades must add up to 100%.<br />
#*Be aware that if you allow multiple answers and have more than a single correct choice, and do not use a negative grade percentage for wrong answers, the students can simply tick all choices and get the full grade.<br />
#If you wish, you can add feedback for each response. It may be a bit more work, but it’s good practice to tell the students why each answer is right or wrong using the feedback area. If students know why an answer is right or wrong, they can analyse their own thinking and begin to understand why an answer is correct. Your feedback will only be displayed if you select Show Feedback in the quiz body options.<br />
#Fill in the rest of the response choices in the rest of the form. Any unused areas will be ignored.<br />
#Fill in the [[Multiple_Choice_question_type#Overall_feedback|overall feedback]] fields if you wish.<br />
#Select the "Save Changes" button at the bottom of the screen.<br />
<br />
=== Penalty factor ===<br />
<br />
The 'penalty factor' only applies when the question is used in a quiz using adaptive mode - i.e. where the student is allowed multiple attempts at a question even within the same attempt at the quiz. If the penalty factor is more than 0, then the student will lose that proportion of the '''maximum''' grade upon each successive attempt. For example, if the default question grade is 10, and the penalty factor is 0.2, then each successive attempt after the first one will incur a penalty of 0.2 x 10 = 2 points.<br />
<br />
==General feedback==<br />
General feedback is some text that gets shown to the student after they have attempted the question. Unlike feedback, which depends on the question type and what response the student gave, the same general feedback text is shown to all students.<br />
<br />
You can control when general feedback is shown to students using the "Students may review:" check-boxes on the quiz editing form.<br />
<br />
You can use the general feedback to give students some background to what knowledge the question was testing. Or to give them a link to more information they can use if they did not understand the questions.<br />
<br />
==Combined feedback==<br />
The option ''Combined feedback'' for correct/partially correct/incorrect responses is particularly useful for multiple-response questions, where it is difficult to control what feedback students see just using the answer-specific feedback.<br />
<br />
So, when the student submits the question, they will see the answer-specific feedback next to the option(s) they selected, the combined feedback in a box below the options, and if applicable, the general feedback underneath everything else.<br />
<br />
==Site administration settings==<br />
<br />
An administrator can specify the defaults for multiple choice settings via the settings link in 'Manage question types' in the Site administration.<br />
<br />
==Lesson module multiple choice questions==<br />
This page was created for the Quiz module. A [[Lesson_module#Multiple_choice|Lesson Multiple Choice]] or [[Multianswer question type]] looks the same to the student but is very different in the teacher's edit mode. A lesson question offers the teacher the chance to both grade a student's answer, give feedback and also to send the student to another specific page based upon the student's choice.<br />
<br />
There are other differences. Quiz has a more robust scoring system that is similar to "Custom Scoring" in the Lesson module. Even with custom scoring turned on, Lesson will not give percentage credit of a question's score for an answer. And students must select all the correct answers to receive any credit for the multianswer question in the Lesson module.<br />
<br />
==All-or-nothing multiple choice question type (plugin)==<br />
The [[All or nothing multiple choice question type]] plugin is adapted from the existing multichoice question. The main difference from the standard Moodle multiple choice question type is in the way that grading works.<br />
<br />
The teacher editing interface is slightly modified as when creating the question, the teacher just indicates which choices are correct.<br />
In an all-or-nothing multiple choice question, a respondent can choose one or more answers. If the chosen answers correspond exactly to the correct choices defined in the question, the respondent gets 100%. If he/she chooses any incorrect choices or does not select all of the correct choices, the grade is 0%.<br />
<br />
Before using the all-or-nothing question type, teachers must really think if this grading is what they want.<br />
<br />
==Calculated multichoice question type==<br />
The [[Calculated multichoice question type]] are like multiple choice questions with the additonal property that the elements to select can include formula results from numeric values that are selected randomly from a set when the quiz is taken. They use the same wildcards than Calculated questions and their wildcards can be shared with other Calculated multichoice or regular Calculated questions.<br />
<br />
The main difference is that the formula is included in the answer choice as {=...}.<br />
<br />
==Eliminator==<br />
<br />
Some teachers say that young students may be less successful in Moodle multiple-choice quizzes than in multiple-choice tests on paper. This would be largely due to the fact that students tend to cross out the wrong answers, which they can not do with Moodle's multiple choice quizzes.<br />
<br />
An "eliminator" is a way of graying out or crossing out choices to help students keep the choice they want. Moodle's core Multiple Choice question does not yet include such an eliminator. However, the teacher can easily create an eliminator by adding HTML code to the text of the choices.<br />
<br />
<p style="margin-bottom:5px;">For a gray out eliminator, add the following HTML code to the text of each choice:</p><br />
&lt;div style="display:inline-block;"><br />
&lt;input type="radio" id="Eliminator" style="display:none;"><br />
&lt;label for="Eliminator"><br />
&lt;span onclick="if(this.style.opacity==0.3){this.style.opacity=1;}else{this.style.opacity=0.3;}" style="opacity: 1;"><br />
<i>Choice text</i><br />
&lt;/span><br />
&lt;/label><br />
&lt;/div><br />
<p style="margin:0;"></p><br />
where <i><pre>Choice text</pre></i> is the actual text for each choice.<br />
<p style="margin-top:2px;">The workaround works as follows:</p><br />
*The student clicks on the <b>text</b> of the choices to toggle: black / gray out. The gray out color reminds the student that these choices are eliminated.<br />
*The student clicks on the <b>radio buttons</b> to select the answer.<br />
<br />
Examples and variations (e.g. line-through) of this workaround are presented [https://moodleformulas.org/course/view.php?id=38&section=7 here].<br />
<br />
==See also==<br />
<br />
*[[Quizventure activity]] a 'space invaders'-like Moodle 2.7+ game using multiple choice questions<br />
* [https://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=368129 Arabic choices not written in Arabic language]<br />
<br />
[[ja:多肢選択問題タイプ]]<br />
[[fr:Question à choix multiple]]<br />
[[ca:Tipus_de_pregunta_de_opcions_múltiples]]<br />
[[de:Fragetyp Multiple-Choice]]<br />
[[es:Tipo de Pregunta de Opción Múltiple]]</div>Dbauer-etshttps://docs.moodle.org/36/en/index.php?title=Formulas_question_type&diff=132920Formulas question type2019-01-03T16:45:50Z<p>Dbauer-ets: </p>
<hr />
<div><div style="background:#d9edf7;color:#000000;padding:8px 20px 16px;border:1px solid #d9d9d9;border-radius:4px;"><br />
<br />
For complete, up-to-date documentation on the Formulas question type, please see [https://moodleformulas.org/ '''MoodleFormulas.org'''].<br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
<br />
[[Category:Contributed code]]<br />
[[Category:Questions]]<br />
[[Category:Mathematics]]<br />
<br />
[[es:Tipo de pregunta fórmulas]]</div>Dbauer-etshttps://docs.moodle.org/36/en/index.php?title=Formulas_question_type&diff=132919Formulas question type2019-01-03T16:41:18Z<p>Dbauer-ets: </p>
<hr />
<div><div style="background:#d9edf7;color:#000000;padding:8px 20px 16px;border:1px solid #d9d9d9;border-radius:4px;"><br />
<br />
For a complete and up-to-date documentation of the Formulas question type, consult the course [https://moodleformulas.org/ '''MoodleFormulas'''].<br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
<br />
[[Category:Contributed code]]<br />
[[Category:Questions]]<br />
[[Category:Mathematics]]<br />
<br />
[[es:Tipo de pregunta fórmulas]]</div>Dbauer-etshttps://docs.moodle.org/36/en/index.php?title=Formulas_question_type&diff=132918Formulas question type2019-01-03T16:37:19Z<p>Dbauer-ets: </p>
<hr />
<div><div style="background:#d9edf7;color:#000000;padding:8px 20px 16px;border:1px solid #d9d9d9;border-radius:4px;"><br />
<br />
For a complete and up-to-date documentation of the Formulas question type, consult the course [https://moodleformulas.org/ '''MoodleFormulas'''].<br />
<br />
*To be allowed to take the quizzes (recommended), you must log in as '''student''' with password '''Moodle2018#'''<br />
<br />
*You can also log in as a guest but, by doing so, you will not be able to take the quizzes. You may also enroll yourself by creating an account; however, since this site is updated frequently, the preservation of quiz data is not guaranteed.<br />
<br />
</div><br />
<br />
<br />
[[Category:Contributed code]]<br />
[[Category:Questions]]<br />
[[Category:Mathematics]]<br />
<br />
[[es:Tipo de pregunta fórmulas]]</div>Dbauer-etshttps://docs.moodle.org/36/en/index.php?title=Multiple_Choice_question_type&diff=132911Multiple Choice question type2018-12-28T16:35:42Z<p>Dbauer-ets: /* Eliminator */</p>
<hr />
<div>{{Questions}}<br />
Moodle provides teachers with a lot of flexibility when creating this common question type. You can create single-answer and multiple-answer questions, include pictures, sound or other media in the question and/or answer options (by inserting HTML) and weight individual answers. Remember that [[Lesson_module#Multiple_choice|Lesson module questions]] behave differently.<br />
<br />
There are two types of multiple choice questions - single answer and multiple answer.<br />
<br />
<br />
===Single-answer questions===<br />
These questions allow one and only one answer to be chosen by providing radio buttons next to the answers. You can specify negative or non-negative marks for each answer, usually zero marks for wrong answers, maximum marks for correct answers and partial marks for partially correct answers.<br />
<br />
===Multiple-answer questions===<br />
The teacher can select "multiple answers are allowed" in a Multiple Choice question type. "Multiple answers" questions types in a quiz allow one or more answers to be chosen by providing check boxes next to the answers. Each answer may carry a positive or negative grade, so that choosing ALL the options will not necessarily result in good grade. If the total grade is negative then the total grade for this question will be zero.<br />
<br />
Feedback can be associated either with specific answers, or with the question as a whole.<br />
<br />
==Question set-up==<br />
<br />
#Select the question category<br />
#Give the question a descriptive name. You'll use the name to track your questions later so "Question 1" isn't a good idea. The name will be used in the question lists on the quiz editing page or in the lesson as a page title. It will not be shown to the students, so you can choose any name that makes sense to you and possibly other teachers.<br />
#Create the question text. If you're using the HTML Editor, you can format the question just like a word processing document.<br />
#Select an image to display if you want to add a picture to the question. The available images are those you have uploaded to the '''main''' Moodle files area (they cannot be in folders). For the student, the image appears immediately after the question text and before the answer options.<br />
#*Alternatively, if you used the HTML editor to create the question text, you can click the image icon. This will pop up the Insert Image window. You can choose to upload an image into your files area from this window, or you can add the URL of an image on the web. If you add a file to your files area, click the name of the file after you upload it to insert the link into the URL text entry at the top of the screen. Then click OK.<br />
#Set the 'default question grade' (i.e. the maximum number of marks for this question).<br />
#Set the 'Penalty factor' (see [[Multiple_Choice_question_type#Penalty_factor|Penalty factor]] below).<br />
#If you wish, add general feedback. This is text that appears to the student after he/she has answered the question.<br />
#Choose whether students can only select one answer or multiple answers<br />
#Choose whether to shuffle the answer options<br />
#Write your first answer in the Choice 1 text field. Inserting HTML into this area also makes it possible to add an image or a sound file.<br />
#Select a grade percentage for the answer. This is the percentage of the total points for the question that selecting this response is worth. You can select negative percentages as well as positive percentages. So, selecting a correct response in a multiple answer question may give you 50% of the possible points, while selecting a wrong answer may take away 10%. Note that in a multiple-answer question, the grades must add up to 100%.<br />
#*Be aware that if you allow multiple answers and have more than a single correct choice, and do not use a negative grade percentage for wrong answers, the students can simply tick all choices and get the full grade.<br />
#If you wish, you can add feedback for each response. It may be a bit more work, but it’s good practice to tell the students why each answer is right or wrong using the feedback area. If students know why an answer is right or wrong, they can analyse their own thinking and begin to understand why an answer is correct. Your feedback will only be displayed if you select Show Feedback in the quiz body options.<br />
#Fill in the rest of the response choices in the rest of the form. Any unused areas will be ignored.<br />
#Fill in the [[Multiple_Choice_question_type#Overall_feedback|overall feedback]] fields if you wish.<br />
#Select the "Save Changes" button at the bottom of the screen.<br />
<br />
=== Penalty factor ===<br />
<br />
The 'penalty factor' only applies when the question is used in a quiz using adaptive mode - i.e. where the student is allowed multiple attempts at a question even within the same attempt at the quiz. If the penalty factor is more than 0, then the student will lose that proportion of the '''maximum''' grade upon each successive attempt. For example, if the default question grade is 10, and the penalty factor is 0.2, then each successive attempt after the first one will incur a penalty of 0.2 x 10 = 2 points.<br />
<br />
==General feedback==<br />
General feedback is some text that gets shown to the student after they have attempted the question. Unlike feedback, which depends on the question type and what response the student gave, the same general feedback text is shown to all students.<br />
<br />
You can control when general feedback is shown to students using the "Students may review:" check-boxes on the quiz editing form.<br />
<br />
You can use the general feedback to give students some background to what knowledge the question was testing. Or to give them a link to more information they can use if they did not understand the questions.<br />
<br />
==Overall feedback==<br />
The option ''overall feedback'' for correct/partially correct/incorrect responses is particularly useful for multiple-response questions, where it is difficult to control what feedback students see just using the answer-specific feedback.<br />
<br />
So, when the student submits the question, they will see the answer-specific feedback next to the option(s) they selected, the overall feedback in a box below the options, and if applicable, the general feedback underneath everything else.<br />
<br />
==Site administration settings==<br />
<br />
An administrator can specify the defaults for multiple choice settings via the settings link in 'Manage question types' in the Site administration.<br />
<br />
==Lesson module multiple choice questions==<br />
This page was created for the Quiz module. A [[Lesson_module#Multiple_choice|Lesson Multiple Choice]] or [[Multianswer question type]] looks the same to the student but is very different in the teacher's edit mode. A lesson question offers the teacher the chance to both grade a student's answer, give feedback and also to send the student to another specific page based upon the student's choice.<br />
<br />
There are other differences. Quiz has a more robust scoring system that is similar to "Custom Scoring" in the Lesson module. Even with custom scoring turned on, Lesson will not give percentage credit of a question's score for an answer. And students must select all the correct answers to receive any credit for the multianswer question in the Lesson module.<br />
<br />
==All-or-nothing multiple choice question type (plugin)==<br />
The [[All or nothing multiple choice question type]] plugin is adapted from the existing multichoice question. The main difference from the standard Moodle multiple choice question type is in the way that grading works.<br />
<br />
The teacher editing interface is slightly modified as when creating the question, the teacher just indicates which choices are correct.<br />
In an all-or-nothing multiple choice question, a respondent can choose one or more answers. If the chosen answers correspond exactly to the correct choices defined in the question, the respondent gets 100%. If he/she chooses any incorrect choices or does not select all of the correct choices, the grade is 0%.<br />
<br />
Before using the all-or-nothing question type, teachers must really think if this grading is what they want.<br />
<br />
==Calculated multichoice question type==<br />
The [[Calculated multichoice question type]] are like multiple choice questions with the additonal property that the elements to select can include formula results from numeric values that are selected randomly from a set when the quiz is taken. They use the same wildcards than Calculated questions and their wildcards can be shared with other Calculated multichoice or regular Calculated questions.<br />
<br />
The main difference is that the formula is included in the answer choice as {=...}.<br />
<br />
==Eliminator==<br />
<br />
Some teachers say that young students may be less successful in Moodle multiple-choice quizzes than in multiple-choice tests on paper. This would be largely due to the fact that students tend to cross out the wrong answers, which they can not do with Moodle's multiple choice quizzes.<br />
<br />
An "eliminator" is a way of graying out or crossing out choices to help students keep the choice they want. Moodle's core Multiple Choice question does not yet include such an eliminator. However, the teacher can easily create an eliminator by adding HTML code to the text of the choices.<br />
<br />
<p style="margin-bottom:5px;">For a gray out eliminator, add the following HTML code to the text of each choice:</p><br />
&lt;div style="display:inline-block;"><br />
&lt;input type="radio" id="Eliminator" style="display:none;"><br />
&lt;label for="Eliminator"><br />
&lt;span onclick="if(this.style.opacity==0.3){this.style.opacity=1;}else{this.style.opacity=0.3;}" style="opacity: 1;"><br />
<i>Choice text</i><br />
&lt;/span><br />
&lt;/label><br />
&lt;/div><br />
<p style="margin:0;"></p><br />
where <i><pre>Choice text</pre></i> is the actual text for each choice.<br />
<p style="margin-top:2px;">The workaround works as follows:</p><br />
*The student clicks on the <b>text</b> of the choices to toggle: black / gray out. The gray out color reminds the student that these choices are eliminated.<br />
*The student clicks on the <b>radio buttons</b> to select the answer.<br />
<br />
Examples and variations (e.g. line-through) of this workaround are presented [https://moodleformulas.org/course/view.php?id=38&section=7 here].<br />
<br />
==See also==<br />
<br />
*[[Quizventure activity]] a 'space invaders'-like Moodle 2.7+ game using multiple choice questions<br />
* [https://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=368129 Arabic choices not written in Arabic language]<br />
<br />
[[ja:多肢選択問題タイプ]]<br />
[[fr:Question à choix multiple]]<br />
[[ca:Tipus_de_pregunta_de_opcions_múltiples]]<br />
[[de:Fragetyp Multiple-Choice]]<br />
[[es:Tipo de Pregunta de Opción Múltiple]]</div>Dbauer-etshttps://docs.moodle.org/36/en/index.php?title=Multiple_Choice_question_type&diff=132910Multiple Choice question type2018-12-28T16:20:01Z<p>Dbauer-ets: /* Eliminator */</p>
<hr />
<div>{{Questions}}<br />
Moodle provides teachers with a lot of flexibility when creating this common question type. You can create single-answer and multiple-answer questions, include pictures, sound or other media in the question and/or answer options (by inserting HTML) and weight individual answers. Remember that [[Lesson_module#Multiple_choice|Lesson module questions]] behave differently.<br />
<br />
There are two types of multiple choice questions - single answer and multiple answer.<br />
<br />
<br />
===Single-answer questions===<br />
These questions allow one and only one answer to be chosen by providing radio buttons next to the answers. You can specify negative or non-negative marks for each answer, usually zero marks for wrong answers, maximum marks for correct answers and partial marks for partially correct answers.<br />
<br />
===Multiple-answer questions===<br />
The teacher can select "multiple answers are allowed" in a Multiple Choice question type. "Multiple answers" questions types in a quiz allow one or more answers to be chosen by providing check boxes next to the answers. Each answer may carry a positive or negative grade, so that choosing ALL the options will not necessarily result in good grade. If the total grade is negative then the total grade for this question will be zero.<br />
<br />
Feedback can be associated either with specific answers, or with the question as a whole.<br />
<br />
==Question set-up==<br />
<br />
#Select the question category<br />
#Give the question a descriptive name. You'll use the name to track your questions later so "Question 1" isn't a good idea. The name will be used in the question lists on the quiz editing page or in the lesson as a page title. It will not be shown to the students, so you can choose any name that makes sense to you and possibly other teachers.<br />
#Create the question text. If you're using the HTML Editor, you can format the question just like a word processing document.<br />
#Select an image to display if you want to add a picture to the question. The available images are those you have uploaded to the '''main''' Moodle files area (they cannot be in folders). For the student, the image appears immediately after the question text and before the answer options.<br />
#*Alternatively, if you used the HTML editor to create the question text, you can click the image icon. This will pop up the Insert Image window. You can choose to upload an image into your files area from this window, or you can add the URL of an image on the web. If you add a file to your files area, click the name of the file after you upload it to insert the link into the URL text entry at the top of the screen. Then click OK.<br />
#Set the 'default question grade' (i.e. the maximum number of marks for this question).<br />
#Set the 'Penalty factor' (see [[Multiple_Choice_question_type#Penalty_factor|Penalty factor]] below).<br />
#If you wish, add general feedback. This is text that appears to the student after he/she has answered the question.<br />
#Choose whether students can only select one answer or multiple answers<br />
#Choose whether to shuffle the answer options<br />
#Write your first answer in the Choice 1 text field. Inserting HTML into this area also makes it possible to add an image or a sound file.<br />
#Select a grade percentage for the answer. This is the percentage of the total points for the question that selecting this response is worth. You can select negative percentages as well as positive percentages. So, selecting a correct response in a multiple answer question may give you 50% of the possible points, while selecting a wrong answer may take away 10%. Note that in a multiple-answer question, the grades must add up to 100%.<br />
#*Be aware that if you allow multiple answers and have more than a single correct choice, and do not use a negative grade percentage for wrong answers, the students can simply tick all choices and get the full grade.<br />
#If you wish, you can add feedback for each response. It may be a bit more work, but it’s good practice to tell the students why each answer is right or wrong using the feedback area. If students know why an answer is right or wrong, they can analyse their own thinking and begin to understand why an answer is correct. Your feedback will only be displayed if you select Show Feedback in the quiz body options.<br />
#Fill in the rest of the response choices in the rest of the form. Any unused areas will be ignored.<br />
#Fill in the [[Multiple_Choice_question_type#Overall_feedback|overall feedback]] fields if you wish.<br />
#Select the "Save Changes" button at the bottom of the screen.<br />
<br />
=== Penalty factor ===<br />
<br />
The 'penalty factor' only applies when the question is used in a quiz using adaptive mode - i.e. where the student is allowed multiple attempts at a question even within the same attempt at the quiz. If the penalty factor is more than 0, then the student will lose that proportion of the '''maximum''' grade upon each successive attempt. For example, if the default question grade is 10, and the penalty factor is 0.2, then each successive attempt after the first one will incur a penalty of 0.2 x 10 = 2 points.<br />
<br />
==General feedback==<br />
General feedback is some text that gets shown to the student after they have attempted the question. Unlike feedback, which depends on the question type and what response the student gave, the same general feedback text is shown to all students.<br />
<br />
You can control when general feedback is shown to students using the "Students may review:" check-boxes on the quiz editing form.<br />
<br />
You can use the general feedback to give students some background to what knowledge the question was testing. Or to give them a link to more information they can use if they did not understand the questions.<br />
<br />
==Overall feedback==<br />
The option ''overall feedback'' for correct/partially correct/incorrect responses is particularly useful for multiple-response questions, where it is difficult to control what feedback students see just using the answer-specific feedback.<br />
<br />
So, when the student submits the question, they will see the answer-specific feedback next to the option(s) they selected, the overall feedback in a box below the options, and if applicable, the general feedback underneath everything else.<br />
<br />
==Site administration settings==<br />
<br />
An administrator can specify the defaults for multiple choice settings via the settings link in 'Manage question types' in the Site administration.<br />
<br />
==Lesson module multiple choice questions==<br />
This page was created for the Quiz module. A [[Lesson_module#Multiple_choice|Lesson Multiple Choice]] or [[Multianswer question type]] looks the same to the student but is very different in the teacher's edit mode. A lesson question offers the teacher the chance to both grade a student's answer, give feedback and also to send the student to another specific page based upon the student's choice.<br />
<br />
There are other differences. Quiz has a more robust scoring system that is similar to "Custom Scoring" in the Lesson module. Even with custom scoring turned on, Lesson will not give percentage credit of a question's score for an answer. And students must select all the correct answers to receive any credit for the multianswer question in the Lesson module.<br />
<br />
==All-or-nothing multiple choice question type (plugin)==<br />
The [[All or nothing multiple choice question type]] plugin is adapted from the existing multichoice question. The main difference from the standard Moodle multiple choice question type is in the way that grading works.<br />
<br />
The teacher editing interface is slightly modified as when creating the question, the teacher just indicates which choices are correct.<br />
In an all-or-nothing multiple choice question, a respondent can choose one or more answers. If the chosen answers correspond exactly to the correct choices defined in the question, the respondent gets 100%. If he/she chooses any incorrect choices or does not select all of the correct choices, the grade is 0%.<br />
<br />
Before using the all-or-nothing question type, teachers must really think if this grading is what they want.<br />
<br />
==Calculated multichoice question type==<br />
The [[Calculated multichoice question type]] are like multiple choice questions with the additonal property that the elements to select can include formula results from numeric values that are selected randomly from a set when the quiz is taken. They use the same wildcards than Calculated questions and their wildcards can be shared with other Calculated multichoice or regular Calculated questions.<br />
<br />
The main difference is that the formula is included in the answer choice as {=...}.<br />
<br />
==Eliminator==<br />
<br />
Some teachers say that young students may be less successful in Moodle multiple-choice quizzes than in multiple-choice tests on paper. This would be largely due to the fact that students tend to cross out the wrong answers, which they can not do with Moodle's multiple choice quizzes.<br />
<br />
An "eliminator" is a way of graying out or crossing out choices to help students keep the choice they want. Moodle's core Multiple Choice question does not yet include such an eliminator. However, a simple workaround is to add HTML code to the text of choices.<br />
<br />
<p style="margin-bottom:5px;">For a gray out eliminator, add the following HTML code to the text of each choice:</p><br />
&lt;div style="display:inline-block;"><br />
&lt;input type="radio" id="Eliminator" style="display:none;"><br />
&lt;label for="Eliminator"><br />
&lt;span onclick="if(this.style.opacity==0.3){this.style.opacity=1;}else{this.style.opacity=0.3;}" style="opacity: 1;"><br />
<i>Choice text</i><br />
&lt;/span><br />
&lt;/label><br />
&lt;/div><br />
<p style="margin:0;"></p><br />
where <i><pre>Choice text</pre></i> is the actual text for each choice.<br />
<p style="margin-top:2px;">The workaround works as follows:</p><br />
*The student clicks on the text labels to toggle: black / gray out. The gray out color reminds the student that these choices are eliminated.<br />
*The student clicks on the radio buttons to select the answer.<br />
<br />
Examples and variations (e.g. line-through) of this workaround are presented [https://moodleformulas.org/course/view.php?id=38&section=7 here].<br />
<br />
==See also==<br />
<br />
*[[Quizventure activity]] a 'space invaders'-like Moodle 2.7+ game using multiple choice questions<br />
* [https://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=368129 Arabic choices not written in Arabic language]<br />
<br />
[[ja:多肢選択問題タイプ]]<br />
[[fr:Question à choix multiple]]<br />
[[ca:Tipus_de_pregunta_de_opcions_múltiples]]<br />
[[de:Fragetyp Multiple-Choice]]<br />
[[es:Tipo de Pregunta de Opción Múltiple]]</div>Dbauer-etshttps://docs.moodle.org/36/en/index.php?title=Multiple_Choice_question_type&diff=132909Multiple Choice question type2018-12-28T15:56:26Z<p>Dbauer-ets: /* Eliminator */</p>
<hr />
<div>{{Questions}}<br />
Moodle provides teachers with a lot of flexibility when creating this common question type. You can create single-answer and multiple-answer questions, include pictures, sound or other media in the question and/or answer options (by inserting HTML) and weight individual answers. Remember that [[Lesson_module#Multiple_choice|Lesson module questions]] behave differently.<br />
<br />
There are two types of multiple choice questions - single answer and multiple answer.<br />
<br />
<br />
===Single-answer questions===<br />
These questions allow one and only one answer to be chosen by providing radio buttons next to the answers. You can specify negative or non-negative marks for each answer, usually zero marks for wrong answers, maximum marks for correct answers and partial marks for partially correct answers.<br />
<br />
===Multiple-answer questions===<br />
The teacher can select "multiple answers are allowed" in a Multiple Choice question type. "Multiple answers" questions types in a quiz allow one or more answers to be chosen by providing check boxes next to the answers. Each answer may carry a positive or negative grade, so that choosing ALL the options will not necessarily result in good grade. If the total grade is negative then the total grade for this question will be zero.<br />
<br />
Feedback can be associated either with specific answers, or with the question as a whole.<br />
<br />
==Question set-up==<br />
<br />
#Select the question category<br />
#Give the question a descriptive name. You'll use the name to track your questions later so "Question 1" isn't a good idea. The name will be used in the question lists on the quiz editing page or in the lesson as a page title. It will not be shown to the students, so you can choose any name that makes sense to you and possibly other teachers.<br />
#Create the question text. If you're using the HTML Editor, you can format the question just like a word processing document.<br />
#Select an image to display if you want to add a picture to the question. The available images are those you have uploaded to the '''main''' Moodle files area (they cannot be in folders). For the student, the image appears immediately after the question text and before the answer options.<br />
#*Alternatively, if you used the HTML editor to create the question text, you can click the image icon. This will pop up the Insert Image window. You can choose to upload an image into your files area from this window, or you can add the URL of an image on the web. If you add a file to your files area, click the name of the file after you upload it to insert the link into the URL text entry at the top of the screen. Then click OK.<br />
#Set the 'default question grade' (i.e. the maximum number of marks for this question).<br />
#Set the 'Penalty factor' (see [[Multiple_Choice_question_type#Penalty_factor|Penalty factor]] below).<br />
#If you wish, add general feedback. This is text that appears to the student after he/she has answered the question.<br />
#Choose whether students can only select one answer or multiple answers<br />
#Choose whether to shuffle the answer options<br />
#Write your first answer in the Choice 1 text field. Inserting HTML into this area also makes it possible to add an image or a sound file.<br />
#Select a grade percentage for the answer. This is the percentage of the total points for the question that selecting this response is worth. You can select negative percentages as well as positive percentages. So, selecting a correct response in a multiple answer question may give you 50% of the possible points, while selecting a wrong answer may take away 10%. Note that in a multiple-answer question, the grades must add up to 100%.<br />
#*Be aware that if you allow multiple answers and have more than a single correct choice, and do not use a negative grade percentage for wrong answers, the students can simply tick all choices and get the full grade.<br />
#If you wish, you can add feedback for each response. It may be a bit more work, but it’s good practice to tell the students why each answer is right or wrong using the feedback area. If students know why an answer is right or wrong, they can analyse their own thinking and begin to understand why an answer is correct. Your feedback will only be displayed if you select Show Feedback in the quiz body options.<br />
#Fill in the rest of the response choices in the rest of the form. Any unused areas will be ignored.<br />
#Fill in the [[Multiple_Choice_question_type#Overall_feedback|overall feedback]] fields if you wish.<br />
#Select the "Save Changes" button at the bottom of the screen.<br />
<br />
=== Penalty factor ===<br />
<br />
The 'penalty factor' only applies when the question is used in a quiz using adaptive mode - i.e. where the student is allowed multiple attempts at a question even within the same attempt at the quiz. If the penalty factor is more than 0, then the student will lose that proportion of the '''maximum''' grade upon each successive attempt. For example, if the default question grade is 10, and the penalty factor is 0.2, then each successive attempt after the first one will incur a penalty of 0.2 x 10 = 2 points.<br />
<br />
==General feedback==<br />
General feedback is some text that gets shown to the student after they have attempted the question. Unlike feedback, which depends on the question type and what response the student gave, the same general feedback text is shown to all students.<br />
<br />
You can control when general feedback is shown to students using the "Students may review:" check-boxes on the quiz editing form.<br />
<br />
You can use the general feedback to give students some background to what knowledge the question was testing. Or to give them a link to more information they can use if they did not understand the questions.<br />
<br />
==Overall feedback==<br />
The option ''overall feedback'' for correct/partially correct/incorrect responses is particularly useful for multiple-response questions, where it is difficult to control what feedback students see just using the answer-specific feedback.<br />
<br />
So, when the student submits the question, they will see the answer-specific feedback next to the option(s) they selected, the overall feedback in a box below the options, and if applicable, the general feedback underneath everything else.<br />
<br />
==Site administration settings==<br />
<br />
An administrator can specify the defaults for multiple choice settings via the settings link in 'Manage question types' in the Site administration.<br />
<br />
==Lesson module multiple choice questions==<br />
This page was created for the Quiz module. A [[Lesson_module#Multiple_choice|Lesson Multiple Choice]] or [[Multianswer question type]] looks the same to the student but is very different in the teacher's edit mode. A lesson question offers the teacher the chance to both grade a student's answer, give feedback and also to send the student to another specific page based upon the student's choice.<br />
<br />
There are other differences. Quiz has a more robust scoring system that is similar to "Custom Scoring" in the Lesson module. Even with custom scoring turned on, Lesson will not give percentage credit of a question's score for an answer. And students must select all the correct answers to receive any credit for the multianswer question in the Lesson module.<br />
<br />
==All-or-nothing multiple choice question type (plugin)==<br />
The [[All or nothing multiple choice question type]] plugin is adapted from the existing multichoice question. The main difference from the standard Moodle multiple choice question type is in the way that grading works.<br />
<br />
The teacher editing interface is slightly modified as when creating the question, the teacher just indicates which choices are correct.<br />
In an all-or-nothing multiple choice question, a respondent can choose one or more answers. If the chosen answers correspond exactly to the correct choices defined in the question, the respondent gets 100%. If he/she chooses any incorrect choices or does not select all of the correct choices, the grade is 0%.<br />
<br />
Before using the all-or-nothing question type, teachers must really think if this grading is what they want.<br />
<br />
==Calculated multichoice question type==<br />
The [[Calculated multichoice question type]] are like multiple choice questions with the additonal property that the elements to select can include formula results from numeric values that are selected randomly from a set when the quiz is taken. They use the same wildcards than Calculated questions and their wildcards can be shared with other Calculated multichoice or regular Calculated questions.<br />
<br />
The main difference is that the formula is included in the answer choice as {=...}.<br />
<br />
==Eliminator==<br />
<br />
Some teachers say that younger students may be less successful in Moodle multiple-choice quizzes than in multiple-choice tests on paper. This would be largely due to the fact that young students like to cross out the wrong answers, which they can not do with Moodle's multiple choice quizzes.<br />
<br />
An "eliminator" is a way of graying out or crossing out choices to help students keep the choice they want. Moodle's core Multiple Choice question does not yet include such an eliminator. However, a simple workaround is to add HTML code to the text of choices.<br />
<br />
<p style="margin-bottom:5px;">For a gray out eliminator, add the following HTML code to each question:</p><br />
&lt;div style="display:inline-block;"><br />
&lt;input type="radio" id="EliminatorChoice" style="display:none;"><br />
&lt;label for="EliminatorChoice"><br />
&lt;span onclick="if(this.style.opacity==0.3){this.style.opacity=1;}else{this.style.opacity=0.3;}" style="opacity: 1;"><br />
<i>Choice text</i><br />
&lt;/span><br />
&lt;/label><br />
&lt;/div><br />
<p style="margin:0;"></p><br />
where <i><pre>Choice text</pre></i> is the text for each choice.<br />
<p style="margin-top:2px;">The workaround works as follows:</p><br />
*The student clicks on the text labels to toggle: black / gray out. The gray out color reminds the student that these choices are eliminated.<br />
*The student clicks on the radio buttons to select the answer.<br />
<br />
Examples and variations (e.g. line-through) of this workaround are presented [https://moodleformulas.org/course/view.php?id=38&section=7 here].<br />
<br />
==See also==<br />
<br />
*[[Quizventure activity]] a 'space invaders'-like Moodle 2.7+ game using multiple choice questions<br />
* [https://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=368129 Arabic choices not written in Arabic language]<br />
<br />
[[ja:多肢選択問題タイプ]]<br />
[[fr:Question à choix multiple]]<br />
[[ca:Tipus_de_pregunta_de_opcions_múltiples]]<br />
[[de:Fragetyp Multiple-Choice]]<br />
[[es:Tipo de Pregunta de Opción Múltiple]]</div>Dbauer-etshttps://docs.moodle.org/36/en/index.php?title=Multiple_Choice_question_type&diff=132908Multiple Choice question type2018-12-28T15:52:18Z<p>Dbauer-ets: /* Eliminator */</p>
<hr />
<div>{{Questions}}<br />
Moodle provides teachers with a lot of flexibility when creating this common question type. You can create single-answer and multiple-answer questions, include pictures, sound or other media in the question and/or answer options (by inserting HTML) and weight individual answers. Remember that [[Lesson_module#Multiple_choice|Lesson module questions]] behave differently.<br />
<br />
There are two types of multiple choice questions - single answer and multiple answer.<br />
<br />
<br />
===Single-answer questions===<br />
These questions allow one and only one answer to be chosen by providing radio buttons next to the answers. You can specify negative or non-negative marks for each answer, usually zero marks for wrong answers, maximum marks for correct answers and partial marks for partially correct answers.<br />
<br />
===Multiple-answer questions===<br />
The teacher can select "multiple answers are allowed" in a Multiple Choice question type. "Multiple answers" questions types in a quiz allow one or more answers to be chosen by providing check boxes next to the answers. Each answer may carry a positive or negative grade, so that choosing ALL the options will not necessarily result in good grade. If the total grade is negative then the total grade for this question will be zero.<br />
<br />
Feedback can be associated either with specific answers, or with the question as a whole.<br />
<br />
==Question set-up==<br />
<br />
#Select the question category<br />
#Give the question a descriptive name. You'll use the name to track your questions later so "Question 1" isn't a good idea. The name will be used in the question lists on the quiz editing page or in the lesson as a page title. It will not be shown to the students, so you can choose any name that makes sense to you and possibly other teachers.<br />
#Create the question text. If you're using the HTML Editor, you can format the question just like a word processing document.<br />
#Select an image to display if you want to add a picture to the question. The available images are those you have uploaded to the '''main''' Moodle files area (they cannot be in folders). For the student, the image appears immediately after the question text and before the answer options.<br />
#*Alternatively, if you used the HTML editor to create the question text, you can click the image icon. This will pop up the Insert Image window. You can choose to upload an image into your files area from this window, or you can add the URL of an image on the web. If you add a file to your files area, click the name of the file after you upload it to insert the link into the URL text entry at the top of the screen. Then click OK.<br />
#Set the 'default question grade' (i.e. the maximum number of marks for this question).<br />
#Set the 'Penalty factor' (see [[Multiple_Choice_question_type#Penalty_factor|Penalty factor]] below).<br />
#If you wish, add general feedback. This is text that appears to the student after he/she has answered the question.<br />
#Choose whether students can only select one answer or multiple answers<br />
#Choose whether to shuffle the answer options<br />
#Write your first answer in the Choice 1 text field. Inserting HTML into this area also makes it possible to add an image or a sound file.<br />
#Select a grade percentage for the answer. This is the percentage of the total points for the question that selecting this response is worth. You can select negative percentages as well as positive percentages. So, selecting a correct response in a multiple answer question may give you 50% of the possible points, while selecting a wrong answer may take away 10%. Note that in a multiple-answer question, the grades must add up to 100%.<br />
#*Be aware that if you allow multiple answers and have more than a single correct choice, and do not use a negative grade percentage for wrong answers, the students can simply tick all choices and get the full grade.<br />
#If you wish, you can add feedback for each response. It may be a bit more work, but it’s good practice to tell the students why each answer is right or wrong using the feedback area. If students know why an answer is right or wrong, they can analyse their own thinking and begin to understand why an answer is correct. Your feedback will only be displayed if you select Show Feedback in the quiz body options.<br />
#Fill in the rest of the response choices in the rest of the form. Any unused areas will be ignored.<br />
#Fill in the [[Multiple_Choice_question_type#Overall_feedback|overall feedback]] fields if you wish.<br />
#Select the "Save Changes" button at the bottom of the screen.<br />
<br />
=== Penalty factor ===<br />
<br />
The 'penalty factor' only applies when the question is used in a quiz using adaptive mode - i.e. where the student is allowed multiple attempts at a question even within the same attempt at the quiz. If the penalty factor is more than 0, then the student will lose that proportion of the '''maximum''' grade upon each successive attempt. For example, if the default question grade is 10, and the penalty factor is 0.2, then each successive attempt after the first one will incur a penalty of 0.2 x 10 = 2 points.<br />
<br />
==General feedback==<br />
General feedback is some text that gets shown to the student after they have attempted the question. Unlike feedback, which depends on the question type and what response the student gave, the same general feedback text is shown to all students.<br />
<br />
You can control when general feedback is shown to students using the "Students may review:" check-boxes on the quiz editing form.<br />
<br />
You can use the general feedback to give students some background to what knowledge the question was testing. Or to give them a link to more information they can use if they did not understand the questions.<br />
<br />
==Overall feedback==<br />
The option ''overall feedback'' for correct/partially correct/incorrect responses is particularly useful for multiple-response questions, where it is difficult to control what feedback students see just using the answer-specific feedback.<br />
<br />
So, when the student submits the question, they will see the answer-specific feedback next to the option(s) they selected, the overall feedback in a box below the options, and if applicable, the general feedback underneath everything else.<br />
<br />
==Site administration settings==<br />
<br />
An administrator can specify the defaults for multiple choice settings via the settings link in 'Manage question types' in the Site administration.<br />
<br />
==Lesson module multiple choice questions==<br />
This page was created for the Quiz module. A [[Lesson_module#Multiple_choice|Lesson Multiple Choice]] or [[Multianswer question type]] looks the same to the student but is very different in the teacher's edit mode. A lesson question offers the teacher the chance to both grade a student's answer, give feedback and also to send the student to another specific page based upon the student's choice.<br />
<br />
There are other differences. Quiz has a more robust scoring system that is similar to "Custom Scoring" in the Lesson module. Even with custom scoring turned on, Lesson will not give percentage credit of a question's score for an answer. And students must select all the correct answers to receive any credit for the multianswer question in the Lesson module.<br />
<br />
==All-or-nothing multiple choice question type (plugin)==<br />
The [[All or nothing multiple choice question type]] plugin is adapted from the existing multichoice question. The main difference from the standard Moodle multiple choice question type is in the way that grading works.<br />
<br />
The teacher editing interface is slightly modified as when creating the question, the teacher just indicates which choices are correct.<br />
In an all-or-nothing multiple choice question, a respondent can choose one or more answers. If the chosen answers correspond exactly to the correct choices defined in the question, the respondent gets 100%. If he/she chooses any incorrect choices or does not select all of the correct choices, the grade is 0%.<br />
<br />
Before using the all-or-nothing question type, teachers must really think if this grading is what they want.<br />
<br />
==Calculated multichoice question type==<br />
The [[Calculated multichoice question type]] are like multiple choice questions with the additonal property that the elements to select can include formula results from numeric values that are selected randomly from a set when the quiz is taken. They use the same wildcards than Calculated questions and their wildcards can be shared with other Calculated multichoice or regular Calculated questions.<br />
<br />
The main difference is that the formula is included in the answer choice as {=...}.<br />
<br />
==Eliminator==<br />
<br />
Some teachers say that younger students may be less successful in Moodle multiple-choice quizzes than in multiple-choice tests on paper. This would be largely due to the fact that young students like to cross out the wrong answers, which they can not do with Moodle's multiple choice quizzes.<br />
<br />
An "eliminator" is a way of graying out or crossing out choices to help students keep the choice they want. Moodle's core Multiple Choice question does not yet include such an eliminator. However, a simple workaround is to add HTML code to the text of choices.<br />
<br />
<p style="margin-bottom:5px;">For a gray out eliminator, add the following HTML code to each question:</p><br />
&lt;div style="display:inline-block;"><br />
&lt;input type="radio" id="EliminatorChoice" style="display:none;"><br />
&lt;label for="EliminatorChoice"><br />
&lt;span onclick="if(this.style.opacity==0.3){this.style.opacity=1;}else{this.style.opacity=0.3;}" style="opacity: 1;"><br />
<i>Choice text</i><br />
&lt;/span><br />
&lt;/label><br />
&lt;/div><br />
<p style="margin:0;"></p><br />
where <i><pre>Choice text</pre></i> is the text for each choice.<br />
<p style="margin-top:2px;">The workaround works as follows:</p><br />
*The student clicks on the text labels to toggle: black / gray out or line-through. The grayed out or line-through remind the student that these choices are eliminated.<br />
*The student clicks on the radio buttons to select the answer.<br />
<br />
Examples and variations of this workaround are presented [https://moodleformulas.org/course/view.php?id=38&section=7 here].<br />
<br />
==See also==<br />
<br />
*[[Quizventure activity]] a 'space invaders'-like Moodle 2.7+ game using multiple choice questions<br />
* [https://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=368129 Arabic choices not written in Arabic language]<br />
<br />
[[ja:多肢選択問題タイプ]]<br />
[[fr:Question à choix multiple]]<br />
[[ca:Tipus_de_pregunta_de_opcions_múltiples]]<br />
[[de:Fragetyp Multiple-Choice]]<br />
[[es:Tipo de Pregunta de Opción Múltiple]]</div>Dbauer-etshttps://docs.moodle.org/36/en/index.php?title=Multiple_Choice_question_type&diff=132907Multiple Choice question type2018-12-28T15:51:16Z<p>Dbauer-ets: /* Eliminator */</p>
<hr />
<div>{{Questions}}<br />
Moodle provides teachers with a lot of flexibility when creating this common question type. You can create single-answer and multiple-answer questions, include pictures, sound or other media in the question and/or answer options (by inserting HTML) and weight individual answers. Remember that [[Lesson_module#Multiple_choice|Lesson module questions]] behave differently.<br />
<br />
There are two types of multiple choice questions - single answer and multiple answer.<br />
<br />
<br />
===Single-answer questions===<br />
These questions allow one and only one answer to be chosen by providing radio buttons next to the answers. You can specify negative or non-negative marks for each answer, usually zero marks for wrong answers, maximum marks for correct answers and partial marks for partially correct answers.<br />
<br />
===Multiple-answer questions===<br />
The teacher can select "multiple answers are allowed" in a Multiple Choice question type. "Multiple answers" questions types in a quiz allow one or more answers to be chosen by providing check boxes next to the answers. Each answer may carry a positive or negative grade, so that choosing ALL the options will not necessarily result in good grade. If the total grade is negative then the total grade for this question will be zero.<br />
<br />
Feedback can be associated either with specific answers, or with the question as a whole.<br />
<br />
==Question set-up==<br />
<br />
#Select the question category<br />
#Give the question a descriptive name. You'll use the name to track your questions later so "Question 1" isn't a good idea. The name will be used in the question lists on the quiz editing page or in the lesson as a page title. It will not be shown to the students, so you can choose any name that makes sense to you and possibly other teachers.<br />
#Create the question text. If you're using the HTML Editor, you can format the question just like a word processing document.<br />
#Select an image to display if you want to add a picture to the question. The available images are those you have uploaded to the '''main''' Moodle files area (they cannot be in folders). For the student, the image appears immediately after the question text and before the answer options.<br />
#*Alternatively, if you used the HTML editor to create the question text, you can click the image icon. This will pop up the Insert Image window. You can choose to upload an image into your files area from this window, or you can add the URL of an image on the web. If you add a file to your files area, click the name of the file after you upload it to insert the link into the URL text entry at the top of the screen. Then click OK.<br />
#Set the 'default question grade' (i.e. the maximum number of marks for this question).<br />
#Set the 'Penalty factor' (see [[Multiple_Choice_question_type#Penalty_factor|Penalty factor]] below).<br />
#If you wish, add general feedback. This is text that appears to the student after he/she has answered the question.<br />
#Choose whether students can only select one answer or multiple answers<br />
#Choose whether to shuffle the answer options<br />
#Write your first answer in the Choice 1 text field. Inserting HTML into this area also makes it possible to add an image or a sound file.<br />
#Select a grade percentage for the answer. This is the percentage of the total points for the question that selecting this response is worth. You can select negative percentages as well as positive percentages. So, selecting a correct response in a multiple answer question may give you 50% of the possible points, while selecting a wrong answer may take away 10%. Note that in a multiple-answer question, the grades must add up to 100%.<br />
#*Be aware that if you allow multiple answers and have more than a single correct choice, and do not use a negative grade percentage for wrong answers, the students can simply tick all choices and get the full grade.<br />
#If you wish, you can add feedback for each response. It may be a bit more work, but it’s good practice to tell the students why each answer is right or wrong using the feedback area. If students know why an answer is right or wrong, they can analyse their own thinking and begin to understand why an answer is correct. Your feedback will only be displayed if you select Show Feedback in the quiz body options.<br />
#Fill in the rest of the response choices in the rest of the form. Any unused areas will be ignored.<br />
#Fill in the [[Multiple_Choice_question_type#Overall_feedback|overall feedback]] fields if you wish.<br />
#Select the "Save Changes" button at the bottom of the screen.<br />
<br />
=== Penalty factor ===<br />
<br />
The 'penalty factor' only applies when the question is used in a quiz using adaptive mode - i.e. where the student is allowed multiple attempts at a question even within the same attempt at the quiz. If the penalty factor is more than 0, then the student will lose that proportion of the '''maximum''' grade upon each successive attempt. For example, if the default question grade is 10, and the penalty factor is 0.2, then each successive attempt after the first one will incur a penalty of 0.2 x 10 = 2 points.<br />
<br />
==General feedback==<br />
General feedback is some text that gets shown to the student after they have attempted the question. Unlike feedback, which depends on the question type and what response the student gave, the same general feedback text is shown to all students.<br />
<br />
You can control when general feedback is shown to students using the "Students may review:" check-boxes on the quiz editing form.<br />
<br />
You can use the general feedback to give students some background to what knowledge the question was testing. Or to give them a link to more information they can use if they did not understand the questions.<br />
<br />
==Overall feedback==<br />
The option ''overall feedback'' for correct/partially correct/incorrect responses is particularly useful for multiple-response questions, where it is difficult to control what feedback students see just using the answer-specific feedback.<br />
<br />
So, when the student submits the question, they will see the answer-specific feedback next to the option(s) they selected, the overall feedback in a box below the options, and if applicable, the general feedback underneath everything else.<br />
<br />
==Site administration settings==<br />
<br />
An administrator can specify the defaults for multiple choice settings via the settings link in 'Manage question types' in the Site administration.<br />
<br />
==Lesson module multiple choice questions==<br />
This page was created for the Quiz module. A [[Lesson_module#Multiple_choice|Lesson Multiple Choice]] or [[Multianswer question type]] looks the same to the student but is very different in the teacher's edit mode. A lesson question offers the teacher the chance to both grade a student's answer, give feedback and also to send the student to another specific page based upon the student's choice.<br />
<br />
There are other differences. Quiz has a more robust scoring system that is similar to "Custom Scoring" in the Lesson module. Even with custom scoring turned on, Lesson will not give percentage credit of a question's score for an answer. And students must select all the correct answers to receive any credit for the multianswer question in the Lesson module.<br />
<br />
==All-or-nothing multiple choice question type (plugin)==<br />
The [[All or nothing multiple choice question type]] plugin is adapted from the existing multichoice question. The main difference from the standard Moodle multiple choice question type is in the way that grading works.<br />
<br />
The teacher editing interface is slightly modified as when creating the question, the teacher just indicates which choices are correct.<br />
In an all-or-nothing multiple choice question, a respondent can choose one or more answers. If the chosen answers correspond exactly to the correct choices defined in the question, the respondent gets 100%. If he/she chooses any incorrect choices or does not select all of the correct choices, the grade is 0%.<br />
<br />
Before using the all-or-nothing question type, teachers must really think if this grading is what they want.<br />
<br />
==Calculated multichoice question type==<br />
The [[Calculated multichoice question type]] are like multiple choice questions with the additonal property that the elements to select can include formula results from numeric values that are selected randomly from a set when the quiz is taken. They use the same wildcards than Calculated questions and their wildcards can be shared with other Calculated multichoice or regular Calculated questions.<br />
<br />
The main difference is that the formula is included in the answer choice as {=...}.<br />
<br />
==Eliminator==<br />
<br />
Some teachers say that younger students may be less successful in Moodle multiple-choice quizzes than in multiple-choice tests on paper. This would be largely due to the fact that young students like to cross out the wrong answers, which they can not do with Moodle's multiple choice quizzes.<br />
<br />
An "eliminator" is a way of graying out or crossing out choices to help students keep the choice they want. Moodle's core Multiple Choice question does not yet include such an eliminator. However, a simple workaround is to simply add HTML code to the text of choices.<br />
<br />
<p style="margin-bottom:5px;">For a gray out eliminator, add the following HTML code to each question:</p><br />
&lt;div style="display:inline-block;"><br />
&lt;input type="radio" id="EliminatorChoice" style="display:none;"><br />
&lt;label for="EliminatorChoice"><br />
&lt;span onclick="if(this.style.opacity==0.3){this.style.opacity=1;}else{this.style.opacity=0.3;}" style="opacity: 1;"><br />
<i>Choice text</i><br />
&lt;/span><br />
&lt;/label><br />
&lt;/div><br />
<p style="margin:0;"></p><br />
where <i><pre>Choice text</pre></i> is the text for each choice.<br />
<p style="margin-top:2px;">The workaround works as follows:</p><br />
*The student clicks on the text labels to toggle: black / gray out or line-through. The grayed out or line-through remind the student that these choices are eliminated.<br />
*The student clicks on the radio buttons to select the answer.<br />
<br />
Examples and variations of this workaround are presented [https://moodleformulas.org/course/view.php?id=38&section=7 here].<br />
<br />
==See also==<br />
<br />
*[[Quizventure activity]] a 'space invaders'-like Moodle 2.7+ game using multiple choice questions<br />
* [https://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=368129 Arabic choices not written in Arabic language]<br />
<br />
[[ja:多肢選択問題タイプ]]<br />
[[fr:Question à choix multiple]]<br />
[[ca:Tipus_de_pregunta_de_opcions_múltiples]]<br />
[[de:Fragetyp Multiple-Choice]]<br />
[[es:Tipo de Pregunta de Opción Múltiple]]</div>Dbauer-etshttps://docs.moodle.org/36/en/index.php?title=Multiple_Choice_question_type&diff=132906Multiple Choice question type2018-12-28T15:50:38Z<p>Dbauer-ets: /* Eliminator */</p>
<hr />
<div>{{Questions}}<br />
Moodle provides teachers with a lot of flexibility when creating this common question type. You can create single-answer and multiple-answer questions, include pictures, sound or other media in the question and/or answer options (by inserting HTML) and weight individual answers. Remember that [[Lesson_module#Multiple_choice|Lesson module questions]] behave differently.<br />
<br />
There are two types of multiple choice questions - single answer and multiple answer.<br />
<br />
<br />
===Single-answer questions===<br />
These questions allow one and only one answer to be chosen by providing radio buttons next to the answers. You can specify negative or non-negative marks for each answer, usually zero marks for wrong answers, maximum marks for correct answers and partial marks for partially correct answers.<br />
<br />
===Multiple-answer questions===<br />
The teacher can select "multiple answers are allowed" in a Multiple Choice question type. "Multiple answers" questions types in a quiz allow one or more answers to be chosen by providing check boxes next to the answers. Each answer may carry a positive or negative grade, so that choosing ALL the options will not necessarily result in good grade. If the total grade is negative then the total grade for this question will be zero.<br />
<br />
Feedback can be associated either with specific answers, or with the question as a whole.<br />
<br />
==Question set-up==<br />
<br />
#Select the question category<br />
#Give the question a descriptive name. You'll use the name to track your questions later so "Question 1" isn't a good idea. The name will be used in the question lists on the quiz editing page or in the lesson as a page title. It will not be shown to the students, so you can choose any name that makes sense to you and possibly other teachers.<br />
#Create the question text. If you're using the HTML Editor, you can format the question just like a word processing document.<br />
#Select an image to display if you want to add a picture to the question. The available images are those you have uploaded to the '''main''' Moodle files area (they cannot be in folders). For the student, the image appears immediately after the question text and before the answer options.<br />
#*Alternatively, if you used the HTML editor to create the question text, you can click the image icon. This will pop up the Insert Image window. You can choose to upload an image into your files area from this window, or you can add the URL of an image on the web. If you add a file to your files area, click the name of the file after you upload it to insert the link into the URL text entry at the top of the screen. Then click OK.<br />
#Set the 'default question grade' (i.e. the maximum number of marks for this question).<br />
#Set the 'Penalty factor' (see [[Multiple_Choice_question_type#Penalty_factor|Penalty factor]] below).<br />
#If you wish, add general feedback. This is text that appears to the student after he/she has answered the question.<br />
#Choose whether students can only select one answer or multiple answers<br />
#Choose whether to shuffle the answer options<br />
#Write your first answer in the Choice 1 text field. Inserting HTML into this area also makes it possible to add an image or a sound file.<br />
#Select a grade percentage for the answer. This is the percentage of the total points for the question that selecting this response is worth. You can select negative percentages as well as positive percentages. So, selecting a correct response in a multiple answer question may give you 50% of the possible points, while selecting a wrong answer may take away 10%. Note that in a multiple-answer question, the grades must add up to 100%.<br />
#*Be aware that if you allow multiple answers and have more than a single correct choice, and do not use a negative grade percentage for wrong answers, the students can simply tick all choices and get the full grade.<br />
#If you wish, you can add feedback for each response. It may be a bit more work, but it’s good practice to tell the students why each answer is right or wrong using the feedback area. If students know why an answer is right or wrong, they can analyse their own thinking and begin to understand why an answer is correct. Your feedback will only be displayed if you select Show Feedback in the quiz body options.<br />
#Fill in the rest of the response choices in the rest of the form. Any unused areas will be ignored.<br />
#Fill in the [[Multiple_Choice_question_type#Overall_feedback|overall feedback]] fields if you wish.<br />
#Select the "Save Changes" button at the bottom of the screen.<br />
<br />
=== Penalty factor ===<br />
<br />
The 'penalty factor' only applies when the question is used in a quiz using adaptive mode - i.e. where the student is allowed multiple attempts at a question even within the same attempt at the quiz. If the penalty factor is more than 0, then the student will lose that proportion of the '''maximum''' grade upon each successive attempt. For example, if the default question grade is 10, and the penalty factor is 0.2, then each successive attempt after the first one will incur a penalty of 0.2 x 10 = 2 points.<br />
<br />
==General feedback==<br />
General feedback is some text that gets shown to the student after they have attempted the question. Unlike feedback, which depends on the question type and what response the student gave, the same general feedback text is shown to all students.<br />
<br />
You can control when general feedback is shown to students using the "Students may review:" check-boxes on the quiz editing form.<br />
<br />
You can use the general feedback to give students some background to what knowledge the question was testing. Or to give them a link to more information they can use if they did not understand the questions.<br />
<br />
==Overall feedback==<br />
The option ''overall feedback'' for correct/partially correct/incorrect responses is particularly useful for multiple-response questions, where it is difficult to control what feedback students see just using the answer-specific feedback.<br />
<br />
So, when the student submits the question, they will see the answer-specific feedback next to the option(s) they selected, the overall feedback in a box below the options, and if applicable, the general feedback underneath everything else.<br />
<br />
==Site administration settings==<br />
<br />
An administrator can specify the defaults for multiple choice settings via the settings link in 'Manage question types' in the Site administration.<br />
<br />
==Lesson module multiple choice questions==<br />
This page was created for the Quiz module. A [[Lesson_module#Multiple_choice|Lesson Multiple Choice]] or [[Multianswer question type]] looks the same to the student but is very different in the teacher's edit mode. A lesson question offers the teacher the chance to both grade a student's answer, give feedback and also to send the student to another specific page based upon the student's choice.<br />
<br />
There are other differences. Quiz has a more robust scoring system that is similar to "Custom Scoring" in the Lesson module. Even with custom scoring turned on, Lesson will not give percentage credit of a question's score for an answer. And students must select all the correct answers to receive any credit for the multianswer question in the Lesson module.<br />
<br />
==All-or-nothing multiple choice question type (plugin)==<br />
The [[All or nothing multiple choice question type]] plugin is adapted from the existing multichoice question. The main difference from the standard Moodle multiple choice question type is in the way that grading works.<br />
<br />
The teacher editing interface is slightly modified as when creating the question, the teacher just indicates which choices are correct.<br />
In an all-or-nothing multiple choice question, a respondent can choose one or more answers. If the chosen answers correspond exactly to the correct choices defined in the question, the respondent gets 100%. If he/she chooses any incorrect choices or does not select all of the correct choices, the grade is 0%.<br />
<br />
Before using the all-or-nothing question type, teachers must really think if this grading is what they want.<br />
<br />
==Calculated multichoice question type==<br />
The [[Calculated multichoice question type]] are like multiple choice questions with the additonal property that the elements to select can include formula results from numeric values that are selected randomly from a set when the quiz is taken. They use the same wildcards than Calculated questions and their wildcards can be shared with other Calculated multichoice or regular Calculated questions.<br />
<br />
The main difference is that the formula is included in the answer choice as {=...}.<br />
<br />
==Eliminator==<br />
<br />
Some people say that younger students may be less successful in Moodle multiple-choice quizzes than in multiple-choice tests on paper. This would be largely due to the fact that young students like to cross out the wrong answers, which they can not do with Moodle's multiple choice quizzes.<br />
<br />
An "eliminator" is a way of graying out or crossing out choices to help students keep the choice they want. Moodle's core Multiple Choice question does not yet include such an eliminator. However, a simple workaround is to simply add HTML code to the text of choices.<br />
<br />
<p style="margin-bottom:5px;">For a gray out eliminator, add the following HTML code to each question:</p><br />
&lt;div style="display:inline-block;"><br />
&lt;input type="radio" id="EliminatorChoice" style="display:none;"><br />
&lt;label for="EliminatorChoice"><br />
&lt;span onclick="if(this.style.opacity==0.3){this.style.opacity=1;}else{this.style.opacity=0.3;}" style="opacity: 1;"><br />
<i>Choice text</i><br />
&lt;/span><br />
&lt;/label><br />
&lt;/div><br />
<p style="margin:0;"></p><br />
where <i><pre>Choice text</pre></i> is the text for each choice.<br />
<p style="margin-top:2px;">The workaround works as follows:</p><br />
*The student clicks on the text labels to toggle: black / gray out or line-through. The grayed out or line-through remind the student that these choices are eliminated.<br />
*The student clicks on the radio buttons to select the answer.<br />
<br />
Examples and variations of this workaround are presented [https://moodleformulas.org/course/view.php?id=38&section=7 here].<br />
<br />
==See also==<br />
<br />
*[[Quizventure activity]] a 'space invaders'-like Moodle 2.7+ game using multiple choice questions<br />
* [https://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=368129 Arabic choices not written in Arabic language]<br />
<br />
[[ja:多肢選択問題タイプ]]<br />
[[fr:Question à choix multiple]]<br />
[[ca:Tipus_de_pregunta_de_opcions_múltiples]]<br />
[[de:Fragetyp Multiple-Choice]]<br />
[[es:Tipo de Pregunta de Opción Múltiple]]</div>Dbauer-etshttps://docs.moodle.org/36/en/index.php?title=Multiple_Choice_question_type&diff=132905Multiple Choice question type2018-12-28T15:44:05Z<p>Dbauer-ets: /* Eliminator */</p>
<hr />
<div>{{Questions}}<br />
Moodle provides teachers with a lot of flexibility when creating this common question type. You can create single-answer and multiple-answer questions, include pictures, sound or other media in the question and/or answer options (by inserting HTML) and weight individual answers. Remember that [[Lesson_module#Multiple_choice|Lesson module questions]] behave differently.<br />
<br />
There are two types of multiple choice questions - single answer and multiple answer.<br />
<br />
<br />
===Single-answer questions===<br />
These questions allow one and only one answer to be chosen by providing radio buttons next to the answers. You can specify negative or non-negative marks for each answer, usually zero marks for wrong answers, maximum marks for correct answers and partial marks for partially correct answers.<br />
<br />
===Multiple-answer questions===<br />
The teacher can select "multiple answers are allowed" in a Multiple Choice question type. "Multiple answers" questions types in a quiz allow one or more answers to be chosen by providing check boxes next to the answers. Each answer may carry a positive or negative grade, so that choosing ALL the options will not necessarily result in good grade. If the total grade is negative then the total grade for this question will be zero.<br />
<br />
Feedback can be associated either with specific answers, or with the question as a whole.<br />
<br />
==Question set-up==<br />
<br />
#Select the question category<br />
#Give the question a descriptive name. You'll use the name to track your questions later so "Question 1" isn't a good idea. The name will be used in the question lists on the quiz editing page or in the lesson as a page title. It will not be shown to the students, so you can choose any name that makes sense to you and possibly other teachers.<br />
#Create the question text. If you're using the HTML Editor, you can format the question just like a word processing document.<br />
#Select an image to display if you want to add a picture to the question. The available images are those you have uploaded to the '''main''' Moodle files area (they cannot be in folders). For the student, the image appears immediately after the question text and before the answer options.<br />
#*Alternatively, if you used the HTML editor to create the question text, you can click the image icon. This will pop up the Insert Image window. You can choose to upload an image into your files area from this window, or you can add the URL of an image on the web. If you add a file to your files area, click the name of the file after you upload it to insert the link into the URL text entry at the top of the screen. Then click OK.<br />
#Set the 'default question grade' (i.e. the maximum number of marks for this question).<br />
#Set the 'Penalty factor' (see [[Multiple_Choice_question_type#Penalty_factor|Penalty factor]] below).<br />
#If you wish, add general feedback. This is text that appears to the student after he/she has answered the question.<br />
#Choose whether students can only select one answer or multiple answers<br />
#Choose whether to shuffle the answer options<br />
#Write your first answer in the Choice 1 text field. Inserting HTML into this area also makes it possible to add an image or a sound file.<br />
#Select a grade percentage for the answer. This is the percentage of the total points for the question that selecting this response is worth. You can select negative percentages as well as positive percentages. So, selecting a correct response in a multiple answer question may give you 50% of the possible points, while selecting a wrong answer may take away 10%. Note that in a multiple-answer question, the grades must add up to 100%.<br />
#*Be aware that if you allow multiple answers and have more than a single correct choice, and do not use a negative grade percentage for wrong answers, the students can simply tick all choices and get the full grade.<br />
#If you wish, you can add feedback for each response. It may be a bit more work, but it’s good practice to tell the students why each answer is right or wrong using the feedback area. If students know why an answer is right or wrong, they can analyse their own thinking and begin to understand why an answer is correct. Your feedback will only be displayed if you select Show Feedback in the quiz body options.<br />
#Fill in the rest of the response choices in the rest of the form. Any unused areas will be ignored.<br />
#Fill in the [[Multiple_Choice_question_type#Overall_feedback|overall feedback]] fields if you wish.<br />
#Select the "Save Changes" button at the bottom of the screen.<br />
<br />
=== Penalty factor ===<br />
<br />
The 'penalty factor' only applies when the question is used in a quiz using adaptive mode - i.e. where the student is allowed multiple attempts at a question even within the same attempt at the quiz. If the penalty factor is more than 0, then the student will lose that proportion of the '''maximum''' grade upon each successive attempt. For example, if the default question grade is 10, and the penalty factor is 0.2, then each successive attempt after the first one will incur a penalty of 0.2 x 10 = 2 points.<br />
<br />
==General feedback==<br />
General feedback is some text that gets shown to the student after they have attempted the question. Unlike feedback, which depends on the question type and what response the student gave, the same general feedback text is shown to all students.<br />
<br />
You can control when general feedback is shown to students using the "Students may review:" check-boxes on the quiz editing form.<br />
<br />
You can use the general feedback to give students some background to what knowledge the question was testing. Or to give them a link to more information they can use if they did not understand the questions.<br />
<br />
==Overall feedback==<br />
The option ''overall feedback'' for correct/partially correct/incorrect responses is particularly useful for multiple-response questions, where it is difficult to control what feedback students see just using the answer-specific feedback.<br />
<br />
So, when the student submits the question, they will see the answer-specific feedback next to the option(s) they selected, the overall feedback in a box below the options, and if applicable, the general feedback underneath everything else.<br />
<br />
==Site administration settings==<br />
<br />
An administrator can specify the defaults for multiple choice settings via the settings link in 'Manage question types' in the Site administration.<br />
<br />
==Lesson module multiple choice questions==<br />
This page was created for the Quiz module. A [[Lesson_module#Multiple_choice|Lesson Multiple Choice]] or [[Multianswer question type]] looks the same to the student but is very different in the teacher's edit mode. A lesson question offers the teacher the chance to both grade a student's answer, give feedback and also to send the student to another specific page based upon the student's choice.<br />
<br />
There are other differences. Quiz has a more robust scoring system that is similar to "Custom Scoring" in the Lesson module. Even with custom scoring turned on, Lesson will not give percentage credit of a question's score for an answer. And students must select all the correct answers to receive any credit for the multianswer question in the Lesson module.<br />
<br />
==All-or-nothing multiple choice question type (plugin)==<br />
The [[All or nothing multiple choice question type]] plugin is adapted from the existing multichoice question. The main difference from the standard Moodle multiple choice question type is in the way that grading works.<br />
<br />
The teacher editing interface is slightly modified as when creating the question, the teacher just indicates which choices are correct.<br />
In an all-or-nothing multiple choice question, a respondent can choose one or more answers. If the chosen answers correspond exactly to the correct choices defined in the question, the respondent gets 100%. If he/she chooses any incorrect choices or does not select all of the correct choices, the grade is 0%.<br />
<br />
Before using the all-or-nothing question type, teachers must really think if this grading is what they want.<br />
<br />
==Calculated multichoice question type==<br />
The [[Calculated multichoice question type]] are like multiple choice questions with the additonal property that the elements to select can include formula results from numeric values that are selected randomly from a set when the quiz is taken. They use the same wildcards than Calculated questions and their wildcards can be shared with other Calculated multichoice or regular Calculated questions.<br />
<br />
The main difference is that the formula is included in the answer choice as {=...}.<br />
<br />
==Eliminator==<br />
<br />
Some people say that younger students may be less successful in Moodle multiple-choice quizzes than in multiple-choice tests on paper. This would be largely due to the fact that young students like to cross out the wrong answers, which they can not do with Moodle's multiple choice quizzes.<br />
<br />
An "eliminator" is a way of graying out or crossing out choices to help students keep the choice they want. Moodle's core Multiple Choice question does not yet include such an eliminator. However, a simple workaround is to simply add HTML code to the text of choices.<br />
<br />
For a gray out eliminator, add the following HTML code to each question:<br />
&lt;div style="display:inline-block;"><br />
&lt;input type="radio" id="EliminatorChoice" style="display:none;"><br />
&lt;label for="EliminatorChoice"><br />
&lt;span onclick="if(this.style.opacity==0.3){this.style.opacity=1;}else{this.style.opacity=0.3;}" style="opacity: 1;"><br />
Choice text<br />
&lt;/span><br />
&lt;/label><br />
&lt;/div><br />
<p style="margin:0;"></p><br />
where <pre>Choice text</pre> is the text for each choice.<br />
The workaround works as follows:<br />
*The student clicks on the text labels to toggle: black / gray out or line-through. The grayed out or line-through remind the student that these choices are eliminated.<br />
*The student clicks on the radio buttons to select the answer.<br />
<br />
Examples and variations of this workaround are presented [https://moodleformulas.org/course/view.php?id=38&section=7 here].<br />
<br />
==See also==<br />
<br />
*[[Quizventure activity]] a 'space invaders'-like Moodle 2.7+ game using multiple choice questions<br />
* [https://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=368129 Arabic choices not written in Arabic language]<br />
<br />
[[ja:多肢選択問題タイプ]]<br />
[[fr:Question à choix multiple]]<br />
[[ca:Tipus_de_pregunta_de_opcions_múltiples]]<br />
[[de:Fragetyp Multiple-Choice]]<br />
[[es:Tipo de Pregunta de Opción Múltiple]]</div>Dbauer-etshttps://docs.moodle.org/36/en/index.php?title=Multiple_Choice_question_type&diff=132904Multiple Choice question type2018-12-28T15:32:19Z<p>Dbauer-ets: /* Eliminator */</p>
<hr />
<div>{{Questions}}<br />
Moodle provides teachers with a lot of flexibility when creating this common question type. You can create single-answer and multiple-answer questions, include pictures, sound or other media in the question and/or answer options (by inserting HTML) and weight individual answers. Remember that [[Lesson_module#Multiple_choice|Lesson module questions]] behave differently.<br />
<br />
There are two types of multiple choice questions - single answer and multiple answer.<br />
<br />
<br />
===Single-answer questions===<br />
These questions allow one and only one answer to be chosen by providing radio buttons next to the answers. You can specify negative or non-negative marks for each answer, usually zero marks for wrong answers, maximum marks for correct answers and partial marks for partially correct answers.<br />
<br />
===Multiple-answer questions===<br />
The teacher can select "multiple answers are allowed" in a Multiple Choice question type. "Multiple answers" questions types in a quiz allow one or more answers to be chosen by providing check boxes next to the answers. Each answer may carry a positive or negative grade, so that choosing ALL the options will not necessarily result in good grade. If the total grade is negative then the total grade for this question will be zero.<br />
<br />
Feedback can be associated either with specific answers, or with the question as a whole.<br />
<br />
==Question set-up==<br />
<br />
#Select the question category<br />
#Give the question a descriptive name. You'll use the name to track your questions later so "Question 1" isn't a good idea. The name will be used in the question lists on the quiz editing page or in the lesson as a page title. It will not be shown to the students, so you can choose any name that makes sense to you and possibly other teachers.<br />
#Create the question text. If you're using the HTML Editor, you can format the question just like a word processing document.<br />
#Select an image to display if you want to add a picture to the question. The available images are those you have uploaded to the '''main''' Moodle files area (they cannot be in folders). For the student, the image appears immediately after the question text and before the answer options.<br />
#*Alternatively, if you used the HTML editor to create the question text, you can click the image icon. This will pop up the Insert Image window. You can choose to upload an image into your files area from this window, or you can add the URL of an image on the web. If you add a file to your files area, click the name of the file after you upload it to insert the link into the URL text entry at the top of the screen. Then click OK.<br />
#Set the 'default question grade' (i.e. the maximum number of marks for this question).<br />
#Set the 'Penalty factor' (see [[Multiple_Choice_question_type#Penalty_factor|Penalty factor]] below).<br />
#If you wish, add general feedback. This is text that appears to the student after he/she has answered the question.<br />
#Choose whether students can only select one answer or multiple answers<br />
#Choose whether to shuffle the answer options<br />
#Write your first answer in the Choice 1 text field. Inserting HTML into this area also makes it possible to add an image or a sound file.<br />
#Select a grade percentage for the answer. This is the percentage of the total points for the question that selecting this response is worth. You can select negative percentages as well as positive percentages. So, selecting a correct response in a multiple answer question may give you 50% of the possible points, while selecting a wrong answer may take away 10%. Note that in a multiple-answer question, the grades must add up to 100%.<br />
#*Be aware that if you allow multiple answers and have more than a single correct choice, and do not use a negative grade percentage for wrong answers, the students can simply tick all choices and get the full grade.<br />
#If you wish, you can add feedback for each response. It may be a bit more work, but it’s good practice to tell the students why each answer is right or wrong using the feedback area. If students know why an answer is right or wrong, they can analyse their own thinking and begin to understand why an answer is correct. Your feedback will only be displayed if you select Show Feedback in the quiz body options.<br />
#Fill in the rest of the response choices in the rest of the form. Any unused areas will be ignored.<br />
#Fill in the [[Multiple_Choice_question_type#Overall_feedback|overall feedback]] fields if you wish.<br />
#Select the "Save Changes" button at the bottom of the screen.<br />
<br />
=== Penalty factor ===<br />
<br />
The 'penalty factor' only applies when the question is used in a quiz using adaptive mode - i.e. where the student is allowed multiple attempts at a question even within the same attempt at the quiz. If the penalty factor is more than 0, then the student will lose that proportion of the '''maximum''' grade upon each successive attempt. For example, if the default question grade is 10, and the penalty factor is 0.2, then each successive attempt after the first one will incur a penalty of 0.2 x 10 = 2 points.<br />
<br />
==General feedback==<br />
General feedback is some text that gets shown to the student after they have attempted the question. Unlike feedback, which depends on the question type and what response the student gave, the same general feedback text is shown to all students.<br />
<br />
You can control when general feedback is shown to students using the "Students may review:" check-boxes on the quiz editing form.<br />
<br />
You can use the general feedback to give students some background to what knowledge the question was testing. Or to give them a link to more information they can use if they did not understand the questions.<br />
<br />
==Overall feedback==<br />
The option ''overall feedback'' for correct/partially correct/incorrect responses is particularly useful for multiple-response questions, where it is difficult to control what feedback students see just using the answer-specific feedback.<br />
<br />
So, when the student submits the question, they will see the answer-specific feedback next to the option(s) they selected, the overall feedback in a box below the options, and if applicable, the general feedback underneath everything else.<br />
<br />
==Site administration settings==<br />
<br />
An administrator can specify the defaults for multiple choice settings via the settings link in 'Manage question types' in the Site administration.<br />
<br />
==Lesson module multiple choice questions==<br />
This page was created for the Quiz module. A [[Lesson_module#Multiple_choice|Lesson Multiple Choice]] or [[Multianswer question type]] looks the same to the student but is very different in the teacher's edit mode. A lesson question offers the teacher the chance to both grade a student's answer, give feedback and also to send the student to another specific page based upon the student's choice.<br />
<br />
There are other differences. Quiz has a more robust scoring system that is similar to "Custom Scoring" in the Lesson module. Even with custom scoring turned on, Lesson will not give percentage credit of a question's score for an answer. And students must select all the correct answers to receive any credit for the multianswer question in the Lesson module.<br />
<br />
==All-or-nothing multiple choice question type (plugin)==<br />
The [[All or nothing multiple choice question type]] plugin is adapted from the existing multichoice question. The main difference from the standard Moodle multiple choice question type is in the way that grading works.<br />
<br />
The teacher editing interface is slightly modified as when creating the question, the teacher just indicates which choices are correct.<br />
In an all-or-nothing multiple choice question, a respondent can choose one or more answers. If the chosen answers correspond exactly to the correct choices defined in the question, the respondent gets 100%. If he/she chooses any incorrect choices or does not select all of the correct choices, the grade is 0%.<br />
<br />
Before using the all-or-nothing question type, teachers must really think if this grading is what they want.<br />
<br />
==Calculated multichoice question type==<br />
The [[Calculated multichoice question type]] are like multiple choice questions with the additonal property that the elements to select can include formula results from numeric values that are selected randomly from a set when the quiz is taken. They use the same wildcards than Calculated questions and their wildcards can be shared with other Calculated multichoice or regular Calculated questions.<br />
<br />
The main difference is that the formula is included in the answer choice as {=...}.<br />
<br />
==Eliminator==<br />
<br />
Some people say that younger students may be less successful in Moodle multiple-choice quizzes than in multiple-choice tests on paper. This would be largely due to the fact that young students like to cross out the wrong answers, which they can not do with Moodle's multiple choice quizzes.<br />
<br />
An "eliminator" is a way of graying out or crossing out choices to help students keep the choice they want. Moodle's core Multiple Choice question does not yet include such an eliminator. However, a simple workaround is to simply add HTML code to the text of choices.<br />
<br />
For a gray out eliminator, add the following HTML code to each question:<br />
&lt;div style="display:inline-block;"><br />
&lt;input type="radio" id="EliminatorChoice" style="display:none;"><br />
&lt;label for="EliminatorChoice"><br />
&lt;span onclick="if(this.style.opacity==0.3){this.style.opacity=1;}else{this.style.opacity=0.3;}" style="opacity: 1;"><br />
Choice text<br />
&lt;/span><br />
&lt;/label><br />
&lt;/div><br />
<br />
where <pre>Choice text</pre> is the text for each choice.<br />
<br />
The workaround works as follows:<br />
*The student clicks on the text labels to toggle: black / gray out or line-through. The grayed out or line-through remind the student that these choices are eliminated.<br />
*The student clicks on the radio buttons to select the answer.<br />
<br />
Examples and variations of this workaround are presented [https://moodleformulas.org/course/view.php?id=38&section=7 here].<br />
<br />
==See also==<br />
<br />
*[[Quizventure activity]] a 'space invaders'-like Moodle 2.7+ game using multiple choice questions<br />
* [https://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=368129 Arabic choices not written in Arabic language]<br />
<br />
[[ja:多肢選択問題タイプ]]<br />
[[fr:Question à choix multiple]]<br />
[[ca:Tipus_de_pregunta_de_opcions_múltiples]]<br />
[[de:Fragetyp Multiple-Choice]]<br />
[[es:Tipo de Pregunta de Opción Múltiple]]</div>Dbauer-etshttps://docs.moodle.org/36/en/index.php?title=Multiple_Choice_question_type&diff=132903Multiple Choice question type2018-12-28T02:47:58Z<p>Dbauer-ets: /* Eliminator */</p>
<hr />
<div>{{Questions}}<br />
Moodle provides teachers with a lot of flexibility when creating this common question type. You can create single-answer and multiple-answer questions, include pictures, sound or other media in the question and/or answer options (by inserting HTML) and weight individual answers. Remember that [[Lesson_module#Multiple_choice|Lesson module questions]] behave differently.<br />
<br />
There are two types of multiple choice questions - single answer and multiple answer.<br />
<br />
<br />
===Single-answer questions===<br />
These questions allow one and only one answer to be chosen by providing radio buttons next to the answers. You can specify negative or non-negative marks for each answer, usually zero marks for wrong answers, maximum marks for correct answers and partial marks for partially correct answers.<br />
<br />
===Multiple-answer questions===<br />
The teacher can select "multiple answers are allowed" in a Multiple Choice question type. "Multiple answers" questions types in a quiz allow one or more answers to be chosen by providing check boxes next to the answers. Each answer may carry a positive or negative grade, so that choosing ALL the options will not necessarily result in good grade. If the total grade is negative then the total grade for this question will be zero.<br />
<br />
Feedback can be associated either with specific answers, or with the question as a whole.<br />
<br />
==Question set-up==<br />
<br />
#Select the question category<br />
#Give the question a descriptive name. You'll use the name to track your questions later so "Question 1" isn't a good idea. The name will be used in the question lists on the quiz editing page or in the lesson as a page title. It will not be shown to the students, so you can choose any name that makes sense to you and possibly other teachers.<br />
#Create the question text. If you're using the HTML Editor, you can format the question just like a word processing document.<br />
#Select an image to display if you want to add a picture to the question. The available images are those you have uploaded to the '''main''' Moodle files area (they cannot be in folders). For the student, the image appears immediately after the question text and before the answer options.<br />
#*Alternatively, if you used the HTML editor to create the question text, you can click the image icon. This will pop up the Insert Image window. You can choose to upload an image into your files area from this window, or you can add the URL of an image on the web. If you add a file to your files area, click the name of the file after you upload it to insert the link into the URL text entry at the top of the screen. Then click OK.<br />
#Set the 'default question grade' (i.e. the maximum number of marks for this question).<br />
#Set the 'Penalty factor' (see [[Multiple_Choice_question_type#Penalty_factor|Penalty factor]] below).<br />
#If you wish, add general feedback. This is text that appears to the student after he/she has answered the question.<br />
#Choose whether students can only select one answer or multiple answers<br />
#Choose whether to shuffle the answer options<br />
#Write your first answer in the Choice 1 text field. Inserting HTML into this area also makes it possible to add an image or a sound file.<br />
#Select a grade percentage for the answer. This is the percentage of the total points for the question that selecting this response is worth. You can select negative percentages as well as positive percentages. So, selecting a correct response in a multiple answer question may give you 50% of the possible points, while selecting a wrong answer may take away 10%. Note that in a multiple-answer question, the grades must add up to 100%.<br />
#*Be aware that if you allow multiple answers and have more than a single correct choice, and do not use a negative grade percentage for wrong answers, the students can simply tick all choices and get the full grade.<br />
#If you wish, you can add feedback for each response. It may be a bit more work, but it’s good practice to tell the students why each answer is right or wrong using the feedback area. If students know why an answer is right or wrong, they can analyse their own thinking and begin to understand why an answer is correct. Your feedback will only be displayed if you select Show Feedback in the quiz body options.<br />
#Fill in the rest of the response choices in the rest of the form. Any unused areas will be ignored.<br />
#Fill in the [[Multiple_Choice_question_type#Overall_feedback|overall feedback]] fields if you wish.<br />
#Select the "Save Changes" button at the bottom of the screen.<br />
<br />
=== Penalty factor ===<br />
<br />
The 'penalty factor' only applies when the question is used in a quiz using adaptive mode - i.e. where the student is allowed multiple attempts at a question even within the same attempt at the quiz. If the penalty factor is more than 0, then the student will lose that proportion of the '''maximum''' grade upon each successive attempt. For example, if the default question grade is 10, and the penalty factor is 0.2, then each successive attempt after the first one will incur a penalty of 0.2 x 10 = 2 points.<br />
<br />
==General feedback==<br />
General feedback is some text that gets shown to the student after they have attempted the question. Unlike feedback, which depends on the question type and what response the student gave, the same general feedback text is shown to all students.<br />
<br />
You can control when general feedback is shown to students using the "Students may review:" check-boxes on the quiz editing form.<br />
<br />
You can use the general feedback to give students some background to what knowledge the question was testing. Or to give them a link to more information they can use if they did not understand the questions.<br />
<br />
==Overall feedback==<br />
The option ''overall feedback'' for correct/partially correct/incorrect responses is particularly useful for multiple-response questions, where it is difficult to control what feedback students see just using the answer-specific feedback.<br />
<br />
So, when the student submits the question, they will see the answer-specific feedback next to the option(s) they selected, the overall feedback in a box below the options, and if applicable, the general feedback underneath everything else.<br />
<br />
==Site administration settings==<br />
<br />
An administrator can specify the defaults for multiple choice settings via the settings link in 'Manage question types' in the Site administration.<br />
<br />
==Lesson module multiple choice questions==<br />
This page was created for the Quiz module. A [[Lesson_module#Multiple_choice|Lesson Multiple Choice]] or [[Multianswer question type]] looks the same to the student but is very different in the teacher's edit mode. A lesson question offers the teacher the chance to both grade a student's answer, give feedback and also to send the student to another specific page based upon the student's choice.<br />
<br />
There are other differences. Quiz has a more robust scoring system that is similar to "Custom Scoring" in the Lesson module. Even with custom scoring turned on, Lesson will not give percentage credit of a question's score for an answer. And students must select all the correct answers to receive any credit for the multianswer question in the Lesson module.<br />
<br />
==All-or-nothing multiple choice question type (plugin)==<br />
The [[All or nothing multiple choice question type]] plugin is adapted from the existing multichoice question. The main difference from the standard Moodle multiple choice question type is in the way that grading works.<br />
<br />
The teacher editing interface is slightly modified as when creating the question, the teacher just indicates which choices are correct.<br />
In an all-or-nothing multiple choice question, a respondent can choose one or more answers. If the chosen answers correspond exactly to the correct choices defined in the question, the respondent gets 100%. If he/she chooses any incorrect choices or does not select all of the correct choices, the grade is 0%.<br />
<br />
Before using the all-or-nothing question type, teachers must really think if this grading is what they want.<br />
<br />
==Calculated multichoice question type==<br />
The [[Calculated multichoice question type]] are like multiple choice questions with the additonal property that the elements to select can include formula results from numeric values that are selected randomly from a set when the quiz is taken. They use the same wildcards than Calculated questions and their wildcards can be shared with other Calculated multichoice or regular Calculated questions.<br />
<br />
The main difference is that the formula is included in the answer choice as {=...}.<br />
<br />
==Eliminator==<br />
<br />
Some people say that younger students may be less successful in Moodle multiple-choice quizzes than in multiple-choice tests on paper. This would be largely due to the fact that young students like to cross out the wrong answers, which they can not do with Moodle's multiple choice quizzes.<br />
<br />
An "eliminator" is a way of graying out or crossing out choices to help students keep the choice they want. Moodle's core Multiple Choice question does not yet include such an eliminator. However, a simple workaround is to simply add HTML code to the text of choices.<br />
<br />
For a gray out eliminator, add the following HTML code to each question:<br />
&lt;div style="display:inline-block;"><br />
&lt;input type="radio" id="EliminatorChoice" style="display:none;"><br />
&lt;label for="EliminatorChoice"><br />
&lt;span onclick="if(this.style.opacity==0.3){this.style.opacity=1;}else{this.style.opacity=0.3;}" style="opacity: 1;"><br />
Choice text<br />
&lt;/span><br />
&lt;/label><br />
&lt;/div><br />
where <pre>Choice text</pre> is the text for each choice.<br />
<br />
The workaround works as follows:<br />
*The student clicks on the text labels to toggle: black / gray out or line-through. The grayed out or line-through remind the student that these choices are eliminated.<br />
*The student clicks on the radio buttons to select the answer.<br />
<br />
Examples and variations of this workaround are presented [https://moodleformulas.org/course/view.php?id=38&section=7 here].<br />
<br />
==See also==<br />
<br />
*[[Quizventure activity]] a 'space invaders'-like Moodle 2.7+ game using multiple choice questions<br />
* [https://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=368129 Arabic choices not written in Arabic language]<br />
<br />
[[ja:多肢選択問題タイプ]]<br />
[[fr:Question à choix multiple]]<br />
[[ca:Tipus_de_pregunta_de_opcions_múltiples]]<br />
[[de:Fragetyp Multiple-Choice]]<br />
[[es:Tipo de Pregunta de Opción Múltiple]]</div>Dbauer-etshttps://docs.moodle.org/36/en/index.php?title=Multiple_Choice_question_type&diff=132902Multiple Choice question type2018-12-28T02:45:16Z<p>Dbauer-ets: /* Eliminator */</p>
<hr />
<div>{{Questions}}<br />
Moodle provides teachers with a lot of flexibility when creating this common question type. You can create single-answer and multiple-answer questions, include pictures, sound or other media in the question and/or answer options (by inserting HTML) and weight individual answers. Remember that [[Lesson_module#Multiple_choice|Lesson module questions]] behave differently.<br />
<br />
There are two types of multiple choice questions - single answer and multiple answer.<br />
<br />
<br />
===Single-answer questions===<br />
These questions allow one and only one answer to be chosen by providing radio buttons next to the answers. You can specify negative or non-negative marks for each answer, usually zero marks for wrong answers, maximum marks for correct answers and partial marks for partially correct answers.<br />
<br />
===Multiple-answer questions===<br />
The teacher can select "multiple answers are allowed" in a Multiple Choice question type. "Multiple answers" questions types in a quiz allow one or more answers to be chosen by providing check boxes next to the answers. Each answer may carry a positive or negative grade, so that choosing ALL the options will not necessarily result in good grade. If the total grade is negative then the total grade for this question will be zero.<br />
<br />
Feedback can be associated either with specific answers, or with the question as a whole.<br />
<br />
==Question set-up==<br />
<br />
#Select the question category<br />
#Give the question a descriptive name. You'll use the name to track your questions later so "Question 1" isn't a good idea. The name will be used in the question lists on the quiz editing page or in the lesson as a page title. It will not be shown to the students, so you can choose any name that makes sense to you and possibly other teachers.<br />
#Create the question text. If you're using the HTML Editor, you can format the question just like a word processing document.<br />
#Select an image to display if you want to add a picture to the question. The available images are those you have uploaded to the '''main''' Moodle files area (they cannot be in folders). For the student, the image appears immediately after the question text and before the answer options.<br />
#*Alternatively, if you used the HTML editor to create the question text, you can click the image icon. This will pop up the Insert Image window. You can choose to upload an image into your files area from this window, or you can add the URL of an image on the web. If you add a file to your files area, click the name of the file after you upload it to insert the link into the URL text entry at the top of the screen. Then click OK.<br />
#Set the 'default question grade' (i.e. the maximum number of marks for this question).<br />
#Set the 'Penalty factor' (see [[Multiple_Choice_question_type#Penalty_factor|Penalty factor]] below).<br />
#If you wish, add general feedback. This is text that appears to the student after he/she has answered the question.<br />
#Choose whether students can only select one answer or multiple answers<br />
#Choose whether to shuffle the answer options<br />
#Write your first answer in the Choice 1 text field. Inserting HTML into this area also makes it possible to add an image or a sound file.<br />
#Select a grade percentage for the answer. This is the percentage of the total points for the question that selecting this response is worth. You can select negative percentages as well as positive percentages. So, selecting a correct response in a multiple answer question may give you 50% of the possible points, while selecting a wrong answer may take away 10%. Note that in a multiple-answer question, the grades must add up to 100%.<br />
#*Be aware that if you allow multiple answers and have more than a single correct choice, and do not use a negative grade percentage for wrong answers, the students can simply tick all choices and get the full grade.<br />
#If you wish, you can add feedback for each response. It may be a bit more work, but it’s good practice to tell the students why each answer is right or wrong using the feedback area. If students know why an answer is right or wrong, they can analyse their own thinking and begin to understand why an answer is correct. Your feedback will only be displayed if you select Show Feedback in the quiz body options.<br />
#Fill in the rest of the response choices in the rest of the form. Any unused areas will be ignored.<br />
#Fill in the [[Multiple_Choice_question_type#Overall_feedback|overall feedback]] fields if you wish.<br />
#Select the "Save Changes" button at the bottom of the screen.<br />
<br />
=== Penalty factor ===<br />
<br />
The 'penalty factor' only applies when the question is used in a quiz using adaptive mode - i.e. where the student is allowed multiple attempts at a question even within the same attempt at the quiz. If the penalty factor is more than 0, then the student will lose that proportion of the '''maximum''' grade upon each successive attempt. For example, if the default question grade is 10, and the penalty factor is 0.2, then each successive attempt after the first one will incur a penalty of 0.2 x 10 = 2 points.<br />
<br />
==General feedback==<br />
General feedback is some text that gets shown to the student after they have attempted the question. Unlike feedback, which depends on the question type and what response the student gave, the same general feedback text is shown to all students.<br />
<br />
You can control when general feedback is shown to students using the "Students may review:" check-boxes on the quiz editing form.<br />
<br />
You can use the general feedback to give students some background to what knowledge the question was testing. Or to give them a link to more information they can use if they did not understand the questions.<br />
<br />
==Overall feedback==<br />
The option ''overall feedback'' for correct/partially correct/incorrect responses is particularly useful for multiple-response questions, where it is difficult to control what feedback students see just using the answer-specific feedback.<br />
<br />
So, when the student submits the question, they will see the answer-specific feedback next to the option(s) they selected, the overall feedback in a box below the options, and if applicable, the general feedback underneath everything else.<br />
<br />
==Site administration settings==<br />
<br />
An administrator can specify the defaults for multiple choice settings via the settings link in 'Manage question types' in the Site administration.<br />
<br />
==Lesson module multiple choice questions==<br />
This page was created for the Quiz module. A [[Lesson_module#Multiple_choice|Lesson Multiple Choice]] or [[Multianswer question type]] looks the same to the student but is very different in the teacher's edit mode. A lesson question offers the teacher the chance to both grade a student's answer, give feedback and also to send the student to another specific page based upon the student's choice.<br />
<br />
There are other differences. Quiz has a more robust scoring system that is similar to "Custom Scoring" in the Lesson module. Even with custom scoring turned on, Lesson will not give percentage credit of a question's score for an answer. And students must select all the correct answers to receive any credit for the multianswer question in the Lesson module.<br />
<br />
==All-or-nothing multiple choice question type (plugin)==<br />
The [[All or nothing multiple choice question type]] plugin is adapted from the existing multichoice question. The main difference from the standard Moodle multiple choice question type is in the way that grading works.<br />
<br />
The teacher editing interface is slightly modified as when creating the question, the teacher just indicates which choices are correct.<br />
In an all-or-nothing multiple choice question, a respondent can choose one or more answers. If the chosen answers correspond exactly to the correct choices defined in the question, the respondent gets 100%. If he/she chooses any incorrect choices or does not select all of the correct choices, the grade is 0%.<br />
<br />
Before using the all-or-nothing question type, teachers must really think if this grading is what they want.<br />
<br />
==Calculated multichoice question type==<br />
The [[Calculated multichoice question type]] are like multiple choice questions with the additonal property that the elements to select can include formula results from numeric values that are selected randomly from a set when the quiz is taken. They use the same wildcards than Calculated questions and their wildcards can be shared with other Calculated multichoice or regular Calculated questions.<br />
<br />
The main difference is that the formula is included in the answer choice as {=...}.<br />
<br />
==Eliminator==<br />
<br />
Some people say that younger students may be less successful in Moodle multiple-choice quizzes than in multiple-choice tests on paper. This would be largely due to the fact that young students like to cross out the wrong answers, which they can not do with Moodle's multiple choice quizzes.<br />
<br />
An "eliminator" is a way of graying out or crossing out choices to help students keep the choice they want. Moodle's core Multiple Choice question does not yet include such an eliminator. However, a simple workaround is to simply add HTML code to the text of choices.<br />
<br />
For a gray out eliminator, add the following HTML code to each question:<br />
&lt;div style="display:inline-block;"><br />
&lt;input type="radio" id="EliminatorChoice" style="display:none;"><br />
&lt;label for="EliminatorChoice"><br />
&lt;span onclick="if(this.style.opacity==0.3){this.style.opacity=1;}else{this.style.opacity=0.3;}" style="opacity: 1;"><br />
Choice text<br />
&lt;/span><br />
&lt;/label><br />
&lt;/div><br />
where <pre>Choice text</pre> is the text for each choice.<br />
<br />
The workaround works as follows:<br />
*The student clicks on the text labels to toggle: black / gray out or line-through. The grayed out or line-through reminds the student that these choices are eliminated.<br />
*The student clicks on the radio buttons to select the answer.<br />
<br />
Examples and variations of this workaround are presented [https://moodleformulas.org/course/view.php?id=38&section=7 here].<br />
<br />
==See also==<br />
<br />
*[[Quizventure activity]] a 'space invaders'-like Moodle 2.7+ game using multiple choice questions<br />
* [https://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=368129 Arabic choices not written in Arabic language]<br />
<br />
[[ja:多肢選択問題タイプ]]<br />
[[fr:Question à choix multiple]]<br />
[[ca:Tipus_de_pregunta_de_opcions_múltiples]]<br />
[[de:Fragetyp Multiple-Choice]]<br />
[[es:Tipo de Pregunta de Opción Múltiple]]</div>Dbauer-etshttps://docs.moodle.org/36/en/index.php?title=Multiple_Choice_question_type&diff=132901Multiple Choice question type2018-12-28T02:42:08Z<p>Dbauer-ets: /* Eliminator */</p>
<hr />
<div>{{Questions}}<br />
Moodle provides teachers with a lot of flexibility when creating this common question type. You can create single-answer and multiple-answer questions, include pictures, sound or other media in the question and/or answer options (by inserting HTML) and weight individual answers. Remember that [[Lesson_module#Multiple_choice|Lesson module questions]] behave differently.<br />
<br />
There are two types of multiple choice questions - single answer and multiple answer.<br />
<br />
<br />
===Single-answer questions===<br />
These questions allow one and only one answer to be chosen by providing radio buttons next to the answers. You can specify negative or non-negative marks for each answer, usually zero marks for wrong answers, maximum marks for correct answers and partial marks for partially correct answers.<br />
<br />
===Multiple-answer questions===<br />
The teacher can select "multiple answers are allowed" in a Multiple Choice question type. "Multiple answers" questions types in a quiz allow one or more answers to be chosen by providing check boxes next to the answers. Each answer may carry a positive or negative grade, so that choosing ALL the options will not necessarily result in good grade. If the total grade is negative then the total grade for this question will be zero.<br />
<br />
Feedback can be associated either with specific answers, or with the question as a whole.<br />
<br />
==Question set-up==<br />
<br />
#Select the question category<br />
#Give the question a descriptive name. You'll use the name to track your questions later so "Question 1" isn't a good idea. The name will be used in the question lists on the quiz editing page or in the lesson as a page title. It will not be shown to the students, so you can choose any name that makes sense to you and possibly other teachers.<br />
#Create the question text. If you're using the HTML Editor, you can format the question just like a word processing document.<br />
#Select an image to display if you want to add a picture to the question. The available images are those you have uploaded to the '''main''' Moodle files area (they cannot be in folders). For the student, the image appears immediately after the question text and before the answer options.<br />
#*Alternatively, if you used the HTML editor to create the question text, you can click the image icon. This will pop up the Insert Image window. You can choose to upload an image into your files area from this window, or you can add the URL of an image on the web. If you add a file to your files area, click the name of the file after you upload it to insert the link into the URL text entry at the top of the screen. Then click OK.<br />
#Set the 'default question grade' (i.e. the maximum number of marks for this question).<br />
#Set the 'Penalty factor' (see [[Multiple_Choice_question_type#Penalty_factor|Penalty factor]] below).<br />
#If you wish, add general feedback. This is text that appears to the student after he/she has answered the question.<br />
#Choose whether students can only select one answer or multiple answers<br />
#Choose whether to shuffle the answer options<br />
#Write your first answer in the Choice 1 text field. Inserting HTML into this area also makes it possible to add an image or a sound file.<br />
#Select a grade percentage for the answer. This is the percentage of the total points for the question that selecting this response is worth. You can select negative percentages as well as positive percentages. So, selecting a correct response in a multiple answer question may give you 50% of the possible points, while selecting a wrong answer may take away 10%. Note that in a multiple-answer question, the grades must add up to 100%.<br />
#*Be aware that if you allow multiple answers and have more than a single correct choice, and do not use a negative grade percentage for wrong answers, the students can simply tick all choices and get the full grade.<br />
#If you wish, you can add feedback for each response. It may be a bit more work, but it’s good practice to tell the students why each answer is right or wrong using the feedback area. If students know why an answer is right or wrong, they can analyse their own thinking and begin to understand why an answer is correct. Your feedback will only be displayed if you select Show Feedback in the quiz body options.<br />
#Fill in the rest of the response choices in the rest of the form. Any unused areas will be ignored.<br />
#Fill in the [[Multiple_Choice_question_type#Overall_feedback|overall feedback]] fields if you wish.<br />
#Select the "Save Changes" button at the bottom of the screen.<br />
<br />
=== Penalty factor ===<br />
<br />
The 'penalty factor' only applies when the question is used in a quiz using adaptive mode - i.e. where the student is allowed multiple attempts at a question even within the same attempt at the quiz. If the penalty factor is more than 0, then the student will lose that proportion of the '''maximum''' grade upon each successive attempt. For example, if the default question grade is 10, and the penalty factor is 0.2, then each successive attempt after the first one will incur a penalty of 0.2 x 10 = 2 points.<br />
<br />
==General feedback==<br />
General feedback is some text that gets shown to the student after they have attempted the question. Unlike feedback, which depends on the question type and what response the student gave, the same general feedback text is shown to all students.<br />
<br />
You can control when general feedback is shown to students using the "Students may review:" check-boxes on the quiz editing form.<br />
<br />
You can use the general feedback to give students some background to what knowledge the question was testing. Or to give them a link to more information they can use if they did not understand the questions.<br />
<br />
==Overall feedback==<br />
The option ''overall feedback'' for correct/partially correct/incorrect responses is particularly useful for multiple-response questions, where it is difficult to control what feedback students see just using the answer-specific feedback.<br />
<br />
So, when the student submits the question, they will see the answer-specific feedback next to the option(s) they selected, the overall feedback in a box below the options, and if applicable, the general feedback underneath everything else.<br />
<br />
==Site administration settings==<br />
<br />
An administrator can specify the defaults for multiple choice settings via the settings link in 'Manage question types' in the Site administration.<br />
<br />
==Lesson module multiple choice questions==<br />
This page was created for the Quiz module. A [[Lesson_module#Multiple_choice|Lesson Multiple Choice]] or [[Multianswer question type]] looks the same to the student but is very different in the teacher's edit mode. A lesson question offers the teacher the chance to both grade a student's answer, give feedback and also to send the student to another specific page based upon the student's choice.<br />
<br />
There are other differences. Quiz has a more robust scoring system that is similar to "Custom Scoring" in the Lesson module. Even with custom scoring turned on, Lesson will not give percentage credit of a question's score for an answer. And students must select all the correct answers to receive any credit for the multianswer question in the Lesson module.<br />
<br />
==All-or-nothing multiple choice question type (plugin)==<br />
The [[All or nothing multiple choice question type]] plugin is adapted from the existing multichoice question. The main difference from the standard Moodle multiple choice question type is in the way that grading works.<br />
<br />
The teacher editing interface is slightly modified as when creating the question, the teacher just indicates which choices are correct.<br />
In an all-or-nothing multiple choice question, a respondent can choose one or more answers. If the chosen answers correspond exactly to the correct choices defined in the question, the respondent gets 100%. If he/she chooses any incorrect choices or does not select all of the correct choices, the grade is 0%.<br />
<br />
Before using the all-or-nothing question type, teachers must really think if this grading is what they want.<br />
<br />
==Calculated multichoice question type==<br />
The [[Calculated multichoice question type]] are like multiple choice questions with the additonal property that the elements to select can include formula results from numeric values that are selected randomly from a set when the quiz is taken. They use the same wildcards than Calculated questions and their wildcards can be shared with other Calculated multichoice or regular Calculated questions.<br />
<br />
The main difference is that the formula is included in the answer choice as {=...}.<br />
<br />
==Eliminator==<br />
<br />
Some people say that younger students may be less successful in Moodle multiple-choice quizzes than in multiple-choice tests on paper. This would be largely due to the fact that young students like to cross out the wrong answers, which they can not do with Moodle's multiple choice quizzes.<br />
<br />
An "eliminator" is a way of graying out or crossing out choices to help students keep the choice they want. Moodle's core Multiple Choice question does not yet include such an eliminator. However, a simple workaround is to simply add HTML code to the text of choices.<br />
<br />
For a gray out eliminator, add the following HTML code to each question:<br />
&lt;div style="display:inline-block;"><br />
&lt;input type="radio" id="EliminatorChoice" style="display:none;"><br />
&lt;label for="EliminatorChoice"><br />
&lt;span onclick="if(this.style.opacity==0.3){this.style.opacity=1;}else{this.style.opacity=0.3;}" style="opacity: 1;"><br />
Choice text<br />
&lt;/span><br />
&lt;/label><br />
&lt;/div><br />
where <pre>Choice text</pre> is the Choice text for each choice.<br />
<br />
The workaround works as follows:<br />
*The student clicks on the text labels to toggle: black / gray out or line-through. The grayed out or line-through reminds the student that these choices are eliminated.<br />
*The student clicks on the radio buttons to select the answer.<br />
<br />
Examples and variations of this workaround are presented [https://moodleformulas.org/course/view.php?id=38&section=7 here].<br />
<br />
==See also==<br />
<br />
*[[Quizventure activity]] a 'space invaders'-like Moodle 2.7+ game using multiple choice questions<br />
* [https://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=368129 Arabic choices not written in Arabic language]<br />
<br />
[[ja:多肢選択問題タイプ]]<br />
[[fr:Question à choix multiple]]<br />
[[ca:Tipus_de_pregunta_de_opcions_múltiples]]<br />
[[de:Fragetyp Multiple-Choice]]<br />
[[es:Tipo de Pregunta de Opción Múltiple]]</div>Dbauer-etshttps://docs.moodle.org/36/en/index.php?title=Multiple_Choice_question_type&diff=132900Multiple Choice question type2018-12-28T02:37:02Z<p>Dbauer-ets: /* Eliminator */</p>
<hr />
<div>{{Questions}}<br />
Moodle provides teachers with a lot of flexibility when creating this common question type. You can create single-answer and multiple-answer questions, include pictures, sound or other media in the question and/or answer options (by inserting HTML) and weight individual answers. Remember that [[Lesson_module#Multiple_choice|Lesson module questions]] behave differently.<br />
<br />
There are two types of multiple choice questions - single answer and multiple answer.<br />
<br />
<br />
===Single-answer questions===<br />
These questions allow one and only one answer to be chosen by providing radio buttons next to the answers. You can specify negative or non-negative marks for each answer, usually zero marks for wrong answers, maximum marks for correct answers and partial marks for partially correct answers.<br />
<br />
===Multiple-answer questions===<br />
The teacher can select "multiple answers are allowed" in a Multiple Choice question type. "Multiple answers" questions types in a quiz allow one or more answers to be chosen by providing check boxes next to the answers. Each answer may carry a positive or negative grade, so that choosing ALL the options will not necessarily result in good grade. If the total grade is negative then the total grade for this question will be zero.<br />
<br />
Feedback can be associated either with specific answers, or with the question as a whole.<br />
<br />
==Question set-up==<br />
<br />
#Select the question category<br />
#Give the question a descriptive name. You'll use the name to track your questions later so "Question 1" isn't a good idea. The name will be used in the question lists on the quiz editing page or in the lesson as a page title. It will not be shown to the students, so you can choose any name that makes sense to you and possibly other teachers.<br />
#Create the question text. If you're using the HTML Editor, you can format the question just like a word processing document.<br />
#Select an image to display if you want to add a picture to the question. The available images are those you have uploaded to the '''main''' Moodle files area (they cannot be in folders). For the student, the image appears immediately after the question text and before the answer options.<br />
#*Alternatively, if you used the HTML editor to create the question text, you can click the image icon. This will pop up the Insert Image window. You can choose to upload an image into your files area from this window, or you can add the URL of an image on the web. If you add a file to your files area, click the name of the file after you upload it to insert the link into the URL text entry at the top of the screen. Then click OK.<br />
#Set the 'default question grade' (i.e. the maximum number of marks for this question).<br />
#Set the 'Penalty factor' (see [[Multiple_Choice_question_type#Penalty_factor|Penalty factor]] below).<br />
#If you wish, add general feedback. This is text that appears to the student after he/she has answered the question.<br />
#Choose whether students can only select one answer or multiple answers<br />
#Choose whether to shuffle the answer options<br />
#Write your first answer in the Choice 1 text field. Inserting HTML into this area also makes it possible to add an image or a sound file.<br />
#Select a grade percentage for the answer. This is the percentage of the total points for the question that selecting this response is worth. You can select negative percentages as well as positive percentages. So, selecting a correct response in a multiple answer question may give you 50% of the possible points, while selecting a wrong answer may take away 10%. Note that in a multiple-answer question, the grades must add up to 100%.<br />
#*Be aware that if you allow multiple answers and have more than a single correct choice, and do not use a negative grade percentage for wrong answers, the students can simply tick all choices and get the full grade.<br />
#If you wish, you can add feedback for each response. It may be a bit more work, but it’s good practice to tell the students why each answer is right or wrong using the feedback area. If students know why an answer is right or wrong, they can analyse their own thinking and begin to understand why an answer is correct. Your feedback will only be displayed if you select Show Feedback in the quiz body options.<br />
#Fill in the rest of the response choices in the rest of the form. Any unused areas will be ignored.<br />
#Fill in the [[Multiple_Choice_question_type#Overall_feedback|overall feedback]] fields if you wish.<br />
#Select the "Save Changes" button at the bottom of the screen.<br />
<br />
=== Penalty factor ===<br />
<br />
The 'penalty factor' only applies when the question is used in a quiz using adaptive mode - i.e. where the student is allowed multiple attempts at a question even within the same attempt at the quiz. If the penalty factor is more than 0, then the student will lose that proportion of the '''maximum''' grade upon each successive attempt. For example, if the default question grade is 10, and the penalty factor is 0.2, then each successive attempt after the first one will incur a penalty of 0.2 x 10 = 2 points.<br />
<br />
==General feedback==<br />
General feedback is some text that gets shown to the student after they have attempted the question. Unlike feedback, which depends on the question type and what response the student gave, the same general feedback text is shown to all students.<br />
<br />
You can control when general feedback is shown to students using the "Students may review:" check-boxes on the quiz editing form.<br />
<br />
You can use the general feedback to give students some background to what knowledge the question was testing. Or to give them a link to more information they can use if they did not understand the questions.<br />
<br />
==Overall feedback==<br />
The option ''overall feedback'' for correct/partially correct/incorrect responses is particularly useful for multiple-response questions, where it is difficult to control what feedback students see just using the answer-specific feedback.<br />
<br />
So, when the student submits the question, they will see the answer-specific feedback next to the option(s) they selected, the overall feedback in a box below the options, and if applicable, the general feedback underneath everything else.<br />
<br />
==Site administration settings==<br />
<br />
An administrator can specify the defaults for multiple choice settings via the settings link in 'Manage question types' in the Site administration.<br />
<br />
==Lesson module multiple choice questions==<br />
This page was created for the Quiz module. A [[Lesson_module#Multiple_choice|Lesson Multiple Choice]] or [[Multianswer question type]] looks the same to the student but is very different in the teacher's edit mode. A lesson question offers the teacher the chance to both grade a student's answer, give feedback and also to send the student to another specific page based upon the student's choice.<br />
<br />
There are other differences. Quiz has a more robust scoring system that is similar to "Custom Scoring" in the Lesson module. Even with custom scoring turned on, Lesson will not give percentage credit of a question's score for an answer. And students must select all the correct answers to receive any credit for the multianswer question in the Lesson module.<br />
<br />
==All-or-nothing multiple choice question type (plugin)==<br />
The [[All or nothing multiple choice question type]] plugin is adapted from the existing multichoice question. The main difference from the standard Moodle multiple choice question type is in the way that grading works.<br />
<br />
The teacher editing interface is slightly modified as when creating the question, the teacher just indicates which choices are correct.<br />
In an all-or-nothing multiple choice question, a respondent can choose one or more answers. If the chosen answers correspond exactly to the correct choices defined in the question, the respondent gets 100%. If he/she chooses any incorrect choices or does not select all of the correct choices, the grade is 0%.<br />
<br />
Before using the all-or-nothing question type, teachers must really think if this grading is what they want.<br />
<br />
==Calculated multichoice question type==<br />
The [[Calculated multichoice question type]] are like multiple choice questions with the additonal property that the elements to select can include formula results from numeric values that are selected randomly from a set when the quiz is taken. They use the same wildcards than Calculated questions and their wildcards can be shared with other Calculated multichoice or regular Calculated questions.<br />
<br />
The main difference is that the formula is included in the answer choice as {=...}.<br />
<br />
==Eliminator==<br />
<br />
Some people say that younger students may be less successful in Moodle multiple-choice quizzes than in multiple-choice tests on paper. This would be largely due to the fact that young students like to cross out the wrong answers, which they can not do with Moodle's multiple choice quizzes.<br />
<br />
An "eliminator" is a way of graying out or crossing out choices to help students keep the choice they want. Moodle's core Multiple Choice question does not yet include such an eliminator. However, a simple workaround is to simply add HTML code to the text of choices.<br />
<br />
For a gray out eliminator, add the following HTML code to each question:<br />
&lt;div style="display:inline-block;"><br />
&lt;input type="radio" id="EliminatorChoice" style="display:none;"><br />
&lt;label for="EliminatorChoice"><br />
&lt;span onclick="if(this.style.opacity==0.3){this.style.opacity=1;}else{this.style.opacity=0.3;}" style="opacity: 1;"><br />
Choice text<br />
&lt;/span><br />
&lt;/label><br />
&lt;/div><br />
where <pre>Choice text</pre> is the Choice text for each choice.<br />
<br />
The workaround works as follows:<br />
*The student clicks on the text labels to toggle: black / gray out or line-through. The grayed out or line-through reminds the student that these choices are eliminated.<br />
*The student clicks on the radio buttons to select the answer.<br />
<br />
Examples and variations of this workaround are presented at this address.<br />
<br />
==See also==<br />
<br />
*[[Quizventure activity]] a 'space invaders'-like Moodle 2.7+ game using multiple choice questions<br />
* [https://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=368129 Arabic choices not written in Arabic language]<br />
<br />
[[ja:多肢選択問題タイプ]]<br />
[[fr:Question à choix multiple]]<br />
[[ca:Tipus_de_pregunta_de_opcions_múltiples]]<br />
[[de:Fragetyp Multiple-Choice]]<br />
[[es:Tipo de Pregunta de Opción Múltiple]]</div>Dbauer-etshttps://docs.moodle.org/36/en/index.php?title=Multiple_Choice_question_type&diff=132899Multiple Choice question type2018-12-28T02:31:19Z<p>Dbauer-ets: /* Calculated multichoice question type */</p>
<hr />
<div>{{Questions}}<br />
Moodle provides teachers with a lot of flexibility when creating this common question type. You can create single-answer and multiple-answer questions, include pictures, sound or other media in the question and/or answer options (by inserting HTML) and weight individual answers. Remember that [[Lesson_module#Multiple_choice|Lesson module questions]] behave differently.<br />
<br />
There are two types of multiple choice questions - single answer and multiple answer.<br />
<br />
<br />
===Single-answer questions===<br />
These questions allow one and only one answer to be chosen by providing radio buttons next to the answers. You can specify negative or non-negative marks for each answer, usually zero marks for wrong answers, maximum marks for correct answers and partial marks for partially correct answers.<br />
<br />
===Multiple-answer questions===<br />
The teacher can select "multiple answers are allowed" in a Multiple Choice question type. "Multiple answers" questions types in a quiz allow one or more answers to be chosen by providing check boxes next to the answers. Each answer may carry a positive or negative grade, so that choosing ALL the options will not necessarily result in good grade. If the total grade is negative then the total grade for this question will be zero.<br />
<br />
Feedback can be associated either with specific answers, or with the question as a whole.<br />
<br />
==Question set-up==<br />
<br />
#Select the question category<br />
#Give the question a descriptive name. You'll use the name to track your questions later so "Question 1" isn't a good idea. The name will be used in the question lists on the quiz editing page or in the lesson as a page title. It will not be shown to the students, so you can choose any name that makes sense to you and possibly other teachers.<br />
#Create the question text. If you're using the HTML Editor, you can format the question just like a word processing document.<br />
#Select an image to display if you want to add a picture to the question. The available images are those you have uploaded to the '''main''' Moodle files area (they cannot be in folders). For the student, the image appears immediately after the question text and before the answer options.<br />
#*Alternatively, if you used the HTML editor to create the question text, you can click the image icon. This will pop up the Insert Image window. You can choose to upload an image into your files area from this window, or you can add the URL of an image on the web. If you add a file to your files area, click the name of the file after you upload it to insert the link into the URL text entry at the top of the screen. Then click OK.<br />
#Set the 'default question grade' (i.e. the maximum number of marks for this question).<br />
#Set the 'Penalty factor' (see [[Multiple_Choice_question_type#Penalty_factor|Penalty factor]] below).<br />
#If you wish, add general feedback. This is text that appears to the student after he/she has answered the question.<br />
#Choose whether students can only select one answer or multiple answers<br />
#Choose whether to shuffle the answer options<br />
#Write your first answer in the Choice 1 text field. Inserting HTML into this area also makes it possible to add an image or a sound file.<br />
#Select a grade percentage for the answer. This is the percentage of the total points for the question that selecting this response is worth. You can select negative percentages as well as positive percentages. So, selecting a correct response in a multiple answer question may give you 50% of the possible points, while selecting a wrong answer may take away 10%. Note that in a multiple-answer question, the grades must add up to 100%.<br />
#*Be aware that if you allow multiple answers and have more than a single correct choice, and do not use a negative grade percentage for wrong answers, the students can simply tick all choices and get the full grade.<br />
#If you wish, you can add feedback for each response. It may be a bit more work, but it’s good practice to tell the students why each answer is right or wrong using the feedback area. If students know why an answer is right or wrong, they can analyse their own thinking and begin to understand why an answer is correct. Your feedback will only be displayed if you select Show Feedback in the quiz body options.<br />
#Fill in the rest of the response choices in the rest of the form. Any unused areas will be ignored.<br />
#Fill in the [[Multiple_Choice_question_type#Overall_feedback|overall feedback]] fields if you wish.<br />
#Select the "Save Changes" button at the bottom of the screen.<br />
<br />
=== Penalty factor ===<br />
<br />
The 'penalty factor' only applies when the question is used in a quiz using adaptive mode - i.e. where the student is allowed multiple attempts at a question even within the same attempt at the quiz. If the penalty factor is more than 0, then the student will lose that proportion of the '''maximum''' grade upon each successive attempt. For example, if the default question grade is 10, and the penalty factor is 0.2, then each successive attempt after the first one will incur a penalty of 0.2 x 10 = 2 points.<br />
<br />
==General feedback==<br />
General feedback is some text that gets shown to the student after they have attempted the question. Unlike feedback, which depends on the question type and what response the student gave, the same general feedback text is shown to all students.<br />
<br />
You can control when general feedback is shown to students using the "Students may review:" check-boxes on the quiz editing form.<br />
<br />
You can use the general feedback to give students some background to what knowledge the question was testing. Or to give them a link to more information they can use if they did not understand the questions.<br />
<br />
==Overall feedback==<br />
The option ''overall feedback'' for correct/partially correct/incorrect responses is particularly useful for multiple-response questions, where it is difficult to control what feedback students see just using the answer-specific feedback.<br />
<br />
So, when the student submits the question, they will see the answer-specific feedback next to the option(s) they selected, the overall feedback in a box below the options, and if applicable, the general feedback underneath everything else.<br />
<br />
==Site administration settings==<br />
<br />
An administrator can specify the defaults for multiple choice settings via the settings link in 'Manage question types' in the Site administration.<br />
<br />
==Lesson module multiple choice questions==<br />
This page was created for the Quiz module. A [[Lesson_module#Multiple_choice|Lesson Multiple Choice]] or [[Multianswer question type]] looks the same to the student but is very different in the teacher's edit mode. A lesson question offers the teacher the chance to both grade a student's answer, give feedback and also to send the student to another specific page based upon the student's choice.<br />
<br />
There are other differences. Quiz has a more robust scoring system that is similar to "Custom Scoring" in the Lesson module. Even with custom scoring turned on, Lesson will not give percentage credit of a question's score for an answer. And students must select all the correct answers to receive any credit for the multianswer question in the Lesson module.<br />
<br />
==All-or-nothing multiple choice question type (plugin)==<br />
The [[All or nothing multiple choice question type]] plugin is adapted from the existing multichoice question. The main difference from the standard Moodle multiple choice question type is in the way that grading works.<br />
<br />
The teacher editing interface is slightly modified as when creating the question, the teacher just indicates which choices are correct.<br />
In an all-or-nothing multiple choice question, a respondent can choose one or more answers. If the chosen answers correspond exactly to the correct choices defined in the question, the respondent gets 100%. If he/she chooses any incorrect choices or does not select all of the correct choices, the grade is 0%.<br />
<br />
Before using the all-or-nothing question type, teachers must really think if this grading is what they want.<br />
<br />
==Calculated multichoice question type==<br />
The [[Calculated multichoice question type]] are like multiple choice questions with the additonal property that the elements to select can include formula results from numeric values that are selected randomly from a set when the quiz is taken. They use the same wildcards than Calculated questions and their wildcards can be shared with other Calculated multichoice or regular Calculated questions.<br />
<br />
The main difference is that the formula is included in the answer choice as {=...}.<br />
<br />
==Eliminator==<br />
<br />
Some people say that younger students may be less successful in Moodle multiple-choice quizzes than multiple-choice tests on paper. This would be largely due to the fact that young students like to cross out the wrong answers, which they can not do with Moodle's multiple choice quizzes.<br />
<br />
An "eliminator" is a way of graying out or crossing out choices to help students keep the choice they want. Moodle's core Multiple Choice question does not yet include such an eliminator. However, a simple workaround is to simply add HTML code to the text of choices.<br />
<br />
For a gray out eliminator, add the following HTML code to each question:<br />
&lt;div style="display:inline-block;"><br />
&lt;input type="radio" id="EliminatorChoice" style="display:none;"><br />
&lt;label for="EliminatorChoice"><br />
&lt;span onclick="if(this.style.opacity==0.3){this.style.opacity=1;}else{this.style.opacity=0.3;}" style="opacity: 1;"><br />
Choice text<br />
&lt;/span><br />
&lt;/label><br />
&lt;/div><br />
where <pre>Choice text</pre> is the Choice text for each choice.<br />
<br />
The workaround works as follows:<br />
-The student clicks on the text labels to toggle: black / gray out or line-through. The grayed out or line-through reminds the student that these choices are eliminated.<br />
-The student clicks on the radio buttons to select the answer.<br />
<br />
==See also==<br />
<br />
*[[Quizventure activity]] a 'space invaders'-like Moodle 2.7+ game using multiple choice questions<br />
* [https://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=368129 Arabic choices not written in Arabic language]<br />
<br />
[[ja:多肢選択問題タイプ]]<br />
[[fr:Question à choix multiple]]<br />
[[ca:Tipus_de_pregunta_de_opcions_múltiples]]<br />
[[de:Fragetyp Multiple-Choice]]<br />
[[es:Tipo de Pregunta de Opción Múltiple]]</div>Dbauer-etshttps://docs.moodle.org/36/en/index.php?title=Ordering_question_type&diff=132897Ordering question type2018-12-24T21:12:38Z<p>Dbauer-ets: /* External links */</p>
<hr />
<div>{{Infobox plugin<br />
|type = question type<br />
|entry = https://moodle.org/plugins/view.php?plugin=qtype_ordering<br />
|tracker = https://github.com/gbateson/moodle-qtype_ordering/issues/<br />
|discussion = https://moodle.org/plugins/view.php?plugin=qtype_ordering<br />
|maintainer = [https://moodle.org/user/profile.php?id=1832609 DualCube Team]<br />
|float = right<br />
}}<br />
<br />
==Overview==<br />
The ordering question type displays several short sentences in a random order which are to be dragged into the correct sequential order. It was developed for the ordering questions used in the [https://moodle.org/plugins/view.php?plugin=mod_reader Reader activity module] for Moodle 2.x and 3.x<br />
<br />
==Moodle versions available==<br />
From Moodle 2.0 to 3.x<br />
<br />
==Translations available==<br />
This plugin is currently translated into:<br />
* cs Czech<br />
* de German<br />
* es Español internacional<br />
* es_mx Español de México<br />
* eu Basque<br />
* fr French<br />
* he Hebrew<br />
* pl Polish<br />
* pt Português<br />
* ru Russian<br />
* zh_tw Chinese (Traditional/Big5)<br />
<br />
==Screenshot==<br />
[[File:qtype.ordering.png]]<br />
<br />
==Example==<br />
* You must first write the question name and the question text:<br />
[[File:Ordering question 01.png|600px]]<br />
<br />
*You can choose whether you want a vertical or a horizontal layout<br />
[[File:Ordering question 02.png|600px]]<br />
<br />
* It is very important that you choose the best grading type for your educational goals. You must choose the one that will better assess your students:<br />
[[File:Ordering question 03.png|600px]]<br />
<br />
*You must write in order all the items:<br />
[[File:Ordering question 04.png|600px]]<br />
<br />
*If you will allow multiple tries, you can write the hints:<br />
[[File:Ordering question 05.png|600px]]<br />
<br />
*If you are using [[Tags]] you can write/choose them here:<br />
[[File:Ordering question 06.png|600px]]<br />
<br />
==What the student sees==<br />
* The student will see a jumbled list of items. The student needs to drag and drop the items until the list is in the correct order:<br />
[[File:Ordering question 07.png|600px]]<br />
<br />
*If the student misplaced items, they will be marked red<br />
[[File:Ordering question 08.png|600px]]<br />
<br />
*It may be important to have a proper feedback sentence explaining what went wrong (if anything)<br />
[[File:Ordering question 09.png|600px]]<br />
<br />
==External links==<br />
* [https://moodleformulas.org/course/view.php?id=30/ MoodleFormulas] where you can try some examples of the Ordering question type. <br />
<br />
[[es:Tipo de pregunta orden]]</div>Dbauer-etshttps://docs.moodle.org/36/en/index.php?title=Quiz_Subscores&diff=131176Quiz Subscores2018-06-11T17:13:48Z<p>Dbauer-ets: /* Larger numbers of topics or questions per topic */</p>
<hr />
<div>Moodle users sometimes ask how to extract subscores or subtotals from Quiz. For examples, see [https://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=35637 Multiple grade quizzes], [https://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=51850 Quiz with sub-totaled sections?] and [https://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=371767 Moodle Quiz Subscores].<br />
<br />
Here is a method to extract subscores from Quiz (or any other Moodle activity that allows you to set different point values per question), without requiring any changes to Moodle code. It is a bit complex, but it does work. However, this method is only useful if you don't plan to use or display the final Quiz score, but you only want to display and use the subscores.<br />
<br />
This method is based on the [https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Modulo_operation modulo operation] and Floor function [https://docs.moodle.org/en/Grade_calculations#Calculation_functions (Definitions of functions)].<br />
<br />
== Step 1: Create Quiz and set values of Questions ==<br />
Start by creating a quiz as usual. However, for each subscore you want to extract, you will need to set the values of questions for that subscore to an order of magnitude matching that subscore. This is easiest to understand with an example. Suppose you are creating a test that will contain questions from three areas: Mathematics, Language, and History. In this example, Mathematics is Topic 1, Language is Topic 2, and History is Topic 3.<br />
<br />
For each topic, use a different point value for each question in that topic. For Topic 1 (Mathematics), each question is worth 1 point. For Topic 2 (Language), each question is worth 10 points. For Topic 3 (History), each question is worth 100 points. (Note that this is going to make your final quiz score meaningless.)<br />
<br />
'''Important''': set the total points of the quiz to the same as the total of all the questions. Otherwise, the Quiz will change its scores based on whatever you set as the maximum number of points for the Quiz, and your calculations in later steps won't work correctly.<br />
<br />
You also need to give the Quiz activity an ID number that you will be able to remember later. In this example we will use "Pretest".<br />
<br />
== Step 2: Create Grade Items for each topic ==<br />
Next, create one new [https://docs.moodle.org/en/Grade_items#Manual_grade_items Manual Grade Item] for each of your Topics. '''Important''': put these Grade Items into a separate category that does NOT have Natural Weighting as the grade aggregation method. After saving each Grade Item, you will [https://docs.moodle.org/en/Grade_calculations edit the Calculation] for the item directly in the item's Edit menu.<br />
<br />
The calculation looks like this (where <nowiki>[[Pretest]]</nowiki> is the ID of the quiz score you are breaking into subscores):<br />
<br />
<pre>=mod(floor([[Pretest]]/topicvalue),10)</pre><br />
where "topicvalue" is the same as the number of points each question in the topic is worth in step 1. So for Topic 1, the calculation is:<br />
<br />
<pre>=mod(floor([[Pretest]]/1),10)</pre><br />
<br />
For Topic 2, the calculation is:<br />
<pre>=mod(floor([[Pretest]]/10),10)</pre><br />
<br />
For Topic 3, the calculation is:<br />
<pre>=mod(floor([[Pretest]]/100),10)</pre><br />
<br />
[https://docs.moodle.org/en/Grade_calculations#Calculation_functions Definitions of functions available in Gradebook Calculations]:<br />
<br />
<pre>mod(dividend, divisor): Calculates the remainder of a division</pre><br />
<br />
<pre>floor(number): Maps a real number to the largest previous integer</pre><br />
<br />
What this does is extract the digit from the quiz grade. So Topic 1 gets the "ones" digit, topic 2 gets the "tens" digit, etc. Note that this means you can only have up to 9 quiz questions per topic (not 10, otherwise you could not tell the difference between 10 correct answers at 1 point each and 1 correct answer at 10 points each).<br />
<br />
The maximum number of topics depends on the number of questions per topic and is limited by both the maximum allowable values of '''Maximum grade''' and '''Total of marks''' for the quiz. With 9 questions per topic, these limits allow a maximum of 4 sections. See below for larger numbers of topics or questions per topic.<br />
<br />
At this point, you may want to test your quiz with some sample students so you can see how this looks in the Gradebook.<br />
<br />
'''Note''': you can aggregate these subscores at the level of the category you created for them by using any of the available aggregation methods (sum, mean, min, max, etc.) and show the result in place of the original Quiz score, if needed.<br />
<br />
== Use your Subscores ==<br />
Now, you have manual grade items for each topic, and they have values you can use in [https://docs.moodle.org/en/Restrict_access controlling visibility/access] to activities. For example, set some labels to display or not display based on subscores from the first quiz. These labels can contain advisory text to students, letting them know whether they should complete a section of the course. You could also hide the section if the student has done well enough on the pretest, or show a section that is normally hidden if the student did poorly enough to need remedial material.<br />
<br />
==Larger numbers of topics or questions per topic==<br />
<br />
With n questions per topic, you must use calculations in base of at least n+1. For example, with 10 questions per topic, you must use base-11 calculations. If you have 4 questions per topic, you could use base-5 calculations.<br />
<br />
With 10 questions per topic and base-11 calculations, the mark for the questions in the first topic is 1, the mark for the questions in the second topic is 11, third topic 121, fourth topic 1331, etc. For topic 1 the calculation is <pre>=mod(floor(<nowiki>[[Pretest]]</nowiki>/1),11)</pre>, for section 2 the calculation is <pre>=mod(floor(<nowiki>[[Pretest]]</nowiki>/11),11)</pre>, for section 3 the calculation is <pre>=mod(floor(<nowiki>[[Pretest]]</nowiki>/121]]),11)</pre>, etc.<br />
<br />
In general, we have:<br />
<br />
<pre>Number of questions per topic : n</pre><br><br />
<br />
<pre>Base for calculations : b = n + 1</pre><br><br />
<br />
<pre>Value for topic t (t = 1, 2,...) : topicvalue(t) = bᵗ⁻¹</pre><br><br />
<br />
<pre>Calculation for topic t : =mod(floor([[Pretest]]/topicvalue(t)),b)</pre><br><br />
<br />
<pre>Maximum grade for the quiz : = n*[ b⁰ + b¹ + b² + ... + b**(number of topics - 1) ]</pre><br><br />
<br />
<pre>Total of marks = Maximum grade for the quiz</pre><br><br />
<br />
Both Maximum grade and Total of marks for the quiz must be less than or equal to their maximum allowable values which are respectively 90 909 and 99 999 by default. For example, with 4 questions per topic and base-5 calculations, the maximum number of topics is 7 with the Maximum grade and Total of marks set at 78 124 (less than or equal to 90 909). Mishael Ogochukwu '''[https://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=371767#p1499327 reported]''' that he got around the limits for Maximum grade and Total Marks by adjusting the datatype for "sumgrades", "maxmark", "grade", "finalgrade", "rawgrademax" and "rawgrade" in the Moodle database to allow for a higher grade number. <br />
<br />
<br />
[[es:Subpuntajes del examen]]</div>Dbauer-etshttps://docs.moodle.org/36/en/index.php?title=Quiz_Subscores&diff=131175Quiz Subscores2018-06-11T16:58:11Z<p>Dbauer-ets: /* Step 2: Create Grade Items for each topic */</p>
<hr />
<div>Moodle users sometimes ask how to extract subscores or subtotals from Quiz. For examples, see [https://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=35637 Multiple grade quizzes], [https://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=51850 Quiz with sub-totaled sections?] and [https://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=371767 Moodle Quiz Subscores].<br />
<br />
Here is a method to extract subscores from Quiz (or any other Moodle activity that allows you to set different point values per question), without requiring any changes to Moodle code. It is a bit complex, but it does work. However, this method is only useful if you don't plan to use or display the final Quiz score, but you only want to display and use the subscores.<br />
<br />
This method is based on the [https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Modulo_operation modulo operation] and Floor function [https://docs.moodle.org/en/Grade_calculations#Calculation_functions (Definitions of functions)].<br />
<br />
== Step 1: Create Quiz and set values of Questions ==<br />
Start by creating a quiz as usual. However, for each subscore you want to extract, you will need to set the values of questions for that subscore to an order of magnitude matching that subscore. This is easiest to understand with an example. Suppose you are creating a test that will contain questions from three areas: Mathematics, Language, and History. In this example, Mathematics is Topic 1, Language is Topic 2, and History is Topic 3.<br />
<br />
For each topic, use a different point value for each question in that topic. For Topic 1 (Mathematics), each question is worth 1 point. For Topic 2 (Language), each question is worth 10 points. For Topic 3 (History), each question is worth 100 points. (Note that this is going to make your final quiz score meaningless.)<br />
<br />
'''Important''': set the total points of the quiz to the same as the total of all the questions. Otherwise, the Quiz will change its scores based on whatever you set as the maximum number of points for the Quiz, and your calculations in later steps won't work correctly.<br />
<br />
You also need to give the Quiz activity an ID number that you will be able to remember later. In this example we will use "Pretest".<br />
<br />
== Step 2: Create Grade Items for each topic ==<br />
Next, create one new [https://docs.moodle.org/en/Grade_items#Manual_grade_items Manual Grade Item] for each of your Topics. '''Important''': put these Grade Items into a separate category that does NOT have Natural Weighting as the grade aggregation method. After saving each Grade Item, you will [https://docs.moodle.org/en/Grade_calculations edit the Calculation] for the item directly in the item's Edit menu.<br />
<br />
The calculation looks like this (where <nowiki>[[Pretest]]</nowiki> is the ID of the quiz score you are breaking into subscores):<br />
<br />
<pre>=mod(floor([[Pretest]]/topicvalue),10)</pre><br />
where "topicvalue" is the same as the number of points each question in the topic is worth in step 1. So for Topic 1, the calculation is:<br />
<br />
<pre>=mod(floor([[Pretest]]/1),10)</pre><br />
<br />
For Topic 2, the calculation is:<br />
<pre>=mod(floor([[Pretest]]/10),10)</pre><br />
<br />
For Topic 3, the calculation is:<br />
<pre>=mod(floor([[Pretest]]/100),10)</pre><br />
<br />
[https://docs.moodle.org/en/Grade_calculations#Calculation_functions Definitions of functions available in Gradebook Calculations]:<br />
<br />
<pre>mod(dividend, divisor): Calculates the remainder of a division</pre><br />
<br />
<pre>floor(number): Maps a real number to the largest previous integer</pre><br />
<br />
What this does is extract the digit from the quiz grade. So Topic 1 gets the "ones" digit, topic 2 gets the "tens" digit, etc. Note that this means you can only have up to 9 quiz questions per topic (not 10, otherwise you could not tell the difference between 10 correct answers at 1 point each and 1 correct answer at 10 points each).<br />
<br />
The maximum number of topics depends on the number of questions per topic and is limited by both the maximum allowable values of '''Maximum grade''' and '''Total of marks''' for the quiz. With 9 questions per topic, these limits allow a maximum of 4 sections. See below for larger numbers of topics or questions per topic.<br />
<br />
At this point, you may want to test your quiz with some sample students so you can see how this looks in the Gradebook.<br />
<br />
'''Note''': you can aggregate these subscores at the level of the category you created for them by using any of the available aggregation methods (sum, mean, min, max, etc.) and show the result in place of the original Quiz score, if needed.<br />
<br />
== Use your Subscores ==<br />
Now, you have manual grade items for each topic, and they have values you can use in [https://docs.moodle.org/en/Restrict_access controlling visibility/access] to activities. For example, set some labels to display or not display based on subscores from the first quiz. These labels can contain advisory text to students, letting them know whether they should complete a section of the course. You could also hide the section if the student has done well enough on the pretest, or show a section that is normally hidden if the student did poorly enough to need remedial material.<br />
<br />
==Larger numbers of topics or questions per topic==<br />
<br />
With n questions per topic, you must use calculations in base of at least n+1. For example, with 10 questions per topic, you must use base-11 calculations. If you have 4 questions per topic, you could use base-5 calculations.<br />
<br />
With 10 questions per topic and base-11 calculations, the mark for the questions in the first topic is 1, the mark for the questions in the second topic is 11, third topic 121, fourth topic 1331, etc. For topic 1 the calculation is <pre>=mod(floor(<nowiki>[[Pretest]]</nowiki>/1),11)</pre>, for section 2 the calculation is <pre>=mod(floor(<nowiki>[[Pretest]]</nowiki>/11),11)</pre>, for section 3 the calculation is <pre>=mod(floor(<nowiki>[[Pretest]]</nowiki>/121]]),11)</pre>, etc.<br />
<br />
In general, we have:<br />
<br />
<pre>Number of questions per topic : n</pre><br><br />
<br />
<pre>Base for calculations : b = n + 1</pre><br><br />
<br />
<pre>Value for topic t (t = 1, 2,...) : topicvalue(t) = bᵗ⁻¹</pre><br><br />
<br />
<pre>Calculation for topic t : =mod(floor([[Pretest]]/topicvalue(t)),b)</pre><br><br />
<br />
<pre>Maximum grade for the quiz : = n*[ b⁰ + b¹ + b² + ... + b**(number of topics - 1) ]</pre><br><br />
<br />
<pre>Total of marks = Maximum grade for the quiz</pre><br><br />
<br />
Both Maximum grade and Total of marks must be less than or equal to the maximum allowable values which are respectively 99 999 and 90 909 by default.<br />
<br />
<br />
[[es:Subpuntajes del examen]]</div>Dbauer-etshttps://docs.moodle.org/36/en/index.php?title=Quiz_Subscores&diff=131174Quiz Subscores2018-06-11T16:55:34Z<p>Dbauer-ets: /* Larger numbers of topics or questions per topic */</p>
<hr />
<div>Moodle users sometimes ask how to extract subscores or subtotals from Quiz. For examples, see [https://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=35637 Multiple grade quizzes], [https://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=51850 Quiz with sub-totaled sections?] and [https://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=371767 Moodle Quiz Subscores].<br />
<br />
Here is a method to extract subscores from Quiz (or any other Moodle activity that allows you to set different point values per question), without requiring any changes to Moodle code. It is a bit complex, but it does work. However, this method is only useful if you don't plan to use or display the final Quiz score, but you only want to display and use the subscores.<br />
<br />
This method is based on the [https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Modulo_operation modulo operation] and Floor function [https://docs.moodle.org/en/Grade_calculations#Calculation_functions (Definitions of functions)].<br />
<br />
== Step 1: Create Quiz and set values of Questions ==<br />
Start by creating a quiz as usual. However, for each subscore you want to extract, you will need to set the values of questions for that subscore to an order of magnitude matching that subscore. This is easiest to understand with an example. Suppose you are creating a test that will contain questions from three areas: Mathematics, Language, and History. In this example, Mathematics is Topic 1, Language is Topic 2, and History is Topic 3.<br />
<br />
For each topic, use a different point value for each question in that topic. For Topic 1 (Mathematics), each question is worth 1 point. For Topic 2 (Language), each question is worth 10 points. For Topic 3 (History), each question is worth 100 points. (Note that this is going to make your final quiz score meaningless.)<br />
<br />
'''Important''': set the total points of the quiz to the same as the total of all the questions. Otherwise, the Quiz will change its scores based on whatever you set as the maximum number of points for the Quiz, and your calculations in later steps won't work correctly.<br />
<br />
You also need to give the Quiz activity an ID number that you will be able to remember later. In this example we will use "Pretest".<br />
<br />
== Step 2: Create Grade Items for each topic ==<br />
Next, create one new [https://docs.moodle.org/en/Grade_items#Manual_grade_items Manual Grade Item] for each of your Topics. '''Important''': put these Grade Items into a separate category that does NOT have Natural Weighting as the grade aggregation method. After saving each Grade Item, you will [https://docs.moodle.org/en/Grade_calculations edit the Calculation] for the item directly in the item's Edit menu.<br />
<br />
The calculation looks like this (where <nowiki>[[Pretest]]</nowiki> is the ID of the quiz score you are breaking into subscores):<br />
<br />
<pre>=mod(floor([[Pretest]]/topicvalue),10)</pre><br />
where "topicvalue" is the same as the number of points each question in the topic is worth in step 1. So for Topic 1, the calculation is:<br />
<br />
<pre>=mod(floor([[Pretest]]/1),10)</pre><br />
<br />
For Topic 2, the calculation is:<br />
<pre>=mod(floor([[Pretest]]/10),10)</pre><br />
<br />
For Topic 3, the calculation is:<br />
<pre>=mod(floor([[Pretest]]/100),10)</pre><br />
<br />
[https://docs.moodle.org/en/Grade_calculations#Calculation_functions Definitions of functions available in Gradebook Calculations]:<br />
<br />
<pre>mod(dividend, divisor): Calculates the remainder of a division</pre><br />
<br />
<pre>floor(number): Maps a real number to the largest previous integer</pre><br />
<br />
What this does is extract the digit from the quiz grade. So Topic 1 gets the "ones" digit, topic 2 gets the "tens" digit, etc. Note that this means you can only have up to 9 quiz questions per topic (not 10, otherwise you could not tell the difference between 10 correct answers at 1 point each and 1 correct answer at 10 points each).<br />
<br />
The maximum number of topics depends on the number of questions per topic and is limited by both the '''Maximum grade''' for the quiz (which is set at 90 909 by default) and the maximum '''Total of marks''' (which is 99 999 by default). With 9 questions per topic, these limits allow a maximum of 4 sections. See below for larger numbers of topics or questions per topic.<br />
<br />
At this point, you may want to test your quiz with some sample students so you can see how this looks in the Gradebook.<br />
<br />
'''Note''': you can aggregate these subscores at the level of the category you created for them by using any of the available aggregation methods (sum, mean, min, max, etc.) and show the result in place of the original Quiz score, if needed.<br />
<br />
== Use your Subscores ==<br />
Now, you have manual grade items for each topic, and they have values you can use in [https://docs.moodle.org/en/Restrict_access controlling visibility/access] to activities. For example, set some labels to display or not display based on subscores from the first quiz. These labels can contain advisory text to students, letting them know whether they should complete a section of the course. You could also hide the section if the student has done well enough on the pretest, or show a section that is normally hidden if the student did poorly enough to need remedial material.<br />
<br />
==Larger numbers of topics or questions per topic==<br />
<br />
With n questions per topic, you must use calculations in base of at least n+1. For example, with 10 questions per topic, you must use base-11 calculations. If you have 4 questions per topic, you could use base-5 calculations.<br />
<br />
With 10 questions per topic and base-11 calculations, the mark for the questions in the first topic is 1, the mark for the questions in the second topic is 11, third topic 121, fourth topic 1331, etc. For topic 1 the calculation is <pre>=mod(floor(<nowiki>[[Pretest]]</nowiki>/1),11)</pre>, for section 2 the calculation is <pre>=mod(floor(<nowiki>[[Pretest]]</nowiki>/11),11)</pre>, for section 3 the calculation is <pre>=mod(floor(<nowiki>[[Pretest]]</nowiki>/121]]),11)</pre>, etc.<br />
<br />
In general, we have:<br />
<br />
<pre>Number of questions per topic : n</pre><br><br />
<br />
<pre>Base for calculations : b = n + 1</pre><br><br />
<br />
<pre>Value for topic t (t = 1, 2,...) : topicvalue(t) = bᵗ⁻¹</pre><br><br />
<br />
<pre>Calculation for topic t : =mod(floor([[Pretest]]/topicvalue(t)),b)</pre><br><br />
<br />
<pre>Maximum grade for the quiz : = n*[ b⁰ + b¹ + b² + ... + b**(number of topics - 1) ]</pre><br><br />
<br />
<pre>Total of marks = Maximum grade for the quiz</pre><br><br />
<br />
Both Maximum grade and Total of marks must be less than or equal to the maximum allowable values which are respectively 99 999 and 90 909 by default.<br />
<br />
<br />
[[es:Subpuntajes del examen]]</div>Dbauer-etshttps://docs.moodle.org/36/en/index.php?title=Quiz_Subscores&diff=131173Quiz Subscores2018-06-11T16:51:24Z<p>Dbauer-ets: /* Larger numbers of topics or questions per topic */</p>
<hr />
<div>Moodle users sometimes ask how to extract subscores or subtotals from Quiz. For examples, see [https://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=35637 Multiple grade quizzes], [https://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=51850 Quiz with sub-totaled sections?] and [https://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=371767 Moodle Quiz Subscores].<br />
<br />
Here is a method to extract subscores from Quiz (or any other Moodle activity that allows you to set different point values per question), without requiring any changes to Moodle code. It is a bit complex, but it does work. However, this method is only useful if you don't plan to use or display the final Quiz score, but you only want to display and use the subscores.<br />
<br />
This method is based on the [https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Modulo_operation modulo operation] and Floor function [https://docs.moodle.org/en/Grade_calculations#Calculation_functions (Definitions of functions)].<br />
<br />
== Step 1: Create Quiz and set values of Questions ==<br />
Start by creating a quiz as usual. However, for each subscore you want to extract, you will need to set the values of questions for that subscore to an order of magnitude matching that subscore. This is easiest to understand with an example. Suppose you are creating a test that will contain questions from three areas: Mathematics, Language, and History. In this example, Mathematics is Topic 1, Language is Topic 2, and History is Topic 3.<br />
<br />
For each topic, use a different point value for each question in that topic. For Topic 1 (Mathematics), each question is worth 1 point. For Topic 2 (Language), each question is worth 10 points. For Topic 3 (History), each question is worth 100 points. (Note that this is going to make your final quiz score meaningless.)<br />
<br />
'''Important''': set the total points of the quiz to the same as the total of all the questions. Otherwise, the Quiz will change its scores based on whatever you set as the maximum number of points for the Quiz, and your calculations in later steps won't work correctly.<br />
<br />
You also need to give the Quiz activity an ID number that you will be able to remember later. In this example we will use "Pretest".<br />
<br />
== Step 2: Create Grade Items for each topic ==<br />
Next, create one new [https://docs.moodle.org/en/Grade_items#Manual_grade_items Manual Grade Item] for each of your Topics. '''Important''': put these Grade Items into a separate category that does NOT have Natural Weighting as the grade aggregation method. After saving each Grade Item, you will [https://docs.moodle.org/en/Grade_calculations edit the Calculation] for the item directly in the item's Edit menu.<br />
<br />
The calculation looks like this (where <nowiki>[[Pretest]]</nowiki> is the ID of the quiz score you are breaking into subscores):<br />
<br />
<pre>=mod(floor([[Pretest]]/topicvalue),10)</pre><br />
where "topicvalue" is the same as the number of points each question in the topic is worth in step 1. So for Topic 1, the calculation is:<br />
<br />
<pre>=mod(floor([[Pretest]]/1),10)</pre><br />
<br />
For Topic 2, the calculation is:<br />
<pre>=mod(floor([[Pretest]]/10),10)</pre><br />
<br />
For Topic 3, the calculation is:<br />
<pre>=mod(floor([[Pretest]]/100),10)</pre><br />
<br />
[https://docs.moodle.org/en/Grade_calculations#Calculation_functions Definitions of functions available in Gradebook Calculations]:<br />
<br />
<pre>mod(dividend, divisor): Calculates the remainder of a division</pre><br />
<br />
<pre>floor(number): Maps a real number to the largest previous integer</pre><br />
<br />
What this does is extract the digit from the quiz grade. So Topic 1 gets the "ones" digit, topic 2 gets the "tens" digit, etc. Note that this means you can only have up to 9 quiz questions per topic (not 10, otherwise you could not tell the difference between 10 correct answers at 1 point each and 1 correct answer at 10 points each).<br />
<br />
The maximum number of topics depends on the number of questions per topic and is limited by both the '''Maximum grade''' for the quiz (which is set at 90 909 by default) and the maximum '''Total of marks''' (which is 99 999 by default). With 9 questions per topic, these limits allow a maximum of 4 sections. See below for larger numbers of topics or questions per topic.<br />
<br />
At this point, you may want to test your quiz with some sample students so you can see how this looks in the Gradebook.<br />
<br />
'''Note''': you can aggregate these subscores at the level of the category you created for them by using any of the available aggregation methods (sum, mean, min, max, etc.) and show the result in place of the original Quiz score, if needed.<br />
<br />
== Use your Subscores ==<br />
Now, you have manual grade items for each topic, and they have values you can use in [https://docs.moodle.org/en/Restrict_access controlling visibility/access] to activities. For example, set some labels to display or not display based on subscores from the first quiz. These labels can contain advisory text to students, letting them know whether they should complete a section of the course. You could also hide the section if the student has done well enough on the pretest, or show a section that is normally hidden if the student did poorly enough to need remedial material.<br />
<br />
==Larger numbers of topics or questions per topic==<br />
<br />
With n questions per topic, you must use calculations in base of at least n+1. For example, with 10 questions per topic, you must use base-11 calculations. If you have 4 questions per topic, you could use base-5 calculations.<br />
<br />
With 10 questions per topic and base-11 calculations, the mark for the questions in the first topic is 1, the mark for the questions in the second topic is 11, third topic 121, fourth topic 1331, etc. For topic 1 the calculation is <pre>=mod(floor(<nowiki>[[Pretest]]</nowiki>/1),11)</pre>, for section 2 the calculation is <pre>=mod(floor(<nowiki>[[Pretest]]</nowiki>/11),11)</pre>, for section 3 the calculation is <pre>=mod(floor(<nowiki>[[Pretest]]</nowiki>/121]]),11)</pre>, etc.<br />
<br />
In general, we have:<br />
<br />
<pre>Number of questions per topic : n</pre><br><br />
<br />
<pre>Base for calculations : b = n + 1</pre><br><br />
<br />
<pre>Value for topic t (t = 1, 2,...) : topicvalue(t) = bᵗ⁻¹</pre><br><br />
<br />
<pre>Calculation for topic t : =mod(floor([[Pretest]]/topicvalue(t)),b)</pre><br><br />
<br />
<pre>Maximum grade for the quiz : = n*[ b⁰ + b¹ + b² + ... + b**(number of topics - 1) ]</pre><br><br />
<br />
<pre>Maximum grade for the quiz : = n*[ b⁰ + b¹ + b² + ... + b**(number of topics - 1) ]</pre><br><br />
<br />
<br />
[[es:Subpuntajes del examen]]</div>Dbauer-etshttps://docs.moodle.org/36/en/index.php?title=Quiz_Subscores&diff=131171Quiz Subscores2018-06-11T16:04:55Z<p>Dbauer-ets: /* Larger numbers of topics or questions per topic */</p>
<hr />
<div>Moodle users sometimes ask how to extract subscores or subtotals from Quiz. For examples, see [https://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=35637 Multiple grade quizzes], [https://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=51850 Quiz with sub-totaled sections?] and [https://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=371767 Moodle Quiz Subscores].<br />
<br />
Here is a method to extract subscores from Quiz (or any other Moodle activity that allows you to set different point values per question), without requiring any changes to Moodle code. It is a bit complex, but it does work. However, this method is only useful if you don't plan to use or display the final Quiz score, but you only want to display and use the subscores.<br />
<br />
This method is based on the [https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Modulo_operation modulo operation] and Floor function [https://docs.moodle.org/en/Grade_calculations#Calculation_functions (Definitions of functions)].<br />
<br />
== Step 1: Create Quiz and set values of Questions ==<br />
Start by creating a quiz as usual. However, for each subscore you want to extract, you will need to set the values of questions for that subscore to an order of magnitude matching that subscore. This is easiest to understand with an example. Suppose you are creating a test that will contain questions from three areas: Mathematics, Language, and History. In this example, Mathematics is Topic 1, Language is Topic 2, and History is Topic 3.<br />
<br />
For each topic, use a different point value for each question in that topic. For Topic 1 (Mathematics), each question is worth 1 point. For Topic 2 (Language), each question is worth 10 points. For Topic 3 (History), each question is worth 100 points. (Note that this is going to make your final quiz score meaningless.)<br />
<br />
'''Important''': set the total points of the quiz to the same as the total of all the questions. Otherwise, the Quiz will change its scores based on whatever you set as the maximum number of points for the Quiz, and your calculations in later steps won't work correctly.<br />
<br />
You also need to give the Quiz activity an ID number that you will be able to remember later. In this example we will use "Pretest".<br />
<br />
== Step 2: Create Grade Items for each topic ==<br />
Next, create one new [https://docs.moodle.org/en/Grade_items#Manual_grade_items Manual Grade Item] for each of your Topics. '''Important''': put these Grade Items into a separate category that does NOT have Natural Weighting as the grade aggregation method. After saving each Grade Item, you will [https://docs.moodle.org/en/Grade_calculations edit the Calculation] for the item directly in the item's Edit menu.<br />
<br />
The calculation looks like this (where <nowiki>[[Pretest]]</nowiki> is the ID of the quiz score you are breaking into subscores):<br />
<br />
<pre>=mod(floor([[Pretest]]/topicvalue),10)</pre><br />
where "topicvalue" is the same as the number of points each question in the topic is worth in step 1. So for Topic 1, the calculation is:<br />
<br />
<pre>=mod(floor([[Pretest]]/1),10)</pre><br />
<br />
For Topic 2, the calculation is:<br />
<pre>=mod(floor([[Pretest]]/10),10)</pre><br />
<br />
For Topic 3, the calculation is:<br />
<pre>=mod(floor([[Pretest]]/100),10)</pre><br />
<br />
[https://docs.moodle.org/en/Grade_calculations#Calculation_functions Definitions of functions available in Gradebook Calculations]:<br />
<br />
<pre>mod(dividend, divisor): Calculates the remainder of a division</pre><br />
<br />
<pre>floor(number): Maps a real number to the largest previous integer</pre><br />
<br />
What this does is extract the digit from the quiz grade. So Topic 1 gets the "ones" digit, topic 2 gets the "tens" digit, etc. Note that this means you can only have up to 9 quiz questions per topic (not 10, otherwise you could not tell the difference between 10 correct answers at 1 point each and 1 correct answer at 10 points each).<br />
<br />
The maximum number of topics depends on the number of questions per topic and is limited by both the '''Maximum grade''' for the quiz (which is set at 90 909 by default) and the maximum '''Total of marks''' (which is 99 999 by default). With 9 questions per topic, these limits allow a maximum of 4 sections. See below for larger numbers of topics or questions per topic.<br />
<br />
At this point, you may want to test your quiz with some sample students so you can see how this looks in the Gradebook.<br />
<br />
'''Note''': you can aggregate these subscores at the level of the category you created for them by using any of the available aggregation methods (sum, mean, min, max, etc.) and show the result in place of the original Quiz score, if needed.<br />
<br />
== Use your Subscores ==<br />
Now, you have manual grade items for each topic, and they have values you can use in [https://docs.moodle.org/en/Restrict_access controlling visibility/access] to activities. For example, set some labels to display or not display based on subscores from the first quiz. These labels can contain advisory text to students, letting them know whether they should complete a section of the course. You could also hide the section if the student has done well enough on the pretest, or show a section that is normally hidden if the student did poorly enough to need remedial material.<br />
<br />
==Larger numbers of topics or questions per topic==<br />
<br />
With n questions per topic, you must use calculations in base of at least n+1. For example, with 10 questions per topic, you must use base-11 calculations. If you have 4 questions per topic, you could use base-5 calculations.<br />
<br />
With 10 questions per topic and base-11 calculations, the mark for the questions in the first topic is 1, the mark for the questions in the second topic is 11, third topic 121, fourth topic 1331, etc. For topic 1 the calculation is <pre>=mod(floor(<nowiki>[[Pretest]]</nowiki>/1),11)</pre>, for section 2 the calculation is <pre>=mod(floor(<nowiki>[[Pretest]]</nowiki>/11),11)</pre>, for section 3 the calculation is <pre>=mod(floor(<nowiki>[[Pretest]]</nowiki>/121]]),11)</pre>, etc.<br />
<br />
In general, we have:<br />
<br />
<pre>Number of questions per topic : n</pre><br><br />
<br />
<pre>Base for calculations : b = n + 1</pre><br><br />
<br />
<pre>Value for topic t (t = 1, 2,...) : topicvalue(t) = bᵗ⁻¹</pre><br><br />
<br />
<pre>Calculation for topic t : =mod(floor([[Pretest]]/topicvalue(t)),b)</pre><br><br />
<br />
[[es:Subpuntajes del examen]]</div>Dbauer-ets